20MY Outlander Petrol Owners Manual - OGFE20E1

OGFE20E1
OUTLANDER
OUTLANDER
Owner’s Manual
OUTLANDER - ENGLISH - OGFE20E1

Printed in the Netherlands
MITSUBISHI MOTORS
19-000330_OGFE20E1_Outlander_OM-Cover_eng_2019_rug-26,9mm.indd All Pages 15/07/19 16:14

Foreword Throughout this owner’s manual the words WARNING and CAUTION
appear. These serve as reminders to be especially careful. Failure to follow
Information for station service
Thank you for selecting an OUTLANDER as your new vehicle.
instructions could result in personal injury or damage to your vehicle. 2WD models 63 litres
This owner’s manual will add to your understanding and full enjoyment of Fuel tank capacity
the many fine features of this vehicle. 4WD models 60 litres
It contains information prepared to acquaint you with the proper way to oper- WARNING
Unleaded petrol octane number (EN228)
ate and maintain your vehicle for the utmost in driving pleasure.
Indicates a strong possibility of severe personal injury or death if in- [2000 and 2400 models]
structions are not followed. [Except for vehicles for Russia, Kazakhstan, Belarus, Ukraine
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Europe B.V. reserves the right to make changes in
and Moldava]
design and specifications and/or to make additions to or improvements in Fuel
this product without obligation to install them on products previously manu- CAUTION Recommended fuel
95 RON or higher
[For vehicles for Russia, Kazakhstan, Belarus, Ukraine and
factured.
Moldava]
It is an absolute requirement for the driver to strictly observe all laws and Means hazards or unsafe practices that could cause minor personal in-
90 RON or higher
regulations concerning vehicles. jury or damage to your vehicle.
[3000 models]
95 RON or higher
This owner’s manual has been written in compliance with such laws and reg- NOTE Refer to the “General information” section for the fuel selection.
ulations, but some of the contents may become contradictory with later
amendment of the laws and regulations. Gives helpful information. Engine oil Refer to the “Maintenance” section for the selection of engine oil.
*: Gives helpful information. Tyre inflation pressure Refer to the “Maintenance” section for the tyre inflation pressure.
Please leave this owner’s manual in this vehicle at time of resale. The next It may differ according to the sales classifications; refer to the sales cata-
owner will appreciate having access to the information contained in this logue.
owner’s manual. Abbreviations used in this owner’s manual:
LHD: Left-Hand Drive
Repairs to your vehicle: RHD: Right-Hand Drive
Vehicles in the warranty period: M/T: Manual Transmission
All warranty repairs must be carried out by a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Au- A/T: Automatic Transmission
thorized Service Point. CVT: Continuously Variable Transmission
The symbol used on the vehicles:
Vehicles outside the warranty period:
Where the vehicle is repaired is at the discretion of the owner.
: See owner’s manual
© 2019 Mitsubishi Motors Corporation

OGFE20E1
BLO-19-000330
20
Table of contents
Overview/Quick guide 1
General information 2
Locking and unlocking 3
Seats and seat belts 4
Instruments and controls 5
Starting and driving 6
For pleasant driving 7
For emergencies 8
Vehicle care 9
Maintenance 10
Specifications 11
Alphabetical index 12
Declaration of Conformity 13
OGFE20E1
Instruments and controls
1 Instruments and controls

1. Combination headlamps and dipper switch p. 5-57
Automatic High-Beam (AHB) switch* p. 5-60
Turn-signal lever p. 5-67
Front fog lamp switch* p. 5-68
Rear fog lamp switch p. 5-69
2. Driver’s ventilators p. 7-02
3. Shift paddles* p. 6-36, 6-43
4. Supplemental restraint system (SRS) - airbag (for driver’s seat)
p. 4-27, 4-32
Horn switch p. 5-76
5. Instruments p. 5-02
7. Engine switch* p. 6-16
8. Windscreen wiper and washer switch p. 5-69
Rear window wiper and washer switch p. 5-73
Headlamp washer switch* p. 5-73
9. Ignition switch* p. 6-15
10. Supplemental restraint system (SRS) - front knee airbag (for driv-
er’s seat)* p. 4-27, 4-32
11. Cruise control switches* p. 6-68, 6-78
12. Steering wheel height and reach adjustment lever p. 6-11
13. Bluetooth® 2.0 interface* p. 7-47
14. Steering wheel audio remote control switches* p. 7-25
[For DISPLAY AUDIO, Smartphone-link Display Audio (SDA)
and Smartphone-link Display Audio (SDA) navigation system, re-
fer to the separate owner’s manual.]
15. Camera switch* p. 6-135
16. Driver’s side electric tailgate switch* p. 3-26
17. Fuse box p. 10-18
18. Forward Collision Mitigation System (FCM) and Ultrasonic mis-
acceleration Mitigation System (UMS) ON/OFF switch* p. 6-94
19. Lane Departure Warning (LDW) switch* p. 6-111
20. Sonar switch* p. 6-123, 6-127
21. Auto Stop & Go (AS&G) OFF switch* p. 6-30
22. Headlamp levelling switch* p. 5-64
23. Active stability control (ASC) OFF switch* p. 6-67
24. Multi information display switch* p. 5-04
1-02 Overview/Quick guide OGFE20E1

1
2. Shift paddles* p. 6-36, 6-43
3. Engine switch* p. 6-16
4. Instruments p. 5-02
6. Multi information display switch* p. 5-04
7. Active stability control (ASC) OFF switch p. 6-67
8. Headlamp levelling switch* p. 5-64
9. Lane Departure Warning (LDW) switch* p. 6-111
10. Forward Collision Mitigation system (FCM) and Ultrasonic mis-
acceleration Mitigation System (UMS) ON/OFF switch* p. 6-94
11. Sonar switch* p. 6-123, 6-127
12. Auto Stop & Go (AS&G) OFF switch p. 6-30
13. Driver’s side electric tailgate switch* p. 3-26
14. Windscreen wiper and washer switch p. 5-69
Rear window wiper and washer switch p. 5-73
Headlamp washer switch* p. 5-73
15. Ignition switch* p. 6-15
16. Supplemental restraint system (SRS) - front knee airbag (for driv-
er’s seat) p. 4-32, 4-32
17. Cruise control switches p. 6-68, 6-78
18. Supplemental restraint system (SRS) - airbag (for driver’s seat)
p. 4-27, 4-32
Horn switch p. 5-76
19. Steering wheel height and reach adjustment lever p. 6-11
20. Bluetooth® 2.0 interface* p. 7-47
21. Camera switch* p. 6-135
22. Steering wheel audio remote control switches* p. 7-25
23. Combination headlamps and dipper switch p. 5-57
Automatic High-Beam (AHB) switch* p. 5-60
Turn-signal lever p. 5-67
Front fog lamp switch* p. 5-68
Rear fog lamp switch p. 5-69
OGFE20E1 Overview/Quick guide 1-03

1
1. Rear window demister switch p. 5-74
LHD Wiper de-icer switch* p. 5-74
2. Passenger’s ventilators p. 7-02
3. Accessory socket* p. 7-73
Cigarette lighter* p. 7-72
4. Electric tailgate power switch* p. 3-26
5. Key slot* p. 6-26
6. ECO mode switch* p. 5-68
7. Blind Spot Warning (BSW) switch* p. 6-104
8. Heated steering wheel switch* p. 5-76
9. Heated windscreen switch* p. 5-75
10. USB input terminal* p. 7-68
11. Cup holder p. 7-80
12. Floor console box p. 7-78
Armrest
Accessory socket p. 7-73
USB input terminal* p. 7-68
13. USB port (for charging)* p. 7-74
15. 2nd seat ventilators* p. 7-02
16. Fuel tank filler door release lever p. 2-03
17. Bonnet release lever p. 10-04
18. Hazard warning flasher switch p. 5-67
19. Air conditioner p. 7-05
20. Multi Around Monitor* p. 6-132
Audio* p. 7-13

1
1. Multi Around Monitor* p. 6-132
RHD
Audio* p. 7-13
2. Rear window demister switch p. 5-74
Wiper de-icer switch* p. 5-74
3. Hazard warning flasher switch p. 5-67
4. Bonnet release lever p. 10-04
5. Cup holder p. 7-80
6. Fuel tank filler door release lever p. 2-03
7. 2nd seat ventilators p. 7-02
9. USB port (for charging)* p. 7-74
10. Floor console box p. 7-78
Armrest
Accessory socket* p. 7-73
11. Electric tailgate power switch* p. 3-26
12. Key slot* p. 6-26
13. ECO mode switch* p. 5-68
14. Blind Spot Warning (BSW) switch* p. 6-104
15. Heated steering wheel switch* p. 5-76
16. Heated windscreen switch* p. 5-75
18. Accessory socket p. 7-73
19. Fuses p. 10-18
20. Passenger’s ventilators p. 7-02
21. Air conditioner p. 7-05

1
1. Supplemental restraint system (SRS) - airbag (for front passeng-
LHD er’s seat) p. 4-27, 4-32
2. Glove box p. 7-78
Card holder p. 7-78
3. Parking brake lever p. 6-05
4. Heated seat switch* p. 4-04
5. Gearshift lever* p. 6-31
Selector lever* p. 6-39
6. Electric parking brake switch p. 6-07
7. Brake auto hold switch p. 6-57
9. Drive mode selector* p. 6-46
S-AWC drive mode-selector* p. 6-50
10. Selector lever p. 6-32, 6-39
Parking brake lever type Electric parking brake type

1
1. Supplemental restraint system (SRS) - airbag (for front passeng-
RHD er’s seat) p. 4-27, 4-32
2. Glove box p. 7-78
Card holder p. 7-78
3. Selector lever p. 6-32
4. Electric parking brake switch p. 6-07
5. Brake auto hold switch p. 6-57
7. Drive mode selector* p. 6-46
S-AWC drive mode-selector* p. 6-50

Interior
1 Interior
1. Sun visors p. 7-71
LHD Vanity mirror p. 7-71
Ticket holder p. 7-71
2. Lock switch p. 3-41
3. Electric remote-controlled outside rear-view mirrors switch
p. 6-12
4. Central door lock switch p. 3-22
5. Electric window control switch p. 3-40
6. Inside rear-view mirror p. 6-11
7. Sunglasses holder* p. 7-80
8. Front seats p. 4-03
9. Supplemental restraint system (SRS) - side airbag (for front seat)*
p. 4-35, 4-27
10. Second seat p. 4-05
11. Third seats (7 persons) p. 4-06
12. Luggage room lamp p. 7-76,10-27
13. Room lamp (rear) p. 7-75, 10-27
14. Adjustable seat belt anchor p. 4-14
Seat belts p. 4-11

Interior
1
1. Inside rear-view mirror p. 6-11
RHD 2. Sun visors p. 7-71
Vanity mirror p. 7-71
Ticket holder p. 7-71
3. Electric remote-controlled outside rear-view mirrors switch
p. 6-12
4. Central door lock switch p. 3-22
5. Electric window control switch p. 3-40
6. Lock switch p. 3-41
7. Adjustable seat belt anchor p. 4-14
Seat belts p. 4-11
8. Room lamp (rear) p. 7-75, 10-27
9. Luggage room lamp p. 7-76,10-27
10. Third seats (7 persons) p. 4-06
11. Second seat p. 4-05
12. Supplemental restraint system (SRS) - side airbag (for front seat)
p. 4-35, 4-27
13. Front seats p. 4-03
14. Sunglasses holder* p. 7-80

Interior
1
1. Supplemental restraint system (SRS) - curtain airbag* p. 4-27,
LHD
4-35
2. Bottle holder p. 7-81
3. Map & room lamps (front) p. 7-75, 7-76, 10-27
4. ERA-GLONASS* p. 8-02
5. Downlight p. 7-75
6. Sunroof switch* p. 3-42
7. Front passenger’s airbag indicator p. 4-30
8. Seat belt reminder p. 4-13
9. Hands-free microphone* p. 7-48
10. Head restraints p. 4-06
11. Armrest p. 4-05
Cup holder p. 7-81
12. Cargo area cover* p. 7-82
13. Assist grips p. 7-83
Coat hook p. 7-83

Interior
1
1. Bottle holder p. 7-81
RHD 2. Supplemental restraint system (SRS) - curtain airbag p. 4-27,
4-35
3. Assist grips p. 7-83
Coat hook p. 7-83
4. Cargo area cover* p. 7-82
5. Armrest p. 4-05
Cup holder p. 7-81
6. Head restraints p. 4-06
7. Map & room lamps (front) p. 7-75, 7-76, 10-27
8. Downlight p. 7-75
9. Sunroof switch* p. 3-42
10. Front passenger’s airbag indicator p. 4-30
11. Seat belt reminder p. 4-13
12. Hands-free microphone* p. 7-48

Luggage area
1 Luggage area
1. Tether anchorages for child restraint system* p. 4-25
2. Jack p. 8-13
Tools p. 8-13
3. Accessory socket p. 7-73
4. Luggage hooks p. 7-83
5. Luggage floor box* p. 7-79
Tyre repair kit* p. 8-20

Outside (Front)
Outside (Front) 1
1. Sunroof* p. 3-42
2. Electric window control p. 3-40
3. Fuel tank filler p. 2-03
4. Outside rear-view mirror p. 6-12
Side turn-signal lamps* p. 5-67, 10-26
Side-view camera* p. 6-132
1 5. Side turn-signal lamps* p. 5-67, 10-26
2 6. Ultrasonic misacceleration Mitigation System (UMS)* p. 6-99
19
Parking sensors* p. 6-125
3 7. Front fog lamps* p. 5-68, 10-26, 10-29
18 8. Headlamps, high-beam p. 5-57, 10-26
9. Headlamps, low beam p. 5-57, 10-26
10. Position lamps p. 5-57, 10-26
17 4 Daytime running lamps p. 5-60, 10-26
11. Front turn-signal lamps p. 5-67, 10-26, 10-29
5 12. Front turn-signal lamps p. 5-67, 10-26, 10-29
6 13. Position lamps p. 5-57, 10-26
16
Daytime running lamps p. 5-60, 10-26
7 14. Headlamps, low beam p. 5-57, 10-26, 10-27
Halogen headlamps type LED headlamps type 15. Headlamps, high-beam p. 5-57, 10-26, 10-28
16. Front view camera* p. 6-132
15
17. Bonnet p. 10-04
14 8 9
18. Windscreen wipers p. 5-69
19. Sensor* [for Automatic High-Beam (AHB), Forward Collision
Mitigation System (FCM) and Lane Departure Warning (LDW)]
13
10
p. 5-60, 6-89, 6-110
11
12
Rain sensor p. 5-69

Outside (Rear)
1 Outside (Rear)
1. Antenna
2. Tail lamps p. 5-57, 10-26,10-31
3. Keyless entry system p. 3-04
Keyless operation system* p. 3-09
Locking and unlocking the doors p. 3-20
4. Tyre p. 10-11
Tyre pressure monitoring system (TPMS)* p. 6-114
3 Tyre inflation pressures p. 10-11
1 Changing tyres p. 8-20
16 2 Tyre rotation p. 10-13
Snow traction device (Tyre chains) p. 10-14
Size of tyres and wheels p. 11-11
15 5. Stop lamps p. 10-26, 10-31
4
6. Rear turn-signal lamps p. 5-67, 10-26, 10-31
14 7. Rear fog lamp (RHD vehicles) p. 5-69, 10-26, 10-30
Reversing lamps (LHD vehicles) p. 10-26, 10-30
8. Spare wheel* p. 8-21
13 9. Ultrasonic misacceleration Mitigation System (UMS)* p. 6-99
Reversing sensor system* p. 6-121
12 Parking sensors* p. 6-125
10. Rear fog lamp (LHD vehicles) p. 5-69, 10-26, 10-30
11 Reversing lamps (RHD vehicles) p. 10-26, 10-30
11. Licence plate lamps p. 5-57, 10-26, 10-32
5 12. Rear-view camera* p. 6-129, 6-132
13. Rear window wiper p. 5-73
10 14. Tailgate* p. 3-24
8 Electric tailgate* p. 3-26
6
9 15. High-mounted stop lamp p. 10-26
7
16. Roof spoiler*

Quick guide
Quick guide Keyless operation key The operating range is approximately 70 cm

from each switch.
1
Locking and unlocking the
doors and tailgate
Keyless entry system
Press the remote control switch, and all doors
and the tailgate will be locked or unlocked as
desired.
The remote control switch will operate within
approximately 4 m from the vehicle. 1- LOCK switch
2- UNLOCK switch
Keyless entry key 3- Electric tailgate switch
4- Indication lamp Refer to “Keyless operation system” on
page 3-09
Refer to “Keyless entry system” on page
3-04.
On vehicles with the electric tailgate, the tail-
gate can be opened automatically if you press
the electric tailgate switch (3) after unlocking
the tailgate.
Refer to “Electric tailgate” on page 3-26.
Keyless operation system*

When you are carrying the keyless operation
key and within the operating range, if you
press the driver’s or front passenger’s door
lock/unlock switch (A), or the tailgate lock
switch (B) (when locking) and the tailgate
open switch (C) (when unlocking), the doors
and the tailgate are locked/unlocked.

Quick guide
1 Around the driver’s seat 1-Combination headlamps AUTO With the ignition switch
Rotate the switch to turn on the lamps. or the operation mode is
in ON, headlamps, posi-
tion, tail, licence plate,
instrument panel lamps
and downlight turn on
and off automatically in
accordance with outside
light level. {Daytime
running lamps will go
on while the tail lamps
are off.} All lamps turn
off automatically when
the ignition switch is
OFF All lamps off {except turned to “OFF” posi-
for daytime running tion or the operation
lamps} mode is put in OFF.
Position, tail, licence
plate, instrument panel
lamps and downlight on
Headlamps and other
lamps go on
Refer “Combination headlamps and dip-
per switch” on page 5-57.

Quick guide
1-Turn-signal lever 3-Engine switch* 1
The turn-signal lamps flash when the lever is If you are carrying the keyless operation key,
operated you can start the engine. If you press the en-
gine switch without depressing the brake
pedal (A/T, CVT) or the clutch pedal (M/T),
you can change the operation mode in the or-
der of OFF, ACC, ON, OFF.
A- Locked
B- Release
Refer “Steering wheel height and reach

adjustment” on page 6-10.
1- Turn-signals
2- Lane-change signals
Refer to “Turn-signal lever” on page

5-67.
OFF- The indication lamp (A)
2-Steering wheel height and on the engine switch
reach adjustment turns off.
1. Release the lever while holding the ACC- The indication lamp on
steering wheel up. the engine switch illu-
2. Adjust the steering wheel to the desired minates orange.
position.
ON- The indication lamp on
3. Securely lock the steering wheel by pull-
the engine switch illu-
ing the lever fully upward.
minates green.
Refer “Engine switch” on page 6-16.

Quick guide
1 4-Wiper and washer switch 5-Electric remote-controlled Refer “Outside rear-view mirrors” on
outside rear-view mirrors page 6-12.
To adjust the mirror position

6-Electric window control
Press the switch down for opening the win-
dow, and pull the switch for closing.
Except for vehicles
equipped with the mirror
retractor switch
MIST- Misting function

The wipers will operate Vehicles equipped with
once. the mirror retractor
switch
OFF- Off
AUTO- Auto-wiper control
The wipers will auto- 1- Driver’s door window
matically operate de- 2- Front passenger’s door window
pending on the rain sen- 3- Rear left door window
sor degree of wetness on 4- Rear right door window
the windscreen. 5- Lock switch
L- Left outside mirror adjustment
LO- Slow Lock switch
R- Right outside mirror adjustment
HI- Fast If you press the switch (5), the passenger’s
1- Up switches cannot be operated. To cancel, press
The washer fluid will be sprayed onto the
2- Down it once again.
windscreen by pulling the lever towards you.
3- Right
4- Left Refer to “Electric window control” on
Refer to “Wiper and washer switch” on
5- Mirror retractor switch page 3-40.
page 5-69.

Quick guide
7-Fuel tank filler door release Automatic transmission IN- Vehicles with shift paddles 1
lever VECS-II 6A/T (Intelligent & (Type 1)
Open the fuel tank filler door. Innovative Vehicle Electronic
The fuel tank filler is located on the rear left Control System II)* and Auto-
side of your vehicle.
matic transmission INVECS-
III 6CVT (Intelligent & Inno-
vative Vehicle Electronic Con-
trol System III)*
Selector lever operation Vehicles with shift paddles
(Type 2)
The transmission selects an optimum gear ra-
tio automatically, depending on the speed of
the vehicle and the position of the accelerator
pedal.
Refer “Filling the fuel tank” on page

2-03.
Vehicles without shift
paddles

Quick guide
1 While depressing the “M” (MANUAL) The following information is included on the
multi information display: odometer, tripme-
brake pedal, move the Use this position when selecting the sports
selector lever through ter, average fuel consumption etc.
mode.
the gate.
Move the selector lever “L” LOW Type 1
through the gate. This position is used only for low speeds
when driving up very steep hills or driving
Selector lever positions downhills with engine braking.
“P” PARK Refer to “Automatic transmission IN-

VECS-II 6A/T (Intelligent & Innovative
This position locks the transmission to pre-
Vehicle Electronic Control System II)” on
vent the vehicle from moving. The engine
page 6-32.
can be started in this position.
“R” REVERSE Refer to “Automatic transmission IN- Type 2

VECS-III 6CVT (Intelligent & Innovative
This position is to back up. Vehicle Electronic Control System III)” on
page 6-39.
“N” NEUTRAL
At this position the transmission is disengag- Multi information display
ed. Always stop the vehicle in a safe place before
operating.
“D” DRIVE
This position is for normal driving.
“Ds” (DOWNSHIFT & SPORTY DRIV-

ING) 1-
mark display screen ® p. 5-07
Use when engine braking is needed, or for 2- Information screen ® p. 5-05
high-power sport drive. Interrupt display screen ® p. 5-06
3- Door ajar warning display screen
® p. 5-07
4- Odometer ® p. 5-08
Quick guide
5- Frozen road warning ® p. 5-22 Drive mode Function Drive mode-selector 1
6- Gearshift indicator* ® p. 6-31
4WD AUTO This mode is for au- The drive mode can be switched by pressing
7- Selector lever position display*
tomatically control- the switch while the ignition switch is in the
® p. 6-34, 6-41
ling the distribution “ON” position or the operation mode is in
8- Service reminder ® p. 5-09
of driving torque to ON.
9- Information display ® p. 5-20
10- Fuel remaining display ® p. 5-23 all four wheels ac-
cording to the driv-
ing conditions.
Refer “Multi information display - Type 1”
on page 5-03 or “Multi information dis- 4WD LOCK This mode is for
play - Type 2” on page 5-19. driving in slippery
conditions such as on
Electronically controlled 4WD snow-covered roads
system* or sand.
The electronically controlled 4WD is a sys- The large amount of
tem that improves acceleration performance driving torque that is
and stability performance by controlling applied to the rear
front-rear distribution of driving torque with tyres enables getting
operating the electronic control coupling ar- out of slippery areas Refer to “Electronically controlled 4WD
ranged in the rear differential assembly. and powerful driving system” on page 6-46.
is possible across all
Drive mode Function ranges. S-AWC (Super-All Wheel Con-
4WD ECO This mode is for eco-
trol)*
nomical driving. S-AWC is an integrated vehicle dynamics
Usually, driving control system that helps enhance driving
mode is 2WD for performance, cornering performance, and ve-
economy but the per- hicle stability over a wide range of driving
formance of 4WD is conditions through integrated management of
produced according the electronically controlled 4WD, the AYC
to the slip of a wheel. (Active Yaw Control), the ABS and the ASC.

Quick guide
1 S-AWC drive Function S-AWC drive Function

mode mode
AWC ECO High fuel efficiency mode. GRAVEL This mode is suitable
This mode is ordinary mainly for driving on un-
driven on efficient 2WD paved or rough roads.
and provides 4WD per- This mode provides 4WD
formance on wheel slip- high driving performance
ping conditions. and stable cornering per-
formance.
NORMAL Normal mode applied to
dry pavement road and wet S-AWC drive mode-selector
road, etc.
The drive mode can be switched by pressing
This mode controls driv-
the switch while the ignition switch is in the
ing/ braking torque be-
“ON” position or the operation mode is in
tween front right and front
ON.
left wheel and between
front and rear wheel ac-
cording to the driving con-
dition, and achieves low
fuel consumption and agile
driving.
SNOW This mode is chiefly suita-
ble for the snow road.
Stability improves on a
slippery road.
Refer to “S-AWC (Super-All Wheel Con-

trol)” on page 6-49.

General information
2
Fuel selection...................................................................................... 2-02

Filling the fuel tank............................................................................. 2-03
Installation of accessories................................................................... 2-04
Modification/alterations to the electrical or fuel systems................... 2-05
Genuine parts...................................................................................... 2-05
Safety and disposal information for used engine oil...........................2-05
Disposal information for used batteries.............................................. 2-06
Event Data Recording......................................................................... 2-06
OGFE20E1
Fuel selection
Fuel selection NOTE Graphical expression for con-

sumer information
2 Unleaded petrol octane number
l Your vehicles have the knock control system
so that you can use unleaded petrol 90 RON
(EN228) as an emergent measure in case unleaded
2000 and 2400 models petrol 95 RON or higher is not available on
[Except for vehicles for journey, etc.
In such a case, you don’t need to adjust the
Russia, Kazakhstan, Be- engine specially. In case of using unleaded
larus, Ukraine and Mol- petrol 90 RON, the engine performance lev-
Recom-
dova] el is reduced.
mended
95 RON or higher l Repeatedly driving short distances at low
fuel
[Vehicles for Russia, Ka- speeds can cause deposits to form in the fuel
zakhstan, Belarus, Uk- system and engine, resulting in poor starting
raine and Moldova] and poor acceleration. If these problems oc- E5: Petrol fuel containing up to 2.7 % (m/m)
cur, you are advised to add a detergent addi- oxygen or up to 5.0 % (V/V) ethanol – Eg.
90 RON or higher
tive to the petrol when you refuel the vehi- EN 228 compliant unleaded petrol
3000 models cle. The additive will remove the deposits,
95 RON or higher E10: Petrol fuel containing up to 3.7 %
thereby returning the engine to a normal
condition. Be sure to use a MITSUBISHI
(m/m) oxygen or up to 10.0 % (V/V) ethanol
MOTORS GENUINE FUEL SYSTEM – Eg. EN 228 compliant unleaded petrol
CAUTION CLEANER. Using an unsuitable additive The petrol engine are compatible with E5
could make the engine malfunction. For de- type petrol (containing 5 % ethanol) and E10
l The use of leaded fuel can result in serious
damage to the engine and catalytic convert- tails, please contact your MITSUBISHI type petrol (containing 10 % ethanol) con-
er. Do not use leaded fuel. MOTORS Authorized Service Point. forming to European standards EN 228.
l Poor quality petrol can cause problems such
as difficult starting, stalling, engine noise
and hesitation. If you experience these prob- CAUTION
lems, try another brand and/or grade of pet-
rol. l Do not use more than 10 % concentration of
ethanol (grain alcohol) by volume.
If the check engine warning lamp flashes,
Use of more than 10 % concentration may
have the system checked as soon as possible
lead to damage to your vehicle fuel system,
at a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized
engine, engine sensors and exhaust system.
Service Point.
2-02 General information OGFE20E1

Filling the fuel tank
Filling the fuel tank Fuel tank capacity
WARNING
2WD models: 63 litres 2
4WD models: 60 litres
l When handling fuel, comply with the safe-
ty regulations displayed by garages and Refueling
filling stations.
l Gasoline is highly flammable and explo- 1. Before filling with fuel, stop the engine.
sive. You could be burned or seriously in- 2. The fuel tank filler is located on the rear
jured when handling it. When refueling
left side of your vehicle.
your vehicle, always turn the engine off
and keep away from flames, sparks, and Open the fuel tank filler door by pulling
1- Remove
smoking materials. Always handle fuel in the release lever located on the side of
2- Close
well-ventilated outdoor areas. the driver’s seat.
l Before removing the fuel cap, be sure to
get rid of your body’s static electricity by CAUTION
touching a metal part of the car or fuel
pump. Any static electricity on your body l Since the fuel system may be under pressure,
remove the fuel tank filler tube cap slowly.
could create a spark that ignites fuel va-
This relieves any pressure or vacuum that
pour.
might have built up in the fuel tank. If you
l Perform the whole refueling process
hear a hissing sound, wait until it stops be-
(opening the fuel tank filler door, remov-
fore removing the cap. Otherwise, fuel may
ing the fuel cap, etc.) by yourself. Do not
spray out, injuring you or others.
let any other person come near the fuel
tank filler. If you allowed a person to help
you and that person was carrying static
electricity, fuel vapour could be ignited.
l Do not move away from the fuel tank fill- 3. Open the fuel tank filler tube by slowly
er until refueling is finished. If you moved
turning the cap anticlockwise.
away and did something else (for exam-
ple, sitting on a seat) part-way through
the refueling process, you could pick up a
fresh charge of static electricity.
l If the tank cap must be replaced, use only
a MITSUBISHI MOTORS genuine part.
OGFE20E1 General information 2-03

Installation of accessories
NOTE Installation of accessories l When installing the radio, for the re-
quired information (frequency, transmis-
2 l While filling with fuel, hang the fuel cap on
the hook (A) located on the inside of the fuel We recommend you to consult your sion output, installing procedure), con-
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service sult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Author-
tank filler door.
Point. ized Service Point.
If the frequency, transmission output and
installing condition are not appropriate,
CAUTION it can adversely affect the electronic de-
l Your vehicle is equipped with a diagnosis vices and could lead to unsafe vehicle
connector for checking and servicing the operation.
electronic control system. l Using a cellular phone or radio set inside
Do not connect a device other than a diagno- the vehicle without an external antenna
sis tool for inspections and service to this
may cause electrical system interference,
connector. Otherwise, the battery could be
discharged, the electronic devices of the ve-
which could lead to unsafe vehicle oper-
hicle could malfunction, or other unexpected ation.
problems could result. l Tyres and wheels which do not meet
In addition, malfunctions caused by connect- specifications must not be used.
4. Insert the gun in the tank port as far as it
ing a device other than a diagnosis tool may Refer to the “Specifications” section for
goes. not be covered under warranty. information regarding wheel and tyre
sizes.
CAUTION l The installation of accessories, optional
l Do not tilt the gun. parts, etc., should only be carried out Important points!
within the limits prescribed by law in
your country, and in accordance with the Due to large number of accessory and re-
5. When the gun stops automatically, do guidelines and warnings contained with- placement parts of different manufactures
not fill with fuel any more. in the documents accompanying this ve- available in the market, it is not possible, not
6. To close, turn the fuel cap slowly clock- hicle. only for MITSUBISHI MOTORS, but also
wise until you hear clicking sounds, then for a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized
l Installing electric components incorrect-
gently push the fuel tank filler door ly could lead to a fire. See to the “Modi- Service Point, to check whether the attach-
closed. fication/alteration to the electrical or fuel ment or installation of such parts affects the
systems” section within this owner’s overall safety of your vehicle.
manual.

Modification/alterations to the electrical or fuel systems
Even when such parts are officially author- Modification/alterations to Use MITSUBISHI MOTORS Genuine Parts,
ized, for example by a “general operators per- designed and manufactured to maintain your
mit” (an appraisal for the part) or through the the electrical or fuel systems MITSUBISHI MOTORS automobile at top 2
execution of the part in an officially approved performance. MITSUBISHI MOTORS Gen-
manner of construction, or when a single op- MITSUBISHI MOTORS CORPORATION uine Parts are identified by this mark and are
eration permit following the attachment or in- has always manufactured safe, high quality available at all MITSUBISHI MOTORS Au-
stallation of such parts, it cannot be deduced vehicles. In order to maintain this safety and thorized Service Points.
from that alone, that the driving safety of quality, it is important that any accessory that
your vehicle has not been affected. is to be fitted, or any modifications carried
out which involve the electrical or fuel sys-
Consider also that there basically exists no li- tems, should be carried out in accordance
ability on the part of the appraiser or the offi- with MITSUBISHI MOTORS guidelines.
cial. Maximum safety can only be ensured
with parts recommended, sold and fitted or CAUTION
installed by a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Au-
l If the wires interfere with the vehicle body Safety and disposal
thorized Service Point (MITSUBISHI
MOTORS genuine replacement parts and
or improper installation methods are used
(protective fuses not included, etc.), elec-
information for used engine
MITSUBISHI MOTORS accessories). The tronic devices may be adversely affected, re- oil
same also pertains to modifications of vehi- sulting in a fire or other accident.
cles with respect to the production specifica- WARNING
tions. For safety reasons, do not attempt any
modifications other than those that follow the Genuine parts l Prolonged and repeated contact may
cause serious skin disorders, including
recommendations of a MITSUBISHI
MITSUBISHI MOTORS has gone to great dermatitis and cancer.
MOTORS Authorized Service Point.
lengths to bring you a superbly crafted auto- l Avoid contact with the skin as far as pos-
mobile offering the highest quality and de- sible and wash thoroughly after any con-
tact.
pendability.
l Keep used engine oils out of reach of chil-
dren.
OGFE20E1 General information 2-05

Disposal information for used batteries
Protect the environment Event Data Recording NOTE

2 It is illegal to pollute drains, water courses This vehicle is equipped with an event data
l EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only
if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no da-
and soil. Use authorized waste collection fa- recorder (EDR). ta are recorded by the EDR under normal
cilities, including civic amenity sites and ga- The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in driving conditions and no personal data
rages providing facilities for disposal of used certain crash or near crash-like situations, (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location)
oil and used oil filters. If in doubt, contact such as an airbag deployment or hitting a are recorded. However, other parties, such as
your local authority for advice on disposal. road obstacle, data that will assist in under- law enforcement, could combine the EDR
data with the type of personally identifying
standing how a vehicle’s systems performed. data routinely acquired during a crash inves-
Disposal information for The EDR is designed to record data related to tigation.
used batteries vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a
short period of time, typically 30 seconds or
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
Your vehicle contains batter- less.
equipment is required, and access to the vehi-
ies and/or accumulators. cle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the
Do not mix with general The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record
vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as
household waste. such data as:
law enforcement, that have the special equip-
For proper treatment, recov- l How various systems in your vehicle ment, can read the information if they have
ery and recycling of used bat- were operating;
access to the vehicle or the EDR.
teries, please take them to ap- l How far (if at all) the driver was de-
plicable collection points, in pressing the accelerator and/or brake
accordance with your nation- pedal; and,
al legislation and the Direc- l How fast the vehicle was traveling.
tives 2006/66/EC.
By disposing of these batter- These data can help provide a better under-
ies correctly, you will help to standing of the circumstances in which crash-
save valuable resources and es and injuries occur.
prevent any potential nega-
tive effects on human health
and the environment which
could otherwise arise from
inappropriate waste handling.

Locking and unlocking
3
Keys.................................................................................................... 3-02
Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting system)........................... 3-03
Keyless entry system...........................................................................3-04
Keyless operation system*..................................................................3-09
Doors...................................................................................................3-20
Central door locks............................................................................... 3-22
Dead Lock System*............................................................................ 3-23
“Child-protection” rear doors..............................................................3-24
Tailgate*..............................................................................................3-25
Electric tailgate*................................................................................. 3-26
Inside tailgate release.......................................................................... 3-32
Security alarm system*....................................................................... 3-33
Electric window control...................................................................... 3-40
Sunroof*..............................................................................................3-42
OGFE20E1
Keys
Keys 3- Keyless operation key (with electric tail- NOTE

gate switch)
4- Emergency key • Keep away from devices that emit strong
The key fits all locks. electromagnetic waves, such as cellular
Keyless entry key
3 WARNING
phones, wireless devices and high fre-
quency equipment (including medical de-
vices).
l When taking a key on flights, do not press
• Do not clean with ultrasonic cleaners or
any switches on the key while on the similar equipment.
plane. If a switch is pressed on the plane,
• Do not leave the key where it may be ex-
the key emits electromagnetic waves, posed to high temperature or high humidi-
which could adversely affect the plane’s ty.
flight operation.
When carrying a key in a bag, be careful l The engine is designed so that it will not
start if the ID code registered in the immo-
that no switches on the key can be easily bilizer computer and the key’s ID code do
pressed by mistake. not match. Refer to the “Electronic immobil-
izer” section for details and key usage.
NOTE l [For vehicles equipped with the security
alarm system]
Keyless operation key l The key (except for the emergency key) is a Pay attention to the following if the security
precision electronic device with a built-in alarm is set to “Active”.
signal transmitter. Please observe the follow- Refer to “Security alarm system” on page
ing in order to prevent a malfunction. 3-33.
• Do not leave in a place that is exposed to • If the security alarm is in the system
direct sunlight, for example on the dash- armed mode, the alarm will sound if the
board. doors are opened after being unlocked
• Do not disassemble or modify. with the key, the inside lock knob or the
• Do not excessively bend the key or sub- central door lock switch.
ject it to strong impacts. • Even if the security alarm is set to “Ac-
• Do not expose to water. tive”, the system preparation mode is not
entered if the keyless entry system or the
• Keep away from magnetic key rings.
keyless operation function was not used to
• Keep away from audio systems, personal lock the vehicle.
computers, TVs, and other equipment that
generates a magnetic field.
1- Keyless entry key
2- Keyless operation key
3-02 Locking and unlocking OGFE20E1

Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting system)
Key number tag [Vehicles equipped with the keyless operation NOTE
key]
The key number is stamped on the tag as in- l [Vehicles without keyless operation system]
In the following cases, the vehicle may not
dicated in the illustration.
Make a record of the key number and store
be able to receive the registered ID code
from the registered key and the engine may
3
the key and key number tag in separate pla- not start.
ces, so that you can order a key from your • When the key contacts a key ring or other
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service metallic or magnetic object.
Point in the event the original keys are lost.
[Vehicles equipped with the keyless entry
key]
Electronic immobilizer
(Anti-theft starting system)
The electronic immobilizer has been de-
signed to significantly reduce the possibility
of vehicle theft. The purpose of the system is • When the key grip contacts metal of an-
other key.
to immobilize the vehicle if an invalid start is
attempted. A valid start attempt can only be
achieved by using a key “registered” to the
immobilizer system.
CAUTION
l Do not modify or add parts to the immobiliz-
er system. Doing so could cause the immo-
bilizer to malfunction.
OGFE20E1 Locking and unlocking 3-03

NOTE NOTE Keyless entry key
In cases like these, remove the object or

additional key from the vehicle key. Then
3 try again to start the engine. If the engine
does not start, we recommend you to con-
tact your MITSUBISHI MOTORS Au-
thorized Service Point.
l [Vehicles equipped with keyless operation
system]
If the engine does not start, we recommend
you to contact your MITSUBISHI
MOTORS Authorized Service Point
l If you lose one of them, contact a
• When the key contacts or is close to other MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Serv-
immobilizing keys (including keys of oth- ice Point as soon as possible. To obtain a re- Keyless operation key
er vehicles). placement or extra spare key, take your vehi-
cle and all remaining keys to your
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Serv-
ice Point. All the keys have to be re-regis-
tered in the immobilizer computer unit. The
immobilizer can register as follows.
• Keyless entry key: up to 8 different keys.
• Keyless operation key: up to 4 different
keys.

Press the remote control switch, and all doors 1- LOCK switch
and the tailgate will be locked or unlocked as 2- UNLOCK switch
desired. 3- Electric tailgate switch
4- Indication lamp

To lock NOTE NOTE

Press the LOCK switch (1). All the doors and l Except for vehicles equipped with a Dead • The time for automatic relocking can be
Lock System, the door and tailgate unlock changed.
the tailgate will be locked. The turn-signal
lamps will blink once when the doors and the
function can be set so that only the driver’s
door unlocks when the UNLOCK switch (2)
• The confirmation function (flashing of the
turn-signal lamps) can be set to operate
3
tailgate are locked. is pressed once. only when the doors and backdoor are
If the door and tailgate unlock function is set locked or only when the doors and back-
To unlock to work as described above, all the doors and door are unlocked.
the tailgate unlock when the UNLOCK • The confirmation function (this indicates
Press the UNLOCK switch (2). All the doors switch is pressed two times in succession. locking or unlocking of the doors and tail-
and the tailgate will be unlocked. If the doors Refer to “Setting of door and tailgate unlock gate with the flash of the turn-signal
function” on page 3-06. lamps) can be deactivated.
and tailgate are unlocked when the front
room lamp switch is in the “DOOR” position l On vehicles with keyless entry system and • The number of times the turn-signal
equipped with the mirror retractor switch, lamps are flashed by the confirmation
or the rear room lamp switch is in the middle the outside rear-view mirrors automatically function can be changed.
(•) position, the room lamp will illuminate for retract or extend when all the doors and tail- l The keyless entry system does not operate in
approximately 15 seconds and the turn-signal gate are locked or unlocked using the remote the following conditions:
lamps will blink twice. control switches of the keyless entry system. • The key is left in the ignition switch. (ve-
The position and tail lamps can also be set to Refer to “Starting and driving: Outside rear- hicles with keyless entry system)
turn on for approximately 30 seconds. Refer view mirrors” on page 6-12. • The operation mode is not in OFF. (vehi-
to “Instruments and controls: Welcome light” l If the UNLOCK switch (2) is pressed and no cles with keyless operation system)
door or tailgate is opened within approxi- • The door or tailgate is open.
on page 5-63. mately 30 seconds, relocking will automati- l The remote control switch will operate with-
cally occur. in approximately 4 m from the vehicle.
l It is possible to modify functions as follows: However, the operating range of the remote
For further information, please contact your control switch may change if the vehicle is
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Serv- located near a power station, or radio/TV
ice Point. broadcasting station.
On vehicles equipped with the Smartphone- l If either of the following problems occurs,
link Display Audio (SDA) or the Smart- the battery may be exhausted.
phone-link Display Audio (SDA) navigation • The remote control switch is operated at
system, screen operations can be used to the correct distance from the vehicle, but
make the adjustment. Refer to the separate the doors and tailgate are not locked/
owner’s manual for details. unlocked in response.

NOTE Setting of door and tailgate un- 1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”
lock function (Except for vehi- position and then remove the key (vehi-
• The indication lamp (4) is dim or does not cles with keyless entry system), or put
come on. cles equipped with a Dead the operation mode in OFF (vehicles
3 For further information, please consult
your MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized
Lock System) with keyless operation system).
Service Point. The door and tailgate unlock function can be 2. Place the combination headlamps and
If you replace the battery yourself, refer to set to the following two conditions. dipper switch in the “OFF” position, and
“Procedure for replacing the remote con- Each time the door and tailgate unlock func- leave the driver’s door open.
trol switch battery” on page 3-07. tion is set, a chime will sound to tell you the 3. Perform the following steps. Steps ii to
l If your remote control switch is lost or dam-
condition of the door and tailgate unlock iv should be completed within 8 sec-
aged, please contact your MITSUBISHI
function. onds.
MOTORS Authorized Service Point for a re-
placement remote control switch.
Number of
l If you wish to add a remote control switch,
chimes
Condition
we recommend you to contact your Keyless entry key
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Serv- When the UNLOCK switch,
ice Point. Step i:
driver’s or front passenger’s
The below remote control switches are avail- One chime Press and hold the LOCK switch (1) for 4 to
able for your vehicle.
door lock/unlock switch, or
[Factory set- 8 seconds.
• Keyless entry key: up to 8 remote control tailgate open switch is press-
ting]
switches ed one time, all doors and
• Keyless operation key: up to 4 remote the tailgate unlock.
control switches
When the UNLOCK switch
or the driver’s door lock/
Operation of the Dead Lock Step ii:
unlock switch is pressed one
While holding the LOCK switch (1), press
System time, only the driver’s door
the UNLOCK switch (2).
unlocks. When the UN-
With a vehicle that has a Dead Lock System, Two chimes
LOCK switch or the driver’s
it is possible to set the Dead Lock System by
door lock/unlock switch is
pressing the LOCK switch (1) two times.
pressed two times in succes-
Refer to “Dead Lock System” on page 3-23
sion, all doors and the tail-
for details.
gate unlock.

Step iii: Step iii: WARNING

While holding the UNLOCK switch (2), re- While holding the UNLOCK switch (2), re-
• This product contains a coin type bat-
lease the LOCK switch (1). lease the LOCK switch (1). tery.
If a coin type battery is swallowed, it
can cause severe internal burns and can
3
lead to death.
Step iv: There have been cases where a swal-
Release the UNLOCK switch (2). lowed battery has caused severe inter-
Step iv: nal burns in just 2 hours.
Release the UNLOCK switch (2). • Keep new and used batteries away
from children.
• If the remote control switch case does
not close securely, stop using the prod-
uct and keep it away from children.
NOTE • If you think batteries might have been
l The number of chimes indicates the current swallowed or placed inside any part of
Keyless operation key setting. a person’s body, seek immediate medi-
l Be sure to press the switches correctly when cal attention.
Step i: performing the procedures. If you perform l To prevent that can result in an explosion
Press and hold the LOCK switch (1) for 4 to the procedures incorrectly, the setting can be or the leakage of flammable liquid or gas.
changed unintentionally. • Do not replace an incorrectly battery.
8 seconds.
l On vehicles equipped with the Smartphone- Replace only with the same battery or
link Display Audio (SDA) or the Smart- an equivalent type.
phone-link Display Audio (SDA) navigation • Do not dispose of a battery into fire or
system, screen operations can be used to incinerator, or mechanically crushing
Step ii: make the adjustment. Refer to the separate or cutting of a battery.
While holding the LOCK switch (1), press owner’s manual for details. • Do not use, store in or bring into a bat-
tery where it may be exposed to ex-
the UNLOCK switch (2).
tremely high temperature or extremely
Procedure for replacing the re- low air pressure.
mote control switch battery
WARNING
l Do not swallow a coin type battery.

CAUTION 2. Remove the screw (A) from the remote NOTE

control switch.
l When the remote control switch case is l Be sure to perform the procedure with the
opened, be careful to keep water, dust, etc. MITSUBISHI mark facing you. If the
3 out. Also, do not touch the internal compo-
nents.
MITSUBISHI mark is not facing you when
you open the remote control switch case, the
l Dispose of used batteries according to regu- switches may come out.
lations for the disposal of battery.
4. Remove the used battery.
NOTE 5. Install a new battery with the + side (B)
up.
l You may purchase a replacement battery at
an electric appliance store.
l A MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized
Service Point can replace the battery for you + side
if you prefer.
3. With the MITSUBISHI mark facing you,
[Keyless entry key] insert the cloth-covered tip of a straight - side
blade (or minus) screwdriver into the
1. Before replacing the battery, remove notch in the remote control switch case
static electricity from your body by Coin type
and use it to open the case. battery
touching a metal grounded object.
CR1620
6. Close the remote control switch case

firmly.
7. Attach the screw (A) removed in step 2.
8. Check the keyless entry system to see
that it works.
[Keyless operation key]

1. Before replacing the battery, remove
static electricity from your body by
touching a metal grounded object.
2. Remove the emergency key from the 5. Install a new battery with the + side (A) The driver should always carry the keyless
key. up. operation key. This key is necessary for lock-
Refer to “Emergency key” on page ing and unlocking the doors and tailgate,
3-20. + side starting the engine and otherwise operating
3. With the MITSUBISHI mark facing you, the vehicle, so before locking and leaving the 3
insert the cloth-covered tip of a straight vehicle, be sure to check that you have the
blade (or minus) screwdriver into the keyless operation key.
- side
notch in the remote control switch case
and use it to open the case. WARNING
Coin type battery
CR2032
l People with implantable cardiac pace-
makers or implantable cardiovascular-de-
fibrillators should not go near the exterior
transmitters (A) or the interior transmit-
ters (B). The radio waves used by the key-
6. Close the case firmly.
less operation system could adversely af-
7. Install the emergency key removed in fect implantable cardiac pacemakers or
step 2. implantable cardiovascular-defibrillators.
8. Check the keyless operation function to
see that it works.

NOTE
The keyless operation system allows you to
l Be sure to perform the procedure with the
MITSUBISHI mark facing you. If the lock and unlock the doors and tailgate and
MITSUBISHI mark is not facing you when start the engine simply by carrying the key-
you open the remote control switch case, the less operation key with you.
transmitter may come out. The keyless operation key can also be used as
the keyless entry system remote control
4. Remove the used battery. switch.
3-04.

WARNING NOTE NOTE

l When using electro-medical devices other • The keyless operation system is carried l Because the keyless operation key continual-
than implantable cardiac pacemakers or together with a communications device ly receives signals, strong radio wave recep-
3 implantable cardiovascular-defibrillators,
contact the electromedical device manu-
such as a cellular phone or radio set, or
with an electronic device such as a per-
tion could affect battery wear. Do not leave
the key near a TV, personal computer, or
facturer ahead of time to determine the sonal computer. other electronic device.
affects of radio waves on the devices. Elec- • The keyless operation key is touching or
tromedical device operations could be ad- covered by a metal object.
versely effected by radio waves. • A keyless entry system is being used Operating range of the keyless
nearby. operation system
• When the keyless operation key battery is
You can limit the possible operations of the worn out. If you are carrying the keyless operation key,
keyless operation system in the following • When the keyless operation key is placed enter the operating range of the keyless oper-
ways. (The keyless operation system can be in an area with strong radio waves or ation system, and press the driver’s or front
used as a keyless entry system.) Consult a noise. passenger’s door lock/unlock switch, the tail-
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service In such cases, use the emergency key. gate LOCK switch or the tailgate open
Point. Refer to “To operate without using the switch, the ID code for your key is verified.
keyless operation function” on page
l You can limit operations to locking and 3-20.
You can only lock and unlock the doors and
unlocking the doors and tailgate. tailgate and start the engine only if the ID co-
l Because the keyless operation key receives
l You can limit operations to starting the signals in order to communicate with the des of your keyless operation key and the ve-
engine. transmitters in the vehicle, the battery con- hicle match.
l The keyless operation system can be dis- tinually wears down regardless of keyless
abled. operation key use. The battery life is 1 to 3
years, depending on usage conditions. When
the battery wears out, replace the battery ac-
NOTE cording to the description in this manual or
have it replaced at your MITSUBISHI
l The keyless operation key uses an ultra-
weak electromagnetic wave. In the following
cases, the keyless operation system may not Refer to “Procedure for replacing the remote
operate properly or may be unstable. control switch battery” on page 3-07.
• When there is equipment nearby that
emits strong radio waves, such as: a pow-
er station, a radio/TV broadcasting station
or an airport.

NOTE NOTE Operating range for starting the

l If the keyless operation key battery is wear- l Locking and unlocking operate only when engine
ing out or there are strong electromagnetic you press a door or tailgate switch that de- The operating range is the interior of the ve-
waves or noise present, the operating range
may become smaller and operation may be- l
tects the keyless operation key.
Operation may not be possible if you are too
hicle. 3
come unstable. close to the front door, door window, or tail-
gate.
l Even if the keyless operation key is within
Operating range for locking 70 cm of the driver’s door handle, front pas-
and unlocking the doors and senger’s door handle, or tailgate handle, if
the key is near to the ground or high up, the
tailgate system may not operate.
The operating range is about 70 cm from the l If the keyless operation key is within the op-
driver’s door lock/unlock switch, front pas- erating range, even someone not carrying the
key can lock and unlock the doors and tail-
senger’s door lock/unlock switch, and tailgate
gate by pressing the driver’s or front pas-
lock/unlock switch. senger’s door lock/unlock switch, the tail-
gate lock switch or the tailgate open switch.
*: Forward direction
: Operating range
NOTE
l Even if it is within the operating range, if the
keyless operation key is in a small item
holder such as the glove box, on top of the
instrument panel, door pocket or in the lug-
gage area, it may be impossible to start the
engine.
*: Forward direction
: Operating range

NOTE Tailgate switches NOTE

l If a keyless operation key is too close to the l The tailgate open switch (C) can be used to
door or door window, it may be possible to check that the vehicle is locked properly.
3 start the engine or change the operation
mode even when the key is outside the vehi-
Press the tailgate open switch within approx-
imately 3 seconds of locking the vehicle. If
cle. you wait longer than 3 seconds and press the
tailgate open switch, the doors and tailgate
will be unlocked.
To operate using the keyless l The time allowed for checking that the vehi-
operation function cle is locked can be adjusted. For further in-
formation, please contact your
Locking the doors and tailgate ice Point.
NOTE On vehicles equipped with the Smartphone-
When you are carrying the keyless operation
key, if you press the driver’s or front pas- l For vehicles equipped with the mirror retrac- link Display Audio (SDA) or the Smart-
tor switch, the outside rear-view mirrors au- phone-link Display Audio (SDA) navigation
senger’s door lock/unlock switch (A), or the tomatically retract when all the doors and system, screen operations can be used to
tailgate LOCK switch (B) within the operat- tailgate are locked using the keyless opera- make the adjustment. Refer to the separate
ing range, the doors and the tailgate are tion function. owner’s manual for details.
locked. Refer to “Starting and driving: Outside rear-
view mirrors” on page 6-12.
The turn-signal lamps will blink once. Unlocking the doors and tail-
Also refer to “Locking and unlocking: Doors, l For vehicles equipped with the Dead Lock
gate
System, pressing the driver’s or front pas-
Central door locks, Split tailgate” on pages
senger’s door lock/unlock switch (A), or the When you are carrying the keyless operation
3-20, 3-22 and 3-25. tailgate lock switch (B) two times in succes- key, if you press the driver’s or front pas-
sion causes the Dead Lock System to be set.
Driver’s or front passenger’s door (Refer to “Setting the system” on page
senger’s door lock/unlock switch (A), or the
lock/unlock switches 3-23.) tailgate open switch (B) within the operating
l The keyless operation function does not op- range, all the doors and the tailgate are un-
erate under the following conditions: locked.
• The keyless operation key is inside the If the front room lamp switch is in the
vehicle. “DOOR” position or the rear room lamp
• The operation mode is not in OFF. switch is in the middle (•) position at this
• A door or the tailgate is open or ajar. time, the room lamp will turn on for 15 sec-
onds. The turn-signal lamps will blink twice.

If the driver’s or front passenger’s door lock/ NOTE NOTE
unlock switch is pressed and any of the doors
or tailgate is not opened within approximate- l For vehicles equipped with the mirror retrac- l The time allowed for checking that the vehi-
tor switch, the outside rear-view mirrors au- cle is locked can be adjusted. For further in-
ly 30 seconds, relocking will automatically
occur.
tomatically extend when all the doors and
tailgate are unlocked using the keyless oper-
formation, please contact
your
3
Also refer to “Locking and unlocking: Doors, ation function. ice Point.
Central door locks, Split tailgate” on pages Refer to “Starting and driving: Outside rear- On vehicles equipped with the Smartphone-
3-20, 3-22 and 3-25. view mirrors” on page 6-12. link Display Audio (SDA) or the Smart-
l Except for vehicles equipped with a Dead phone-link Display Audio (SDA) navigation
Driver’s and front passenger’s door lock/unlock switches
Lock System, the keyless operation function system, screen operations can be used to
can be set so that only the driver’s door un- make the adjustment. Refer to the separate
locks when the driver’s door lock/unlock owner’s manual for details.
switch is pressed. l The time between unlocking and automatic
If the keyless operation function is set to locking can be adjusted. Please consult a
work as described above, all the doors and MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Serv-
the tailgate unlock when the driver’s door ice Point.
lock/unlock switch is pressed two times in On vehicles equipped with the Smartphone-
succession. link Display Audio (SDA) or the Smart-
Refer to “Setting of door and tailgate unlock phone-link Display Audio (SDA) navigation
function” on page 3-06. system, screen operations can be used to
l The keyless operation function does not op- make the adjustment. Refer to the separate
erate when the operation mode is not in OFF. owner’s manual for details.
Tailgate open switch
l In order to make it possible to check that the
doors and tailgate are locked, you cannot un- Operation confirmation when locking and
lock them by using the tailgate open switch
unlocking
for 3 seconds after locking them.
Operation can be confirmed as shown below.
However, the room lamp will only illuminate
if the front room lamp switch is in the
“DOOR” position or the rear room lamp
switch is in the middle (•) position.
B
When locking: The turn-signal lamps will
blink once.

When unlock- The room lamp will illu- (Refer to “Dead Lock System” on page
ing: minate for approximately 3-23.)
15 seconds, the turn-sig-
nal lamps will blink twice.
3
NOTE
l Functions can be modified as stated below.
For further information, please contact your
ice Point.
On vehicles equipped with the Smartphone-
link Display Audio (SDA) or the Smart-
phone-link Display Audio (SDA) navigation
system, screen operations can be used to
make the adjustment. Refer to the separate
owner’s manual for details.
• Set the confirmation function (blinking of
the turn-signal lamps) to operate only
when the vehicle is locked or only when
the vehicle is unlocked.
• Disable the operation confirmation func-
tion (blinking of the turn-signal lamps).
• Change the number of blinks for the oper-
ation confirmation function (blinks of the
turn-signal lamps).
Operation of the Dead Lock

System
For vehicles equipped with the Dead Lock
System, it is possible to set the Dead Lock
System using the driver’s or front passenger’s
door lock/unlock switch, or the tailgate
LOCK switch.

Warning activation
In order to prevent vehicle theft or the accidental operation of the keyless operation system, the buzzer and the display on the information screen
in the multi-information display are used to alert the driver.
If a warning is activated, always check the vehicle and the keyless operation key. The warning is also displayed if there is a fault in the keyless
operation system.
3
TYPE 1: Colour liquid crystal display type TYPE 2: Mono-colour liquid crystal display type
Item TYPE 1 TYPE 2 Note (Solution)

Display Buzzer Indicator Buzzer
Detection of fail- Inner buzzer No sounds There is a fault in the keyless operation
ure sounds once. system.
Illuminates
Fall of battery volt- Inner buzzer No sounds The battery starts to run out, the warn-
age sounds once. ing is activated.
(The warning is not activated if the bat-
Blinks tery is completely dead.)
Key not detected Inner buzzer No sounds When the engine switch is turned to the
sounds once. ACC or ON from OFF or when the en-
gine is started, the warning is activated,
Blinks if any of the following conditions is oc-
curred.
l Carrying another keyless operation
key with a different code, or the
keyless operation key could be out-
side the operating range.
l The battery of the keyless opera-
tion key is dead.
l Communication is blocked by elec-
tric wave environment.


Keyless operation Inner buzzer Inner buzzer If the operation mode is in OFF and the
3 key reminder sounds about 1 mi- sounds about 1 mi- driver’s door is opened with the keyless
nute. Outer buzzer nute. Outer buzzer operation key in the key slot, a warning
sounds about 3 Blinks sounds about 3 is issued and the outer buzzer sounds
seconds intermit- seconds. for about 3 seconds and the inner buz-
tently. zer sounds for about 1 minute to remind
you to remove the key. If the key re-
moved from key slot, the buzzer is stop-
ped.


Keyless operation Inner buzzer Inner buzzer l When the vehicle is parked with
key take-out moni- sounds once. Outer sounds once. Outer the operation mode in any mode 3
toring system buzzer sounds in- buzzer sounds in- other than OFF, if you close the
termittently. Blinks termittently. door after opening any of the doors
and taking the keyless operation
key out of the vehicle, a warning is
issued until the key is detected in
the vehicle.
l If you take the keyless operation
key out of the vehicle through a
window without opening a door,
the keyless operation key take-out
monitoring system does not oper-
ate.
l It is possible to change the setting
to make the keyless operation key
take-out monitoring system operate
if you take the keyless operation
key out from the vehicle through a
window without opening a door.
For further information, please
contact a MITSUBISHI MOTORS
Authorized Service Point.


Keyless operation Inner buzzer Inner buzzer l Even if you have the keyless oper-
3 key take-out moni- sounds once. Outer sounds once. Outer ation key within the engine start
toring system buzzer sounds in- buzzer sounds in- operating range, if the keyless op-
termittently. Blinks termittently. eration key and vehicle ID codes
cannot be matched, for example
due to the ambient environment or
electromagnetic conditions, the
warning may be activated.
Key lock-in pre- Inner buzzer Outer buzzer l When the operation mode is in
vention system sounds once. Outer sounds about 3 OFF, if you close all the doors and
buzzer sounds seconds intermit- the tailgate with the keyless opera-
about 3 seconds in- Blinks tently. tion key left in the vehicle and you
termittently. try to lock the doors and tailgate by
pressing the driver’s or front pas-
senger’s door lock/unlock switch,
or the tailgate LOCK switch, a
warning is issued and you cannot
lock the doors and tailgate.
l Make sure you have the keyless
operation key with you before
locking the doors. Even if you
leave the keyless operation key in-
side the vehicle, it is possible that
the doors will lock depending on
the surrounding environment and
wireless signal conditions.


Door ajar preven- Inner buzzer Outer buzzer When the operation mode in OFF, if
tion system sounds once. Outer sounds about 3 you try to lock the doors and tailgate by 3
buzzer sounds seconds intermit- pressing the driver’s or front passeng-
about 3 seconds in- Blinks tently. er’s door lock/unlock switch, or the tail-
termittently. gate LOCK switch with one of the
doors or the tailgate not completely
closed, a warning is issued and you can-
not lock the doors and tailgate.
Operation mode Inner buzzer Outer buzzer When the operation mode is in any
OFF reminder sys- sounds once. Outer sounds about 3 mode other than OFF, if you try to lock
tem buzzer sounds seconds intermit- the doors and tailgate by pressing the
about 3 seconds in- Blinks tently. driver’s or front passenger’s door lock/
termittently. unlock switch, or the tailgate LOCK
switch, a warning is issued and you
cannot lock the doors and tailgate.

Doors
To operate without using the NOTE CAUTION

keyless operation function l After using the emergency key, always re- l Be careful not to lock the doors while the
turn it into the keyless operation key. key is inside the vehicle.
Emergency key
3 The emergency key is built into the keyless
Locking and unlocking the driver’s door
operation key. If the keyless operation func- NOTE
tion cannot be used, for example because the Turning the emergency key in the forward di-
keyless operation key battery has worn out or rection locks the door, and turning it in the l To prevent the key from being locked inside
the vehicle, neither the lock knob on the
the vehicle battery is flat, you can lock and rear direction unlocks the door. Also refer to driver’s door nor the key can be used to lock
unlock the driver’s door with the emergency “Locking and unlocking: Doors” on page the driver’s door when it is open.
key. To use the emergency key (A), unlock 3-20.
the lock knob (B) and remove it from the To lock or unlock with the key
keyless operation key (C).
1- Lock
2- Unlock 1- Lock
2- Unlock
NOTE Doors
l Only use the emergency key for emergen-
cies. If the keyless operation key battery CAUTION
wears out, replace it as quickly as possible
so that you can use the keyless operation l Make sure the doors are closed: driving with
doors not completely closed is dangerous.
key.
l Never leave children in the vehicle unatten-
ded.

Doors
NOTE To lock or unlock from inside To lock without using the key
l When locking or unlocking with the key, on-
the vehicle
ly the driver’s door will be locked or un- Front passenger’s door, Rear
locked.
To lock or unlock all doors and the tailgate,
door 3
use the central door lock switch, the keyless
entry system or the keyless operation func-
tion.
Refer to “Central door locks” on page 3-22,
“Keyless entry system” on page 3-04 and
“To operate using the keyless operation
function” on page 3-12.
l If the vehicle is equipped with the keyless
operation system, the driver’s door can be
locked or unlocked with the emergency key. 1- Lock
Refer to “Emergency key” on page 3-20. 2- Unlock
Pull the inside door handle towards you to Set the inside lock knob (1) to the locked po-
open the door. sition, and close the door (2).
NOTE NOTE
l The driver’s door can be opened without us- l The driver’s door cannot be locked using the
ing the lock knob by pulling on the inside inside lock knob while the driver’s door is
door handle. opened.
l In a vehicle that has a Dead Lock System, it
is not possible to unlock the door by pushing
the lock knob to the unlock side while the
Dead Lock System is set.
(Refer to “Dead Lock System” on page
3-23.)

Central door locks
Central door locks To lock and unlock the doors These functions are not activated when the
and tailgate vehicle is shipped from the factory. To acti-
vate or deactivate these functions, please con-
tact a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized
3 NOTE Using the central door lock Service Point.
l Repeated continuous operation between lock switch
and unlock could activate the central door Using the ignition switch or the
locking systems built-in protection circuit Using the central door lock switch on the engine switch
and prevent the system from operating. If driver’s door locks or unlocks all doors and
this occurs, wait approximately 1 minute be- the tailgate. All doors and the tailgate will unlock when-
fore operating the central door lock switch. ever the ignition switch is turned to the
l When the driver’s door is open, the central LHD RHD
“LOCK” position or the operation mode is
door lock switch cannot be used to lock it. put in OFF.
Using the selector lever position

All doors and the tailgate will unlock when-
ever the selector lever is moved to the “P”
(PARK) position with the ignition switch in
the “ON” position or put the operation mode
in ON.
1- Lock
2- Unlock
To unlock the doors and tail-

gate
You can select the functions to unlock the
doors and tailgate either using the ignition
switch or the engine switch, or using the se-
lector lever position.

Dead Lock System*
NOTE Setting the system Driver’s and front passenger’s door lock/unlock
switches*
l On vehicles equipped with the Smartphone- 1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”
link Display Audio (SDA) or the Smart- position and then remove the key (vehi-
cles with keyless entry system), or put
the operation mode in OFF (vehicles
3
make the adjustment. with keyless operation system).
Refer to the separate owner’s manual for de-
2. Get out of the vehicle. Close all of the
tails.
doors and the tailgate.
3. Press the LOCK switch (A) on the re-
Dead Lock System* mote control switch, the driver’s or front
passenger’s door lock/unlock switch (C),
The Dead Lock System helps prevent theft. or the tailgate LOCK switch (D) to lock Tailgate switches*
When the keyless entry system or the keyless all of the doors and the tailgate. The
operation system has been used to lock all of turn-signal lamps will blink once.
the doors and the tailgate, the Dead Lock 4. Press the switch again within 2 seconds.
System makes it impossible to unlock the The turn-signal lamps will blink three
doors using the inside lock knobs. times to show that the Dead Lock Sys-
tem has been set.
CAUTION
Keyless entry system Keyless operation
l Do not set the Dead Lock System when system
someone is inside the vehicle. With the Dead
Lock System set, it is not possible to unlock
the doors using the inside lock knobs. If you NOTE
erroneously set the Dead Lock System, un-
lock the doors using the UNLOCK switch l Pressing the LOCK switch (A) on the re-
on the remote control switch or using the mote control switch once while the Dead
keyless operation function. Lock System is set causes the turn-signal
lamps to blink three times, so it is possible to
confirm that the Dead Lock System is set.

“Child-protection” rear doors
Cancelling the system NOTE NOTE

When the following operation is performed, l It is possible to adjust the time between l Ifyou need advice on how to set the Dead
the doors and tailgate will unlock and the pressing the UNLOCK switch (B) on the re- Lock System, please contact a MITSUBISHI
3 Dead Lock System will be simultaneously
cancelled.
mote control switch or the driver’s or front
passenger’s door lock/unlock switch (C) and
automatic locking. For details, please con-

l The UNLOCK switch (B) on the remote
control switch is pressed.
tact a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized “Child-protection” rear
Service Point.
l The driver’s or front passenger’s door On vehicles equipped with the Smartphone- doors
lock/unlock switch (C) or the tailgate link Display Audio (SDA) or the Smart-
open switch (E) is pressed while you are phone-link Display Audio (SDA) navigation
carrying the keyless operation key. system, screen operations can be used to
NOTE l It is possible to lock the doors and tailgate
and set the Dead Lock System at the same
l If neither a door nor the tailgate is opened
within 30 seconds of unlocking (except us- time with a single push of the LOCK switch
ing the tailgate open switch), the doors and (A) on the remote control switch, the driv-
tailgate are automatically relocked and the er’s or front passenger’s door lock/unlock
Dead Lock System is simultaneously set switch (C), or the tailgate lock switch (D).
again. For details, please contact a MITSUBISHI
MOTORS Authorized Service Point. 1- Lock
l Even when it is not possible to use the key-
2- Unlock
less entry system or keyless operation func-
tion to unlock the doors, it is possible to use
the key to unlock the driver’s door. When
Testing the system Child protection helps prevent the rear doors
the key is used to unlock the driver’s door, Open all of the door windows, then set the from being opened accidentally from the in-
the Dead Lock System is cancelled for only Dead Lock System. (Refer to “Setting the side.
the driver’s door. If you wish to subsequent- system” on page 3-23.) If the lever is set to the locked position, the
ly unlock all other doors, turn the ignition
After setting the Dead Lock System, reach rear door cannot be opened using the inside
switch to the “ON” or “ACC” position, or
put the operation mode in ON or ACC.
into the vehicle through a window and con- handle, but only with the outside handle.
firm that you cannot unlock the doors using If the lever is set to the “Unlock” position,
the lock knobs. the child protection mechanism does not
function.

Tailgate*
CAUTION CAUTION To open

l When driving with a child in the rear seat, l To avoid damage to the tailgate, make sure After unlocking the tailgate, push the tailgate
please use the child protection to prevent ac- the area above and behind the tailgate is
open switch (A) and pull up the tailgate.
cidental door opening which may cause an
accident.
clear before opening it.
3
To lock/unlock
Tailgate* The tailgate can be locked or unlocked by us-
ing the central door lock switch (driver side).
WARNING
l It is dangerous to drive with the tailgate LHD RHD
open, since carbon monoxide (CO) gas
can enter the cabin.
You cannot see or smell CO. It can cause
unconsciousness and even death.
l When opening and closing the tailgate,
make sure that there are no people nearby
and be careful not to hit your head or NOTE
pinch your hands, neck, etc.
l When there is a build up of snow or ice, it l The tailgate cannot be opened when the bat-
tery is flat or disconnected.
should be removed before opening the
If you want to open the tailgate, it can be
tailgate. If you open the tailgate without
opened by using the inside tailgate release.
removing it, there is a possibility that the 1- Lock
Refer to “Inside tailgate release” on page
tailgate may close suddenly due to the 2- Unlock 3-32.
weight of that snow or ice.
l When you open the tailgate make sure
that the tailgate is opened fully and re- NOTE
mains fully open. If you only open the tail-
gate halfway there is a risk that the tail-
l Repeated continuous operating between lock
and unlock could cause the central door
gate may drop and slam shut. If you open locks’ built-in protection circuit to prevent
the tailgate whilst your vehicle is parked the system from operating. If this occurs,
on an incline it is more difficult to do so wait approximately 1 minute before operat-
than on the flat and also it may drop and ing the central door lock switch.
slam shut.

Electric tailgate*
To close NOTE Operating the electric tailgate

Pull the tailgate grip (B) downward as illus- • Do not attach any plastic material, tape,
etc., to the gas struts. WARNING
trated. Gently shut the tailgate from the out-
3 side so that it is completely closed. Always
• Do not tie string, etc., around the gas
struts. l The luggage area was not designed for
ensure the tailgate is securely closed. • Do not hang any object on the gas struts. people to ride in it. Do not let your chil-
dren ride in or play in the luggage area.
Riding or playing in the luggage area
could result in a serious accident.
l Before driving, make sure the electric tail-
gate is securely closed.
If you drive with the tailgate open, there is
a danger of exhaust gas entering the vehi-
cle and causing carbon monoxide poison-
ing.
l For safety’s sake, the electric tailgate
should be operated by adults and not chil-
dren.
l When opening and closing the tailgate,
make sure that there are no people nearby
and be careful not to hit your head or
CAUTION
Electric tailgate* pinch your hands, neck, etc.
l When closing the tailgate, always ensure Make sure the electric tailgate is com-
your or other person’s fingers cannot be pletely open before loading and unloading
Before operating the electric tailgate, unlock
caught by the tailgate. luggage.
the tailgate by using the keyless entry system,
keyless operation system, or the central door
NOTE locks. CAUTION
l Gas struts (C) are installed to support the
3-04, “Keyless operation system*” on page l Do not stand behind the exhaust pipe when
tailgate. loading and unloading luggage.
To prevent damage or faulty operation. 3-09, or “Central door locks” on page 3-22. The heat from the exhaust could cause
• Do not hold the gas struts and wires when burns.
closing the tailgate.
• Also, do not push or pull the gas struts.

Electric tailgate*
CAUTION NOTE NOTE

l To avoid damage to the tailgate, make sure l When opening and closing the electric tail- • Do not tie string, etc., around the gas
the area above and behind the tailgate is gate, do not place your hands near the arm struts.
l
clear before opening it.
Before driving, make sure the electric tail- l
(B).
Gas struts (C) are installed in the locations
• Do not hang anything from the gas struts. 3
gate is closed properly. If the tailgate opens shown below in order to support the electric
when driving, luggage could fall onto the tailgate. Automatic operation
road and cause an accident. l Make sure not to bump your head in the area
The electric tailgate can be operated using the
l Do not install accessories other than near the arm of the electric tailgate when
remote control switch on the keyless entry
MITSUBISHI MOTORS GENUINE parts loading and unloading luggage.
on the electric tailgate. Some accessories key or keyless operation key, or the close
could be too heavy, causing the drop preven- switch on the tailgate when the electric tail-
tion mechanism to operate. gate power switch (A) is on.
l When closing the electric tailgate, make sure
there is no foreign matter around the striker
(A).
If foreign matter gets into the striker it could
prevent the electric tailgate from closing
normally.
NOTE
l Please observe the following in order to pre-
vent damage or faulty operation.
• Do not pull on the gas struts when closing
the electric tailgate or otherwise push or
pull them.
• Do not attach any plastic material, tape,
etc., to the gas struts.

Electric tailgate*
WARNING NOTE Operating conditions

l Turn off the electric tailgate power switch l The electric tailgate cannot be opened when The electric tailgate can be opened automati-
when not operating the electric tailgate. the battery is flat or disconnected. cally when all of the following conditions are
3 If the switch is left on, someone’s hand or
head could get caught if the electric tail-
If you want to open the electric tailgate, it
can be opened by using the inside tailgate re-
met.
<Using the keyless operation key>
gate switch or close switch is accidentally lease.
l The operation mode is in OFF.
operated, or children play with the con- Refer to “Inside tailgate release” on page
trols. 3-32. l The electric tailgate is completely
l If the electric tailgate power switch is l If the keyless entry system or close switch is closed.
turned off while the tailgate is operating, operated when the electric tailgate power l The electric tailgate is unlocked.
it will stop moving and switch to manual switch is off, the warning buzzer sounds 4
operation. times to notify the driver that the electric <Using the driver’s side electric tailgate
At this time, the electric tailgate could tailgate cannot be operated.
switch>
open or close suddenly, depending on its l The electric tailgate does not operate nor-
l The operation mode is in ON with the
position. mally under the following conditions:
• When parked on an incline selector lever in the “P” (PARK) posi-
• In strong winds tion (A/T) or the parking brake is ap-
CAUTION • When the electric tailgate is covered with plied (M/T).
l Do not apply excessive force on the electric snow l The electric tailgate is completely
tailgate when opening or closing it. Doing so l Repeated continuous operation between closed.
could cause a breakdown. opening and closing the electric tailgate will l The electric tailgate is unlocked.
activate the built-in protection circuit and
l Do not start the engine while the tailgate is
operating. The sudden operation prevention switch the tailgate to manual operation.
The electric tailgate can be closed automati-
mechanism could operate, making the elec- l If the electric tailgate handle is operated
cally when all of the following conditions are
tric tailgate stop intermittently while it while the tailgate is operating or immediate-
moves. ly after it is closed, the tailgate will move in met.
the direction opposite to the one in which it <Using the keyless operation key>
was operating. l The operation mode is in OFF.
l If the battery or fuse is replaced while the
l The electric tailgate is completely open.
electric tailgate is open, it cannot be closed
automatically. l People, luggage, etc., are not touching
In this case close the electric tailgate man- the sensors.
ually.
<Using the driver’s side electric tailgate
switch or close switch>

Electric tailgate*
l The operation mode is in ON with the If the electric tailgate switch is pressed twice •While The warning buzzer sounds
selector lever in the “P” (PARK) posi- in a row, the electric tailgate operates after closed: and the tailgate completely
tion (A/T) or with the parking brake is the warning buzzer sounds. opens.
applied (M/T), or the operation mode is The electric tailgate operates as follows:
in ACC or OFF.
•While
open:
The warning buzzer sounds
and the tailgate completely
3
l The electric tailgate is completely open. •While The warning buzzer sounds
closed: and the tailgate completely closes.
l People, luggage, etc., are not touching
the sensors. opens. If the driver’s side electric tailgate switch is
•While The warning buzzer sounds pressed once while the tailgate is operating,
Operating the electric tailgate open: and the tailgate completely the warning buzzer sounds once and it moves
closes. in the direction opposite to the one in which
using the keyless operation key it was operating.
If the electric tailgate switch is pressed once
or the driver’s side electric tail- while the tailgate is operating, the warning
gate switch buzzer sounds and it moves in the direction WARNING
After unlocking the doors and the electric opposite to the one in which it was operating. l When operating the electric tailgate, en-
tailgate, the electric tailgate can be operated sure the safety of the surrounding area,
by pressing the switch (A) of the keyless op- make sure there is sufficient space behind
NOTE and above the vehicle, and be careful not
eration key or the driver’s side electric tail-
gate switch (B). l If the electric tailgate switch is pressed 3 or to bump your head or catch your hands
more times in a row, the tailgate may not op- or fingers.
erate normally.
If this occurs, wait a short time before again
pressing the electric tailgate switch twice.
<Using the driver’s side electric tailgate

switch>
If the driver’s side electric tailgate switch is
pressed for more than about 1 second, the
electric tailgate operates after the buzzer
sounds.
The electric tailgate operates as follows.
<Using the keyless operation key>

Electric tailgate*
Opening the electric tailgate us- Closing the electric tailgate us- Safety mechanism
ing the open switch ing the close switch The safety mechanism is activated if the elec-
The electric tailgate can be opened by press- The electric tailgate can be closed by press- tric tailgate should trap a person or an object
3 ing the open switch (C). ing the close switch (D) on the inside of the during automatic operation, or if the sensors
(A) on either side of the electric tailgate are
electric tailgate.
hit. The warning buzzer sounds once for safe-
ty and the electric tailgate automatically
moves in the direction opposite to the one in
which it was operating.
If the open switch is pressed with the tailgate

and all doors are unlocked, the electric tail- If the close switch on the inside of the elec-
gate opens after the warning buzzer sounds. tric tailgate is pressed, the electric tailgate
When the tailgate and all doors are locked, closes after the warning buzzer sounds.
the warning buzzer will not sound. If the close switch is pressed once while the
tailgate is closing, the warning buzzer sounds
CAUTION
NOTE and the electric tailgate opens. l The safety mechanism will sometimes not
operate depending on the condition of the
l When the keyless operation key is within the trapped object or how it is trapped. There-
operation range, the electric tailgate can be NOTE fore, be especially careful not to trap a hand,
opened by pressing the open switch even if part of your body or an object at this time.
l If the close switch is again pressed once
l The safety mechanism is cancelled just be-
the tailgate is locked. while the electric tailgate is operating in the
fore the electric tailgate is fully closed to al-
opening direction, the warning buzzer
low it to close completely. Therefore be es-
sounds and the electric tailgate closes.
pecially careful not to trap a hand or finger
at this time.

Electric tailgate*
CAUTION NOTE Manual operation

l The safety mechanism is deactivated when l If snow has accumulated on the electric tail- If the electric tailgate power switch is off, the
the electric tailgate is closed manually. gate, remove it before operation. electric tailgate can be operated by manual
Therefore be especially careful not to trap a
hand or finger at this time.
l Do not install accessories other than
MITSUBISHI MOTORS GENUINE parts
operation.
3
l If the safety mechanism is repeatedly operat- on the electric tailgate. Some accessories After unlocking the electric tailgate, push the
ed, the tailgate could be switched to manual could be too heavy, causing the drop preven-
tailgate open switch (A) and pull up the tail-
operation. Be careful at this time, as the tion mechanism to operate.
gate.
electric tailgate could open or close sudden- l The drop prevention mechanism could be
ly, depending on its position. activated if manual operation is attempted
Once the electric tailgate is completely open immediately after the electric tailgate is
or closed, normal automatic operation is completely opened automatically.
again possible.
Sudden operation prevention
NOTE mechanism
If the engine is started while the electric tail-
l If the environment or usage conditions sub-
ject the sensors to the same kind of force as gate is operating automatically, it may switch
that of trapping a person or object, the safety to manual operation due to insufficient bat-
mechanism could be activated. tery voltage, making the electric tailgate stop
l Do not damage the sensors when loading or intermittently while it moves. This is to stop
unloading luggage, or when cleaning the the electric tailgate from operating suddenly.
rear window. Doing so could prevent the
When the tailgate is completely closed or CAUTION
tailgate from closing automatically.
opened, automatic operation is again possible
after approximately 10 seconds. l Make sure there is no one around the electric
Drop prevention mechanism tailgate when opening it.
After the electric tailgate is opened automati- CAUTION

cally, if it is detected that the tailgate is drop- NOTE
ping due to factors such as accumulated l The safety mechanism is deactivated while
snow, the electric tailgate is closed automati- the sudden operation prevention mechanism l If it does nor open immediately after push-
is operating. Therefore be especially careful ing the tailgate open switch, the electric tail-
cally. A warning buzzer sounds continuously not to trap a hand or finger at this time. gate cannot be lifted.
while the drop prevention mechanism oper- If this occurs, push the tailgate open switch
ates. again and pull up the electric tailgate.

Inside tailgate release
NOTE Tailgate easy closer

l The electric tailgate cannot be opened when The tailgate easy closer is a mechanism for
the battery is flat or disconnected. assisting the closing of the electric tailgate.
3 If the electric tailgate is closed to a position
where it is detected as being ajar, it closes au-
To close the tailgate, pull the tailgate grip (B)
downward and release it before the tailgate is tomatically.
completely closed, and then gently slam the
electric tailgate from the outside. WARNING
l Be careful not to catch your hands or fin-
gers when the electric tailgate closes auto-
matically from the door ajar position. If
you think your hands or fingers could be NOTE
caught during the operation of the tailgate
easy closer, pull the handle of the electric
l The tailgate easy closer operates even when
the electric tailgate power switch is OFF.
tailgate. The electric tailgate will return to
the door ajar position.
l Repeated continuous operation of the handle
could activate the protection circuit and tem-
porarily prevent the tailgate easy closer from
operating.
CAUTION If this occurs, wait about 1 minute before
l Do not touch the latch (A) on the inside of operating the tailgate easy closer again.
the electric tailgate. The tailgate easy closer
could operate and catch your fingers.
CAUTION Inside tailgate release
l Do not fully close the electric tailgate with
your hand still on the tailgate grip. Doing so The inside tailgate release is designed to pro-
could trap and injure your hand or arm. vide a way to open the tailgate in the case of
l The safety mechanism is deactivated when a discharged battery.
the electric tailgate is closed manually.
Therefore be especially careful not to trap a
hand or finger at this time.

Security alarm system*
The tailgate release (see illustration) is moun- 2. Move the lever (B) to open the tailgate. Also, for vehicles equipped with the interior
ted on the tailgate. alarm sensor, the alarm will be activated if
Vehicles without Vehicles with any of the following occurs:
electric tailgate electrictailgate l Attempt to an unlawful moving of the
vehicle (the vehicle inclination detection 3
function)
l Detection of a motion in the vehicle (the
interior intrusion detection function)
l Disconnect the battery terminal.
The security alarm system is set to “active”.

When making changes to the settings, please
follow the procedure listed in the section ti-
3. Push out on the tailgate to open it. tled “Changing the security alarm settings”
You and your family should familiarise your- on page 3-35.
selves with the location and operation of the On vehicles equipped with the Smartphone-
tailgate release. CAUTION link Display Audio (SDA) or the Smart-
l Always keep the release lever lid on the tail- phone-link Display Audio (SDA) navigation
To open gate closed when driving so that your lug- system, screen operations can be used to
gage cannot accidentally bump against the make the adjustment. Refer to the separate
1. Open the lid (A) inside of the tailgate. lever and open the tailgate. owner’s manual for details.
Security alarm system* CAUTION

The security alarm system is for alerting the l Do not modify or add parts to the security
alarm system.
surrounding area of suspicious behaviour to Doing so could cause the security alarm to
prevent unlawful entry into the vehicle by op- malfunction.
erating an alarm if a door, the tailgate or the
bonnet is opened when the vehicle has not
been unlocked using the keyless entry system
or the keyless operation function.

NOTE NOTE The security alarm has four

l The alarm system will not be activated if the • Suffering a continuous impact or vibra- modes:
doors and the tailgate have been locked us- tion by hail, thunder, etc.
3 ing a key, the inside lock knob or the central
door lock switch (instead of the keyless en-
According to the situations, deactivate the
vehicle inclination detection function and System preparation mode (ap-
try system or the keyless operation func- the interior intrusion detection function. prox. 20 seconds)
tion). Refer to “To deactivate the vehicle incli-
(The buzzer sounds intermittently and the se-
l For vehicles equipped with the interior alarm nation detection function and the interior
sensor, if the turn-signal lamps do not blink intrusion detection function*” on page curity indicator (A) blinks.)
after the locking and unlocking operation us- 3-38.
ing the keyless entry system or the keyless l For vehicles equipped with the interior alarm Type 1
operation function, the security alarm system sensor, the sensitivity of the interior intru-
may be malfunctioning. sion detection function can be adjusted. For
Have the vehicle inspected at a details, please contact a MITSUBISHI
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Serv- MOTORS Authorized Service Point.
ice Point.
If the confirmation function (blinking of the
turn-signal lamps by locking and unlocking
the doors and the tailgate) is deactivated, the Type 2
turn-signal lamps do not blink after the lock-
ing and unlocking operation.
For information on the confirmation func-
tion, refer to “Keyless entry system” on page
3-04 and “To operate using the keyless oper-
ation function” on page 3-12.
l For vehicles equipped with the interior alarm
sensor, the security alarm system could be
activated in the following situations. The system preparation time extends from
• Using a car wash the point at which all of the doors and the
• Taking the vehicle on a ferry tailgate are locked by pressing the LOCK
• Parking in an automated car park switch on the remote control switch or the
• Leaving someone or a pet in the vehicle keyless operation function to the point at
• Leaving a window or the sunroof open which the system armed mode goes into ef-
• Leaving an unstable object such as a stuf- fect.
fed toy or accessory in the vehicle

During this time, it is possible to temporarily The turn-signal lamps blink and the horn NOTE
open a door or the tailgate without using the (the siren for vehicles equipped with the
keyless entry system or the keyless operation interior alarm sensor) sounds, warning l When lending the vehicle to another person
or allowing the vehicle to be driven by
function and without causing the alarm to people around the vehicle of an abnor-
sound (for example, when you forget some- mal condition.
someone who is unfamiliar with the security
alarm system, be sure to give the person a
3
thing inside the vehicle or realize that a win- proper explanation of the security alarm sys-
dow is open). Refer to “Alarm activation” on page 3-39. tem.
If a person who is unfamiliar with the securi-
System armed mode ty alarm system accidentally unlocked the
NOTE vehicle, causing the alarm to sound, the
(The buzzer stops and the security indicator alarm would be a nuisance to people nearby.
continues to blink with the indicator’s re- l The alarm will resume if unlawful actions
are taken again, even if the alarm has stop-
duced lit-up duration time.) ped.
Once the system preparation mode has ended, Changing the security alarm
the system armed mode starts. System cancellation settings
If an unlawful opening of any of the doors, It is possible to set the security alarm to the
tailgate or bonnet is detected during the sys- It is possible to cancel the system activation
“active” mode or “inactive” mode.
tem armed mode, the alarm will be activated during the system preparation mode or the
Follow the procedure below.
to warn people around the vehicle of an ab- system armed mode.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”
normal condition. In addition, it is possible to cancel the alarm
position and then remove the key (vehi-
Also, for vehicles equipped with the interior- once it has been activated.
alarm sensor, if unlawful moving of the vehi- Refer to “Cancelling the system” on page
cle is attempted or a vehicle intrusion is de- 3-39, “Cancelling the alarm” on page 3-40.
with keyless operation system).
tected, the alarm will be activated. 2. Place the lamp switch in the “OFF” posi-
tion, and leave the driver’s door open.
Alarm activation
Inside alarm (approx. 10 seconds):
The buzzer sounds, warning those inside
the vehicle of an abnormal condition.
(except for vehicles equipped with the
interior alarm sensor)
Outside alarm (approx. 30 seconds):

3. Pull the windscreen wiper and washer
switch towards you and hold it there.
(Since the ignition switch is in the
“LOCK” position or the operation mode
3 in OFF, washer fluid will not be
sprayed.)
The settings mode can be toggled by

pressing the UNLOCK switch. The
mode can be confirmed from the num-
ber of times the buzzer sounds.
Number of
times the Security alarm settings
4. After approximately 10 seconds, the
buzzer mode
buzzer will make a sound. Keep the
sounds
windscreen wiper and washer switch
pulled towards you. (If the windscreen 1 Alarm inactive
wiper and washer switch was released, 2 Alarm active
the setting change mode would be can-
celled. To start over, perform the proce-
6. Any of the following operations can be
dure again from step 3.)
used to terminate the system settings
5. When the buzzer stops, with the wind-
change mode.
screen wiper and washer switch still
pulled towards you, press the UNLOCK l Releasing the windscreen wiper and
washer switch.
switch (A) on the remote control switch
to select the security alarm settings l Closing the driver’s door.
mode. l Inserting the key into the ignition
switch. (vehicles with keyless entry
system)
l Put the operation mode in ON or lock/unlock switch (B), or the tailgate Tailgate LOCK switch*
ACC. (vehicles with the keyless oper- LOCK switch (C) in order to lock all the
ation system) doors and the tailgate.
l Placing the lamp switch in any posi-
tion other than “OFF”. 3
l Allowing 30 seconds to pass without
making any changes to the settings.
NOTE
l If anything with regard to making changes to
the security alarm system settings is hard to
understand, please consult your By locking the vehicle using the keyless
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Serv- entry system or the keyless operation
ice Point. function, the system preparation mode is
l Avoid leaving valuable items inside the ve- activated.
hicle even when the security alarm system The buzzer makes an intermittent beep-
Driver’s and front passenger’s door look/unlock switches*
has been set to the “active” mode.
ing sound and the security indicator (D)
Setting the system

Follow the procedure below to set the system
to the system armed mode.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”
position and then remove the key (vehi-
with keyless operation system).
2. Exit the vehicle and close all of the
doors, tailgate and bonnet.
3. Press the LOCK switch (A) on the re-
mote control switch of the keyless entry
system or the keyless operation system,
the driver’s or front passenger’s door

in the instrument cluster flashes for con- 4. After approximately 20 seconds, the 1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”
firmation. buzzer stops, and when the blinking of position and then remove the key (vehi-
the security indicator starts to slow cles with keyless entry system), or put
down, the system armed mode goes into the operation mode in OFF (vehicles
3
Type 1
effect. with keyless operation system).
The security indicator continues to blink 2. Raise and hold the wiper and washer
during the system armed mode. switch to the “MIST” position for ap-
proximately 3 seconds. The buzzer will
NOTE sound twice and the function will be de-
activated.
Type 2 l The security alarm system can be activated
when people are riding inside the vehicle or
To activate the function again, raise and hold
when the windows are open. To prevent ac-
cidental activation of the alarm, do not set the wiper and washer switch to the “MIST”
the system to the system armed mode while position for approximately 3 seconds.
people are riding in the vehicle. The buzzer will sound once and the function
l Avoid leaving valuable items inside the ve- will be activated.
hicle even when the security alarm system
has been set to the “active” mode.
NOTE
To deactivate the vehicle incli-
l The system preparation mode is not activa-
ted when the doors and the tailgate have nation detection function and
been locked using a method other than the
keyless entry system or the keyless operation
the interior intrusion detection
function (namely a key, the inside lock knob function*
or the central door lock switch). The vehicle inclination detection function
l If the bonnet is open, the security indicator and the interior intrusion detection function
illuminates, and the system does not enter
the system preparation mode.
can be deactivated when parking in automa-
When the bonnet is closed, the system enters ted car parks, when leaving pets in the vehi-
the system preparation mode, and after ap- cle or when leaving the vehicle with the win- NOTE
proximately 20 seconds the system enters dows slightly open. l The function will be activated again if the
the system armed mode. following operation is performed.

NOTE NOTE NOTE

• If the doors and the tailgate are unlocked l If the bonnet is opened during the system l If the UNLOCK switch on the remote con-
using the keyless entry system or the key- preparation mode, the system preparation trol switch, or the driver’s or front passeng-
less operation function.
• If the ignition switch is turned to the
mode is suspended.
The system returns to the system preparation
er’s door lock/unlock switch is pressed and
no door or the tailgate is opened within 30
3
“ON” or “ACC” position or the operation mode when the bonnet is closed. seconds, the doors and the tailgate will auto-
mode is put in on or ACC. l If the battery terminals are disconnected matically relock. In this case as well, the
while the system is in the system preparation system preparation mode will go into effect.
mode, the memory will be erased. l The time between pressing the UNLOCK
Cancelling the system l It is possible to register up to 8 remote con- switch on the remote control switch, or the
The following methods can be used to cancel trol switches for the keyless entry system driver’s or front passenger’s door lock/
and 4 remote control switches for the key- unlock switch and automatic locking can be
the system when it is in the system prepara-
less operation system. adjusted. Consult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS
tion mode or the system armed mode. As long as they are registered, any of the re- Authorized Service Point.
l Pressing the UNLOCK switch on the remote control switches, other than the one On vehicles equipped with the Smartphone-
mote control switch. used to activate the system, can be used to link Display Audio (SDA) or the Smart-
l Turning the ignition switch to the “ON” cancel the system. phone-link Display Audio (SDA) navigation
position. (vehicles with keyless entry If you want to register additional remote system, screen operations can be used to
system) control switches, please contact a make the adjustment. Refer to the separate
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Serv- owner’s manual for details.
l Putting the operation mode in ON. (vehi- ice Point.
cles with keyless operation system)
l The activation distance for the keyless entry
l Opening any one of the doors or the tail- system is approximately 4 m. Alarm activation
gate, or inserting the key into the igni- If it is not possible to lock or unlock the ve- When the system is in the system armed
tion switch (vehicles with keyless entry hicle by pressing the switch at the correct
mode, the alarm will be activated as follows
system) when the system is in the system distance or the security alarm system cannot
be set or cancelled using the switch, the bat- if the vehicle is unlocked or if any of the
preparation mode.
tery may need to be replaced. doors, tailgate or bonnet is opened using a
l Holding the keyless operation key and method other than the keyless entry system or
Refer to “Procedure for replacing the remote
pressing the driver’s or front passenger’s
control switch battery” on page 3-07. the keyless operation function.
door lock/unlock switch, or the tailgate
1. The inside alarm will be activated for
open switch to unlock the doors and the
approximately 10 seconds. (except for
tailgate (vehicles with the keyless opera-
vehicles equipped with the interior alarm
tion system).
sensor)

Electric window control
NOTE Cancelling the alarm NOTE

l If the bonnet is opened during the system It is possible to halt the activation of an alarm l When the ignition switch is turned to the
armed mode, the vehicle outside alarm oper- using the following methods: “ON” position or the operation mode is put
3 ates immediately, without the vehicle inside l Pressing the LOCK or UNLOCK switch in ON, the buzzer sounds 4 times. This oper-
alarm operating. on the remote control switch. ation indicates that the alarm was activated
l The time for the vehicle inside alarm can be (After pressing the LOCK switch, the while the vehicle was parked.
adjusted. Please consult a MITSUBISHI Please check the inside of the vehicle to con-
vehicle will lock if all the doors and the
MOTORS Authorized Service Point. firm that nothing was stolen.
tailgate are closed, after which the sys-
l Even if the battery is disconnected, the alarm
tem preparation mode will once again go activation memory will not be erased.
2. The alarm will be activated for approxi- into effect.)
mately 30 seconds. l Turning the ignition switch to the “ON”
The turn-signal lamps will blink, and the position. (vehicles with keyless entry Electric window control
horn (the siren for vehicles equipped system)
with the interior alarm sensor) will l Putting the operation mode in ON. (vehi- The electric windows can only be operated
sound intermittently. cles with keyless operation system) with the ignition switch or the operation
l Holding the keyless operation key and mode in ON.
locking or unlocking the doors and the
tailgate using the keyless operation func-
Electric window control switch
tion (vehicles equipped with the keyless Each door window opens or closes while the
operation system). corresponding switch is operated.
NOTE Driver’s switch LHD Driver’s switch RHD
l Even if a door or the tailgate is closed while

the inside alarm is activating, this will not
cancel the alarm activation. (except for vehi-
cles equipped with the interior alarm sensor)
3. The alarm will resume if unlawful ac-

tions are taken again, even if the alarm
has stopped.

Electric window control
1- Driver’s door window NOTE NOTE
2- Front passenger’s door window
3- Rear left door window l If the switch is operated continuously, the l Repeated operation with the engine stopped
electric window protection function will ac- will run down the battery. Operate the win-
4- Rear right door window
5- Lock switch
tivate and the door window may not be
opened and closed automatically even if the
dow switches only while the engine is run-
ning.
3
switch is fully pressed down/pulled up. l The rear door windows only open halfway.
WARNING In such a case, pull up the door window
switch until the window has been fully
l Before operating the electric window con- closed. Lock switch
trol, make sure that nothing can get trap- You should now be able to operate the door When this switch is operated, the passenger’s
ped (head, hand, finger, etc.). window in the normal fashion.
switches cannot be used to open or close the
l Never leave the vehicle without removing
the key. door windows and the driver’s switch cannot
Passenger’s switches open or close any door windows other than
l Never leave a child (or other person who
might not be capable of safe operation of The passenger’s switches can be used to op- the driver’s door window.
the electric window control) in the vehicle erate the corresponding passenger’s door To unlock, push it once again.
alone.
windows.
Press the switch down for opening the win-
Driver’s switches dow, and pull up the switch for closing it.
The driver’s switches can be used to operate
all door windows. A window can be opened
or closed by operating the corresponding
switch.
Press the switch down to open the window,
and pull up the switch to close it.
If the switch is fully pressed down/pulled up,
the door window automatically opens/closes 1- Lock
completely. 2- Unlock
If you want to stop the window movement,
operate the switch lightly in the reverse direc-
tion.

Sunroof*
WARNING CAUTION NOTE

l A child may tamper with the switch at the l The safety mechanism is cancelled just be- release the switch, raise the switch once
risk of its hands or head being trapped in fore the window is fully closed. This allows again and hold it in this condition for at least
3 the window. When driving with a child in
the vehicle, please press the window lock
the window to close completely. Therefore
be especially careful that no fingers are trap-
1 second, then release it. You should now be
able to operate the door window in the nor-
switch to disable the passenger’s switches. ped in the window. mal fashion.
l The safety mechanism is deactivated while
the switch is pulled up. Therefore be espe-
Timer function cially careful that fingers are not trapped in Sunroof*
The door windows can be opened or closed the door window opening.
for 30 seconds after the engine is stopped. The sunroof can only be operated with the ig-
However, once the driver’s door or the front nition switch or the operation mode in ON.
NOTE
passenger’s door is opened, the windows can-
not be operated. l The safety mechanism can be activated if the
driving conditions or other circumstances
Safety mechanism cause the driver’s door window to be subjec-
ted to a physical shock similar to that caused
If a hand or head is trapped in the closing by a trapped hand or head.
window, it will lower automatically. l If the following operation is performed, the
Nonetheless, make sure that nobody puts safety mechanism will be cancelled and the
their head or hand out of the window when door window will not automatically open/
closing a window. close completely.
The lowered window will become operation- • When the battery terminals are disconnec-
ted.
al after a few seconds.
• When the fuse for electric window is re-
placed. 1- Open
WARNING • When the safety mechanism is activated 2- Tilt up
five or more times consecutively. 3- Close, Tilt down
l If the battery terminals are disconnected In such a case, the following procedure
or the fuse for electric window is replaced, should be implemented to rectify this situa-
the safety mechanism will be cancelled. tion. To open, press the switch (1).
If a hand or head got trapped, a serious If the window is open, repeatedly raise the To stop the moving sunroof, press switch (2)
injury could result. appropriate window switch until that win- or (3).
dow has been fully closed. Following this,

Sunroof*
NOTE The opened sunroof will become operational 4. The initialize is completed when the
after a few seconds. sunroof is stopped at tilt up position.
l The sunroof automatically stops just before
reaching the fully open position.
If the sunroof does not return to normal, con-
Press the switch again to fully open it.
CAUTION sult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized 3
Service Point.
To close, press the switch (3). l The safety mechanism is cancelled just be-
To stop the moving sunroof, press switch (1) fore the sunroof is fully closed. This allows
the sunroof to close completely.
Sunshade
or (2).
Therefore be especially careful that no fin-
gers are trapped in the sunroof.
Slide the sunshade manually to open and
To tilt up, press the switch (2). close it.
The rear of the sunroof will rise.
NOTE
To tilt down, press the switch (3).
l The safety mechanism can be activated if the
driving conditions or other circumstances
WARNING cause the sunroof to be subjected to a physi-
cal shock similar to that caused by a trapped
l Do not put head, hands or anything else hand or head.
out of the sunroof opening while driving
the vehicle.
l Never leave a child (or other person who If the safety mechanism should be activated 5
might not be capable of safe operation of or more times consecutively, normal closing
the sunroof switch) in the vehicle alone. of the sunroof will be aborted.
l Before operating the sunroof, make sure As an emergency measure, the sunroof can be
that nothing is capable of being trapped
closed bit by bit until the sunroof is com- CAUTION
(head, hand, finger, etc.).
pletely closed by repeatedly pressing switch l Be careful that hands are not trapped when
(2). closing the sunshade.
Safety mechanism After that, the sunroof can be set the initial-
ized state in the following procedure.
If a hand or head is trapped in the closing
1. Move the sunroof in slide open position. NOTE
sunroof, it will reopen automatically.
2. Press the tilt up switch (2) continually in l Be sure to tilt down the sunroof before clos-
Nonetheless, make sure that nobody puts
10 seconds. ing the sunshade.
their head or hand out of the sunroof when
3. The sunroof will be moved to tilt up po-
opening or closing.
sition automatically bit by bit.
Sunroof*
NOTE NOTE
l The sunshade cannot be closed with the sun- l Be careful, not to put any wax on the weath-
roof opened. erstrip (black rubber) around the sunroof
3 l The sunroof stops just before reaching the
fully open position.
opening. If stained with wax, the weather-
strip cannot maintain a weatherproof seal
If the vehicle is driven with the sunroof in with the sunroof.
this position, wind throb is lower than with l After washing the vehicle or after it has
the sunroof fully open. rained, wipe off any water that is on the sun-
l If you are going to leave the vehicle unatten- roof before operating it.
ded, always close the sunroof and take the l Operating the sunroof repeatedly with the
key with you. engine stationary will run down the battery.
l Do not try to operate the sunroof if it is fro- Operate the sunroof while the engine is run-
zen closed (after snow fall or during extreme ning.
cold).
l Do not sit or place heavy luggage on the
sunroof or roof opening edge.
l Release the switch as soon as the sunroof
reaches the fully open or fully closed posi-
tion.
l If the sunroof does not operate when the
sunroof switch is operated, release the
switch and check whether something is trap-
ped by the sunroof. If nothing is trapped, we
recommend you to have the sunroof
checked.
l Depending on the model of ski carriers or
roof carriers, the sunroof may contact with
the carrier when the sunroof is tilted up. Be
careful when tilting up the sunroof if such a
ski carrier or a roof carrier is installed.
l Be sure to close the sunroof completely
when washing the vehicle or when leaving
the vehicle.

Seats and seat belts
Seat arrangement.................................................................................4-02 4
Seat adjustment................................................................................... 4-03
Front seats........................................................................................... 4-03
Second seats*...................................................................................... 4-05
Third seats (7 persons)........................................................................ 4-06
Head restraints.....................................................................................4-06
Making a luggage area........................................................................ 4-08
Making a flat seat................................................................................4-10
Seat belts............................................................................................. 4-11
Pregnant women restraint....................................................................4-17
Seat belt pretensioner system and force limiter system...................... 4-17
Child restraint......................................................................................4-18
Seat belt inspection............................................................................. 4-27
Supplemental restraint system (SRS) - airbag.................................... 4-27
OGFE20E1
Seat arrangement
Seat arrangement
By operating the front, second or third seat, select the desired seat arrangement.
5 persons 7 persons
4
Normal usage
Flat seat ® p. 4-10
Folding the second seats

® p. 4-08
Making a luggage area
Folding the third seats (7 per-

-
sons) ® p. 4-10
4-02 Seats and seat belts OGFE20E1

Seat adjustment
Seat adjustment WARNING Front seats

l Do not place objects under the seats. This
Adjust the driver’s seat so that you are com- could prevent the seat from locking se-
fortable and that you can reach the pedals, curely, and it could lead to an accident. Manual type
steering wheel, switches etc. while retaining It may also cause damage to the seat or
a clear field of vision. other parts.
4
WARNING CAUTION
l Do not attempt to adjust the seat while l Make sure the seat is adjusted by an adult or
driving. This can cause loss of vehicle con- with adult supervision for correct and safe
trol and result in an accident. After ad- operation.
justments are made, ensure the seating is l Do not place a cushion or the like between
locked in position by attempting to move your back and the seatback while driving.
the seat forward and rearward without The effectiveness of the head restraints will
using the adjusting mechanism. be reduced in the event of an accident.
l Do not allow people or children to ride in l The reclining mechanism of the front seat’s
any area of your vehicle that is not equip- seatback is spring loaded, causing it to return
ped with seats and seat belts, and make to the vertical position when the lock lever is
sure that everyone travelling in your vehi- operated. When using the lever, sit close to
cle is in a seat and wearing a seat belt, or the seatback or hold it with your hand to
in the case of a child is strapped in a child control its return motion.
restraint. l When sliding the seats, be careful not to
l To minimize the risk of personal injury in catch your hand or foot.
the event of a collision or sudden braking, l When adjusting the front seat while the sec-
the seatbacks should always be in the al- ond seat is folded, be careful not to apply
most upright position while the vehicle is strong force to the flipped second seat cush-
in motion. The protection provided by the ion.
seat belts may be reduced significantly Doing so could cause damage to the cover of
when the seatback is reclined. There is the front seat and the fitting of the second
greater risk that the passenger will slide seat cushion. 1- To adjust forward or backward
under the seat belt, resulting in serious in- Lift the handle and adjust the seat to the
jury, when the seatback is reclined. desired position, and release the handle.
OGFE20E1 Seats and seat belts 4-03

Front seats
2- To recline the seatback Power type* 3- To adjust seat height
Pull the lever up and then lean backward Operate the switch as indicated by the
to the desired position, and release the arrows and adjust the seat height to the
lever. desired position.
3- To adjust seat height (driver’s side only) If the entire switch is operated, then the
Repeatedly operate the lever and adjust entire seat moves.
4 the seat height to the desired position. 4- To adjust the lumbar support (driver’s
4- To adjust lumbar support (driver’s side side only)
only)* Operate the switch as indicated by the
Operate the switch as indicated by the arrows and adjust the lumbar support to
arrows and adjust the lumbar support to the desired position.
the desired position.
Heated seats*
The heated seats can be operated with the ig-
nition switch or the operation mode in ON.
Operate the switch as indicated by arrows.
The indication lamp (A) will illuminate while
the heater is on.
Type 1
1- To adjust forward or backward

Operate the switch as indicated by the
arrows and adjust the seat to the desired
position.
2- To recline the seatback
Operate the switch as indicated by the
arrows and adjust the seatback angle to
the desired position.

Second seats*
Type 2 CAUTION Second seats*
• Children, elderly or ill people
• People with sensitive skin
• Excessively tired people
• People under the influence of alcohol or
sleep inducing medication (cold medicine, 4
etc.)
l Do not place heavy objects on the seat or
stick pins, needles, or other pointed objects
into it.
l Do not use a blanket, cushion, or other mate-
rial with high heat insulation properties on
1 (HI) - Heater high (for quick heating). the seat while using the heater; this might 1- To adjust forward or backward (vehicles
2 (neu- - Heater off. cause the heater element to overheat
with second seat slide function)
tral po- l Do not use benzine, kerosene, petrol, alcohol
Lift the handle and adjust the seat to the
or other organic solvents when cleaning the
sition) seats. Doing so could damage not only the desired position, and release the handle.
3 (LO) - Heater low (to keep the seat seat cover, but also the heater element. 2- To recline the seatback
warm). l If water or any other liquid is spilled on the Pull the lever up and adjust the seatback
seat, allow it to dry thoroughly before at- by hand to the desired position, and re-
tempting to use the heater. lease the lever.
CAUTION l Turn the heater off immediately if it appears
to be malfunctioning during use.
l Operate in the high position for quick heat- Armrest
ing. Once the seat is warm, set the heater to
To use the armrest, fold it down.
low to keep it warm. Slight variations in seat
temperature may be felt while using the
heated seats. This is caused by the operation
of the heater’s internal thermostat and does
not indicate a malfunction.
l If the following types of persons use the
heated seats, they might become too hot or
receive minor burns (red skin, heat blisters,
etc.):

Third seats (7 persons)
To return to the original position, push it After returning the seat, gently try to move it Third seats (7 persons)
backward level with the seat. forward and backward to check that it is se-
curely retained and adjust seatback to the
normal seating position.
To recline the seatback

NOTE Pull up the strap and adjust the seatback by
hand to the desired position, and release the
l Do not climb or sit on the armrest.
Doing so could damage the armrest. WARNING strap.
l The top surface of the armrest contains a cup
l Do not drive the vehicle with the seatback
holder for second seat occupants. folded forward. The seat is not retained Head restraints
Refer to “Cup holder” on page 7-80. with the seatback in this position, so seri-
ous injuries could be suffered in the event
of hard braking or a collision.
WARNING
To get in and out of the third
l Driving without the head restraints in
seat place can cause you and your passengers
(walk-in function, 7 persons) serious injury or death in an accident. To
reduce the risk of injury in an accident,
The lever can be used to make getting in and always make sure the head restraints are
out easier. Pull up the lever (A), tilt the seat- installed and properly positioned when
back forward. Then slide the entire seat for- the seat is occupied.
ward. l Never place a cushion or similar device on
To return the seat, slide the entire seat back- the seatback. This can adversely affect
ward to the desired position and then raise head restraint performance by increasing
the distance between your head and the
the seatback until it locks securely.
restraint.

Head restraints
WARNING To raise the head restraint, move it upward. To install

To lower the restraint, move it downward
l When a person sits in the second or the while pushing the height adjusting knob (A) Confirm that the head restraint is facing the
third seats, pull up the head restraint to a
in the direction of the arrow. After adjust- correct direction, and then insert it into the
height at which it locks in position. Be
sure to make this adjustment before start- ment, push the head restraint downward and seatback while pressing the height adjusting
make sure that it is locked. knob (A) in the direction indicated by the ar-
ing to drive. Serious injuries could other-
wise be suffered as the result of an impact. row. 4
The head restraint stalk with the adjustment
notches (B) must be installed in the hole with
the adjusting knob (A).
CAUTION
l Confirm that the height adjusting knob (A)
is correctly adjusted as shown in the illustra-
tion, and also lift the head restraints to en-
sure that they do not come out of the seat-
back.
To remove
To adjust height Lift the head restraint with the height adjust-
Adjust the head restraint height so that the ing knob (A) pushed in.
centre of the head restraint is as close as pos-
sible to ear level to reduce the chances of in-
jury in the event of collision. Any person too
tall for the head restraint to reach their seated
ear level, should adjust the restraint as high
as possible.

CAUTION CAUTION NOTE

l The shape and size of the head restraint dif- l Do not stack luggage above the seatback l If you do not move the second seat fully
fers according to the seat. Always use the height. Secure the luggage firmly. backward, you may not be able to fold the
correct head restraint provided for the seat Serious accidents could result due to unre- second seat.
and do not install the head restraint in the strained objects entering the passenger com-
4 wrong direction.
l
partment during sudden braking.
When folding or storing the seat, be sure not 4. Lift the front end of the seat cushion.
to catch your hand or leg.
NOTE
l It is possible to folding the seat independent-
ly on each side.
Folding the second seats

To fold
1. Lower the head restraints of the second
Making a luggage area seat to the lowest position.
5. Flip the seat cushion forward. On vehi-
cles with the third seats, move the lever
Refer to “Head restraints” on page 4-06.
To create luggage space, you can fold the (A) to the luggage area mode position.
2. Store the seat belt for the second centre
second and/or the third seats.
seating position.
Refer to “Second-centre 3-point type
WARNING seat belt” on page 4-15.
3. On vehicles with second seat slide func-
l When driving the vehicle, do not allow
anyone to sit on the third seat if the section, move the second seat fully back-
ond seat is in the foldeddown position. ward.
Refer to “Second seats*” on page 4-05.

6. Fold the seat belt buckles forward. CAUTION 3. While lifting the seat belt’s buckle (A),
gently lower the seat cushion. Make sure
l Do not allow any person to sit on the flipped that there is a hook (B) at the position
seat cushion, and do not place luggage on it.
shown in the illustration.
The seat’s mounting fittings could bend un-
der the weight, making it impossible for the
seat to be retained on the vehicle.
4
NOTE
l When folding the second seatback forward
once, the seat automatically switch from the
luggage area mode to the walk-in mode.
CAUTION To return
l Do not allow any person to get on the plastic 1. Raise the seatback until it locks securely
cover (B), and do not place luggage on it. into place.
Doing so could damage cover.
2. On vehicles with the third seats, make
sure that the lever is at the walk-in mode
7. Pull up the lever (C), then fold the seat- position.
back forward. Otherwise, move the lever to the walk-in
mode position. 4. Push down the seat cushion until it locks
into place.

Making a flat seat
5. Make sure the seat belt’s buckle is on the Push lightly on the seatback to confirm CAUTION
seat cushion. that it has actually been secured.
l Do not walk around on top of the seats after
they have been laid flat.
Folding the third seats (7 per- l To ensure the seats are locked securely, at-
sons) tempt to move them back and forth.
4 l Do not jump on, or impact the seatbacks
heavily.
To fold l To raise the seatback, put a hand on the seat-
1. Lower the head restraints of the third back and raise slowly. Never have a child do
this operation, or an unexpected accident
seat to the lowest position. (Refer to
may result.
“Head restraints” on page 4-06.)
2. Pull up the strap (A), then fold the seat-
back forward. 1. Remove the head restraints from the
front seats, raise the armrest and remove
Making a flat seat the cargo area cover (if so equipped).
(Refer to “Head restraints” on page 4-06,
By removing the head restraints and fully re- “Armrest” on page 4-05 and “Cargo area
clining the seatbacks of the seats, one large cover” on page 7-82)
flat seat is achieved.
WARNING
l Never drive with passengers on the flat
seat. This is highly dangerous.
To return
CAUTION
1. Pull the strap (A), then raise the seatback
until it locks securely into place. l To make a flat seat, stop the vehicle in a safe
place.
l Make sure the seat is adjusted by an adult or
with adult supervision for correct and safe 2. Slide the second seats fully backward
operation.
(vehicles with second seat slide func-
tion).

Seat belts
(Refer to “Second seats*” on page 4-05) (Refer to “Second seats*” on page 4-05) Seat belts
To protect you and your passengers in the
event of an accident, it is most important that
the seat belts are worn correctly while driv-
ing. 4
The front seat belts have a pretensioner sys-
tem. These belts are used the same way as a
conventional seat belt.
Refer to “Seat belt pretensioner system and
force limiter system” on page 4-17.
3. Slide the front seats fully forward, then 5. The flat seat configuration is now com- WARNING
recline the seatbacks backwards to ach- plete. Reverse the above procedures
ieve a flat surface. when returning the seat to the normal
l Seat belts should always be worn by every
adult who drives or rides in this vehicle,
(Refer to “Front seats” on page 4-03) position. and by all children who are tall enough to
wear seat belts properly.
Other children should always use proper
child restraint systems.
l Always place the shoulder belt over your
shoulder and across your chest. Never put
it behind you or under your arm.
l One seat belt should be used by only one
person. Doing otherwise can be danger-
ous.
4. Recline the second seatbacks backwards.

Seat belts
WARNING NOTE
l The seat belt will provide its wearer with l You can check if the belt locks by pulling it
maximum protection if the recliner seat- forward quickly.
back is placed in fully upright position. l If the seat belt buckles in the second seating
When the seatback is reclined, there is position are not found, you will find them
4 greater risk that the passenger will slide
under the belt, especially in a forward im-
under the second seat cushion.
Refer to “Folding the second seats” on page
pact accident, and may be injured by the 4-08 for putting the seat belt buckles at the
belt or by striking the instrument panel or proper position.
seatbacks.
l Remove any twists when using the belt. To fasten
l No modifications or additions should be
1. Pull the seat belt out slowly while hold-
WARNING
made by the user which will either pre-
vent the seat belt adjusting devices from ing the latch plate. l Never wear the lap portion of the belt
operating to remove slack, or prevent the across your abdomen. During accidents it
seat belt assembly from being adjusted to can press sharply against the abdomen
remove slack. NOTE and increase the risk of injury.
l Never hold a child in your arms or on l When the seat belts cannot be pulled out in a l The seat belts must not be twisted when
your lap when riding in this vehicle, even locked condition, pull the belts once force- worn.
if you are wearing your seat belt. To do so fully and then return them. After that, pull
risks severe or fatal injury to the child in the belts out slowly once again. 3. Pull the belt slightly to adjust slackness
a collision or sudden stop.
as desired.
l Always adjust the belt to a snug fit.
2. Insert the latch plate into the buckle until
l Always wear the lap portion of the belt
over your hips. a “click” is heard.
3-point type seat belt (with

emergency locking mechanism)
This type of belt requires no length adjust-
ment. Once worn, the belt adjusts itself to the
movement of the wearer, but in the event of a
sudden or strong shock, the belt automatical-
ly locks to hold the wearer’s body.

Seat belts
To unfasten NOTE [For the front passenger]
Hold the latch plate and push the button on l If the seat belt (A) or ring (B) becomes dirty,
the buckle. the belt may not retract smoothly. If the seat Type A
belt and ring are dirty, clean them with a
mild soap or detergent solution.
4
Type B
NOTE Seat belt reminder

l As the belt retracts automatically, keep hold- *- This warning lamp shows the
ing the latch plate while retracting so that the
belt stows slowly. Failure to do this could
For the driver and the front case of the left-hand drive vehi-
damage the vehicle.
passenger’s seat cles.
[For the driver] Type A: Except for Russia, Kazakhstan,
Belarus, Ukraine and Moldova
Type 1 Type B: For Russia, Kazakhstan, Belarus,
Ukraine and Moldova
If the ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
position or the operation mode is put in ON
Type 2
while a seat belt is not fastened, the warning
lamp comes on and the tone sounds for about
6 seconds to remind the driver and the front
passenger to fasten the seat belt.

Seat belts
If the vehicle is driven with the seat belt still For the rear passenger’s seats* WARNING
unfastened, the warning lamp will blink and
the tone will sound intermittently until the l Do not install any accessory or sticker
that makes the lamp difficult to see.
seat belt is fastened. At the same time, “FAS-
TEN SEAT BELT” is displayed on the infor-
4
mation screen in the multi information dis- NOTE
play for the driver (Type 1 only).
l The warning lamp comes on even if no one
is sitting on the rear seats.
WARNING l If a seat belt is unfastened while the vehicle
is being driven, the tone sounds for approxi-
l Do not install any accessory or sticker mately 1 second and the warning lamp
that makes the lamp difficult to see. comes on for approximately 30 seconds. At
the same time, the warning lamp for the seat
where the seat belt is not fastened comes on.
NOTE l If the seat belts are initially fastened but a
*- This warning lamp shows the case of
l If the seat belt subsequently remains unfas- seat belt is unfastened while the vehicle is
the 7-passenger vehicles. stationary and the vehicle is then driven with
tened, the warning lamp and the tone will is-
sue further warnings each time the vehicle If the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” the seat belt still unfastened, the warning
starts moving from a stop. lamp comes on again for approximately 30
position or the operation mode is put in ON
l For the front passenger seat, the warning seconds.
while a seat belt is not fastened, the warning
function works only while a person is sitting
on the seat.
lamp comes on for approximately 30 seconds
l When luggage is placed on the front passen- to remind the rear passenger to fasten the seat Adjustable seat belt anchor
ger seat, a sensor in the seat cushion may, belt. (front seats)
depending on the weight and position of the If the vehicle is driven with the seat belt still
luggage, cause the warning tone to sound
The seat belt anchor height can be adjusted.
unfastened, the warning lamps come on for
and the warning lamp to come on. approximately another 30 seconds. (This illu-
mination happens only the first time the vehi-
cle starts moving with the seat belt still un-
fastened.)
The warning lamps go off when the seat belt
is fastened.

Seat belts
Move the seat belt anchor down with the lock Second-centre 3-point type seat To fasten
knob (A) depressed. To move the anchor up, belt 1. Pull out the buckle (C) from the seat-
slide it without depressing the lock knob (A).
The second-centre 3-point type seat belt must back.
be worn correctly as illustrated. 2. Pull out the small latch plate (A) and
Anchor down Anchor up
then pull out the latch plate (B) by tilting
it as shown in the illustration. 4
AA0111461
WARNING
l When adjusting the seat belt anchor, set it WARNING
at a position that is sufficiently high so l Be sure to securely connect the both latch
that the belt will make full contact with
your shoulder but will not touch your
plate (A and B). Failing to do so could sig- NOTE
nificantly reduce the amount of protection
neck. and cause serious injures in a collision or l Pulling out the latch plate by force may
a sudden stop. damage the headliner.
3. Pull the seat belt and insert the small

NOTE latch plate (A) into the buckle (C).
l If the seat belt buckles in the second seating
position are not found, you will find them
under the second seat cushion.
Refer to “Folding the second seats” on page
4-08 for putting the seat belt buckles at the
proper position.

Seat belts
4. Insert the latch plate (B) into the buckle Second and third seat belt stor-
(D). age
When the seat belt is not in use, store it as
shown in the illustration.
2. After the seat belt is retracted complete-

ly, insert the latch plate (B) into the up-
per slit (F), and then insert the small
5. Pull the belt slightly to adjust slackness latch plate (A) into the lower slit (G).
as desired.
Seat belt plate storage
To unfasten
1. Hold the latch plate and push the button Outboard seating position
on the buckle. After passing the belt through the rear notch
(A), insert the plate into the front notch (B).
NOTE
l As the belt retracts automatically, keep hold-
ing the latch plate while retracting so that the
AA0111487
belt stows slowly. Failure to do this could
damage the vehicle.
l To release the buckle (C), press the button 3. Store the seat belt buckle in the storage
(E) with a narrow-tipped object (latch plate pocket.
or mechanical key etc.). (Refer to next column.)
AA0064860

Pregnant women restraint
Pregnant women restraint Pretensioner system CAUTION

When the ignition switch or the operation l Installation of audio equipment or repairs in
WARNING mode is under the following conditions, if the vicinity of the pretensioner seat belts or
there is a frontal impact or a side impact (ve- floor console must be performed in line with
l Seat belts work for everyone, including
hicles equipped with SRS side airbags and MITSUBISHI MOTORS guidelines. It is
pregnant women. Pregnant women should
use the available seat belts. This will re- SRS curtain airbags) severe enough to injure important to do so because the work could
affect the pretensioner systems.
4
duce the likelihood of injury to both the the driver and/or front passenger, the preten-
woman and the unborn child. The lap belt sioner system will retract their respective seat l If you need to scrap the vehicle, please con-
sult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized
should be worn across the thighs and as belts instantaneously, thus maximizing the Service Point.
snug against the hips as possible, but not seat belt’s effectiveness. It is important to do so because unexpected
across the waist. Consult your doctor if [Except vehicles equipped with keyless oper- activation of the pretensioner seat belts
you have any additional questions or con- could cause injuries.
ation system]
cerns.
The ignition switch is in the “ON” or
“START” position.
NOTE
Seat belt pretensioner [Vehicles equipped with keyless operation
system] l The pretensioner seat belts will be activated
system and force limiter The operation mode is in ON. if the vehicle suffers a severe impact, even if
system On vehicles equipped with the ERA-GLO- the seat belts are not worn.
NASS, the pre-tensioner system will operate l The pretensioner seat belts are designed to
work only once. After the pretensioner seat
The driver’s seat and front passenger’s seat even when a rollover or overturning of the belts have been activated, we recommend
each have a seat belt equipped with a preten- vehicle is detected. you have it replaced by a MITSUBISHI
sioner system and force limiter system. MOTORS Authorized Service Point.
WARNING
l To obtain the best results from your pre- SRS warning
tensioner seat belt, make sure you have The same warning lamp/display is shared by
adjusted your seat correctly and wear the SRS airbags and the pretensioner seat
your seat belt properly.
belts.
Refer to “SRS warning lamp/display” on
page 4-38.

Child restraint
Force limiter system WARNING WARNING

In the event of a collision, each force limiter l When attaching a child restraint system l Extreme Hazard!
system will effectively absorb the load ap- to the rear seat, prevent the front seat- NEVER use a rearward facing child re-
plied to the seat belt to minimize the impact backs from touching the child restraint straint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE
to the passenger. system. AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH or SERI-
4 Otherwise, the child could be seriously in-
jured in the event of hard braking or a
OUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur.
Child restraint collision.
Use rearward facing child restraints in the
When transporting children in your vehicle, rear seat or turn off the front passenger’s air-
some type of child restraint system should al-
Caution for installing the child bag ON-OFF switch. (Refer to “To turn an
ways be used according to the size of the restraint on vehicles with front airbag off” on page 4-31)
child. This is required by law in most coun- passenger’s airbag
tries.
The regulations concerning driving with chil- The label shown here is attached on vehicles Front passenger's
dren in the front seat may differ from country with a front passenger’s airbag. airbag ON
to country. You are advised to comply with
the relevant regulations.
WARNING
l When possible, put children in the rear
seat. Accident statistics indicate that chil-
dren of all sizes and ages are safer when
properly restrained in the rear seat rather
than in the front seat.
l Holding a child in your arms is no substi-
tute for a restraint system. Failure to use
a proper restraint system can result in se-
vere or fatal injury to the child.
l Each child restraint device or fixing is to
be used only by one child.

Child restraint
WARNING Instruction: WARNING

lA REARWARD FACING CHILD RE- l For small infants, an infant carrier l When installing a child restraint system,
STRAINT must NOT be used in the front should be used. For small children refer to the instructions provided by the
passenger seat if the front passenger’s air- whose height when seated allows the manufacturer of the restraint system.
bag has not been deactivated. The force of shoulder belt to lie in contact with the Failure to do so can result in severe or fa-
an inflating airbag could kill or cause se-
rious injuries to the child. A rearward
face or the throat, a child seat should be
l
tal injury to the child.
After installation, push and pull the child
4
facing child restraint should be used in
used. restraint system back and forth, and side
the rear seat. l The child restraint system should be ap- to side, to see that it is properly secured. If
l A FORWARD FACING CHILD RE- propriate for the child’s weight and the child restraint system is not installed
STRAINT should be used in the rear seat height and properly fit in the vehicle. securely, it may cause injury to the child
whenever possible; if it must be used in For a higher degree of safety: THE or other occupants in the case of accident
the front passenger seat, turn off the front CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM or sudden stops.
passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch. SHOULD BE INSTALLED IN THE l When the child restraint system is not in
Failure to do so could kill or cause serious use, keep your child restraint system se-
REAR SEAT.
injuries to the child. cured with the seat belt or remove it from
l Before purchasing a child restraint sys- the vehicle in order to prevent it from be-
tem, try installing it in the rear seat to ing thrown around inside the vehicle dur-
Infants and small children make sure there is a good fit. Because of ing an accident.
When transporting infants and small children the location of the seat belt buckles and
in your vehicle, follow the instruction given the shape of the seat cushion, it may be
below. difficult to securely install some manu- NOTE
facturer’s child restraint systems. l Depending on the seating position in the ve-
If the child restraint system can be hicle and the child restraint system that you
pulled forward or to either side easily on have, the child restraint can be attached us-
the seat cushion after the seat belt has ing one of the following two locations:
been tightened, choose another manufac- • Using the lower anchorage in the rear seat
ONLY if the child restraint has ISOFIX
turer’s child restraint system. mountings (See page 4-25).
• Using the seat belt (See page 4-26).

Child restraint
Older children
Children who have outgrown the child re-
straint system should be seated in the rear
seat and wear combination lap shoulder belt.
The lap portion of the belt should be snug
4 and positioned low on the abdomen so that it
is below the top of the hip-bone. Otherwise,
the belt could intrude into the child’s abdo-
men during an accident and cause injury.

Child restraint
Suitability for various ISOFIX positions

Vehicle ISOFIX positions
Mass group Size class Fixture
Second outboard
Carrycot F ISO/L1 X
4
G ISO/L2 X
0 - Up to 10 kg E ISO/R1 IL
0+ - Up to 13 kg E ISO/R1 IL
－ ISO/R2X IL
D ISO/R2 IL, IL#*1
C ISO/R3 IL
I - 9 to 18 kg － ISO/R2X IL
D ISO/R2 IL
C ISO/R3 IL
B ISO/F2 IUF
B1 ISO/F2X IUF, IL#*2
A ISO/F3 IUF
II - 15 to 25 kg －－ IL#*3
III -22 to 36 kg －－ IL#*3

Child restraint
CAUTION
l When installing a child restraint system, remove the head restraint from the seat.
l When installing a child restraint system, adjust the second seat to rearmost position for the seat with slide if applicable, the second seatback angle to 4 steps
forward from most reclined position.
l Do not sit in the middle seating position of the second seats when installing a child restraint system to the left outboard seating position of the second seats.
4 Because the child restraint interferes with the seat belt, you cannot fasten the seat belt correctly.
l The child restraint system that’s a MITSUBISHI MOTORS GENUINE part for the mass group “0+ up to 13 kg” is designed for children 40 to 83 cm in
height.
Definition of characters in the table above:

l IUF- Suitable for ISOFIX forward child restraint systems of universal category approved for use in the mass group.
l IL- Suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems of semi-universal category approved for use in the mass group.
l IL#- Suitable for particular ISOFIX child restraint systems given in the following list (MITSUBISHI MOTORS GENUINE parts).
l X- ISOFIX position not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems in this mass group.
Genuine part No. UN-R44 Approval No. UN-R219 Approval No.

MZ315055 (Child restraint system),
*1 — E1-000008
MZ315056 (ISOFIX base)
*2 MZ313045 E1-04301133 —
*3 MZ315025 E1-04301304 —
NOTE
l MITSUBISHI MOTORS Europe B.V. reserves the right to changes without any prior announcement.
For further information, please contact a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point.

Child restraint
Suitability for various seating positions

Seating position
Front passenger
Mass group
Deactivated Air- Second outboard Second centre Third
Activated airbag
bag*1
4
0 - Up to 10 kg X X U X X
0+ - Up to 13 kg X L#*3 U, L#*3 X L#*3
I -9 to 18 kg X L#*4 U, L#*4 X X
II -15 to 25 kg X L#*5 U*2, L#*5 X X
III -22 to 36 kg X L#*5 U*2, L#*5 X X
*1: With front passenger’s airbag deactivated by means of front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch.
*2: Do not remove the head restraint when installing a booster cushion.
CAUTION
l When installing a child restraint system, remove the head restraint from the seat. However, do not remove the head restraint when installing a booster cush-
ion (see 4-26).
l Do not sit in the middle seating position of the second seats when installing a child restraint system to the left outboard seating position of the second seats.
Because the child restraint interferes with the seat belt, you cannot fasten the seat belt correctly.
l The child restraint system that’s a MITSUBISHI MOTORS GENUINE part for the mass group “0+ up to 13 kg” is designed for children 40 to 83 cm in
height.
Definition of characters the above table:

l U- Suitable for “universal” category restraints approved for use in this mass group.
l L#- Suitable for particular child restraint systems given in the following list (MITSUBISHI MOTORS GENUINE parts.).
l X- Seat position not suitable for children in this mass group.

Child restraint
Genuine parts No. UN-R44 Approval No. UN-R219 Approval No.

*3 MZ315055 — E1-000008
*4 MZ313045 E1-04301133 —
*5 MZ315025 E1-04301304 —
4
NOTE
l There is no applicable MITSUBISHI MOTORS GENUINE Parts to the Mass Group “0-Up to 10 kg”.
l MITSUBISHI MOTORS Europe B.V. reserves the right to changes without any prior announcement.
For detailed information, consult your MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point.

Child restraint
Installing a child restraint sys- Tether anchorage location Child restraint system with
tem to the lower anchorage There are 2 child restraint anchorage points
ISOFIX mountings
(ISOFIX child restraint mount- located on the back of the second seatbacks. The child restraint system is designed only
ings) and tether anchorage* These are for securing a child restraint sys- for seats that incorporate lower anchorages.
tem tether strap to each of the 2 rear seating Retain the child restraint system using the
Lower anchorage location positions in your vehicle. lower anchorages. 4
It is not necessary to retain the child restraint
Your vehicle’s second seat is fitted with low- system using the vehicle’s seat belts.
er anchorages for attaching a child restraint
system with ISOFIX mountings.
WARNING
A- Child restraint system connectors
AA0111504
l Child restraint anchorages are designed
to withstand only those loads imposed by To install
correctly fitted child restraints. Under no
circumstances are they to be used for 1. Remove any foreign material in or
adult seat belts, harnesses, or for attach- around the connectors and ensure the ve-
ing other items or equipment to the vehi- hicle seat belt is in its normal storage po-
cle. sition.
2. Remove the head restraint from the loca-
tion in which you wish to install a child
restraint.

Child restraint
3. Open the gap a little between the seat 5. Latch the tether strap hook (E) of the Installing a child restraint sys-
cushion (A) and the seatback (B) with child restraint system to the tether an- tem to a 3-point type seat belt
your hand to locate the lower anchorages chorage bar (F) and tighten the top tether
(C). strap hook so it is securely fastened. (with emergency locking mech-
4. For easier access, the seatback may be anism)
recline rearward. Push the child restraint
4 system’s connectors (D) into the lower Installation:
anchorages (C) in accordance with the
1. Put a child restraint system on the seat in
instructions provided by the child re-
which you wish to install it, and remove
straint system’s manufacturer.
the head restraint from the seat.
After it is security fastened, adjust the
seatback to 4 steps forward from most
reclined position.
CAUTION
l Do not remove the head restraint when in-
stalling a booster cushion.
NOTE
l If it is difficult to latch the tether strap hook,
turn the hook sideways.
6. Push and pull the child restraint system

in all directions to be sure it is secure.
A- Vehicle seat cushion To remove

B- Vehicle seatback Remove the child restraint system in accord-
C- Lower anchorage ance with the instructions provided by the
D- Connector child restraint system’s manufacturer. 2. Route the belt through the child restraint
according to the child restraint system
If your child restraint system requires manufacturer’s instructions, then insert
the use of a tether strap, fasten the tether the latch plate into the buckle.
strap in accordance with step 5.

Seat belt inspection
3. Remove all slack of a lap belt by pulling Seat belt inspection WARNING
the webbing through the belt’s adjust-
ment feature. be able to provide adequate protection in
Check the belts for cuts, worn or frayed web- a collision or other situation.
3-point type seat belt requires no length bing and for cracked or deformed metallic
adjustment, remove all slack by using parts. Replace the belt assembly if it is defec-
the locking clip.
4. Before putting the child in the restraint,
tive. 4
push and pull the restraint in all direc-
tions to be sure it is secure. Do this be- WARNING
fore each use. l We recommend you to have all seat belt
assemblies including retractors and at-
taching hardware inspected after any col-
WARNING lision. We recommend that seat belt as-
l For some types of child restraint, the lock- semblies in use during a collision be re-
ing clip (A) should be used to help avoid placed unless the collision was minor and
personal injury during a collision or sud- the belts show no damage and continue to
den manoeuvre. operate properly. lA dirty belt should be cleaned with neu-
It must be fitted and used in accordance l Do not attempt to repair or replace any tral detergent in warm water. After rins-
with the child restraint manufacturer’s part of the seat belt assemblies; we recom- ing in water, let it dry in the shade. Do not
instructions. mend you to have this work done by a attempt to bleach or re-dye the belts be-
The locking clip must be removed when MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized cause this will affect their characteristics.
the child restraint is removed. Service Point. Incorrect repair or replace-
ment could reduce the effectiveness of the
belts and could result in serious injury in Supplemental restraint
the event of a collision.
l Once the pretensioner has been activated, system (SRS) - airbag
it cannot be re-used.
It must be replaced together with the re- The information for SRS airbags includes im-
tractor. portant information concerning the driver’s
l Do not insert any foreign objects (pieces and front passenger’s airbags, the driver’s
of plastic, paper clips, buttons, etc.) in the knee airbag, the side airbags and the curtain
buckle or retractor mechanism. In addi- airbags.
tion, do not modify, remove or install the
seat belt. Otherwise, the seat belt may not

Supplemental restraint system (SRS) - airbag
The SRS driver’s and front passenger’s air- On vehicles equipped with the ERA-GLO-
bags are designed to supplement the primary NASS, the SRS curtain airbags will also de-
protection of the driver and front passenger ploy when a rollover of the vehicle is detec-
side seat belt systems by providing those oc- ted and the curtain airbags are also designed
cupants with protection against head and to help reduce the risk of complete and parti-
chest injuries in certain moderate-to-severe al ejection from the vehicle through side win-
4 frontal collisions. dows in both side impact and rollover type
accidents.
The SRS driver’s knee airbag (if so equip-
ped) is designed to supplement the primary The SRS is NOT a substitute for the seat
protection of the driver’s seat belt system. It belts. To ensure the maximum protection dur-
can reduce the forward movement of the ing all types of collisions and accidents, all 1- Airbag module (Driver)
driver’s lower legs and provide increased occupants, including the passengers as well 2- Front passenger’s airbag indicator
overall body protection in certain moderate- as the driver, must wear their seat belts. 3- Airbag module (Passenger)
to-severe frontal collisions. 4- Driver’s knee airbag module*
NOTE 5- Front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF
The SRS side airbags (if so equipped) are de- switch
signed to supplement properly worn seat l The ERA-GLONASS (if so equipped) is de-
signed to operate when any of the airbags
belts and provide the driver and front passen-
deploy.
ger with protection against chest injuries in Refer to “ERA-GLONASS” on page 8-02.
certain moderate-to-severe side impact colli-
sions.
How the Supplemental Re-
The SRS curtain airbags (if so equipped) are straint System works
designed to supplement properly worn seat The SRS includes the following components:
belts and provide the driver and passenger
with protection against head injuries in cer-
tain moderate-to-severe side impact colli-
sions. 6- Side airbag modules*
7- Curtain airbag modules*

Only when the ignition switch or the opera- CAUTION
tion mode is under the following conditions,
the airbags will operate. l Airbags inflate at an extremely rapid speed.
In certain situations, contact with inflating
[Except vehicles equipped with keyless oper-
airbags can result in abrasions, bruises, light
ation system] cuts, and the like.
The ignition switch is in the “ON” or
“START” position. 4
[Vehicles equipped with keyless operation WARNING
system]
l IT IS VERY IMPORTANT TO BE
The operation mode is in ON. PROPERLY SEATED.
On vehicles with the ERA-GLONASS, when A driver or front passenger too close to
the airbag control unit detects a rollover of the steering wheel or instrument panel WARNING
the vehicle, the curtain airbags will be de- during airbag deployment can be killed or
ployed. seriously injured. l Infants and small children should never
Airbags inflate very fast, and with great be unrestrained, stand up against the in-
The airbags deployment produces a sudden, strument panel or be held in your arms or
force.
loud noise, and releases some smoke and If the driver and front passenger are not on your lap. They could be seriously in-
powder, but these conditions are not injuri- properly seated and restrained, the air- jured or killed in a collision, including
ous, and do not indicate a fire in the vehicle. bags may not protect you properly, and when the airbag inflates. They should be
People with respiratory problems may feel could cause serious or fatal injuries when properly seated in the rear seat in an ap-
it inflates. propriate child restraint system. See the
some temporary irritation from chemicals “Child restraint” section of this owner’s
used to produce the deployment; open the l Do not sit on the edge of the seat, or sit
manual.
with your lower legs too close to the in-
windows after airbag deployment, if safe to
strument panel, or lean head or chest
do so. close to the steering wheel or instrument
The airbags deflate very rapidly after deploy- panel. Do not put feet or legs on or against
ment, so there is little danger of obscured vi- the instrument panel.
sion. l Place all infants and small children in the
rear seat and properly restrained using an
appropriate child restraint system.
The rear seat is the safest place for infants
and children.

WARNING Front passenger’s airbag ON- Front passenger’s airbag indi-

l Older children should be seated in the OFF switch cator
rear seat, properly wearing the seat belt, The front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch The front passenger’s airbag indicator is loca-
with an appropriate booster seat if nee- can be used to disable the front passenger’s ted in the instrument panel.
ded.
airbag. If you have a child restraint system
4 that cannot be fitted to any seat other than the Type A
Caution for installing the child front passenger seat, be sure to turn OFF the
restraint on vehicles with front front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch be-
fore using it.
passenger’s airbag (Refer to “To turn an airbag off” on page Type B
The label shown here is attached on vehicles 4-31)
with front passenger’s airbag. The front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch
is located as shown in the illustration.
Type A: Except for Russia, Kazakhstan,

Belarus, Ukraine and Moldova
Type B: For Russia, Kazakhstan, Belarus,
WARNING Ukraine and Moldova
l Extreme Hazard! The both indicator normally comes on when

NEVER use a rearward facing child re- the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” po-
straint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE sition or the operation mode is put in ON,
AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH or SERI- and goes off a few seconds later.
OUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur.

When the front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF WARNING 1. Insert the key into the front passenger’s
switch is turned OFF, the OFF indicator will airbag ON-OFF switch, and turn it to the
stay on to show that the front passenger’s air- • Wait at least 60 seconds to operate the “OFF” position.
front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF
bag is not operational. When the front pas- 2. Remove the key from the front passeng-
switch after turning the ignition switch
senger’s airbag ON-OFF switch is turned to the “LOCK” position or putting the er’s airbag ON-OFF switch.
ON, the OFF indicator goes off, and the ON 3. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” po-
indicator comes on for approximately 1 mi-
operation mode in OFF.
The SRS airbag system is designed to sition or put the operation mode in ON. 4
nute to show that the front passenger’s airbag retain enough voltage to deploy the air- The front passenger’s airbag OFF indi-
is operational. bag. cation lamp will stay on.
• Always remove the key from the front
passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch af-
WARNING ter operating that switch. Failure to do Type A
so could lead to improper position of
l Do not fit any accessory that makes the
the front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF
indication lamp impossible to see, and do
switch.
not cover the indication lamp with a stick-
• Do not turn OFF the front passenger’s
er. You would not be able to verify the sta-
airbag ON-OFF switch except when a Type B
tus of the passenger airbag system.
child restraint system is fitted to the
front passenger seat.
To turn an airbag off • If the OFF indicator does not come on
when the front passenger’s airbag ON-
OFF switch is turned OFF, do not fit a
WARNING child restraint system to the front pas-
senger seat. We recommend you to
l To reduce risk of serious or fatal injury: have the system inspected by a Type A: Except for Russia, Kazakhstan,
• Always turn the ignition switch to the MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Belarus, Ukraine and Moldova
“LOCK” position or put the operation Service Point.
mode in OFF, before operating the Type B: For Russia, Kazakhstan, Belarus,
• If the OFF indicator remains on when
front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF the front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF
Ukraine and Moldova
switch. Failure to do so could adversely switch is turned ON, do not allow any- The front passenger’s airbag is now deactiva-
affect the airbag performance. one to sit on the front passenger seat. ted and will not deploy until switched on
We recommend you to have the system
again.
inspected by a MITSUBISHI
To turn an airbag off, follow these steps:

Driver’s and front passenger’s Driver’s knee airbag system*

airbag system The driver’s knee airbag is located under the
The driver’s airbag is located under the pad- steering wheel. The driver’s knee airbag is
ded cover in the middle of the steering wheel. designed to deploy at the same time as the
The front passenger’s airbag is contained in driver’s front airbag.
4 the instrument panel above the glove box.
The driver’s airbag and the front passenger’s
airbag are designed to inflate at the same
time even if the passenger seat is not occu-
pied.
1- Head-on collision with a solid wall at a
speed of approximately 25 km/h
(15 mph) or higher
2- Moderate-to-severe frontal impact with-
in the shaded area between the arrows
The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag

Deployment of front airbags will deploy if the severity of the impact is
and driver’s knee airbag above the designed threshold level, compara-
ble to a collision at approximately 25 km/h
The front airbags and driver’s (15 mph) when impacting straight into a solid
knee airbag ARE DESIGNED wall that does not move or deform. If the se-
TO DEPLOY when… verity of the impact is below the above
threshold level, the front airbags and driver’s
The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag are knee airbag may not deploy. However, this
designed to deploy when the vehicle suffers a threshold speed will be considerably higher if
moderate-to-severe frontal impact. The typi- the vehicle strikes an object that absorbs the
cal condition is shown in the illustration. impact by either deforming or moving (for
example, another stationary vehicle, pole or a
guard rail).

Because frontal collisions can easily move
you out of position, it is important to always
properly wear your seat belts. Your seat belts
will help keep you a safe distance from the
steering wheel and instrument panel during
the initial stages of airbag deployment. The
initial stage of airbag inflation is the most 4
forceful, and can possibly cause serious or fa-
tal injuries. Moreover, the seat belts in your
vehicle are your primary means of protection
in a collision. The SRS airbags are designed
to provide additional protection. Therefore, 1- Collision with a utility pole, tree or other 1- Rear end collisions
for your safety and the safety of all occu- narrow object 2- Side collisions
pants, be sure to always properly wear your 2- Vehicle slides under the rear body of a 3- Vehicle rolls onto its side or roof
seat belts. truck
3- Oblique frontal impacts Because the front airbags and driver’s knee
The front airbags and driver’s airbag do not protect the occupant in all types
knee airbag MAY NOT DE- Because the front airbags and driver’s knee of collisions, be sure to always properly wear
PLOY when… airbag do not protect the occupant in all types your seat belts.
of frontal collisions, be sure to always prop-
With certain types of frontal collisions, the erly wear your seat belts. The front airbags and driver’s
vehicle’s body structure is designed to absorb knee airbag MAY DEPLOY
the shock to help protect the occupants from The front airbags and driver’s when…
harm. (The vehicle body’s front area may de- knee airbag ARE NOT DE- The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag
form significantly as it absorbs the impact.) SIGNED TO DEPLOY when… may deploy if the bottom of the vehicle suf-
Under such circumstances, the front airbags
and driver’s knee airbag may not deploy irre- The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag are fers a moderate-to-severe impact (undercar-
spective of the deformation and damage to not designed to deploy in conditions where riage damage).
the vehicle body. they cannot typically provide protection to Examples of some typical conditions are
Examples of some typical conditions are the occupant. shown in the illustration.
shown in the illustration. Such conditions are shown in the illustration.

WARNING WARNING
l Do not attach anything to the steering l Do not attach accessories to the lower por-
wheel’s padded cover, such as badges or tion of the driver’s side instrument panel.
accessories. It might strike and injure an Such objects could prevent the driver’s
occupant if the airbag inflates. knee airbag from inflating normally or
4 l Do not set anything on, or attach anything
to, the instrument panel above the glove
could be propelled and cause serious in-
jury if the airbag inflates.
box. It might strike and injure an occu-
pant if the airbag inflates.
1- Collision with an elevated median/island

or kerb
2- Vehicle travels over a deep hole/pothole
3- Vehicle drives down a steep slope and
hits the ground
Because the front airbags and driver’s knee

airbag may deploy in certain types of unex-
pected impacts as shown in the illustration
that can easily move you out of position, it is WARNING
important to always properly wear your seat l Do not put packages, pets or other objects
WARNING between the airbags and the driver or
belts. Your seat belts will help keep you a
safe distance from the steering wheel and in- l Do not attach accessories to, or put them front passenger. It could affect airbag per-
strument panel during the initial stages of air- in front of, the windscreen. These objects formance, or could cause injury when the
could restrict the airbag inflation, or airbag inflates.
bag deployment. The initial stage of airbag
inflation is the most forceful and can possibly
strike and injure an occupant if the air- l Right after the airbag inflation, several
bags inflate. airbag system components will be hot. Do
cause serious or fatal injuries if you contact it l Do not attach additional keys or accesso- not touch these components. There is a
at this stage. ries (hard, pointed or heavy objects) to danger of being burnt.
the ignition key. Such objects could pre-
vent the driver’s knee airbag from inflat-
ing normally or could be propelled and
cause serious injury if the airbag inflates.

WARNING The label shown here is attached to the seat- Deployment of side airbags and
backs with a side airbag. curtain airbags
l The airbag system is designed to work on-
ly once. Once the airbags have deployed,
they will not work again. They must The side airbags and curtain
promptly be replaced, and we recommend airbags ARE DESIGNED TO
you to have the entire airbag system in-
spected by a MITSUBISHI MOTORS
DEPLOY when… 4
Authorized Service Point. The side airbags and curtain airbags are de-
signed to deploy when the vehicle suffers a
Side airbag system* moderate-to-severe side impact to the middle
of the passenger compartment.
The side airbags (A) are contained in the The typical condition is shown in the illustra-
driver and front passenger seatbacks. tion.
The side airbag is designed to inflate only on
the side of the vehicle that is impacted, even Curtain airbag system*
with no passenger in the front seat.
The curtain airbags are contained in the front
pillars and roof side rail. The curtain airbag is
designed to inflate only on the side of the ve-
hicle that is impacted, even with no passen-
ger in the front seat or second seat.

On vehicles equipped with the ERA-GLO- The side airbags and curtain 3- Collision with a utility pole, tree or other
NASS, when the vehicle rolls onto its side or airbags MAY NOT DEPLOY narrow object
roof, the curtain airbags will deploy. when…
With certain types of side collisions, the vehi-
cle’s body structure is designed to absorb the
4 shock to help protect the occupants from
harm. (The vehicle body’s side area may de-
form significantly as it absorbs the impact.)
Under such circumstances, the side airbags
and curtain airbags may not deploy irrespec-
tive of the deformation and damage to the ve-
hicle body. Examples of some typical condi-
tions are shown in the illustration.
4- Oblique side impacts
5- Vehicle rolls onto its side or roof*
The seat belts in your vehicle are your pri-
mary means of protection in a collision. The
Because the side airbags and curtain airbags
SRS side airbags and curtain airbags are de-
do not protect the occupant in all types of
signed to provide additional protection.
side collisions, be sure to always properly
Therefore, for your safety and the safety of
wear your seat belts.
all occupants, be sure to always properly
wear your seat belts.
1- Side impacts in an area away from the

passenger compartment
2- Motorcycle or other similar small vehi-
cle collides with the side of vehicle
*On vehicles equipped with the ERA-GLO-

NASS, when the vehicle rolls onto its side
or roof, the curtain airbags will deploy.
The side airbags and curtain 2- Rear end collisions WARNING
airbags ARE NOT DESIGNED 3- Pitch end over end
TO DEPLOY when… l Do not allow any second seat occupant to
hold onto the seatback of either front seat,
Because the side airbags and curtain airbags in order to reduce risk of injury from the
The side airbags and curtain airbags are not
do not protect the occupant in all types of deploying side airbag. Special care should
designed to deploy in conditions where they
collisions, be sure to always properly wear
cannot usually provide protection to the oc-
your seat belts. l
be taken with children.
Do not place any objects near or in front
4
cupant. Typical conditions are shown in the of the seatback of either front seat. They
illustration. could interfere with proper side airbag in-
WARNING flation, and also could cause injury if
l The side airbags and curtain airbags are thrown free by side airbag deployment.
designed to supplement the driver and l Do not place stickers, labels or additional
passenger seat belts in certain side im- trim on the seatback of either front seat.
pacts. Seat belts should always be worn They could interfere with proper side air-
properly, and the driver and passenger bag inflation.
should sit well back and upright without l Do not install seat covers on seats with
leaning against the window or door. side airbags.
l The side airbag and curtain airbag inflate Do not re-cover seats that have side air-
with great force. The driver and passen- bags. This could interfere with proper
ger should not put their arms out of the side airbag inflation.
window, and should not lean against the l Do not attach a microphone (A) or any
door, in order to reduce the risk of serious other device or object around the part
or possible fatal injury from the deploying where the curtain airbags (B) activate
side airbag and curtain airbag. such as on the windscreen, side door glass,
front and rear pillars and roof side or as-
sist grips. When the curtain airbags in-
flate, the microphone or other device or
object will be hurled with great force or
the curtain airbags may not activate cor-
rectly, resulting in death or serious injury.
1- Head-on collisions
WARNING If there is a problem involving one or more of

the SRS components, the warning lamp will
l We recommend work around and on the come on and stay on. At the same time, the
side airbags and curtain airbags system to
warning display will appear on the informa-
be done by a MITSUBISHI MOTORS
Authorized Service Point. tion screen in the multi information display
(Type 1 only).
4 The SRS warning lamp is shared by the SRS
SRS warning lamp/display airbag system and the seat belt pretensioner
system.
Type 1
WARNING
WARNING
l If any of the following conditions occur,
l Do not put a hanger or any heavy or poin- there may be a problem with the SRS air-
ted object on the coat hook. If the curtain bags and/or seat belt pretensioners, and
airbag was activated, any such item could they may not function properly in a colli-
be propelled away with great force and sion or may suddenly activate without a
could prevent the curtain airbag from in- collision:
flating correctly. Hang clothes directly on
Type 2 • Even when the ignition switch or the
the coat hook (without using a hanger). operation mode is in ON, the SRS
Make sure there are no heavy or sharp warning lamp does not come on or it
objects in the pockets of clothes that you remains on.
hang on the coat hook.
• The SRS warning lamp and/or the
l Do not allow a child to lean against or warning display comes on while driv-
close to the front door even if the child is ing.
seated in a child restraint system. The SRS airbags and seat belt pretension-
The child’s head should also not lean ers are designed to help reduce the risk of
against or be close to the area where the There is a Supplemental Restraint System
(“SRS”) warning lamp on the instrument serious injury or death in certain colli-
side airbag and curtain airbag are loca- sions. If either of the above conditions oc-
ted. It is dangerous if the side airbag and panel. The system checks itself every time curs, immediately have your vehicle
curtain airbag inflate. the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” po- checked by a MITSUBISHI MOTORS
Failure to follow all of these instructions sition or the operation mode is put in ON. Authorized Service Point.
could lead to serious or fatal injury to the The SRS warning lamp will come on for sev-
child. eral seconds and then go out. This is normal
and means the system is working properly.

NOTE WARNING
l On vehicles equipped with the ERA-GLO- l If you found any tear, scratch, crack or
NASS, if the ERA-GLONASS system oper- damage to the portion where the airbag is
ates, the SRS warning lamp illuminates. stored, you should have the SRS inspected
by a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized
SRS servicing
Service Point.
4
NOTE
WARNING
l If your vehicle has to be scrapped, do this in
l We recommend any maintenance per- line with local legislation and contact a
formed on or near the components of the MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Serv-
SRS to be performed by a MITSUBISHI ice Point to safely dismantle the airbag sys-
MOTORS Authorized Service Point. tem.
Improper work on the SRS components
or wiring could result in inadvertent de-
ployment of the airbags, or could render
the SRS inoperative; either situation
could result in serious injury.
l Do not modify your steering wheel, seat
belt retractor or any other SRS compo-
nents. For example, replacement of the
steering wheel, or modifications to the
front bumper or body structure can ad-
versely affect SRS performance and lead
to possible injury.
l If your vehicle has sustained any damage,
we recommend you to have the SRS in-
spected to ensure it is in proper working
order.
l On vehicles with the side airbags, do not
modify your front seats, centre pillar and
centre console.
It can adversely affect SRS performance
and lead to possible injury.

OGFE20E1
Instruments..........................................................................................5-02
Multi information display - Type 1..................................................... 5-03
Multi information display - Type 2..................................................... 5-19 5
Indication lamp, warning lamp, and information screen
display list (multi information display - Type 1)............................ 5-28
Indication and warning lamps (multi information display -
Type 2)............................................................................................ 5-51
Indication lamps..................................................................................5-52
Warning lamps.................................................................................... 5-53
Information screen display (Vehicle equipped with the
multi information display - Type 1) ...............................................5-56
Combination headlamps and dipper switch........................................ 5-57
Headlamp levelling............................................................................. 5-64
Turn-signal lever................................................................................. 5-67
Hazard warning flasher switch............................................................5-67
ECO mode switch*............................................................................. 5-68
Fog lamp switch.................................................................................. 5-68
Wiper and washer switch.................................................................... 5-69
Wiper de-icer switch*......................................................................... 5-74
Rear window demister switch............................................................. 5-74
Heated windscreen switch*.................................................................5-75
Heated steering wheel switch*............................................................5-76
Horn switch......................................................................................... 5-76
OGFE20E1
Instruments
Instruments 2- Multi information display (Type 1: Col- Meter illumination control -

our liquid crystal display type) Type 1
® p. 5-03
Type 1 Information screen display list (Type 1) Each time you press the rheostat illumination
® p. 5-28 button, there is a sound and the brightness of
Multi information display (Type 2: the instruments changes.
Mono-colour liquid crystal display type)
® p. 5-19
5 3- Speedometer (km or mph + km/h)
4- Rheostat illumination button (Type 1)
® p. 5-02
5- Multi information display switch (Type
2) ® p. 5-19
Type 2
CAUTION
l When driving, watch the tachometer to make
sure that the engine speed indication does 1- Brightness level
not rise into the red zone (excessive engine 2- Rheostat illumination button
rpm).
NOTE
l You can adjust to 8 different levels respec-
tively for when the position lamps are illu-
minated and when they are not.
l When the lamp switch is in a position other
1- Tachometer than the “OFF” position, the meter illumina-
The tachometer indicates the engine tion switches automatically to the adjusted
speed (r/min). The tachometer helps you brightness, depending on the brightness out-
side the vehicle.
to obtain more economical driving and
also warns you of excessive engine
l The brightness level of the instruments is
stored when the ignition switch is turned off
speeds (Red zone). or the operation mode is put in OFF.
5-02 Instruments and controls OGFE20E1

Multi information display - Type 1
NOTE The following information is included on the 1-

multi information display: warnings, odome-
l If you press and hold the button for about 2 2- Information screen ® p. 5-05
ter, tripmeter, average and momentary fuel
seconds or more when the position lamps are Interrupt display screen ® p. 5-06
consumption, average speed etc.
illuminated, the brightness level changes to 3- Door ajar warning display screen
the maximum level. Pressing and holding ® p. 5-07
the button for about 2 seconds or more again [When the ignition switch or the operation
4- Odometer ® p. 5-08
returns the brightness level to the previous mode is OFF]
5-
level. “ ” or “ ” mark indicator ® p. 5-05 5
Multi information display -
Type 1
Always stop the vehicle in a safe place before
operating.
[When the ignition switch or the operation mode is ON]
OGFE20E1 Instruments and controls 5-03

1- Drive mode indicator display screen* 19- Auto Stop & Go (AS&G) display It is also possible to change elements such as
® p. 6-46 screen* ® p. 6-26 the language and units used on the multi in-
2- S-AWC (Super-All Wheel Control) drive Auto Stop & Go (AS&G) OFF display formation display by operating the multi in-
mode display screen* ® p. 6-51 screen* ® p. 6-31 formation display switch.
3-
4- “Speed Limit Display screen*” on page NOTE
6-114 l The fuel units, outside temperature units,
5 5- Lane Departure Warning (LDW) display display language, and other settings can be
screen* ® p. 6-110 changed.
6- ECO mode indicator display screen* Refer to “Changing the function settings” on
® p. 5-68 page 5-25.
7- Engine coolant temperature display
® p. 5-07 Multi information display
8- Odometer ® p. 5-08 switch
9- Gearshift indicator display screen*
® p. 6-31, 6-35, 6-43 Each time the multi information display
10- Selector lever position display (vehicles switch is operated, the buzzer sounds and the
with A/T or CVT) ® p. 6-34, 6-41 multi information display changes between
11- Cruise control display screen* information such as warnings, tripmeter,
® p. 6-68 average and momentary fuel consumption,
12- Adaptive Cruise Control System (ACC) distance range etc.
display screen* ® p. 6-78
13- Speed limiter display screen*
® p. 6-72
14- ECO indicator* ® p. 5-12
15-
“ ” or “ ” mark indicator ® p. 5-05
16- Information screen ® p. 5-05
17- Fuel remaining display screen
® p. 5-08
18- Outside temperature display screen
® p. 5-08

Information screen (when the Information screen (when the Information screen (when the
ignition switch or the operation ignition switch is turned from ignition switch or the operation
mode is OFF) the “LOCK” position to the mode is ON)
Each time you lightly press the multi infor- “ON” position or the operation Each time you lightly press the multi infor-
mation display switch, the display screen mode is changed from OFF to mation display switch, the display screen
switches in the following order. ON) switches in the following order.
When the ignition switch is turned to the 5
“ON” position or the operation mode is put in
ON, the display screen switches in the fol-
lowing order.
*1: When there is no warning display

*2: When there is a warning display
1- Tripmeter ® p. 5-09
3- Auto Stop & Go (AS&G) monitor*
® p. 5-12 *1: When the inspection time has arrived
ECO score display* ® p. 5-13 1- Screen when the ignition switch or the
4- Service reminder ® p. 5-09 operation mode is OFF
5- Redisplay of a warning display screen 2- System check screen ® p. 5-10
® p. 5-06 3- Screen when the ignition switch or the
operation mode is ON *1: When there is no warning display
4- Service reminder ® p. 5-09 *2: When there is a warning display

2- Tripmeter ® p. 5-09 NOTE Even if the cause of the warning display is
3- Driving range display ® p. 5-11 not eliminated, you can return to the screen
ECO drive assist display* ® p. 5-12 l While driving, the function setting screen is that was displayed before the warning dis-
not displayed even if you operate the multi
4- Average fuel consumption display play.
information display switch.
® p. 5-11 Always stop the vehicle in a safe place be- If you press the multi information display
ECO drive assist display* ® p. 5-12 fore operating and firmly apply the parking switch, the display screen switches to the
5- Average speed display* ® p. 5-11 brake and put the gearshift lever into the “N” screen that was displayed before the warning
display and the mark (A) is displayed.
5 Momentary fuel consumption display (Neutral) position (M/T) or the selector lever
into the “P” (Park) position (A/T or CVT).
® p. 5-12
Refer to “Changing the function settings” on
6- Auto Stop & Go (AS&G) monitor* page 5-13.
® p. 5-12 l When there is information to be announced,
ECO score display* ® p. 5-13 such as a system fault, the buzzer sounds
7- S-AWC (Super-All Wheel Control) op- and the screen display is switched.
eration display* ® p. 6-52 Refer to “Interrupt display screen” on page
8- Service reminder ® p. 5-09 5-06.
9- Function setting screen ® p. 5-13
10- Redisplay of a warning display screen Interrupt display screen
® p. 5-06
Warning display
NOTE When there is information to be announced,
If you want to switch the display
Warning display screens with a “ ” or “ ”
l While driving, the service reminder are not such as a system fault, the buzzer sounds and
displayed even if you operate the multi in- mark displayed in the upper right of the
the information screen is switched to the
formation display switch. Always stop the screen can be switched. If you want to switch
warning display screen.
vehicle in a safe place before operating. the display, press the multi information dis-
Refer to the warning list and take the neces-
play switch as follows.
sary measures.
“ ”: Press lightly.
Refer to “Warning display list” on page
“ ”: Press for approximately 2 seconds or
5-30.
more.
When the cause of the warning display is
eliminated, the warning display goes out au-
tomatically.
To return to the screen displayed before
the warning display
Redisplay of a warning display NOTE CAUTION
screen
l When the mark is displayed, the warning l Before moving your vehicle, check that the
When the mark is displayed, if you lightly display screen can be redisplayed on the in- warning display does not appear.
press the multi information display switch a formation screen.
few times, the warning display screen you Refer to “Information screen (when the igni- Engine coolant temperature
tion switch or the operation mode is OFF)”
switched from is redisplayed.
on page 5-05.
display
This indicates the engine
Other interrupt displays Refer to “Information screen (when the igni-
tion switch or the operation mode is ON)” coolant temperature.
5
The operation status of each system is dis- on page 5-05. If the coolant becomes hot,
played on the information screen. “ ” will blink.
Refer to the appropriate page in the warning Door ajar warning display Pay careful attention to the
display list for further details. engine coolant temperature
Refer to “Other interrupt displays” on page
screen
display while you are driv-
5-47. ing.
mark display screen
This is displayed when you press the multi
CAUTION
information display switch and return from l If the engine is overheating, “ ” will blink.
the warning display screen to the previous In this case, the bar graph is in the red zone.
screen. Immediately park the vehicle in a safe place
If any of the doors or the tailgate is not com- and take the required measures. Refer to
This mark is also displayed if there is another pletely closed, this displays the open door or “Engine overheating” on page 8-11.
warning other than the one displayed. tailgate.
When the cause of the warning display is When the ignition switch or the operation
eliminated, the mark goes out automatical- mode is ON, if the vehicle speed exceeds ap-
ly. proximately 8 km/h (5 mph) while a door is
ajar, a buzzer sounds 4 times. This notifies
the driver that a door is ajar.

Fuel remaining display screen Fuel remaining warning dis- CAUTION

This displays the amount of fuel remaining. play l Do not run out of fuel, or the catalytic con-
When the fuel is reduced to about 10 litres, verter may be adversely affected. If the
the information screen switches to the inter- warning display appears, refuel as soon as
possible.
rupt display of the fuel remaining warning
display, and the “ ” mark (B) on the fuel re-
5
maining display flashes slowly (about once NOTE
per second). After a few seconds, the infor-
mation screen returns from the fuel remain- l On inclines or curves, the display may be in-
correct due to the movement of fuel in the
ing warning display to the previous screen. tank.
If the remaining fuel level is reduced further,
the information screen switches to the fuel re- Outside temperature display
maining warning display and the “ ” mark
(B) on the fuel remaining display flashes
screen
F- Full This shows the temperature
quickly (about twice per second).
E- Empty outside the vehicle.
NOTE
l It may take several seconds to stabilise the
display after refilling the tank.
l If fuel is added with the ignition switch or NOTE
the operation mode is in ON, the fuel gauge
may incorrectly indicate the fuel level.
l The display setting can be changed to the
preferred units (°C or °F).
l The arrow (A) indicates that the fuel tank Refer to “Changing the function settings” on
filler is located on the left side of the body. page 5-13.
l Depending on factors such as the driving
conditions, the displayed temperature may
vary from the actual outside temperature.
Odometer
The odometer indicates the distance travel-
led.

Tripmeter NOTE 2. This informs you that a periodic inspec-

tion is due. Consult a MITSUBISHI
The tripmeter indicates the distance travelled l Depending on the vehicle specifications, the MOTORS Authorized Service Point.
between two points. displayed time may differ from the next peri-
At that time, when the ignition switch is
odic inspection time recommended by
MITSUBISHI MOTORS. turned from the “LOCK” position to the
Example usage of tripmeter and tripmeter
In addition, the display settings for the next “ON” position or the operation mode is
periodic inspection time can be modified. changed from OFF to ON, the warning
It is possible to measure two currently
display is displayed for a few seconds on
travelled distances, from home using
To modify the display settings, have it adjus-
ted at a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized the information screen.
5
tripmeter and from a particular point Service Point.
on the way using tripmeter . For more details, contact a MITSUBISHI
To reset the tripmeter
To return the display to 0, hold down the
multi information display switch for about 2
seconds or more. Only the currently dis- 3. After your vehicle is inspected at a
played value will be reset. MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized
Service Point, it displays the time until
Example the next periodic inspection.
If tripmeter is displayed, only tripmeter
will be reset. To reset
The “---” display can be reset while the igni-
NOTE tion switch or the operation mode is in OFF.
l When disconnecting the battery terminal, the 1. Displays the time until the next periodic When the display is reset, the time until the
memory of tripmeter and are inspection. next periodic inspection is displayed and the
cleared, and the display returns to “0”. warning display is no longer displayed when
the ignition switch is turned from the
NOTE “LOCK” position to the “ON” position or the
Service reminder l The distance is shown in units of 100 km operation mode is changed from OFF to ON.
Displays the approximate time until the next (100 miles). The time is shown in units of
periodic inspection recommended by months.
MITSUBISHI MOTORS. “---” is displayed
when the inspection time has arrived.
1. When you lightly press the multi infor- 3. Lightly press the multi information dis- NOTE
mation display switch a few times, the play switch while the icon is flashing to
information display switches to the serv- change the display from “---” to l When “---” is displayed, after a certain dis-
tance and a certain period of time, the dis-
ice reminder display. “CLEAR”. After this, the time until the
play is reset and the time until the next peri-
next periodic inspection will be dis- odic inspection is displayed.
played. l If you accidentally reset the display, we rec-
ommend you to consult a MITSUBISHI
5 MOTORS Authorized Service Point.
System check screen

When the ignition switch is turned to the
ON, the system check screen is displayed for
about 4 seconds. If there is no fault, informa-
tion screen (when the ignition switch or the
2. Press and hold the multi information dis- operation mode is ON) is displayed.
play switch for about 2 seconds or more If there is a fault, the screen changes to warn-
to display “ ” and make it flash. (If CAUTION ing display.
there is no operation for about 10 sec- Refer to “Warning display list” on page
onds with flashing, the display returns to l The customer is responsible for making sure
5-30.
that periodic inspection and maintenance are
the previous screen.)
performed. Inspections and maintenance
must be performed to prevent accidents and
malfunctions.
NOTE
l “---”display cannot be reset when the igni-
tion switch or the operation mode is in ON.
NOTE
l The system check screen display varies de-
pending on the customer’s equipment.

Driving range display NOTE NOTE

This displays the approximate driving range l The display setting can be changed to the l “---” is displayed when the average fuel con-
(how many more kilometres or miles you can preferred units (km or miles). sumption cannot be measured.
drive). When the driving range falls below Refer to “ Changing the function settings” ” l The initial (default) setting is “Auto reset
approximately 50 km (30 miles), “---” is dis- on page 5-13. mode”.
played. l The average fuel consumption depends on
the driving condition (road condition, driv-
Refuel as soon as possible. Average fuel consumption dis-
play
ing behavior, etc.). The displayed fuel con-
sumption may vary from the actual fuel con-
5
sumption. Treat the fuel consumption dis-
This displays the average fuel consumption played as just a rough guideline.
from the last reset to the present time. l The memory of the auto reset mode or man-
There are two types of mode settings of manual reset mode for the average fuel con-
ual reset and automatic reset. sumption display is erased if the battery is
Refer to “Changing the reset mode for aver- disconnected.
age fuel consumption and average speed” on l The display setting can be changed to the
NOTE page 5-14
preferred units {km/L, mpg (US), mpg (UK)
or L/100 km}.
l The driving range is determined based on For information on how to change the aver- Refer to “Changing the function settings” on
the fuel consumption data. This may vary age fuel consumption display setting, refer to page 5-13.
depending on the driving conditions and “ Changing the function settings ” on page
habits. Treat the distance displayed as just a
5-13.
rough guideline. Average speed display*
l When you refuel, the driving range display
This displays the average speed from the last
is updated.
However, if you only add a small amount of reset to the present time.
fuel, the correct value will not be displayed. There are two types of mode settings of man-
Fill with a full tank whenever possible. ual reset and automatic reset.
l On rare occasions, the value displayed for Refer to “Changing the reset mode for aver-
the driving range may change if you are age fuel consumption and average speed” on
parked on an extremely steep incline. This is
page 5-14.
due to the movement of fuel in the tank and NOTE For the method for changing the average
does not indicate a malfunction.
l The average fuel consumption display can speed display setting, refer to “Changing the
be reset separately for the auto reset mode function settings” on page 5-13.
and for the manual reset mode.

The “ ” mark (A) in the momentary fuel
gauge shows the average fuel consumption.
When the momentary fuel consumption sur-
passes the average fuel consumption, the mo-
mentary fuel consumption is displayed with a
green bar graph.
Be conscious that when maintaining the mo-
5 NOTE mentary fuel consumption above the average NOTE
fuel consumption, driving with better fuel
l The average speed display can be reset sepa- l When the ignition switch or the operation
rately for the auto reset mode and for the consumption can be possible. mode is ON again, the accumulated time
manual reset mode. will be reset.
l “---” is displayed when the average speed
NOTE
cannot be measured. ECO indicator*
l The initial (default) setting is “Auto reset l When the momentary fuel consumption can-
mode”. not be measured, the bar graph is not dis- This indicator will be dis-
l The display setting can be changed to the played. played when fuel-efficient
preferred units (km/h or mph). l The display setting can be changed to the driving is achieved.
Refer to “Changing the function settings” on preferred units {km/L, mpg (US), mpg (UK)
page 5-13. or L/100 km}.
l The memory of the auto reset mode or man- Refer to “Changing the function settings” on
ual reset mode for the average speed display page 5-13. ECO Drive Assist*
is erased if the battery is disconnected. l It is possible to cancel the green bar graph.
Refer to “Changing the function settings” on This function displays how fuel-efficiently
page 5-13. you are driving under different driving condi-
Momentary fuel consumption tions.
display The ECO drive assist display will change as
Auto Stop & Go (AS&G) moni- follows if you do fuel-efficient driving using
While driving, this displays the momentary
fuel consumption, using a bar graph.
tor* the accelerator in a way well matched with
The accumulated time the engine has been the vehicle speed.
stopped by Auto Stop & Go (AS&G) system
is displayed.
Refer to “Auto Stop & Go (AS&G) system”
on page 6-26.

The display shows the overall ECO score the Refer to “Information screen (when the
ECO drive level
function has counted from the time when the ignition switch or the operation mode is
ignition switch is turned to “ON” to the time ON)” on page 5-05
when it is turned to “LOCK” or “ACC”, or
from the time when the operation mode is set
to “ON” to the time when it is set to “OFF”.
Low High
5
ECO drive level
CAUTION
NOTE l For safety, stop the vehicle before operating.
While driving, even if you operate the multi
l On vehicles with A/T or CVT, the ECO
information display switch, the function set-
drive assist is displayed only when vehicle is Low High
ting screen is not displayed.
driven with the selector lever in the “D”
(Drive) position or when vehicle is driven in
the sport mode (for vehicles equipped with 3. Press and hold the multi information dis-
shift paddles). play switch for about 2 seconds or more
Changing the function settings to switch from the setting mode screen
ECO Score* The “Display language”, “Temperature unit”, to the menu screen.
ECO score indicates the points you have “Fuel consumption unit”, and “Average fuel
scored on fuel-efficient driving by the num- consumption and speed reset method” etc.
ber of leaves as follows: setting can be modified as desired.
1. Stop the vehicle in a safe place.
[When the ignition switch or the operation Firmly apply the parking brake and put
mode is ON] the gearshift lever into the “N” (Neutral)
The display shows the score you achieved in position (M/T) or the selector lever into
the last several minutes. the “P” (Park) position (A/T or CVT).
2. Lightly press the multi information dis-
[When the ignition switch is turned off or the play switch a few times to switch the in-
operation mode is put in OFF] formation screen to the function setting
screen.
NOTE Refer to “Changing the turn-signal 2. Lightly press the multi information dis-
sound” on page 5-18. play switch to select “AVG (average fuel
l To return the menu screen to the function Refer to “Changing the momentary fuel consumption and average speed set-
setting screen, press and hold the multi in-
consumption display” on page 5-18. ting)”.
formation display switch for about 2 seconds
or more. Refer to “Reset of low tyre pressure
l If no operations are made within approxi- warning threshold” on page 6-119.
mately 30 seconds of the menu screen being Refer to “Tyre ID set change” on page
6-120.
5 displayed, the display returns to the function
setting screen. Refer to “Returning to the factory set-
tings” on page 5-18.
4. Select the item to change on the menu
screen and change to the desired setting. NOTE
Refer to the following items for further
details on the operation methods. l If the battery is disconnected, these function
settings are reset from memory and automat-
ically return to the factory settings (except
Refer to “Changing the reset mode for the low tyre pressure warning threshold, tyre 3. Press and hold the multi information dis-
average fuel consumption and average ID set and Speed Limit Display function).
play switch for about 2 seconds or more
speed” on page 5-14.
to switch from A/1 (Auto reset mode) to
Refer to “Changing the fuel consump-
tion display unit” on page 5-15. Changing the reset mode for M/2/P (Manual reset mode), or from
M/2/P to A/1.
Refer to “Changing the temperature average fuel consumption and
The setting is changed to the selected
unit” on page 5-16. average speed mode condition.
Refer to “Changing the display lan-
The mode conditions for the average fuel
guage” on page 5-16. Manual reset mode
consumption and average speed display can
Refer to “Changing the language cooper-
be switched between “Auto reset” and “Man- l When the average fuel consumption and
ative control” on page 5-17.
ual reset”. average speed are being displayed, if
Refer to “Speed Limit Display function
1. Press and hold the multi information dis- you hold down the multi information
setting” on page 6-114.
play switch for about 2 seconds or more display switch, the average fuel con-
Refer to “Operation sound setting” on
to switch from the setting mode screen sumption and average speed displayed at
page 5-17.
to the menu screen. that time are reset.
Refer to “Changing the time until
Refer to “Information display” on page
“REST REMINDER” is displayed” on
5-20.
page 5-17.
l When the following operation is per- l When the engine switch or the operation 1. Press and hold the multi-information
formed, the mode setting is automatical- mode is in the following conditions, the meter switch for about 2 seconds or
ly switched from manual to auto. average fuel consumption display and more to switch from the setting mode
[Except for vehicles equipped with key- average speed display are automatically screen to the menu screen.
less operation system] reset. Refer to “Changing the function set-
Turn the ignition switch from the “ACC” [Except for vehicles equipped with key- tings” on page 5-13.
or “LOCK” position to the “ON” posi- less operation system] 2. Lightly press the multi-information me-
tion. The ignition switch is in the “ACC” or ter switch to select “AVG UNIT (fuel
[For vehicles equipped with keyless op- “LOCK” position for about 4 hours or consumption display setting)”.
5
eration system] longer.
Change the operation mode from ACC [For vehicles equipped with keyless op-
or OFF to ON. eration system]
Switching to auto occurs automatically. The operation mode is in ACC or OFF
If switching to manual mode is done, for about 4 hours or longer.
however, the data from the last reset is
displayed. NOTE
Auto reset mode l The average fuel consumption display and
average speed display can be reset separately
l When the average fuel consumption and for the auto reset mode and for the manual
average speed are being displayed, if reset mode.
you hold down the multi information l The memory of the auto reset mode or man-
3. Press and hold the multi-information
display switch, the average fuel con- ual reset mode for the average fuel con-
sumption display and average speed display meter switch for about 2 seconds or
sumption and average speed displayed at
is erased if the battery is disconnected. more to display “AVG UNIT” (fuel con-
that time are reset.
sumption display unit setting).
Changing the fuel consumption play switch to select the units.
display unit 5. Press and hold the multi information dis-
The display unit for fuel consumption can be play switch for about 2 seconds or more
switched. The distance, speed, and amount to change the setting to the selected unit.
units are also switched to match the selected
fuel consumption unit.

NOTE 2. Lightly press the multi information dis- 1. Press and hold the multi information dis-
play switch to select “ ” (temperature play switch for about 2 seconds or more
l The display units for the driving range, the unit setting). to switch from the setting mode screen
average fuel consumption, the average speed
3. Press and hold the multi information dis- to the menu screen.
and the momentary fuel consumption are
switched, but the units for the indicating play switch for about 2 seconds or more Refer to “Changing the function set-
needle (speedometer), the odometer and the to switch in from °C to °F, or from °F to tings” on page 5-13.
tripmeter will remain unchanged. °C. 2. Lightly press the multi information dis-
The setting is changed to the selected play switch to select “LANGUAGE”
5 temperature unit. (language setting).
The distance and speed units are also switch-
ed in the following combinations to match
the selected fuel consumption unit. NOTE
Fuel con- Distance Speed (aver- l The temperature value on the air conditioner
panel is switched in conjunction with the
sumption (driving age speed) outside temperature display unit of the multi
range) information display.
L/100 km km km/h However, “°C” or “°F” are not shown on the
temperature display of an air conditioner.
mpg (US) mile(s) mph l On vehicles equipped with the Smartphone-
mpg (UK) mile(s) mph
km/L km km/h system, the temperature value shown on the
air conditioner screen of the audio system is 3. Press and hold the multi information dis-
switched in conjunction with the outside play switch for about 2 seconds or more
temperature display unit of the multi infor-
Changing the temperature unit to display “LANGUAGE”.
mation display.
The display unit for temperature can be
play switch to select the desired lan-
switched.
1. Press and hold the multi information dis-
Changing the display language guage.
The language of the multi information dis- 5. If you hold down the multi information
play can be switched. display switch for about 2 seconds or
to switch from the setting mode screen
more, the setting is changed to the selec-
to the menu screen.
ted language.
Refer to “Changing the function set-
tings” on page 5-13.

NOTE NOTE 1. Press and hold the multi information dis-

l If “---” is selected in the language setting, a l The language display modified with the lan- to switch from the setting mode screen
warning message is not displayed when guage setting can be switched in the follow-
to the menu screen.
there is a warning display or interrupt dis- ing manner.
play. Refer to “Changing the function set-
• When A or 1 (language cooperation ena-
bled) has been selected with the language tings” on page 5-13.
cooperative control, the language for the 2. Lightly press the multi information dis-
Changing the language cooper- play switch to select “ ” (operation
Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped)
5
ative control or Multi Around Monitor (if so equipped) sound setting).
is automatically changed to the language 3. Press and hold the multi information dis-
The language used in the Bluetooth® 2.0 in- selected for the multi information display. play switch for about 2 seconds or more
terface (if so equipped) or Multi Around However, this changing function may not
to switch from ON (operation sound on)
Monitor (if so equipped) can be changed au- work depending on the language selected
for the multi information display. to OFF (operation sound off), or from
tomatically to the same language as that
• When M, 2 or P (language cooperation OFF to ON.
shown in the multi information display.
disabled) has been selected with the lan- The setting is changed to the selected
Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of
guage cooperative control, the language condition.
BLUETOOTH SIG, INC.
for the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so
1. Press and hold the multi information dis- equipped) or Multi Around Monitor (if so
play switch for about 2 seconds or more equipped) is not automatically changed to NOTE
to switch from the setting mode screen the language selected for the multi infor- l The operation sound setting only deactivates
to the menu screen. mation display. the operation sound of the multi information
Refer to “Changing the function set- l The language on the display of the audio display switch and rheostat illumination but-
tings” on page 5-13. system (if so equipped) is not automatically ton. The warning display and other sounds
changed even if you select A or 1 (language cannot be deactivated.
cooperation enabled) of the language coop-
play switch to select “ ” eration control.
(language cooperative control). Changing the time until “REST
play switch to switch from A/1 (lan- Operation sound setting REMINDER” is displayed
guage cooperation enabled) to M/2/P You can turn off the operation sounds of the The time until the display appears can be
(language cooperation disabled), or from multi information display switch and rheostat changed.
M/2/P to A/1. illumination button.
The setting is changed to the selected
condition.

1. Press and hold the multi information dis- 1. Press and hold the multi information dis- 3. Press and hold the multi information dis-
play switch for about 2 seconds or more play switch for about 2 seconds or more play switch for about 2 seconds or more
to switch from the setting mode screen to switch from the setting mode screen to switch from ON (with the green bar
to the menu screen. to the menu screen. graph) to OFF (without the green bar
Refer to “Changing the function set- Refer to “Changing the function set- graph), or from OFF to ON.
tings” on page 5-13. tings” on page 5-13. The setting changes to the selected bar
2. Lightly press the multi information dis- 2. Lightly press the multi information dis- graph setting.
play switch to select “ALARM” (rest play switch to select (changing the
5 time setting). turn-signal sound). Returning to the factory set-
3. Press and hold the multi information dis- 3. Press and hold the multi information dis-
play switch for about 2 seconds or more play switch for about 2 seconds or more tings
to display “ALARM”. to switch from 1 (turn-signal sound 1) to Many of the function settings can be returned
4. Lightly press the multi information dis- 2 (turn-signal sound 2), or from 2 to 1. to their factory settings.
play switch to select the time until the The setting changes to the selected turn- 1. Press and hold the multi information dis-
display. signal sound. play switch for about 2 seconds or more
5. Press and hold the multi information dis- to switch from the setting mode screen
play switch for about 2 seconds or more, to the menu screen.
Changing the momentary fuel Refer to “Changing the function set-
the setting is changed to the selected
time. consumption display tings” on page 5-13.
It is possible to change the bar graph setting 2. Lightly press the multi information dis-
of the momentary fuel consumption display. play switch to select “RESET” (return-
NOTE 1. Press and hold the multi information dis- ing to the factory settings).
l The drive time is reset when the ignition play switch for about 2 seconds or more 3. When you press and hold the multi in-
switch is turned off or the operation mode is to switch from the setting mode screen formation display switch for about 5 sec-
put in OFF. to the menu screen. onds or more, the buzzer sounds and all
Refer to “Changing the function set- of the function settings are returned to
Changing the turn-signal sound tings” on page 5-13. the factory settings.
It is possible to change the turn-signal sound. 2. Lightly press the multi information dis-
play switch to select (changing the NOTE
momentary fuel consumption display).
l The factory settings are as follows:

NOTE NOTE 1- Speed limiter display* ® p. 6-73

2- Frozen road warning ® p. 5-22
• Average fuel consumption and average • Speed Limit Display function 3- Gearshift indicator* ® p. 6-31, 6-43
speed reset mode: A (Auto reset)
4- Information display ® p. 5-20
• Fuel consumption display unit: L/100 km
Multi information display - 5- Selector lever position display (vehicles
• Temperature unit: °C (Celsius)
with CVT) ® p. 6-41
• Display language: ENGLISH or RUSSI-
AN
Type 2 6- Fuel remaining display ® p. 5-23
• Cooperative language setting: A (lan-
Always stop the vehicle in a safe place before 5
guage cooperation enabled)
operating. NOTE
• Operation sounds: ON (Operation sounds
on) The following information is included on the l When the ignition switch or the operation
• “REST REMINDER” display: OFF multi information display: odometer, tripme- mode is OFF, the selector lever position dis-
• Turn-signal sound: Turn-signal sound 1 ter, average fuel consumption etc. play, gearshift indicator, fuel remaining dis-
play and frozen road warning are not dis-
• Momentary fuel consumption with the
green bar graph: ON played.
l The following settings cannot be returned to
their factory settings.
• Low tyre pressure warning threshold
• Tyre ID set

Information display
Each time you lightly press the multi information display switch (A), the display switches in the following order.
1- Odometer 6- Average fuel consumption display 9- Service reminder (distance) ® p. 5-23

2- Tripmeter ® p. 5-22 10- Service reminder (month) ® p. 5-23
3- Tripmeter 7- Auto Stop & Go (AS&G) monitor* 11- Tyre pressure monitoring system dis-
4- Meter illumination control ® p. 5-21 ® p. 5-22 play* ® p. 6-119, 6-120
5- Driving range display ® p. 5-21 8- Outside temperature display ® p. 5-22
NOTE
l When the ignition switch or the operation mode is OFF, the driving range display, average fuel consumption display, outside temperature display and tyre
pressure monitoring system display are not displayed.
l While driving, the service reminder is not displayed even if you operate the multi information display switch.

Odometer Meter illumination control NOTE

The odometer indicates the distance travel- Each time you press and hold the multi infor- l The brightness level of the instruments is
led. mation display switch (2) for about 2 seconds stored when the ignition switch is turned off
or more, there is a sound and the brightness or the operation mode is put in OFF.
Tripmeter of the instruments changes.
The tripmeter indicates the distance travelled Driving range display
between two points.
This displays the approximate driving range 5
Example usage of tripmeter and tripmeter (how many more kilometres or miles you can
drive). When the driving range falls below
It is possible to measure two currently approximately 50 km (30 miles), “---” is dis-
travelled distances, from home using played.
tripmeter and from a particular point
on the way using tripmeter . NOTE
To reset the tripmeter l The driving range is determined based on
1- Brightness level the fuel consumption data. This may vary
To return the display to 0, hold down the depending on the driving conditions and
2- Multi information display switch
multi information display switch for about 2 habits. Treat the distance displayed as just a
rough guideline.
seconds or more. Only the currently dis-
played value will be reset. NOTE l When you refuel, the driving range display
is updated.
l You can adjust to 8 different levels respec- However, if you only add a small amount of
Example tively for when the position lamps are illu- fuel, the correct value will not be displayed.
If tripmeter is displayed, only tripmeter minated and when they are not. Fill with a full tank whenever possible.
will be reset. Each time you reduce two brightness levels, l On rare occasions, the value displayed for
the segment display of the brightness level the driving range may change if you are
decreases one by one. parked on an extremely steep incline. This is
NOTE l When the lamp switch is in a position other due to the movement of fuel in the tank and
than the “OFF” position, the meter illumina- does not indicate a malfunction.
l When disconnecting the battery terminal, the tion switches automatically to the adjusted
memory of tripmeter and are l The display setting can be changed to the
brightness, depending on the brightness out- preferred units (km or miles).
cleared, and the display returns to “0”. side the vehicle. Refer to “Changing the function settings” on
page 5-25.

Average fuel consumption dis- NOTE NOTE

play l The display setting can be changed to the l Depending on factors such as the driving
This displays the average fuel consumption preferred units {km/L, L/100 km, mpg}. conditions, the displayed temperature may
from the last reset to the present time. Refer to “Changing the function settings” on vary from the actual outside temperature.
page 5-25.
The reset mode conditions for the average
fuel consumption display can be switched be- Frozen road warning
tween “Auto reset” and “Manual reset”. Auto Stop & Go (AS&G) moni-
5 For information on how to change the aver- tor*
If the outside air temperature drops below ap-
prox. 3°C (37 °F), the alarm sounds and the
age fuel consumption display setting, refer to
The accumulated time the engine has been outside air temperature warning symbol (A)
“Changing the function settings” on page
stopped by Auto Stop & Go (AS&G) system flashes for about 10 seconds.
5-25.
is displayed.
Refer to “Auto Stop & Go (AS&G) system”
NOTE on page 6-26.
l The average fuel consumption display can
be reset separately for the auto reset mode
NOTE
l “---” is displayed when the average fuel con- l When the ignition switch or the operation
sumption cannot be measured. mode is ON again, the accumulated time
l The initial (default) setting is “Auto reset will be reset.
mode”.
l The average fuel consumption depends on
the driving condition (road condition, driv- Outside temperature display
ing behavior, etc.). The displayed fuel con- This shows the temperature outside the vehi-
sumption may vary from the actual fuel con- cle. CAUTION
sumption. Treat the fuel consumption dis-
played as just a rough guideline. l There is a danger the road might be icy, even
when this symbol is not flashing, so please
l The memory of the auto reset mode or man- NOTE take care when driving.
ual reset mode for the average fuel con-
sumption display is erased if the battery is l The display setting can be changed to the
disconnected. preferred units (°C or °F). Refer to “Chang-
ing the function settings” on page 5-25.

Fuel remaining display Fuel remaining warning display Service reminder

The fuel remaining display indicates the fuel If the remaining fuel level is approximately Displays the approximate time until the next
level in the fuel tank when the ignition switch 10 litres or less (one segment displayed) periodic inspection that MITSUBISHI
or the operation mode is ON. when the ignition switch is turned to the MOTORS recommends. “---” is displayed
“ON” position or the operation mode is when the inspection time has arrived.
changed to ON, the last segment of the fuel The spanner mark indicates the periodic in-
gauge flashes. If the remaining fuel level is spection.
reduced further, the last segment of the fuel 5
gauge goes out, “ ” and the bar graph flash.
NOTE
l Depending on the vehicle specifications, the
displayed time until the next periodic inspec-
tion may differ from that of MITSUBISHI
MOTORS recommends.
In addition, the display settings for the next
periodic inspection time can be modified.
1- Full To modify the display settings, have it adjus-
0- Empty ted at a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized
Service Point.
For more details, contact a MITSUBISHI
NOTE MOTORS Authorized Service Point.
l It may take several seconds to stabilise the
display after refilling the tank.
l If fuel is added with the ignition switch or
CAUTION
Distance
the operation mode is ON, the fuel gauge
may incorrectly indicate the fuel level. l Do not drive with an extremely low fuel lev-
l The fuel lid mark (A) indicates that the fuel el; running out of fuel could cause damage
tank filler door is located on the left side of to the catalytic converter.
the vehicle. Month
NOTE
l On inclines or curves, the display may be in-
correct due to the movement of fuel in the
tank.

1. Displays the time until the next periodic 1. When you lightly press the multi infor- 3. Lightly press the multi information dis-
inspection. mation display switch a few times, the play switch while the icon is flashing to
information display switches to the serv- change the display from “---” to
NOTE ice reminder display. “cLEAr”. After this, the time until the
next periodic inspection will be dis-
l The distance is shown in units of 100 km played.
(100 miles). The time is shown in units of
months.
5
2. This informs you that a periodic inspec-
tion is due. Please consult a
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized
Service Point.
3. After your vehicle is inspected at a
Service Point, it displays the time until
the next periodic inspection.
To reset play switch for about 2 seconds or more
CAUTION
to make the spanner mark start flashing.
The “---” display can be reset while the igni- (If there is no operation for about 10 sec- l The customer is responsible for making sure
tion switch or the operation mode is in OFF. onds with flashing, the display will re- that periodic inspection and maintenance are
vert to its original indication.) performed.
Inspections and maintenance must be per-
formed to prevent accidents and malfunc-
tions.
NOTE
l “---”display cannot be reset when the igni-
tion switch or the operation mode is in ON.

NOTE 1. When you lightly press the multi infor- l When the following operation is per-
mation display switch a few times, the formed, the mode setting is automatical-
l When “---” is displayed, after a certain dis- information display switches to the driv- ly switched from manual to auto.
tance and a certain period of time, the dis-
ing range display. [Except for vehicles equipped with key-
play is reset and the time until the next peri-
odic inspection is displayed. Refer to “Information display” on page less operation system]
l If you accidentally reset the display, consult 5-20. Turn the ignition switch from the “ACC”
a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Serv- 2. Each time you press the multi informa- or “LOCK” position to the “ON” posi-
tion display switch for 2 seconds or tion.
ice Point.
more on driving range display, you can [For vehicles equipped with keyless op-
5
switch reset mode for average fuel con- eration system]
Changing the function settings
sumption. Change the operation mode from ACC
The “Average fuel consumption reset mode”, (A: Auto reset mode, B: Manual reset or OFF to ON.
“Fuel consumption unit” and “Temperature mode)
unit” setting can be modified as desired, Switching to auto occurs automatically.
when the ignition switch or the operation If switching to manual mode is done,
mode is ON. Auto reset mode Manual reset mode
however, the data from the last reset is
displayed.
CAUTION
Auto reset mode
l The driver should not operate the display
while the vehicle is in motion. l When the average fuel consumption is
l When operating the system, stop the vehicle being displayed, if you hold down the
in a safe area. multi information display switch, the
average fuel consumption displayed at
that time are reset.
Changing the reset mode for
Manual reset mode
average fuel consumption
The mode conditions for the average fuel l When the average fuel consumption is
consumption display can be switched be- being displayed, if you hold down the
tween “Auto reset” and “Manual reset”. multi-information meter switch, the
average fuel consumption displayed at
that time is reset.

l When the engine switch or the operation 1. When you lightly press the multi infor- NOTE
mode is in the following conditions, the mation display switch a few times, the
average fuel consumption display is au- information display switches to the aver- l The memory of the unit setting is erased if
the battery is disconnected, and it returns au-
tomatically reset. age fuel consumption display.
tomatically to factory setting.
[Except for vehicles equipped with key- Refer to “Information display” on page
less operation system] 5-20.
The ignition switch is in the “ACC” or 2. Press and hold the multi information dis- The distance units is also switched in the fol-
“LOCK” position for about 4 hours or play switch for about 5 seconds or more lowing combinations to match the selected
5 longer. until buzzer sound is heard twice. fuel consumption unit.
[For vehicles equipped with keyless op- 3. Press and hold the multi information dis-
Fuel consumption Distance (driving
eration system] play switch to switch in sequence from
range)
The operation mode is in ACC or OFF “km/L” → “L/100 km” → “mpg” →
for about 4 hours or longer. “km/L”. km/L km
L/100 km km
NOTE mpg mile(s)
l The average fuel consumption display can
be reset separately for the auto reset mode
Changing the temperature unit
l The memory of the auto reset mode or man-
ual reset mode for the average fuel con- The display unit for outside temperature can
sumption display is erased if the battery is be switched.
disconnected. 1. When you lightly press the multi infor-
l The initial (default) setting is “Auto reset mation display switch a few times, the
mode”. information display switches to the out-
side temperature display. Refer to “Infor-
Changing the fuel consumption NOTE mation display” on page 5-20.
2. Each time you press the multi informa-
display unit l The display units for the driving range, the
tion display switch for 2 seconds or
average fuel consumption are switched, but
The display unit for fuel consumption can be the units for the indicating needle (speedom- more on outside temperature display,
switched. The distance and amount units are eter), the odometer, the tripmeter and the you can switch from °C to °F or from °F
also switched to match the selected fuel con- service reminder will remain unchanged. to °C unit of outside temperature display.
sumption unit.

NOTE
l The temperature value on the air conditioner
panel is switched in conjunction with the
outside temperature display unit of the multi
information display.
However, “°C” or “°F” are not shown on the
temperature display of an air conditioner.
l On vehicles equipped with the Smartphone-
5
system, the temperature value shown on the
air conditioner screen of the audio system is
switched in conjunction with the outside
temperature display unit of the multi infor-
mation display.

Indication lamp, warning lamp, and information screen display list (multi information display - Type 1)
Indication lamp, warning lamp, and information screen display list (multi information dis-
play - Type 1)
Indication and warning lamp list
1- Position lamp indication lamp 7- Charge warning lamp ® p. 5-55 11- Forward Collision Mitigation System
® p. 5-52 8- Blind Spot Warning (BSW) indication (FCM) OFF indication lamp*
2- Front fog lamp indication lamp* lamp* ® p. 6-104 ® p. 6-89
® p. 5-52 9- Automatic High-Beam (AHB) indication Ultrasonic misacceleration Mitigation
3- Turn-signal indication lamps/Hazard lamp* ® p. 5-60 System (UMS) OFF indication lamp*
warning indication lamps ® p. 5-52 10- LED headlamp warning lamp* ® p. 6-94
4- Rear fog lamp indication lamp ® p. 5-59 12- Information screen display list
® p. 5-52 ® p. 5-29
5- High-beam indication lamp ® p. 5-52 13- Active Stability Control (ASC) indica-
6- Security indicator* ® p. 3-33 tor* ® p. 6-67
14- Active Stability Control (ASC) OFF in- 17- Check engine warning lamp ® p. 5-54 20- Brake auto hold indication lamp*
dicator* ® p. 6-67 18- Seat belt warning lamp ® p. 4-13 ® p. 6-57
15- Anti-lock brake system (ABS) warning 19- Tyre pressure monitoring system warn- 21- Brake warning lamp ® p. 5-53
lamp ® p. 6-64 ing lamp* ® p. 6-114 22- Electric parking brake warning lamp*
16- Supplement Restraint System (SRS) ® p. 5-54
warning lamp ® p. 4-38
Information screen display list

5
When there is information to be announced, such as lamp reminders, a sound is emitted and the screen switches to the displays shown below.
Refer to the appropriate page and take the necessary measures.
When the cause of the warning display is eliminated, the warning display goes out automatically.
Refer to “Warning display list” on page 5-30.
Refer to “Navigation information display” on page 5-46.
Refer to “Other interrupt displays” on page 5-47.
NOTE
l A warning may be displayed on the information screen and the buzzer may sound in the following rare cases.
This is caused by the system picking up interference such as noise or strong electromagnetic waves, and is not a functional problem.
• An extremely strong electromagnetic wave is received from a source such as an illegal radio set, a spark from a wire, or a radar station.
• Abnormal voltage or a static electricity discharge is generated by the operation of installed electrical equipment (including after-market parts).
If the warning display appears many times, we recommend you to consult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point.

Warning display list

Screen Cause Solution (Reference)
l You have forgotten to turn off the lamps. l Refer to “Lamps (headlamps, fog lamps,
etc.) auto-cutout function” on page 5-57.
5
l The washer fluid is running low. l Replenish the container with washer fluid.
Refer to “Washer fluid” on page 10-08.
Refer to “Capacity” on page 11-14.
l There is a fault in the LED headlamps. l We recommend you to consult a

ice Point.
Refer to “LED headlamp warning lamp”
on page 5-59.
l There is a fault in the keyless operation sys- l Refer to “Keyless operation system*” on
tem. page 3-09.

l The keyless operation key is not detected. l Insert the keyless operation key into the
key slot.
5
Refer to “If the keyless operation key is
not operating properly” on page 6-25.
l You have forgotten to remove the keyless l Remove the keyless operation key from
operation key from the key slot. the key slot.
Refer to “Keyless operation key reminder”
on page 6-26.
l The steering wheel is locked. l Press the engine switch while turning
steering wheel.
Refer to “Steering wheel lock” on page
6-19.
l The engine is stopped while the selector l Place the selector lever in the “P” (Park)
lever is in a position other than the “P” position to put the operation mode in OFF.
(Park) position.


l The driver’s door is opened with the steer- l Refer to “Steering wheel lock” on page
ing wheel unlocked. 6-19.
5 l There is a fault in the EPS. l Have the vehicle inspected by a

ice Point as soon as possible.
Refer to “Electric power steering system
(EPS)” on page 6-65.
l There is a fault in the ABS. l Avoid sudden braking and high-speed
driving, stop the vehicle in a safe place,
and take corrective measures. Refer to
“ABS warning lamp/display” on page
6-64.
l The tyre pressure in one of the tyres is low. l Refer to “Tyre pressure monitoring system
warning lamp/display” on page 6-114.
l There is a fault in the tyre pressure moni- l Refer to “Tyre pressure monitoring system
toring system. warning lamp/display” on page 6-114.


l One of the doors or the tailgate is not com- l Close the door or tailgate.
pletely closed. Refer to “Door ajar warning display
The open door is displayed. screen” on page 5-07.
l The bonnet is open. l Close the bonnet.

Refer to “Bonnet” on page 10-04.
5
l There is a fault in the electronic immobil- l Put the operation mode in OFF, and then
izer (Anti-theft starting system). start the engine again.
If the warning is not cancelled, please con-
tact a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized
Service Point.
l The driver’s door is open when the opera- l Put the operation mode in OFF.
tion mode is in any mode other than OFF. Refer to “Operation mode ON reminder
system” on page 6-19.
l An attempt was made to lock all the doors l Put the operation mode in OFF.
and the tailgate when the operation mode Refer to “Operation mode OFF reminder
is in any mode other than OFF. system” on page 6-19.
l There is a fault in the steering wheel lock. l Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe
place.
We recommend you to consult a
ice Point.


l There is a fault in the electrical system. l Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe
place.
We recommend you to consult a
ice Point.
5 l The engine is overheated. l Stop the vehicle in a safe place and take
corrective measures.
Refer to “Engine overheating” on page
8-11.
l The automatic transmission (A/T or CVT) l Refer to “Automatic transmission IN-

fluid temperature is too high. VECS-II 6A/T” on page 6-32.
l Refer to “Automatic transmission IN-
VECS-III 6CVT” on page 6-39.
l You turned the ignition switch to the “ON” l Fasten your seat belt properly. Refer to
position or put the operation mode in ON “Seat belt reminder” on page 4-13.
without fastening your seat belt.
l There is a fault in the fuel system. l We recommend you to consult a

ice Point.


l The fuel is running low. l Refuel as soon as possible. Refer to “Fuel
remaining warning display” on page 5-08.
l You are driving with the parking brake still

applied.
l Release the parking brake. Refer to “Brake
warning display” on page 5-56.
5
l The brake fluid level in the reservoir has l Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe
fallen to a low level. place.
l There is a fault in the brake system. We recommend you to consult a
ice Point.
Refer to “Brake warning display” on page
5-56.
l There is a fault with the Electric parking l We recommend you to have it checked,
brake. immediately.
Refer to “Electric parking brake” on page
6-07.
l The parking brake cannot be applied tem- l Refer to “Electric parking brake” on page
porarily due to repeated operation of the 6-07.
Electric parking brake switch within a
short time.


l You try to release the Electric parking l Refer to “Electric parking brake” on page
brake switch without depressing the brake 6-07.
pedal.
5 l The Electric parking brake has been auto-

matically applied.
l Refer to “Brake auto hold” on page 6-57.
l The brake auto hold is automatically can- l Refer to “Brake auto hold” on page 6-57.
celled.
l The brake auto hold is not available. l Refer to “Brake auto hold” on page 6-57.


l The Electric parking brake is not automati- l When the ignition switch is turned off or
cally applied because there is a fault in the the operation mode is put in OFF, place the
Electric parking brake system. selector lever in the “P” (Park) position
and depress the brake pedal more firmly
than usual with the right foot.
Then, operate the ignition switch or the en-
gine switch. 5
l We recommend you to have the brake auto
hold system inspected by a MITSUBISHI
Refer to “Brake auto hold” on page 6-57.
l The brake auto hold system does not turn l Press the brake auto hold switch after fas-
on because the driver’s seat belt is not fastening the driver’s seat belt.
tened. Refer to “Brake auto hold” on page 6-57.
l The brake auto hold system does not turn l Depress the brake pedal more firmly than
off because the brake pedal is not pressed. usual with the right foot. Then, press the
brake auto hold switch.
l There is a fault in the engine oil circulation l Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe
system. place. We recommend you to have it
checked.
Refer to “Oil pressure warning display” on
page 5-57.


l There is a fault in the charging system. l Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe
place. We recommend you to consult a
ice Point.
Refer to “Charge warning display” on
page 5-57.
5 l There is a fault in the Supplemental re- l We recommend you to have it checked,
straint system (SRS) airbag or the preten- immediately.
sioner system. Refer to “SRS warning lamp/display” on
page 4-38.
l There is a fault in the Active Stability l We recommend you to have it checked.

Control (ASC). Refer to “Active stability control (ASC)*”
on page 6-66.
l There is a fault in the hill start assist. l We recommend you to have it checked.
Refer to “Hill start assist” on page 6-60.
l There is a fault in the electronically con- l We recommend you to have it checked.
trolled 4WD system. Refer to “Electronically controlled 4WD
system” on page 6-46.
l There is a fault in the S-AWC system. l We recommend you to have it checked.
Refer to “S-AWC (Super-All Wheel Con-
l There is a fault in the A/T or CVT. l We recommend you to have it checked.
Refer to “Automatic transmission IN-
VECS-II 6A/T” on page 6-32.
Refer to “Automatic transmission IN-
VECS-III 6CVT” on page 6-39.


l The electronically controlled 4WD system l Refer to “Electronically controlled 4WD
is hot. system” on page 6-46.
l The S-AWC system is hot. l Refer to “S-AWC (Super-All Wheel Con-
l The outside temperature is 3 °C (37 °F) or l Be careful of ice on the road.

less. l The road can be icy even when this warn- 5
ing is not displayed, so drive carefully.
l The Adaptive Cruise Control System l Increase the following distance by de-
(ACC) has detected the approach of the pressing the brake pedal or marking other
vehicles in front. decelerating control.
Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control System
(ACC): Proximity alarm” on page 6-81.
l The Forward Collision Mitigation System l Take appropriate action such as depressing
(FCM) has detected the danger of colli- the brake to avoid collision.
sion. Refer to“Forward collision warning func-
tion” on page 6-90.
l The Adaptive Cruise Control System l Depress the brake pedal as soon as your
(ACC) detected a stop of the vehicle in vehicle comes to a stop.
front and stopped your vehicle, but the Refer to “When ACC detects a vehicle in
brake will be released soon. front within the set distance” on page
6-80.
l The Electric parking brake cannot be ap- l Depress the brake pedal as soon as possi-
plied automatically. ble.


l The Adaptive Cruise Control System l Refer to “How to use ACC” on page 6-83.
(ACC) control is automatically cancelled
and the system is placed in the ‘standby’
state.
5 l Conditions for the start of control are not

met, the Adaptive Cruise Control System
(ACC) cannot start the control.
l The Adaptive Cruise Control System

(ACC) cannot start the control because the
speed is out of speed range.

(ACC) cannot start the control because not
detected the approach of the vehicles in
front.

(ACC) is temporarily not available such as
for adhesion of contaminants to the sensor.
This is not a malfunction.


l There is a fault in the Adaptive Cruise l We recommend you to have it checked.
Control System (ACC). Refer to “To terminate ACC control” on
page 6-86.
l There is a fault in the Forward Collision

Mitigation System (FCM).
l We recommend you to have it checked.
Refer to “FCM braking function” on page
5
6-91.
l FCM braking function of the Forward Col- l Refer to “FCM braking function” on page
lision Mitigation System (FCM) has been 6-91.
activated.
l The Forward Collision Mitigation System

(FCM) is temporarily unavailable for some
reason. This is not a malfunction.
l The Lane Departure Warning (LDW) has l Refer to “Lane Departure Warning
detected that your vehicle is about to leave (LDW)” on page 6-110.
or has left the lane.


l There is a fault in the Lane Departure l We recommend you to have it checked.
Warning (LDW). Refer to “LDW deactivation due to fault”
on page 6-112.
5 l The Ultrasonic misacceleration Mitigation

System (UMS) sensor is temporarily not
l When the warning display does not disap-
pear after waiting for a while, contact a
available for some reason such as the envi- MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Serv-
ronmental condition or increase of the sen- ice Point.
sor temperature. Refer to “Ultrasonic misacceleration Miti-
gation System (UMS): Warning display”
on page 6-104.


l The Ultrasonic misacceleration Mitigation l We recommend you to have it checked,
System (UMS) does not operate normally immediately.
because there are some malfunctions in the Refer to “Ultrasonic misacceleration Miti-
sensor or the system. gation System (UMS): Warning display”
on page 6-104.
l The Ultrasonic misacceleration Mitigation l Refer to “Ultrasonic misacceleration Miti-

System (UMS) is activated. gation System (UMS)” on page 6-99.


l The Blind Spot Warning (BSW) sensor is l When the warning display does not disap-
temporarily not available for some reason pear after waiting for a while, contact a
such as the environmental condition or in- MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Serv-
crease of the sensor temperature. ice Point.
Refer to “Blind Spot Warning (BSW)” on
page 6-104.
5 l The Blind Spot Warning (BSW) does not l We recommend you to have it checked,
operate normally because there are some immediately.
malfunctions in the sensor or the system. Refer to “Blind Spot Warning (BSW)” on
page 6-104.
l Foreign objects, such as dirt, snow or ice, l Remove a foreign object on the bumper
adhere to the bumper surface around the surface around the sensor.
sensor. When the warning display does not disap-
pear after having cleaned the bumper sur-
face around the sensor, contact a
ice Point.
Refer to “Blind Spot Warning (BSW):
When there is a foreign objects on the sen-
sor” on page 6-107.
l The Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) has l Pay special attention to the rear of your ve-
detected a vehicle that is approaching your hicle.
vehicle. Refer to “Rear Cross Traffic Alert
(RCTA)” on page 6-108.


l There is a fault in the sensor. l We recommend you to consult a
ice Point.
Refer to “Forward Collision Mitigation
System (FCM): System problem warning”
on page 6-95
Refer to “Lane Departure Warning 5
(LDW): System problem warning” on
page 6-112.
Refer to “Automatic High-Beam (AHB):
System problem warning” on page 5-62.
l The Forward Collision Mitigation System l After the temperature of the sensor has
(FCM), Lane Departure Warning (LDW) been in range, the system will automatical-
and Automatic High-Beam (AHB) is tem- ly return to operation.
porarily unavailable due to a high or low Refer to “Forward Collision Mitigation
temperature of the sensor. System (FCM): System problem warning”
on page 6-95.
Refer to “Lane Departure Warning
page 6-112.
l The sensor is temporarily unavailable due l Refer to “Forward Collision Mitigation
to conditions such as the adhesion of con- System (FCM): System problem warning”
taminants to the sensor or windscreen. on page 6-95.
This is not a malfunction. Refer to “Lane Departure Warning
page 6-112.


l There is a fault in the Automatic High- l We recommend you to consult a
Beam (AHB). MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Serv-
ice Point.
5
Navigation information dis- 1- Guidance display NOTE
Shows the direction of vehicle travel and
play* the guidance location. l Please read this section and also the separate
On vehicles equipped with Smartphone-link owner’s manual for SDA navigation system.
Display Audio (SDA) navigation system, the
following information on navigation will be Direction of vehicle travel (Example)
displayed when guidance location such as

junction and destination is approached after
you set the destination and started the route Intermediate
destination
guidance. Destination Ferry terminal Tollbooth (Example)
2- Remaining distance display

Shows the distance to the location where
the guidance is displayed.

Other interrupt displays

l When starting the engine, you pressed the l Place the gearshift lever in the “N” (Neu-
engine switch without depressing the clutch tral) position, fully depress the clutch
pedal (M/T). pedal, depress the brake pedal with the
right foot. Then, press the engine switch.
Refer to “Starting and stopping the en- 5
gine” on page 6-21.
l When starting the engine, the selector lever l Place the selector lever in the “P” (Park)
is in a position other than the “P” (Park) or position, depress the brake pedal with the
the “N” (Neutral) position, or you pressed right foot. Then, press the engine switch.
the engine switch without depressing the Refer to “Starting and stopping the en-
brake pedal (A/T or CVT). gine” on page 6-21.
The operation status of each system is displayed on the information screen. Refer to the appropriate page for the system for further details.
Screen System operation status Reference

l When “4WD ECO” mode is selected. Refer to “Electronically controlled 4WD sys-
tem” on page 6-46.
l When “4WD AUTO” mode is selected.


l When “4WD LOCK” mode is selected.
5 l When “AWC ECO” mode of S-AWC is se- Refer to “S-AWC (Super-All Wheel Control)”
lected. on page 6-49.
l When “NORMAL” mode of S-AWC is se-

lected.
l When “SNOW” mode of S-AWC is selec-

ted.
l When “GRAVEL” mode of S-AWC is se-

lected.


l When the reversing sensor system detect an Refer to “Reversing sensor system” on page
obstruction. 6-121.
l When the parking sensor detects an obsta- Refer to “Parking sensors (Front/Rear)” on
cle. page 6-125.
5
l When the ECO mode is activated. Refer to “ECO mode switch” on page 5-68.
l When the Forward Collision Mitigation Sys- Refer to “FCM and UMS ON/OFF switch” on
tem (FCM) is activated or the timing of an page 6-94.
alarm is changed.


l When the Forward Collision Mitigation Refer to “FCM and UMS ON/OFF switch” on
System (FCM) is deactivated. page 6-94.
l When the Ultrasonic misacceleration Miti- Refer to “Turn on/off the UMS ” on page
gation System (UMS) is deactivated. 6-104.
This informs you that a periodic inspection is due.

5
Screen Solution
We recommend you to have it checked. Refer to “Service reminder” on page 5-09 for further
details.
The setting for rest interval can be changed.
Screen Solution
Stop the vehicle in a safe place, turn off the engine, and take a rest.
Use this display as rough guide for taking rests during a long drive.
The interval from the start of your trip until this message is displayed can be set.
Refer to “Changing the time until “REST REMINDER“ is displayed” on page 5-17.
The display and buzzer alert the driver when the set time is reached. If you continue to drive
without having a rest, the buzzer sounds about every 5 minutes to encourage you to take a rest.
l In the following cases, the time driven is reset and the display returns to the previous dis-
play screen. After this, when the set time is reached again, the buzzer and display encourage
you to take a rest.
• The buzzer sounds 3 times.
• Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK” position or put the operation mode in OFF.
• The multi information display switch is held for approximately 2 seconds or more.

Indication and warning lamps (multi information display - Type 2)
Indication and warning lamps (multi information display - Type 2)
1- Washer fluid level warning lamp 9- Electric power steering system (EPS) 17- 4WD LOCK mode indication lamp*
® p. 5-56 warning lamp ® p. 6-65 ® p. 6-46
2- Position lamp indication lamp 10- Auto Stop & Go (AS&G) indication 18- 4WD ECO mode indication lamp*
® p. 5-52 lamp* ® p. 6-26 ® p. 6-46
3- Front fog lamp indication lamp* 11- LED headlamp warning lamp* 19- ECO drive assist* ® p. 5-53
® p. 5-52 ® p. 5-59 20- Oil pressure warning lamp ® p. 5-55
4- Turn-signal indication lamps/Hazard 12- Auto Stop & Go (AS&G) OFF indica- 21- Charge warning lamp ® p. 5-55
warning indication lamps ® p. 5-52 tion lamp* ® p. 6-26 22- High coolant temperature warning lamp
5- Security indicator* ® p. 3-33 13- Rear fog lamp indication lamp (red) ® p. 5-55
6- Door ajar warning lamp ® p. 5-56 ® p. 5-52 23- Low coolant temperature indication
7- For details, refer to “Steering wheel 14- High-beam indication lamp ® p. 5-52 lamp (blue) ® p. 5-52
lock” on page 6-19. (if so equipped) 15- ECO mode indication lamp* ® p. 5-68 24- Multi information display ® p. 5-19
8- For details, refer to “Warning activation” 16- Cruise control indication lamp* 25- Active Stability Control (ASC) indica-
on page 3-15. (if so equipped) ® p. 6-69 tor* ® p. 6-67

Indication lamps
26- Active Stability Control (ASC) OFF in- 28- Supplement Restraint System (SRS) 31- Tyre pressure monitoring system warn-
dicator* ® p. 6-67 warning lamp ® p. 4-38 ing lamp* ® p. 6-114
27- Anti-lock brake system (ABS) warning 29- Check engine warning lamp ® p. 5-54 32- Brake warning lamp ® p. 5-53
lamp ® p. 6-64 30- Seat belt warning lamp ® p. 4-13
Indication lamps High-beam indication lamp Position lamp indication lamp

5 This indication lamp illumi- This indication lamp illumi-
nates when the high-beam is nates while the position
Turn-signal indication lamps/ used. lamps are on.
Hazard warning indication
lamps
These indication lamps blink
in the following situations.
Front fog lamp indication Low coolant temperature indi-
l When the turn-signal lamp* cation lamp - blue (Vehicle
lever is moved to acti- This lamp illuminates while equipped with the multi infor-
vate a turn-signal lamp. the front fog lamps are on. mation display - Type 2)
Refer to “Turn-signal
This indication lamp illumi-
lever” on page 5-67.
nates in blue when the cool-
l When the hazard warning flasher switch ant temperature is low.
is pressed to activate the hazard warning
lamps. Rear fog lamp indication lamp
Refer to “Hazard warning flasher This lamp illuminates while
switch” on page 5-67. the rear fog lamp is on. NOTE
l When the hazard warning lamps auto-
matically activate due to sudden braking l When the indication lamp goes out, this
while driving. (Vehicles equipped with should be used as a rough indication of when
the heating starts working.
the emergency stop signal system) Refer
to“Emergency stop signal system” on
page 6-62

Warning lamps
ECO Drive Assist* Warning lamps CAUTION

This function displays how fuel-efficiently l In the situations listed below, brake perform-
you are driving under different driving condi- ance may be compromised or the vehicle
tions.
Brake warning lamp may become unstable if brakes are applied
The ECO drive assist display will change as This lamp illuminates when suddenly; consequently, avoid driving at
follows if you do fuel-efficient driving using the ignition switch is turned high speeds or applying the brakes suddenly.
to the “ON” position or the Furthermore, the vehicle should be brought
the accelerator in a way well matched with
the vehicle speed. operation mode is put in ON,
to a stop in a safe location and we recom-
mend you to have it checked.
5
and goes off after a few sec-
• The brake warning lamp does not illumi-
onds. nate when the parking brake is applied or
Always make sure that the lamp goes off be- does not turn off when the parking brake
ECO drive level fore driving. is released.
With the ignition switch or the operation • The ABS warning lamp and brake warn-
mode in ON, the brake warning lamp illumi- ing lamp illuminate at the same time
For details, refer to “ABS warning lamp/
nates under the following conditions:
display” on page 6-64.
Low High l When the parking brake lever has been • The brake warning lamp remains illumi-
engaged. nated during driving.
l When the brake fluid level in the reser- l The vehicle should be brought to a halt in
voir falls to a low level. the following manner when brake perform-
l When the brake force distribution func- ance has deteriorated.
tion is not operating correctly. • Depress the brake pedal harder than usual.
NOTE Even if the brake pedal moves down to
the very end of its possible stroke, keep it
l On vehicles with A/T or CVT, the ECO With the ignition switch or the operation pressed down hard.
drive assist is displayed only when vehicle is mode in ON, a buzzer sounds under the fol-
driven with the selector lever in the “D” lowing condition:
(DRIVE) position or when vehicle is driven l The vehicle speed exceeds 8 km/h
in the sport mode (for vehicles equipped (5 mph) with the parking brake applied.
with shift paddles).

Warning lamps
CAUTION CAUTION This lamp will also illuminate when the igni-
tion switch is turned “ON” or the operation
• Should the brakes fail, use engine braking l When the warning lamp remains on or does mode is put in ON, and goes off after the en-
to reduce your speed and observe the fol- not come on, there is a possibility that the
gine has started. If it does not go off after the
lowing instructions. parking brake cannot be operated or re-
[Vehicles with the parking brake of the leased. Immediately contact the nearest engine has started, we recommend you to
lever type] MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Serv- have the vehicle checked.
Carefully pull the parking brake lever. ice Point. When the warning lamp comes on
5 [Vehicles with the Electric parking brake]
Keep pulling the Electric parking brake
during driving, immediately stop the vehicle
in a safe place, and contact your
CAUTION
switch. (Refer to “Electric parking brake” MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Serv- l Prolonged driving with this lamp on may
on page 6-07) ice Point. If you inevitably have to park, cause further damage to the emission control
park the vehicle on level and stable ground, system. It could also affect fuel economy
Depress the brake pedal to operate the shift the selector lever in “P” (Park) position and drivability.
stop lamp to alert the vehicles behind you. and place chocks or blocks. l If the lamp does not illuminate when the ig-
nition switch is turned to the “ON” position
or the operation mode is put in ON, we rec-
Electric parking brake warn- Check engine warning lamp ommend you to have the system checked.
ing lamp* This lamp is a part of an on- l If the lamp illuminates while the engine is
running, avoid driving at high speeds and
This warning lamp will illu- board diagnostic system
have the system inspected by a
minate when there is a fault which monitors the emis- MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Serv-
in the Electric parking brake sions, engine control system ice Point as soon as possible.
system. or A/T control system/CVT Accelerator pedal and brake pedal response
Normally, this warning lamp control system. may be negatively influenced under these
illuminates when the ignition If a problem is detected in one of these sys- conditions.
switch is turned to the “ON” position or the tems, this lamp illuminates or flashes.
operation mode is put in ON, and goes off in Although your vehicle will usually be driva-
ble and not need towing, we recommend you
NOTE
a few seconds.
to have the system checked as soon as possi- l The engine electronic control module ac-
ble. commodating the onboard diagnostic system
has various fault data (especially about the
exhaust emission) stored.

Warning lamps
This data will be erased if a battery cable is Oil pressure warning lamp (Ve- High coolant temperature
disconnected which will make a rapid diag- hicle equipped with the multi warning lamp - red (Vehicle
nosis difficult. Do not disconnect a battery
cable when the check engine warning lamp is information display - Type 2) equipped with the multi infor-
ON. This lamp illuminates when mation display - Type 2)
the ignition switch is turned This lamp illuminates in red
Charge warning lamp to the “ON” position or the if the coolant temperature
operation mode is put in ON,
This lamp illuminates when and goes off after the engine
becomes excessively high. 5
the ignition switch is turned has started. If it illuminates
to the“ON” position or the while the engine is running, the oil pressure
operation mode is put in ON,
and goes off after the engine
is too low. CAUTION
Turn the engine off and have it inspected.
has started. l If the lamp illuminates during vehicle opera-
On vehicles equipped with the multi information, it indicates that the engine is possibly
tion display - Type 1: A warning is also dis- CAUTION overheating. Continued driving could make
the engine fail. Immediately stop the vehicle
played on the multi information display. l This warning lamp does not indicate the in a safe place and take appropriate action.
amount of oil level in the engine. This must (Refer to “Engine overheating” on page
be determined by checking the oil level on
CAUTION the dipstick, while the engine is switched
8-11.)
l If it illuminates while the engine is running, off.

there is a problem in the charging system. l If this lamp illuminates when the engine oil NOTE
Immediately park your vehicle in a safe level is not low, have it inspected.
place and we recommend you to have it l If you continue driving with low engine oil l The high coolant temperature warning lamp
checked. level or with this warning lamp illuminated, may illuminate when the vehicle has been
engine seizure may occur. driven at high speeds or on hilly roads. This
illuminating does not necessarily indicate a
problem. It should stop if you keep the en-
gine running for a while or continue driving
the vehicle.

Information screen display (Vehicle equipped with the multi information display - Type 1)
Door ajar warning lamp (Vehi- Information screen display When the ignition switch is turned to the
cle equipped with the multi in- “ON” position or the operation mode is put in
(Vehicle equipped with the ON, if the brake fluid is low, this warning is
formation display - Type 2)
multi information display - displayed.
This lamp illuminates when The warning lamp in the instrument cluster
a door or the tailgate is either Type 1) also illuminates.
open or not completely
closed. Brake warning display
5 If the vehicle speed reaches
CAUTION
approximately 8 km/h l If this warning stays illuminated and does
(5 mph) with a door or the tailgate open or not go out while driving, there is a danger of
ineffective braking. In this case, immediately
incompletely closed, a buzzer sounds 4 times
park your vehicle in a safe place and we rec-
as a warning. ommend you to have it checked.
l If the brake warning display is displayed and
CAUTION This warning is displayed if you drive with the brake warning lamp and the ABS warn-
ing lamp are illuminated at the same time,
the parking brake still applied. The warning
l Before moving your vehicle, check that the the braking force distribution function will
warning lamp is OFF. lamp in the instrument cluster only illumi- not operate, so the vehicle may be destabi-
nates when the parking brake is applied. lised during sudden braking. Avoid sudden
braking and high-speed driving, stop the ve-
Washer fluid level warning hicle in a safe place, and we recommend you
lamp (Vehicle equipped with CAUTION to have it checked.
the multi information display - l If a vehicle is driven without releasing the l The vehicle should be brought to a halt in
parking brake, the brake will be overheated, the following manner when brake perform-
Type 2) resulting in ineffective braking and possible ance has deteriorated.
This lamp comes on when brake failure. • Depress the brake pedal harder than usual.
the washer fluid is running If this warning is displayed, release the park- Even if the brake pedal moves down to
ing brake. the very end of its possible stroke, keep it
low. pressed down hard.
If the lamp comes on, re-
plenish the container with
washer fluid.
Refer to “Washer fluid” on page 10-08.
Refer to “Capacity” on page 11-14.

Combination headlamps and dipper switch
CAUTION CAUTION Combination headlamps

• Should the brakes fail, use engine braking l If the warning is displayed while the engine and dipper switch
to reduce your speed and observe the fol- is running, immediately park your vehicle in
lowing instructions. a safe place and we recommend you to have
[Vehicles with the parking brake of the it checked. Headlamps
lever type]
Carefully pull the parking brake lever.
Oil pressure warning display NOTE
[Vehicles with the Electric parking brake]
Keep pulling the Electric parking brake
5
switch. (Refer to “Electric parking brake”
l When entering a country in which vehicles
are driven on the opposite side of the road to
on page 6-07) the country in which your vehicles is sup-
Depress the brake pedal to operate the plied, necessary measures have to be taken
stop lamp to alert the vehicles behind you. to avoid dazzling oncoming traffic. Howev-
er, headlamps on this vehicle do not need
Charge warning display any adjustment.
If the engine oil pressure drops while the en- l Do not leave the lights on for a long time
gine is running, the warning display is dis- while the engine is stationary (not running).
played on the information screen in the multi A run-down battery could result.
information display. l When it rains, or when the vehicle has been
washed, the inside of the lens sometimes be-
comes foggy, but this does not indicate a
CAUTION functional problem.
When the lamp is switched on, the heat will
If there is a fault with the charging system, l If the vehicle is driven while the engine oil remove the fog. However, if water gathers
is low, or the oil level is normal but the inside the lamp, we recommend you to have
the warning display is displayed on the infor-
warning is displayed, the engine may burn it checked.
mation screen in the multi information dis- out and be damaged.
play. The warning lamp in the instrument l If the warning is displayed while the engine
cluster also illuminates. is running, immediately park your vehicle in
a safe place and check the engine oil level.
l If the warning is displayed while the engine
oil level is normal, have it inspected.

Rotate the switch to turn on the lamps. NOTE NOTE
l The sensitivity of the automatic on/off con- l Do not cover the sensor (A) for the automat-
trol can be adjusted. For further information, ic on/off control by affixing a sticker or label
contact a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Author- to the windscreen.
ized Service Point.
5 phone-link Display Audio (SDA) navigation
make the adjustment.
tails.
l When the headlamps are turned off by the
automatic on/off control with the ignition
All lamps off {except for daytime switch in the “ON” position or the operation
OFF l If the lamps do not turn on or off with the
running lamps} mode in ON, the front fog lamps (if so
switch in the “AUTO” position, manually
equipped) and rear fog lamps also go off.
With the ignition switch or the oper- operate the switch and we recommend you
When the headlamps are subsequently
ation mode is in ON, headlamps, po- to have your vehicle checked.
turned back on by the automatic on/off con-
sition, tail, licence plate, instrument trol, the front fog lamps also come on but the
panel lamps and downlight turn on rear fog lamp stays off. If you wish to turn Lamps (headlamps, fog lamps,
and off automatically in accordance the rear fog lamp back on, operate the switch
AUTO with outside light level. {Daytime again. etc.) auto-cutout function
running lamps will go on while the l If the following operation is performed
tail lamps are off.} All lamps turn while the lamp switch is in the “ ” po-
off automatically when the ignition sition, the lamps will turn off automati-
switch is turned to “OFF” position cally when the driver’s door is opened.
or the operation mode is put in OFF. [Except vehicles equipped with keyless
operation system]
Position, tail, licence plate, instru-
The ignition switch is turned to the
ment panel lamps and downlight on
“LOCK” or “ACC” position, or the key
Headlamps and other lamps go on is removed from the ignition switch.
[For vehicles equipped with keyless op-
eration system]
The operation mode is in OFF or ACC.
l If the following operation is performed When you want to keep the LED headlamp warning lamp*
while the lamp switch is in the “ ” po- lamps on: This warning lamp will illuminate when there
sition, the lamps will remain on for
1. In the following cases, turn the lamp is a fault in the LED headlamps.
about 3 minutes while the driver’s door
switch to the “OFF” position.
is shut and will then automatically turn
[Except vehicles equipped with keyless Type 1
off.
operation system]
[Except vehicles equipped with keyless
The ignition switch is in the “LOCK” or
operation system]
The ignition switch is turned to the
“ACC” position. 5
“LOCK” or “ACC” position, or the key
eration system]
is removed from the ignition switch.
2. Turn on the lamps with the switch in the Type 2
eration system]
“” or “” position again, then the
lamps will remain on.
NOTE
l The lamp auto-cutout will not function when
the lamp switch is in the “ ” position.
l The lamp auto-cutout function can also be
disabled.
For further information, we recommend you NOTE
to consult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Au- l If the warning lamp illuminates, there may
thorized Service Point. be a fault on the unit. Have the vehicle
On vehicles equipped with the Smartphone- checked at a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Au-
link Display Audio (SDA) or the Smart- thorized Service Point.
make the adjustment. Lamp monitor buzzer
If the following operation is performed, a
tails.
buzzer will sound to remind the driver to turn
off the lamps.
[Except for vehicles equipped with keyless
operation system]

If the driver’s door is opened when the key is Dipper (High/Low beam NOTE
in the “LOCK” or “ACC” position or re- change)
moved from the ignition switch while the l The high-beams can also flash when the
When the lamp switch is in the “ ” posi- lamp switch is OFF.
lamps are on.
tion, the beam changes from high to low (or l If you turn the lamps off with the headlamps
set to high-beam, the headlamps are auto-
[For vehicles equipped with keyless opera- low to high) each time the lever is pulled
matically returned to their low-beam setting
tion system] fully (1). While the high-beam is on, the when the lamp switch is next turned to the
If the driver’s door is opened when the opera- high-beam indication lamp in the instrument
5 tion mode is in ACC or OFF while the lamps cluster will also illuminate.
“ ” position.
are on.
Automatic High-Beam (AHB)*
In both cases, the buzzer will automatically The Automatic High-Beam (AHB) switches
stop if the auto-cutoff function is activated, the headlamp beams (high/low) when the
the lamp switch is turned off, or the door is sensor (A) senses a illuminant such as lights
closed. of a vehicle in front or oncoming vehicle or a
street lamp.
Daytime running lamps
The daytime running lamps come on when
the engine is running and the lamp switch is
in the “OFF” or “AUTO” position and the tail
lamps are off.
Headlamp flasher
The high-beams flash when the lever is
NOTE pulled slightly (2), and will go off when it is
l If the lamp switch is in the “ ” or “ ” released.
position, or if the tail lamps are on when the When the high-beam is on, the high-beam in-
lamp switch is in the “AUTO” position, the dication lamp in the instrument cluster will il-
daytime running lamps come on as position
luminate.
lamps.

WARNING If the AHB switch is pressed again, the Manual switching

AHB will be deactivated and AHB indi-
l The headlamp beams (high/low) may not cator will go off. Switching to low beam
be switched automatically under certain
circumstances. Do not overestimate the 1. Pull the lever towards you.
system. It is the responsibility of the driv- 2. The AHB indicator will go off.
er to switch the headlamp beams (high/ 3. The AHB switch is pressed again, the
low) manually to suit each driving condi- AHB will activated.
tion.
Refer to “Dipper (High/Low beam Switching to high-beam 5
change)” on page 5-60 1. Pull the lever towards you.
2. The AHB indicator will go off and the
high-beam indicator illuminates.
How to use the AHB 3. The AHB switch is pressed again, the
1. Rotate the lamp switch to “ ” position AHB will activated.
or “AUTO” position when the engine is
running. Automatic switching conditions
2. Press the AHB switch. NOTE The high-beam headlamps illuminate when
all of the following conditions are met:
l If the headlamps are on when the lamp
l Your vehicle speed exceeds approxi-
switch is in the “AUTO” position, the AHB
works. mately 40 km/h (25 mph).
l You can switch the headlamp beams (high/ l It is dark ahead of your vehicle.
low) manually by operating the lever even if l There are no vehicles in front or oncom-
the AHB is working. ing vehicles, or none of their exterior
Refer to “Dipper (High/Low beam change)” lamps are illuminated.
on page 5-60.
If the lever is operated manually, the AHB
indicator will go off and the AHB will be de- The low beam headlamps illuminate when
activated. any of the following conditions occur:
Refer to “Manual switching” on page 5-61. l Your vehicle speed does not exceed ap-
l The AHB is not deactivated when you pull proximately 30 km/h (19 mph).
The AHB is activated and the indicator the lever slightly (operation of the headlamp l It is bright ahead of your vehicle.
flasher).
will illuminate. l An exterior lamp of a vehicle in front or
oncoming vehicle is illuminating.

NOTE NOTE NOTE

l The headlamps may not be switched from l The AHB recognises environmental condi- • The rear end of a vehicle in front (such as
high-beam to low beam under the following tions by sensing a light source ahead of your a container truck) reflect a strong light.
circumstances. vehicle. Therefore, you may feel like some- • Your vehicle’s headlamp is broken or
• A vehicle in front or oncoming vehicle is thing is not quite right when the headlamp dirty.
hindered by any object such as continuous beams are switched automatically. • Your vehicle is inclined due to a flat tyre
bends, elevated median/island, traffic l The system may not detect a light vehicle or towing.
5 signs, roadside trees.
• Your vehicle passes an oncoming vehicle l
such as a bicycle.
The system may not detect an ambient
• The warning display appears.
(Refer to “System problem warning” on
suddenly on a bend with poor visibility. brightness precisely. This causes the traffic page 5-62.
• Another vehicle crosses ahead of your ve- to be dazzled by high-beam or the low beam l Observe the precautions below to maintain
hicle. to be maintained. In such cases, you should good usage conditions:
l The headlamps may remain at low beam (or switch the headlamp beams manually. • Do not attempt to disassemble the sensor.
be switched from high-beam to low beam) • In bad weather (heavy rain, fog, snow or • Do not affix a sticker or label on the
when a reflective object (e.g. street lamp, sandstorm). windscreen near the sensor.
traffic signal, noticeboard and signboard) re- • The windscreen is dirty or fogged up. • Avoid overload.
flects light. • The windscreen is cracked or broken. • Do not modify your vehicle.
l Any of the following factors may influence • The sensor is deformed or dirty. • When the windscreen is replaced, use the
the headlamp beam switching timing:
• A light that is similar to the headlamps or MITSUBISHI MOTORS GENUINE
• How brightly the exterior lamps of a vehi- tail lamps is shining around your vehicle. parts.
cle in front or oncoming vehicle illumi-
• A vehicle in front or oncoming vehicle is
nate.
• Movement or direction of a vehicle in
driven without lights, the exterior lamps System problem warning
are dirty or discoloured, or the direction
front or oncoming vehicle. of the headlamp beams is adjusted im-
If a problem occurs with the system, the fol-
• Only right or left exterior lamp of a vehi- properly. lowing warning display will appear to the
cle in front or oncoming vehicle is illumi- type of the problem.
• It becomes dark and bright suddenly and
nating. continuously around your vehicle.
• A vehicle in front or oncoming vehicle is • Your vehicle is driven on uneven surfaces. The AHB deactivation due to fault
a motorcycle.
• Road conditions (gradient, bends and road • Your vehicle is driven on a winding road. If a failure is detected in the system, the fol-
surface). • A reflective object such as a noticeboard lowing warning display will appear and the
• The number of occupants and luggage or a mirror reflects a light ahead of your AHB will automatically be turned off.
load. vehicle.
• When lamps of the vehicle in front or
headlamps of an oncoming vehicle blend
into the other lamps.

If the warning display remains even after the Sensor is too hot or cold When the sensor performance returns, the
ignition switch is turned to the “LOCK” posi- AHB will resume operation.
tion or the operation mode is put in OFF and If the system becomes temporarily unavaila- If the warning display does not disappear af-
then turned back to ON, please contact a ble due to a high or low temperature of the ter waiting for a while, there is a possibility
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service sensor, the following warning display will that the sensor has a malfunction. Contact a
Point. appear. MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service
[When the AHB is malfunctioning] After the temperature of the sensor has been Point for inspection of the sensor.
in range, the system will automatically return
to operation. 5
If the warning display does not disappear af-
ter waiting for a while, there is a possibility
that the AHB has a malfunction. Contact a
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service
Point for inspection of the system.
[When the sensor is malfunctioning] Welcome light
This function turns on the position and tail
lamps for about 30 seconds after the UN-
LOCK switch on the remote control transmit-
ter is pressed when the combination head-
lamps and dipper switch is in the “OFF” or
“AUTO” position. The welcome light func-
Windscreen is dirty tion will operate only when it is dark outside
NOTE If the AHB determines that its performance the vehicle.
has been degraded, the warning display will
l If the sensor or its surrounding area reaches
appear.
an extremely high temperature when parking NOTE
the vehicle under a blazing sun, the “AHB This can occur when:
SERVICE REQUIRED” warning display l Foreign objects, such as dirt, snow or l While the welcome light function is operat-
may appear. ice, adhere to the windscreen of the sen- ing, perform one of the following operations
If the warning display remains even after the to cancel the function.
sor portion.
temperature of the sensor or its surrounding • Push the LOCK switch on the remote
area has been in range, please contact a l There are adverse weather conditions, control transmitter.
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Serv- such as rain, snow, sand storms, etc. • Turn the combination headlamps and dip-
ice Point. l A vehicle in front or an oncoming vehi- per switch to the “ ” or “ ” position.
cle is splashing water, snow or dirt.

Headlamp levelling
NOTE 3. Within 60 seconds of turning the ignition NOTE

switch to the “LOCK” position or put-
• Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” posi- ting the operation mode in OFF, pull the l While the coming home light function is op-
tion or put the operation mode in ON. erating, perform one of the following opera-
turn signal lever towards you.
l It is possible to modify functions as follows: tions to cancel the function.
• The headlamps can be set to come on in • Pull the lever towards you.
the low beam setting. • Turn the combination headlamps and dip-
• The welcome light function can be deacti- per switch to the “ ” or “ ” position.
5 vated.
For further information, please contact your
• Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” posi-
tion or put the operation mode in ON.
l It is possible to modify functions as follows:
ice Point. • The time that the headlamps remain on
On vehicles equipped with the Smartphone- can be changed.
link Display Audio (SDA) or the Smart- • The coming home light function can be
phone-link Display Audio (SDA) navigation deactivated.
system, screen operations can be used to For further information, please contact your
make the adjustment. Refer to the separate MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Serv-
owner’s manual for details. ice Point.
4. The headlamps will come on in the low On vehicles equipped with the Smartphone-
beam setting for about 30 seconds. After link Display Audio (SDA) or the Smart-
Coming home light the headlamps go off, the headlamps can phone-link Display Audio (SDA) navigation
This function turns on the headlamps in the be turned on again in the low beam set- system, screen operations can be used to
low beam setting for about 30 seconds after ting for about 30 seconds by pulling the make the adjustment. Refer to the separate
the ignition switch is turned to the “LOCK” turn signal lever towards you within 60 owner’s manual for details.
position or the operation mode is put in OFF. seconds of turning the ignition switch to
1. Turn the combination headlamps and the “LOCK” position or putting the op- Headlamp levelling
dipper switch to the “OFF” or “AUTO” eration mode in OFF.
position. To turn on the headlamps again after 60
2. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK” seconds of turning the ignition switch to
Headlamp levelling switch (ex-
position or put the operation mode in the “LOCK” position or putting the op- cept for vehicle with LED
OFF. Also, if a key was used to start the eration mode in OFF, repeat the process headlamps)
engine, remove the key from the ignition from step 1. The angle of the headlamp beam varies de-
switch. pending on the load carried by the vehicle.

Headlamp levelling
The headlamp levelling switch can be used to Vehicle condition Switch posi- Switch position 5 passengers (including
adjust the headlamp illumination distance tion 2- driver) + Full luggage
(when the lower beam is illuminated) so that loading
the headlamps’ glare does not distract other “0”
Switch position Driver + Full luggage
drivers.
3- loading
Set the switch according to the following ta-
ble. 2400 models, 3000 models
“0”
Vehicle condition Switch posi- 5
tion
“0”
“1”
“0”
“2”
“1”
CAUTION “3”
l Always perform adjustments before driving.
Do not attempt to adjust while driving, as it
could cause an accident.
“3”
●:1 person
5 - person seat :Full luggage loading
2000 models Switch position Driver only/Driver + 1
0- front passenger “3”
Switch position 5 passengers (including

1- driver)
●:1 person
:Full luggage loading
Headlamp levelling
Switch position Driver only/Driver + 1 Vehicle condition Switch posi- Switch position Driver + Full luggage
0- front passenger tion 3- loading/7 passengers (in-
Switch position 5 passengers (including cluding driver) + Full lug-
“2”
1- driver) gage loading
Switch position 5 passengers (including Automatic headlamp levelling

3- driver) + Full luggage (vehicles with LED headlamps)
loading/Driver + Full lug- “3”*1, “2”*2
5 gage loading
This mechanism automatically adjusts the di-
rection of the headlamps (beam position) de-
pending on changes in the condition of the
7 - person seat vehicle, such as the number of occupants or
“3” luggage weight. When the headlamps are il-
Vehicle condition Switch posi-
tion luminated with the ignition switch or the op-
eration mode in ON, the beam position of the
“0” headlamps is automatically adjusted when the
*1: Except GF7WXTCXL6 vehicle is stopped.
*2: GF7WXTCXL6
●:1 person
“0”
:Full luggage loading
Switch position Driver only/Driver + 1

0- front passenger
“1”
Switch position Driver + 1 front passenger
1- + 2 passengers on third
seat
*1: Switch position 7 passengers (including
Except GF7WXTCXL6
*2: 2- driver)/7 passengers (in-
GF7WXTCXL6
cluding driver) + Full lug-
gage loading

Turn-signal lever
Turn-signal lever NOTE Hazard warning flasher

l If the lamp flashes unusually quickly, the switch
bulb in a turn-signal lamp may have burned
out. We recommend you to have the vehicle Use the hazard warning flasher switch when
inspected. the vehicle has to be parked on the road for
l It is possible to activate the following func-
any emergency.
tions.
The hazard warning flashers can always be
• Flashing of the turn-signal lamps when
the lever is operated with the ignition operated, regardless of the ignition switch po- 5
switch or the operation mode is in ACC. sition or the operation mode.
• Deactivate the turn-signal lamp 3-flash
function for lane changes Push the switch to turn on the hazard warning
• The time required to operate the lever for flashers, all turn-signal lamps flash continu-
1- Turn-signals the 3-flash function can be adjusted.
When making a normal turn, use posi- ously. To turn them off, push the switch
For further information, we recommend you
tion (1). The lever will return automati- to consult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Au- again.
cally when cornering is completed. thorized Service Point.
2- Lane-change signals On vehicles equipped with the Smartphone-
When moving the lever to (2) slightly to link Display Audio (SDA) or the Smart-
change a lane, the turn-signal lamps and system, screen operations can be used to
indication lamp in the instrument cluster make the adjustment. Refer to the separate
will only flash while the lever is operat- owner’s manual for details.
ed. l It is possible to change the tone of a sound-
Also, when you move the lever to (2) ing buzzer as the turn-signal lamps flash.
slightly then release it, the turn-signal [Vehicle equipped with the multi informa-
lamps and indication lamp in the instru- tion display - type 1]
Refer to “Changing the turn-signal sound”
ment cluster will flash 3 times.
on page 5-18.
[Vehicle equipped with the multi informa-
tion display - type 2]
to consult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Au-

ECO mode switch*
NOTE While the ECO mode is working, an ECO Fog lamp switch
mode indicator will be turned on.
l On vehicles equipped with the emergency
stop signal system, while the hazard warning Front fog lamp switch*
lamps are blinking due to having manually
The front fog lamps can be operated while
pushed the switch, the emergency stop signal
system does not operate. the headlamps or tail lamps are on. Turn the
Refer to “Emergency stop signal system” on knob in the “ON” direction to turn on the
front fog lamps. An indication lamp in the in-
5 page 6-62.
strument cluster will also come on. Turn the
knob in the “OFF” direction to turn off the
ECO mode switch* front fog lamps. The knob will automatically
return to its original position when you re-
ECO mode is an eco-driving support system lease it.
which automatically controls the engine, air
conditioning system and 4WD system (4WD
vehicles only) and S-AWC (if so equipped) to NOTE
improve fuel efficiency.
Refer to “Electronically controlled 4WD sys- l Even if the ECO mode is selected, after turn-
ing off the ignition switch or the operation
tem” on page 6-46. mode and turning the vehicle on again, the
Refer to “S-AWC (Super-All Wheel Con- ECO mode is set to OFF.
trol)” on page 6-49 l Even if the ECO mode is operating, you can
Refer to “Automatic climate control air con- select normal operation of the air condition-
ditioner” on page 7-05. er.
The ECO mode starts working by pressing
the ECO mode switch when the ignition On vehicles equipped with the Smartphone- NOTE
switch or operation mode is in ON. Push the link Display Audio (SDA) or the Smart-
switch again and the ECO mode will cancel. phone-link Display Audio (SDA) navigation l The front fog lamps are automatically turned
off when the headlamps or tail lamps are
system, it is possible to change the setting by
turned off. To turn the front fog lamps on
means of screen operations.
again, turn the knob in the “ON” direction
after turning on the headlamps or tail lamps.
tails.

Wiper and washer switch
NOTE Turn the knob once in the “ON” direction to NOTE

turn on the front fog lamps. Turn the knob
l Do not use fog lamps except in conditions of once more in the “ON” direction to turn on l To turn the rear fog lamp on again, turn the
fog, otherwise excessive lamp glare may knob twice in the “ON” direction after turn-
the rear fog lamp. To turn the rear fog lamp
temporarily blind oncoming vehicle drivers. ing on the headlamps. (Vehicle with front
off, turn the knob once in the “OFF” direc- fog lamps)
tion. Turn the knob once more in the “OFF”
Rear fog lamp switch direction to turn off the front fog lamps. The
The rear fog lamp can be operated when the knob will automatically return to its original Wiper and washer switch 5
headlamps or front fog lamps (if so equipped) position when you release it.
turn on. CAUTION
An indication lamp in the instrument cluster
comes on when the rear fog lamp is turned l If the washer is used in cold weather, the
washer fluid sprayed against the glass may
on. freeze, which may hinder visibility. Warm
the glass with the defroster or rear window
[Vehicle without front fog lamps] demister before using the washer.
Turn the knob once in the “ON” direction to
turn on the rear fog lamp. To turn the rear fog Windscreen wipers
lamp off, turn the knob once in the “OFF” di-
rection. The knob will automatically return to
its original position when you release it. NOTE
[Vehicle with front fog lamps] NOTE l To ensure a clear rearward view, the rear
window wiper will automatically perform
l The rear fog lamp is automatically turned off several continuous operations if the gearshift
when the headlamps or front fog lamps (if so lever or the selector lever is put in the “R”
equipped) are turned off. position while the windscreen wipers are op-
l To turn the rear fog lamp on again, turn the erating.
knob once in the “ON” direction after turn- Refer to “Rear window wiper and washer”
ing on the headlamps. (Vehicle without front on page 5-73.
fog lamps)
The windscreen wipers can be operated with
the ignition switch or the operation mode is
in ON or ACC.

If the blades are frozen to the windscreen or If the lever is put in the “AUTO” position, CAUTION
rear window, do not operate the wipers until the rain sensor (A) will detect the extent of
the ice has melted and the blades are freed, rain (or snow, other moisture, dust, etc.) and • When cleaning the outside surface of the
windscreen, if you touch on top of the
otherwise the wiper motor may be damaged. the wipers will operate automatically.
rain sensor.
Keep the lever in the “OFF” position if the When cleaning the outside surface of the
•
windscreen is dirty and the weather is dry. windscreen, if you wipe with a cloth on
Wiper operation under these conditions can top of the rain sensor.
scratch the windscreen and damage the wip-
5 ers.
•
•
When using an automatic car wash.
A physical shock is applied to the wind-
screen.
• A physical shock is applied to the rain
sensor.
NOTE
l To protect the rubber parts of the wipers, this
operation of the wipers does not take place
MIST- Misting function
even if the lever is put in the “AUTO” posi-
The wipers will operate once. tion when the vehicle is stationary and the
OFF- Off ambient temperature is about 0 °C or lower.
l Do not cover the sensor by affixing a sticker
AU- Auto-wiper control or label to the windscreen. Also, do not put
TO- Rain sensor any water-repellent coating on the wind-
CAUTION
The wipers will automatically oper- screen. The rain sensor would not be able to
ate depending on the degree of wet- l With the ignition switch or the operation detect the extent of rain, and the wipers
ness on the windscreen. mode in ON and lever in the “AUTO” posi- might stop working normally.
tion, the wipers may automatically operate l In the following cases, the rain sensor may
LO- Slow in the situations described below. be malfunctioning.
If your hands get trapped, you could suffer For further information, we recommend you
HI- Fast
injuries or the wipers could malfunction. Be to consult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Au-
Rain sensor sure to turn the ignition switch to the “OFF” thorized Service Point.
Can only be used when the ignition switch or position or put the operation mode in OFF, • When the wipers operate at a constant in-
or move lever to the “OFF” position to deac- terval despite changes in the extent of
the operation mode is in ON.
tivate the rain sensor. rain.

NOTE With the lever in the “AUTO” position, it is NOTE

possible to adjust the sensitivity of the rain
• When the wipers do not operate even sensor by turning the knob (B). For further information, we recommend you
though it is raining. to consult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Au-
l The wipers may automatically operate when thorized Service Point.
things such as insects or foreign objects are On vehicles equipped with the Smartphone-
affixed to the windscreen on top of the rain link Display Audio (SDA) or the Smart-
sensor or when the windscreen is frozen. phone-link Display Audio (SDA) navigation
Objects affixed to the windscreen will stop
the wipers when the wipers cannot remove
5
them. To operate the wipers again, move the owner’s manual for details.
lever in the “LO” or “HI” position.
Also, the wipers may operate automatically
due to strong direct sunlight or electromag- Misting function
netic wave. To stop the wipers, place the lev- Move the lever in the direction of the arrow
er in the “OFF” position. and release, to operate the wipers once.
l Contact a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Author- Use this function when you are driving in
ized Service Point when replacing the wind- “+”- Higher sensitivity to rain mist or drizzle.
screen or reinforcing the glass around the The wipers will operate once if the lever is
sensor. “-”- Lower sensitivity to rain
raised to the “MIST” position and released
when the ignition switch or the operation
To adjust the sensitivity of the rain sensor NOTE mode is in the “ON” or “ACC” position. The
l It is possible to activate the following func- wipers will continue to operate while the lev-
tions. er is held in the “MIST” position.
• Automatic operation (rain droplet sensi-
tive) can be changed to intermittent opera-
tion (vehicle-speed sensitive).
• Automatic operation (rain droplet sensi-
tive) can be changed to intermittent opera-
tion (except vehicle-speed sensitive).

The wipers will operate once if the lever is On vehicles equipped with a headlamp wash- NOTE
moved to the “AUTO” position and the knob er, while the headlamps are on, the headlamp
(C) is turned in the “+” direction when the ig- washer will operate once together with the l It is possible to modify functions as follows:
nition switch is in the “ON” position or the windscreen washer. • Causing the wiper never to operate when
washer fluid is sprayed.
operation mode is in ON. Also, except for vehicles for Russia, Kazakh-
• Except for vehicles for Russia, Kazakh-
stan, Belarus, Ukraine and Moldova, by re- stan, Belarus, Ukraine and Moldova, de-
leasing the lever soon after pulling it towards activating the intelligent washer.
you, the washer fluids will be sprayed several
5 times while the wipers are operating several
• Except for vehicles for Russia, Kazakh-
stan, Belarus, Ukraine and Moldova, de-
times. (Intelligent washer) Then about 6 sec- activating the function that operates the
wipers once more about 6 seconds later.
onds later, wipers operate once more.
• Vehicles for Russia, Kazakhstan, Belarus,
Intelligent washer will stop operating with Ukraine and Moldova, activating the in-
any operation of the lever. telligent washer.
• Vehicles for Russia, Kazakhstan, Belarus,
Ukraine and Moldova, the wipers can be
set to operate again after about 6 seconds.
Windscreen washer to consult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Au-
The windscreen washer can be operated with On vehicles equipped with the Smartphone-
the ignition switch or the operation mode is link Display Audio (SDA) or the Smart-
in ON or ACC. phone-link Display Audio (SDA) navigation
The washer fluid will be sprayed onto the system, screen operations can be used to
windscreen by pulling the lever towards you. make the adjustment. Refer to the separate
When the wipers are not in operation or in in-
termittent operation, by pulling the lever to-
wards you, the wipers will operate several CAUTION
times while the washer fluid is being sprayed. l If the washer is used in cold weather, the
Except for vehicles for Russia, Kazakhstan, washer fluid sprayed against the glass may
Belarus, Ukraine and Moldova, then about 6 freeze resulting in poor visibility. Heat the
seconds later, wipers operate once more. glass with the defroster or demister before
using the washer.

Rear window wiper and wash- NOTE NOTE

er l The rear window wiper will automatically l The interval for intermittent operation can be
The rear window wiper and washer switch perform several continuous operations if the adjusted.
can be operated with the ignition switch or gearshift lever or the selector lever is put in For further information, we recommend you
the “R” position while the windscreen wip- to consult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Au-
the operation mode in ON or ACC.
ers or the rear window wiper is operating. thorized Service Point.
(automatic operation mode) On vehicles equipped with the Smartphone-
After the automatic operation, the rear win-
dow wiper will stop operating if the knob is
5
in the “OFF” position. If the knob is in the system, screen operations can be used to
“INT” position, the rear window wiper will make the adjustment. Refer to the separate
return to the intermittent operation. owner’s manual for details.
It is possible to set the rear window wiper to
perform the automatic operation only if the
gearshift lever or the selector lever is put in Headlamp washer switch*
the “R” position while the rear window wip- The headlamp washer can be operated with
er is operating with the knob in the “INT”
the ignition switch or the operation mode in
position.
For further information, we recommend you ON or ACC and the lamp switch at the “ ”
INT - The wiper operates continu- to consult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Au- position.
ously for several seconds then thorized Service Point.
operates intermittently at in- l If the knob is in the “OFF” position, turn the Push the button once and the washer fluid
knob to the “INT” position twice quickly to will be sprayed on to the headlamps.
tervals of about every 8 sec- operate the rear window wiper continuously.
onds (continuous operation mode)
OFF - Off Turn the knob to the “OFF” position to stop
the rear window wiper continuous operation.
- The washer fluid will be
sprayed onto the rear window
when the knob is turned fully
in either direction.
The wipers operate automati-
cally several times while the
washer fluid is being sprayed.

Wiper de-icer switch*
NOTE l Avoid using the washer continuously for Rear window demister
more than 20 seconds. Do not operate
l If the ignition switch or the operation mode the washer when the fluid reservoir is switch
is in ON or ACC and the headlamps are on,
empty.
the headlamp washer operates together with The rear window demister switch can be op-
the windscreen washer the first time the Otherwise, the motor may burn out.
l Periodically check the level of washer erated when the engine is running.
windscreen washer lever is pulled.
fluid in the reservoir and refill if re- Push the switch to turn on the rear window
quired. demister. It will be turned off automatically
5 Precautions to observe when During cold weather, add a recommen- in about 15 to 20 minutes depending on the
using wipers and washers ded washer solution that will not freeze outside temperature. To turn off the demister
in the washer reservoir. Failure to do so while it is operating, push the switch again.
l If the moving wipers become blocked The indication lamp (A) will illuminate while
partway through a sweep by ice or other could result in loss of washer function
and frost damage to the system compo- the demister is on.
deposits on the glass, the wipers may
temporarily stop operating to prevent the nents.
motor from overheating. In this case,
park the vehicle in a safe place, turn the Wiper de-icer switch*
ignition switch to the “LOCK” position
or put the operation mode in OFF, and The rear window demister switch can be op-
then remove the ice or other deposits. erated when the engine is running.
Because the wipers will start operating When the front wipers have frozen to the
again after the wiper motor cools down, windscreen at the parked positions, turning
so check that the wipers operate before on this switch will heat the windscreen to
using them. make the wipers operable. Press the rear win-
l Do not use the wipers when the glass is dow demister switch and the deicer will oper-
dry. ate.
They may scratch the glass surface and NOTE
the blades wear out prematurely.
l Before using the wipers in cold weather, NOTE l On vehicles equipped with heated mirrors,
when the rear window demister switch is
check that the wiper blades are not fro- l The wiper de-icer is activated/deactivated,
pressed, the outside rear-view mirrors are
zen onto the glass. The motor may burn depending on the operation of the rear win-
defogged or defrosted. Refer to “Heated mir-
out if the wipers are used with the blades dow demister. Refer to “Rear window de-
ror” on page 6-14.
mister switch” on page 5-74.
frozen onto the glass.

Heated windscreen switch*
NOTE NOTE The indication lamp (A) will illuminate while

the heated windscreen is on.
l On vehicles equipped with the wiper de-icer, l Do not allow objects to touch the inside of
when the rear window demister switch is the rear window glass, damaged or broken
pushed, the window glass becomes warm wires may result.
and the wipers become operable. Refer to
“Wiper de-icer switch” on page 5-74.
l It is possible to change the setting to make Heated windscreen switch*
the rear window demister operate automati-
cally when ambient temperature becomes In cold weather windscreen can be heated by
5
low while the engine is running, even if you electrical-heat units.
do not push the rear window demister
switch. It operates automatically only once
It will speed-up removal of frost and conden-
after turning the ignition switch to the “ON” sate.
position or putting the operation mode in po- The heated windscreen switch can be operat-
sition or putting the operation mode in ON. ed when the engine is running and the outside
If you choose this setting, the heated mirrors temperature is about 5 °C or less.
(if so equipped) and wiper de-icer (if so Push the switch to turn on the heated wind- CAUTION
equipped) will also operate automatically at screen. It will be turned off automatically in
the same time. l While heated windscreen is operating, the
about 5 to 10 minutes depending on the out- outer surface of the windscreen will be hot.
side temperature. To turn off the heated wind- Do not touch the windscreen to prevent
screen while it is operating, push the switch burns.
On vehicles equipped with the Smartphone- again.
NOTE
system, screen operations can be used to l Remove snow before use of the heated
make the adjustment. Refer to the separate windscreen. It is not possible to melt large
owner’s manual for details. amount of accumulated snow by the heated
l The demister switch is not to melt snow but windscreen.
to clear mist. Remove snow before use of l To avoid the battery runs out, do not use the
the demister switch. heated windscreen continuously.
l When cleaning the inside of the rear win-
dow, use a soft cloth and wipe gently along
the heater wires, being careful not to damage
the wires.

Heated steering wheel switch*
Heated steering wheel The indication lamp (A) will illuminate while CAUTION
the heated steering wheel is on.
switch* l Long use of the heated steering wheel with-
out running the engine may run down the
The heated steering wheel will warm the grip battery.
portions of the left and right on the steering
wheel by internal heater.
Horn switch
5 Press the steering wheel on or around the
“ ” mark.
CAUTION
l If the following types of persons use the
heated steering wheel, they might become
too hot or receive minor burns (red skin,
heat blisters, etc.):
: Heating range
• Elderly or ill people
The heated steering wheel can be operated • People with sensitive skin
when the ignition switch or operation mode is • Excessively tired people
in ON. • People under the influence of sleep in-
ducing medication (cold medicine, etc.)
l If water or any other liquid is spilled on the
Push the switch to turn on the heated steering steering wheel, allow it to dry thoroughly
wheel. It will be turned off automatically in before attempting to use the heated steering
about 30 minutes. To turn off the heated wheel. Turn the heated steering wheel off
steering wheel while operating, push the immediately if it appears to be malfunction-
switch again. ing during use.

Starting and driving
Economical driving............................................................................. 6-02 Anti-lock brake system (ABS)............................................................6-63

Driving, alcohol and drugs..................................................................6-02 Electric power steering system (EPS).................................................6-65
Safe driving techniques.......................................................................6-03 Active stability control (ASC)*.......................................................... 6-66
Running-in recommendations............................................................. 6-04 Cruise control*....................................................................................6-68
Parking brake...................................................................................... 6-05 Speed Limiter*....................................................................................6-72 6
Parking................................................................................................ 6-10 Adaptive Cruise Control System (ACC)*...........................................6-78
Steering wheel height and reach adjustment.......................................6-10 Forward Collision Mitigation System (FCM)*...................................6-89
Inside rear-view mirror........................................................................6-11 Ultrasonic misacceleration Mitigation System (UMS)*.....................6-99
Outside rear-view mirrors................................................................... 6-12 Blind Spot Warning (BSW) (with Lane Change Assist)*.................6-104
Ignition switch*...................................................................................6-15 Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)*....................................................6-108
Engine switch*....................................................................................6-16 Lane Departure Warning (LDW)*.................................................... 6-110
Steering wheel lock.............................................................................6-19 Speed Limit Display function (Vehicles equipped with
Starting and stopping the engine.........................................................6-21 Smartphone-link Display Audio (SDA) navigation system)........ 6-114
Auto Stop & Go (AS&G) system*..................................................... 6-26 Tyre pressure monitoring system (TPMS)*...................................... 6-114
Manual transmission*......................................................................... 6-31 Reversing sensor system*................................................................. 6-121
Automatic transmission INVECS-II 6A/T (Intelligent & Parking sensors (Front/Rear)*.......................................................... 6-125
Innovative Vehicle Electronic Control System II)*........................6-32 Rear-view camera*........................................................................... 6-129
Automatic transmission INVECS-III 6CVT (Intelligent & Multi Around Monitor*.................................................................... 6-132
Innovative Vehicle Electronic Control System III)*.......................6-39 Cargo loads....................................................................................... 6-140
Electronically controlled 4WD system*............................................. 6-46 Trailer towing....................................................................................6-141
S-AWC (Super All Wheel Control)*.................................................. 6-49
4-wheel drive operation...................................................................... 6-53
Inspection and maintenance following rough road operation.............6-55
Cautions on handling of 4-wheel drive vehicles.................................6-55
Braking................................................................................................6-56
Brake auto hold*................................................................................. 6-57
Hill start assist*...................................................................................6-60
Brake assist system*........................................................................... 6-61
Emergency stop signal system*.......................................................... 6-62
OGFE20E1
Economical driving
Economical driving The drive mode-selector should be set to Cargo loads

“4WD ECO” (Electronically controlled
For economical driving, there are some tech- 4WD) or “AWC ECO” (S-AWC) when driv- Do not drive with unnecessary articles in the
nical requirements that have to be met. The ing 4WD vehicles to obtain best possible fuel luggage compartment. Especially during city
prerequisite for low fuel consumption is a economy. driving where frequent starting and stopping
properly adjusted engine. In order to achieve is necessary, the increased weight of the vehi-
longer life of the vehicle and the most eco- City traffic cle will greatly affect fuel consumption. Also
nomical operation, we recommend you to avoid driving with unnecessary luggage or
Frequent starting and stopping increases the carriers, etc., on the roof; the increased air re-
have the vehicle checked at regular intervals
6 in accordance with the service standards.
average fuel consumption. Use roads with
smooth traffic flow whenever possible. When
sistance will increase fuel consumption.
Fuel economy and generation of exhaust gas
and noise are highly influenced by personal
driving on congested roads, avoid use of a Cold engine starting
low shift position at high engine speeds.
driving habits as well as the particular operat-
Starting of a cold engine consumes more
ing conditions. The following points should
Idling fuel.
be observed in order to minimize wear of
Unnecessary fuel consumption is also caused
brakes, tyres and engine as well as to reduce The vehicle consumes fuel even during by keeping a hot engine running. After the
environmental pollution. idling. Avoid extended idling whenever pos- engine is started, commence driving as soon
sible. as possible.
Accelerating and decelerating
Speed Air conditioning
Drive according to the traffic conditions and
avoid sudden starts, sudden acceleration and At higher vehicle speed, more fuel is con- The use of the air conditioning will increase
sudden braking, as they will increase fuel sumed. Avoid driving at full speed. Even a the fuel consumption.
consumption. slight release of the accelerator pedal will
save a significant amount of fuel. Driving, alcohol and drugs
Shifting
Tyre inflation pressure Drunk driving is one of the most frequent
Shift only at an appropriate speed and engine
speed. Always use the highest shift position causes of accidents.
Check the tyre inflation pressures at regular
possible. intervals. Low tyre inflation pressure increa-
ses road resistance and fuel consumption. In
addition, low tyre pressures adversely affect
tyre wear and driving stability.
6-02 Starting and driving OGFE20E1
Safe driving techniques
Your driving ability can be seriously im- Floor mats l Make sure that infants and small chil-
paired even with blood alcohol levels far be- dren are properly restrained in accord-
low the legal minimum. If you have been WARNING ance with the laws and regulations, and
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated for maximum protection in case of an
non-drinking driver, call a cab or a friend, or l Keep floor mats clear of the pedals by accident.
correctly laying floor mats that are suita-
use public transportation.
ble for the vehicle.
l Prevent children from playing in the lug-
Drinking coffee or taking a cold shower will To prevent the floor mats from slipping
gage compartment. It is quite dangerous
not make you sober. out of position, securely retain them using to allow them to play there while the ve-
Similarly, prescription and nonprescription the hook etc. hicle is moving.
drugs affect your alertness, perception and re- Note that laying a floor mat over a pedal 6
action time. Consult with your doctor or or laying one floor mat on top of another Loading luggage
pharmacist before driving while under the in- can obstruct pedal operation and lead to a
fluence of any of these medications. serious accident. When loading luggage, be careful not to load
above the height of seats. This is dangerous
not only because rearward vision will be ob-
WARNING structed, but also the luggage may be projec-
l NEVER DRINK AND DRIVE. ted into the passenger compartment under
Your perceptions are less accurate, your hard braking.
reflexes are slower and your judgment is
impaired.
Safe driving techniques

Driving safety and protection against injury
cannot be fully ensured. However, we recom-
mend that you pay extra attention to the fol-
Carrying children in the vehi-
lowing: cle
Seat belts l Never leave your vehicle unattended

with the key and children inside the ve-
Before starting the vehicle, make sure that hicle. Children may play with the driv-
you and your passengers have fastened your ing controls and this could lead to an ac-
seat belts. cident.
OGFE20E1 Starting and driving 6-03

Running-in recommendations
Running-in recommendations
During the running-in period for the first 1,000 km (620 miles), it is advisable to drive your new vehicle using the following precautions as a
guideline to aid long life as well as future economy and performance.
l Do not race the engine at high speeds.
l Avoid rapid starting, accelerating, braking and prolonged high-speed running.
l Keep to the running-in speed limit shown below.
Please note that the legal speed limits displayed must be adhered to.
l Do not exceed loading limits.
6 l Refrain from towing a trailer.
Vehicles with M/T

Shift point Speed limit
1st gear 30 km/h (19 mph)
2nd gear 60 km/h (37 mph)
3rd gear 90 km/h (56 mph)
4th gear 115 km/h (71 mph)
6th gear -
Vehicles with A/T


Parking brake

Vehicles with CVT

6
“D” (DRIVE) 120 km/h (74 mph)
1st position 30 km/h (19 mph)
2nd position 50 km/h (30 mph)
3rd position 70 km/h (43 mph)
with shift paddles
4th position 90 km/h (56 mph)
Parking brake
To park the vehicle, first bring it to a com-
plete stop, firmly apply the parking brake to
hold the vehicle.
Make sure the brake warning lamp is illumi-
nated.

Parking brake
Lever type parking brake* NOTE CAUTION

l If the parking brake does not hold the vehi- l Before driving, be sure that the parking
To apply cle stationary after the foot brake is released, brake is fully released and brake warning
have your vehicle checked immediately. lamp is off.
If you drive without the parking brake fully
To release released, the warning display will appear on
the information screen in the multi informa-
tion display and a buzzer sound when the ve-
hicle speed exceeds 8 km/h (5 mph).
If a vehicle is driven without releasing the
6 parking brake, the brake will be overheated,
resulting in ineffective braking and possible
brake failure.
Warning lamp
1- Firmly depress and hold the brake pedal,
then pull the lever up without pushing
the button at the end of hand grip.
1- Firmly depress and hold the brake pedal,
CAUTION then pull the lever up slightly.
Warning display
2- Push the button at the end of hand grip.
l When you intend to apply the parking brake, 3- Lower the lever fully.
firmly press the brake pedal to bring the ve-
hicle to a complete stop before pulling the
parking brake lever.
Pulling the parking brake lever with the ve-
hicle moving could make the rear wheels
lock up, thereby making the vehicle unsta-
ble. It could also make the parking brake
l If the brake warning lamp does not extin-
guish when the parking brake is fully re-
malfunction. leased, the brake system may be abnormal.
Have your vehicle checked immediately.
For details, refer to “Brake warning lamp”
NOTE on page 5-53.
l Apply sufficient force to the parking brake
lever to hold the vehicle stationary after the
foot brake is released.

Parking brake
Electric parking brake* 2. Pull up the Electric parking brake switch NOTE
while depressing the brake pedal.
The Electric parking brake is the system that l If the Electric parking brake must be applied
applies the parking brake by the electric mo- in an emergency situation, pull and hold the
When the parking brake is applied, the brake
tor. Electric parking brake switch to apply the
warning lamp in the instrument cluster and Electric parking brake. At that time, the fol-
the indication lamp (A) on the Electric park- lowing warning display will appear in the
NOTE ing brake switch will come on. multi-information display and a buzzer will
sound, however you should continue to pull
l You may hear an operation noise from the
and hold the Electric parking brake switch.
vehicle body when operating the Electric CAUTION
parking brake. This does not indicate a mal- 6
function and the Electric parking brake is l While the vehicle is in motion, do not apply
operating normally. the Electric parking brake. Doing so may
l When the battery is weak or dead, the Elec- cause overheating and/or premature wear of
tric parking brake cannot be applied or re- brake parts, reducing brake performance.
leased. Refer to “Emergency starting” on
page 8-09.
l You may feel the brake pedal moving when NOTE l When parking on steep grades, pull up the
Electric parking brake switch twice (once
operating the Electric parking brake.
This does not indicate a malfunction. l In the following conditions, the brake warn- more after the operation is completed once).
ing lamp will illuminate for approximately The maximum effect of the parking brake
15 seconds and then go off. will be obtained.
To apply • While the electric parking brake is ap- l If the parking brake does not hold the vehi-
plied, the ignition switch is turned to the cle stationary after the foot brake is released,
“LOCK” position or the operation mode contact a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Author-
is put in OFF. ized Service Point.
• While the ignition switch is in the l When the ignition switch or the operation
“LOCK” position or the operation mode mode is other than ON, if the Electric park-
is in OFF, the Electric parking brake ing brake is applied, the Electric parking
switch is pulled up. brake indication lamp comes on for a while.
1. Stop the vehicle completely.

Parking brake
NOTE To release When the parking brake is released, the brake

warning lamp and the indication lamp on the
l If the Electric parking brake switch is re- Electric parking brake switch go off.
peatedly operated in a short time, the follow- Manual operation
ing warning display will appear in the multi-
information display and the Electric parking Before driving, be sure that the Electric park-
brake will temporarily stop working. In such ing brake is released and the brake warning
case, wait for approximately 1 minute until lamp is off.
the warning display disappears, and operate
the Electric parking brake switch again.
CAUTION
6
l After the Electric parking brake switch has
been operated to apply or release the Electric
parking brake, if the brake warning lamp and
the indicator on the Electric parking brake
switch remain blinking or the Electric park-
ing brake warning lamp remains illuminated,
l The brake warning lamp and the indication the Electric parking brake system may be
lamp on the Electric parking brake switch malfunctioning and the Electric parking
may blink. This does not indicate a malfunc-
1. Make sure that the ignition switch or the
operation mode is ON. brake may not be applied or released. Imme-
tion, the lamps go off when/if the Electric diately park your vehicle in a safe place and
parking brake is released. 2. Press down the Electric parking brake contact the nearest MITSUBISHI MOTORS
l Depending on the situation, the Electric switch while depressing the brake pedal. Authorized Service Point.
parking brake may be applied automatically.
l If a vehicle is driven without releasing the
Refer to “Brake auto hold” on page 6-57. Automatic operation Electric parking brake, the brake will over-
When the accelerator pedal is depressed heat, resulting in ineffective braking and
slowly while all of the following conditions possible brake failure.
are met, the Electric parking brake is auto- l If the brake warning lamp does not go off af-
ter the parking brake has been released, the
matically released. brake system may be malfunctioning.
l The engine is running. Contact the nearest MITSUBISHI MOTORS
l The selector lever is in the “D” (Drive) Authorized Service Point.
or the “R” (Reverse) position.
l The driver’s seat belt is fastened.

Parking brake
CAUTION NOTE If there is a malfunction in the system, the

warning lamp will come on. In addition, the
l If the acceleration of the vehicle seems ab- l If you start driving without releasing the warning display appears on the information
normally slow after the vehicle has been Electric parking brake, the warning display
screen in the multi information display.
parked with the Electric parking brake ap- will appear.
plied in cold weather, stop the vehicle in a Under normal conditions, the warning lamp
safe place, then apply and release the Elec- only comes on when the ignition switch is
tric parking brake. If the vehicle acceleration turned to the “ON” position or the operation
is still slow, contact the nearest mode is put in ON and goes off a few sec-
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Serv- onds later.
ice Point.
6
l If the driver’s foot contacts the accelerator CAUTION
NOTE pedal in the condition that the Electric park-
l When the Electric parking brake warning
ing brake can be released by an automatic
l When the ignition switch or the operation lamp does not illuminate or remains illumi-
operation, the Electric parking brake may be
mode is other than ON, the parking brake nated when the ignition switch is turned to
released automatically.
cannot be released. the “ON” position or the operation mode is
l If the Electric parking brake does not auto- put in ON, or comes on while driving, the
matically release, it may be released by man- Warning display Electric parking brake may not be applied or
ual operation. released. Immediately contact the nearest
Warning lamp MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Serv-
l When the selector lever is other than “P”
(Park) position, if you try to release the ice Point. For details, refer to “Electric park-
Electric parking brake without depressing ing brake warning lamp” on page 5-54.
the brake pedal, the warning display will ap- When parking your vehicle while the Elec-
pear. tric parking brake warning lamp is illumina-
ted, park the vehicle on level and stable
Warning display
ground, move the selector lever to the “P”
(Park) position and place chocks, blocks, or
stones behind and in front of the tyres to pre-
vent the vehicle from moving.

Parking
Parking On vehicles equipped with M/T, apply the WARNING

parking brake and place the gearshift lever
into the 1st position. l Leaving the engine running risks injury
To park the vehicle, firmly apply the parking or death from accidentally moving the
brake, and then move the gearshift lever to 1st On vehicles equipped with A/T or CVT, ap- gearshift lever (with M/T) or the selector
or “R” (Reverse) position for vehicles equip- ply the parking brake and place the selector lever (with A/T or CVT) or the accumula-
ped with M/T, or set the selector lever to “P” lever into the “P” (Park) position. tion of toxic exhaust fumes on the passen-
(Park) position for vehicles equipped with If necessary, apply chocks to wheels. ger compartment.
A/T or CVT.
NOTE Where you park
6 Parking on a hill
l If your vehicle is equipped with A/T or
CVT, be sure to apply the parking brake be- WARNING
To prevent the vehicle from rolling, follow fore moving selector lever to the “P” (Park)
these procedures: l Do not park your vehicle in areas where
position. If you move selector lever to the combustible materials such as dry grass
“P” (Park) position before applying the park- or leaves can come in contact with a hot
Parking on a downhill slope ing brake, it may be difficult to disengage exhaust, since a fire could occur.
selector lever from the “P” (Park) position
Turn the front wheels towards the kerb and when next you drive the vehicle, requiring
move the vehicle forward until the kerb side application of a strong force the selector lev- When leaving the vehicle
wheel gently touches the kerb. er to move from the “P” (Park) position.
On vehicles equipped with M/T, apply the Always carry the key and lock all doors and
parking brake and place the gearshift lever the tailgate when leaving the vehicle unatten-
Parking with the engine run-
into the “R” (Reverse) position. ded.
On vehicles equipped with A/T or CVT, ap-
ning Always try to park your vehicle in a well lit
ply the parking brake and place the selector area.
Never leave the engine running while you
lever into the “P” (Park) position. take a short sleep/rest. Also, never leave the
If necessary, apply chocks to wheels. engine running in a closed or poorly ventila- Steering wheel height and
Parking on an uphill slope ted place. reach adjustment
Turn the front wheels away from the kerb and 1. Release the lever while holding the
move the vehicle back until the kerb side steering wheel up.
wheel gently touches the kerb. 2. Adjust the steering wheel to the desired
position.

Inside rear-view mirror
3. Securely lock the steering wheel by pull- Inside rear-view mirror To adjust the vertical mirror
ing the lever fully upward. position
Adjust the rear-view mirror only after making
any seat adjustments so you have a clear It is possible to move the mirror up and down
view to the rear of the vehicle. to adjust its position.
Type 1
A- Locked
Type 2
B- Release
WARNING
To adjust the mirror position
l Do not attempt to adjust the steering
wheel while you are driving the vehicle.
It is possible to move the mirror up/down and
left/right to adjust its position.
WARNING
l Do not attempt to adjust the rear-view
mirror while driving. This can be danger-
ous.
Always adjust the mirror before driving.
Adjust the rear-view mirror to maximize the

view through the rear window.

Outside rear-view mirrors
To reduce the glare Type 2 Outside rear-view mirrors

When the headlamps of the vehicles behind
Type 1 you are very bright, the reflection factor of To adjust the mirror position
the rear-view mirror is automatically changed The outside rear-view mirrors can be operat-
The lever (A) at the bottom of the mirror can to reduce the glare. ed when the ignition switch is in the “ON” or
be used to adjust the mirror to reduce the
“ACC” position or the operation mode is put
glare from the headlamps of vehicles behind
in ON or ACC.
you during night driving.
6 WARNING
l Do not attempt to adjust the rear-view
mirrors while driving. This can be dan-
gerous.
Always adjust the mirrors before driving.
l Your vehicle is equipped with convex type
mirrors.
Please take into consideration, that ob-
jects you see in the mirror will look small-
When the ignition switch is turned to the er and farther away compared to a nor-
mal flat mirror.
“ON” position or the operation mode is put in Do not use this mirror to estimate dis-
1- Normal ON, the reflection factor of the mirror is au- tance of following vehicles when changing
2- Anti-glare tomatically changed. lanes.
NOTE
l Do not hang items on, or spray glass cleaner
on the sensor (1), as reduced sensitivity
could result.

1. Place the lever (A) to the same side as Retracting and extending the [For vehicles equipped with the mirror re-
the mirror whose adjustment is desired. outside mirrors tractor switch]
The outside mirror can be folded in towards Retracting and extending the
Except for vehicles equipped the side window to prevent damage when mirrors using the mirror retrac-
with the mirror retractor
switch
parking in narrow areas. tor switch
With the ignition switch in the “ON” or
CAUTION “ACC” position or the operation mode in ON
l Do not drive the vehicle with the mirror fol- or ACC, push the mirror retractor switch to
Vehicles equipped with the
ded in. retract the mirrors. Push it again to extend the 6
mirror retractor switch
The lack of rearward visibility normally pro- mirrors to their original positions.
vided by the mirror could lead to an acci-
dent.
After placing the ignition switch in the
“LOCK” position or the operation mode in
OFF, it is possible to retract and extend the
[Except for vehicles equipped with the mirrors using the mirror retractor switch for
mirror retractor switch] approximately 30 seconds.
Push the mirror towards the back of the vehi-
L- Left outside mirror adjustment cle with your hand to retract it in. When ex-
R- Right outside mirror adjustment tending the mirror, pull it out towards the
front of the vehicle until it clicks to lock in
2. Press the switch (B) to the left, right, up place.
or down to adjust the mirror position.
1- Up
2- Down
3- Right
4- Left
3. Return the lever (A) back to the middle
position (•).

CAUTION Retracting and extending the NOTE

mirrors without using the mir-
l It is possible to retract and extend the mir-
ror retractor switch • Automatically extend when the ignition
rors by hand. After retracting a mirror using switch is turned to the “ON” position or
the mirror retractor switch, however, you [Vehicles with keyless entry system] the operation mode is put in ON, and au-
should extend it by using the switch again, The mirrors automatically retract or extend tomatically retract when the driver’s door
not by hand. If you extended the mirror by when the doors are locked or unlocked using is opened after the ignition switch is
hand after retracting it using the switch, it turned to the “LOCK” position or the op-
would not properly lock in position. As a re-
the remote control switches of the keyless en- eration mode in put in OFF.
sult, the mirrors could move because of the try system. • Automatically extend when the vehicle
wind or vibration while you are driving, and Refer to “Keyless entry system” on page speed reaches 30 km/h (19 mph).
6 this may limit the driver’s rearward visibili- 3-04. • Deactivate the automatic extension func-
ty. [Vehicles equipped with keyless operation tion.
system]
The mirrors automatically retract or extend Heated mirror*
NOTE when the doors are locked or unlocked using
l Be careful not to get your hands trapped the keyless entry system or the keyless opera- To demist or defrost the outside rear-view
while a mirror is moving. tion function. mirrors, press the rear window demister
l If you move a mirror by hand or it moves af- Refer to “Keyless entry system” on page 3-04 switch.
ter hitting a person or object, you may not be The indication lamp (A) will illuminate while
able to return it to its original position using
or “Keyless operation system: To operate us-
ing the keyless operation function” on page the demister is on.
the mirror retractor switch. If this happens,
push the mirror retractor switch to place the 3-12.
mirror in its retracted position and then push
the switch again to return the mirror to its
original position.
NOTE
l When freezing has occurred and mirrors fail l Functions can be modified as stated below.
to operate as intended, please refrain from Consult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Author-
repeated pushing of the retractor switch as ized Service Point.
this action can result in burn-out of the mir- On vehicles equipped with the Smartphone-
ror motor circuits. link Display Audio (SDA) or the Smart-

Ignition switch*
The heater will be turned off automatically in Ignition switch* START
approximately 15 to 20 minutes depending
on the ambient temperature. The starter motor operates. After the engine
has started, release the key and it will auto-
matically return to the “ON” position.
NOTE
l Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic
immobilizer.
To start the engine, the ID code transmitted 6
by the transponder inside the key must
match the code registered in the immobilizer
computer.
Refer to “Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft
LOCK starting system)” on page 3-03.
NOTE The engine is stopped and the steering wheel

locked. The key can only be inserted and re-
ACC power auto-cutout func-
l The heated mirror can be set so that it can
tion
turn on automatically only once if the ambi- moved in this position.
ent temperature becomes low, when the igni- After approximately 30 minutes has elapsed
tion switch is turned to the “ON” position or ACC with the ignition switch in the “ACC” posi-
the operation mode is put in ON. tion, the function automatically cuts out the
For further information, we recommend you The engine is stopped, but the audio system power for the audio system and other electric
to consult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Au- and other electric devices can be operated.
devices that can be operated with that posi-
On vehicles equipped with the Smartphone- tion.
ON When the ignition switch is turned from the
phone-link Display Audio (SDA) navigation “ACC” position, the power is supplied again
system, screen operations can be used to All the vehicle’s electrical devices can be op- to those devices.
make the adjustment. Refer to the separate erated.
NOTE
l It is possible to modify functions as follows:

Engine switch*
NOTE For vehicles equipped with A/T or CVT, CAUTION

when removing the key, first set the selector
• The time until the power cuts out can be lever to the “P” (Park) position, and push the l Do not turn the key to the “START” position
changed to approximately 60 minutes. while the engine is running. Doing so could
key in at the “ACC” position and keep it de-
• The ACC power auto-cutout function can damage the starter motor.
be deactivated. pressed until it is turned to the “LOCK” posi-
For details, we recommend you to consult tion, and remove it.
a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Engine switch*
Service Point.
On vehicles equipped with the Smart- In order to prevent theft, the engine will not
phone-link Display Audio (SDA) or the
6 Smartphone-link Display Audio (SDA)
start unless a preregistered keyless operation
navigation system, screen operations can
key is used. (Engine immobilizer function)
be used to make the adjustment. If you are carrying the keyless operation key,
Refer to the separate owner’s manual for you can start the engine.
details.
To remove the key

For vehicles equipped with a M/T, when re-
moving the key, push the key in at the CAUTION
“ACC” position and keep it depressed until it
is turned to the “LOCK” position and remove l Do not remove the ignition key from the ig-
nition switch while driving. The steering
it. wheel will be locked, causing loss of con-
trol.
l If the engine is stopped while driving, the
brake servomechanism will cease to function
and braking efficiency will deteriorate. Also,
the power steering system will not function CAUTION
and it will require greater manual effort to l The indication lamp (A) will flash orange
operate the steering. when there is a problem or malfunction in
l Do not leave the key in the “ON” position the keyless operation system. Never drive if
for a long time when the engine is not run- the indication lamp on the engine switch is
ning, doing so will cause the battery to be flashing orange. Immediately contact a
discharged. MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Serv-
ice Point.

Engine switch*
CAUTION NOTE The indication lamp on the engine switch il-

luminates orange.
l If the engine switch operation is not smooth Warning lamp (mono-colour liquid crystal
and feels like it is sticking, do not operate display) ON
the switch. Immediately contact a
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Serv- All vehicle’s electrical devices can be operat-
ice Point. ed.
The indication lamp on the engine switch il-
luminates green. The indication lamp goes
NOTE Warning display (colour liquid crystal dis- off when the engine is running.
l When operating the engine switch, press the play) 6
switch all the way in. If the switch is not
fully pressed, the engine may not start or the NOTE
operation mode may not change. If the en-
gine switch is pressed correctly, there is no
l Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic
immobilizer.
need to hold the engine switch down. To start the engine, the ID code transmitted
l When the battery in the keyless operation by the transponder inside the key must
key has worn out, or the keyless operation match the code registered in the immobilizer
key is out of the vehicle, a warning lamp computer. Refer to “Electronic immobilizer
will blink for 5 seconds or a warning display Operation mode of the engine (Anti-theft starting system)” on page 3-03.
will appear. switch and its function
OFF
The indication lamp on the engine switch
turns off.
The operation mode cannot be put in OFF
when the selector lever is in any position oth-
er than the “P” (Park) position (A/T, CVT).
ACC
Electrical devices such as the audio and ac-
cessory socket can be operated.

Engine switch*
Changing the operation mode CAUTION NOTE

If you press the engine switch without de- l When the battery is disconnected, the cur- 2 One of the other causes could be low
pressing the brake pedal (A/T, CVT) or the rent operation mode is memorized. After re- . battery voltage. If this occurs, the
clutch pedal (M/T), you can change the oper- connecting the battery, the memorized mode keyless entry system, keyless opera-
ation mode in the order of OFF, ACC, ON, is selected automatically. Before disconnect-
tion function, and steering wheel lock
OFF. ing the battery for repair or replacement,
make sure to put the operation mode in OFF. will also not operate. Contact a
Be careful if you are not sure which opera- MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized
tion mode the vehicle is in when the battery Service Point.
is run down.
6 l The operation mode cannot be changed from
OFF to ACC or ON if the keyless operation ACC power auto-cutout func-
key is not detected to be in the vehicle. Refer tion
to “Keyless operation system: operating
range for starting the engine” on page 3-11. After approximately 30 minutes have elapsed
l When there is the keyless operation key in with the operation mode in ACC, the func-
the vehicle and the operation mode is not tion automatically cuts out the power for the
changed, the battery in the keyless operation audio system and other electric devices that
key may have worn out. Refer to “Warning can be operated with that position.
activation” on page 3-15. When the engine switch operate again, the
CAUTION power is supplied again.
l When the engine is not running, put the op- NOTE
eration mode in OFF. Leaving the operation
mode in ON or ACC for a long time when l If the operation mode cannot be changed to NOTE
the engine is not running may cause the bat- OFF, perform the following procedure. l It is possible to modify functions as follows:
tery to be discharged, making it impossible 1 Move the selector lever to the “P” • The time until the power cuts out can be
to start the engine, lock and unlock the steer- . (PARK) position, and then change changed to approximately 60 minutes.
ing wheel. the operation mode to OFF. (For ve-
hicles with A/T or CVT)

Steering wheel lock
NOTE When the operation mode is in any mode oth- To lock

er than OFF, if you try to lock the doors and
• The ACC power auto-cutout function can tailgate by pressing the driver’s or front pas- Remove the key at the “LOCK” position.
be deactivated.
senger’s door lock/unlock switch, or the tail- Turn the steering wheel until it is locked.
For details, we recommend you to consult
a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized gate LOCK switch, a warning lamp will blink
Service Point. or warning display will appear, and the outer To unlock
On vehicles equipped with the Smart- buzzer will sound and you cannot lock the
phone-link Display Audio (SDA) or the doors and tailgate. Turn the key to the “ACC” position while
Smartphone-link Display Audio (SDA) moving the steering wheel slightly right and
navigation system, screen operations can Operation mode ON reminder left. 6
be used to make the adjustment. system
Refer to the separate owner’s manual for
details. If the driver’s door is opened with the engine
stopped and the operation mode in any mode
other than OFF, the operation mode ON re-
Operation mode OFF reminder minder inner buzzer sounds intermittently to
system remind you to put the operation mode in
OFF.
Warning lamp (mono-colour liquid crystal dis-
play) Warning display (colour liquid crystal display)
CAUTION
Warning display (colour liquid crystal display) l Remove the key when leaving the vehicle.
In some countries, it is prohibited to leave
the key in the vehicle when parked.
Steering wheel lock
[For vehicles equipped with keyless opera-
[Except vehicles equipped with keyless op-
tion system]
eration system]

Steering wheel lock
To lock l Put the operation mode in ACC. NOTE

l Start the engine.
After pressing the engine switch and opera- l When the steering wheel does not unlock,
the warning lamp will blink and the inner
tion mode in OFF, when driver’s door is
opened, the steering wheel is locked.
CAUTION buzzer will sound and the warning lamp illu-
minates. Press the engine switch again while
l If the engine is stopped while driving, do not moving the steering wheel slightly right and
open a door or press the LOCK switch on left.
NOTE the remote control switch until the vehicle
stops in a safe place. This could cause the Warning lamp (mono-colour liquid crystal
l When the following operation is performed
with the operation mode in OFF, and the se- steering wheel to lock, making it impossible
6 lector lever is in the “P” (Park) position (A/T to operate the vehicle.
display)
or CVT), the steering wheel is locked. l Carry the key with you when leaving the ve-
• Open or close one of the doors. (except hicle.
the tailgate) If your vehicle needs to be towed, unlock the
• Lock all the doors and the tailgate with steering wheel.
the keyless entry system or the keyless Refer to “Emergency towing” on page Warning display (colour liquid crystal dis-
operation system function. 8-28. play)
l When the driver’s door is opened while the
steering wheel does not lock, a warning dis-
play will appear and the buzzer sounds to
alert the steering wheel is unlocked.
Warning display
To unlock
The following methods can be used to unlock
the steering wheel.

Starting and stopping the engine
NOTE NOTE Starting and stopping the

l When the steering wheel lock is abnormal, l If there is a fault in the steering wheel lock, engine
the warning lamp illuminates or the warning the warning lamp illuminates and the inner
display will appear and the inner buzzer will buzzer sounds or warning display will ap-
sound. Put the operation mode in OFF and pear. Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe Tips for starting
then press the lock switch of the keyless op- place and contact the nearest MITSUBISHI
eration key. And then press the engine MOTORS Authorized Service Point.
switch, If the warning lamp illuminates
again, contact an MITSUBISHI MOTORS Warning lamp (mono-colour liquid crystal
[Except vehicles equipped with
Authorized Service Point. keyless operation system]
display)
6
Warning lamp (mono-colour liquid crystal
l Do not operate the starter motor continu-
ously longer than 10 seconds; doing so
display)
could run down the battery. If the engine
does not start, turn the ignition switch
Warning display (colour liquid crystal dis- back to “LOCK”, wait a few seconds,
play) and then try again. Trying repeatedly
with the starter motor still turning will
Warning display (colour liquid crystal dis-
damage the starter mechanism.
play)
WARNING
l Never run the engine in a closed or poorly
ventilated area any longer than is needed
to move your vehicle in or out of the area.
Carbon monoxide gases are odourless and
can be fatal.
CAUTION
l Never attempt to start the engine by pushing
or pulling the vehicle.
l Do not run the engine at high revolutions or
drive the vehicle at high speed until the en-
gine has had a chance to warm up.

CAUTION CAUTION On vehicles equipped with A/T or CVT,

make sure the selector lever is in the “P”
l Release the ignition key as soon as the en- l Never attempt to start the engine by pushing (Park) position.
gine starts to avoid damaging the starter mo- or pulling the vehicle.
tor. l Do not run the engine at high revolutions or
drive the vehicle at high speed until the en- Vehicles with M/T Vehicles with A/T or CVT
[For vehicles equipped with gine has had a chance to warm up.
keyless operation system]
l The operation mode can be in any mode Starting the engine
6 to start the engine. [Except vehicles equipped with keyless op-
l The starter motor will be turning for up eration system]
to approximately 15 seconds if the en- The starting procedure is as follows:
gine switch is released at once. Pressing 1. Insert the ignition key and fasten the seat
the engine switch again while the starter belt.
motor is still turning will stop the starter 2. Make sure the parking brake is applied.
motor. The starter motor will be turning 3. Depress and hold the brake pedal. NOTE
for up to approximately 30 seconds 4. Fully depress the clutch pedal (M/T).
l On vehicles equipped with A/T or CVT, the
while the engine switch is pressed. starter will not operate unless the selector
If the engine does not start, wait for a NOTE lever is in the “P” (Park) or “N” (Neutral)
while and then attempt to start the en- position.
gine again. Trying repeatedly with the l On vehicles equipped with M/T, the starter For safety reasons, start the engine in the
will not operate unless the clutch pedal is “P” (Park) position so that the wheels are
starter motor still turning will damage
fully depressed (Clutch interlock). locked.
the starter mechanism.
5. On vehicles equipped with M/T, place 6. After turning the ignition key to the
WARNING the gearshift lever in the “N” (Neutral) “ON” position, make certain that all
l Never run the engine in a closed or poorly position. warning lamps are functioning properly
ventilated area any longer than is needed before starting the engine.
to move your vehicle in or out of the area.
7. Turn the ignition key to the “START”
Carbon monoxide gases are odourless and
can be fatal. position without depressing the accelera-
tor pedal, and release it when the engine
starts.

NOTE 3. If the engine still will not start, the en- NOTE
gine could be flooded with too much
l Minor noises may be heard on engine start- petrol. While depressing the brake pedal l After the engine has not started for a while,
up. These will disappear as the engine the brake pedal effort needed to start the en-
on vehicles equipped with A/T or CVT
warms up. gine may become greater.
or the clutch pedal on the vehicles equip-
l For the 2000 models with Auto Stop & Go If this occurs, depress the brake pedal more
(AS&G) system, if you replace the battery, it ped with M/T, push the accelerator pedal firmly than usual.
needs more time to start the engine in shortly all the way down and hold it there, then
after the battery replacement. crank the engine for 5 to 6 seconds. Re-
4. Fully depress and hold the clutch pedal
turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”
(M/T).
When it is difficult to start the position and release the accelerator ped- 6
engine al. Wait a few seconds, and then crank
the engine again for 5 to 6 seconds while NOTE
After several attempts, you may experience
depressing the brake pedal or the clutch l On vehicles equipped with M/T, the starter
that the engine still does not start.
pedal, but do not push the accelerator will not operate unless the clutch pedal is
1. Make sure that all electric devices, such
pedal. Release the ignition switch if the fully depressed (Clutch interlock).
as lamps, air conditioning blower and
engine starts. If the engine fails to start,
rear window demister, are turned off.
repeat these procedures. If the engine 5. On vehicles with M/T, place the gear-
2. While depressing the brake pedal on ve-
still will not start, we recommend you to shift lever in the “N” (Neutral) position.
hicles equipped with A/T or CVT or the
have the vehicle checked. On vehicles with A/T or CVT, make sure
clutch pedal on the vehicles equipped
with M/T, press the accelerator pedal the selector lever is in the “P” (Park) po-
Using the MIVEC engine sition.
halfway and hold it there, then crank the
engine. Release the accelerator pedal, The MIVEC engine automatically controls
immediately after the engine starts. valve timing in accordance with driving con- Vehicles with M/T Vehicles with A/T or CVT
ditions for maximum engine performance.
[For vehicles equipped with keyless opera-

tion system]
The starting procedure is as follows:
1. Fasten the seat belt.
2. Make sure the parking brake is applied.
3. Press and hold the brake pedal down
firmly with your right foot.

6. Press the engine switch. NOTE 2. While depressing the brake pedal on ve-
7. Make sure that all warning lamps are hicles equipped with A/T or CVT or the
functioning properly. l When starting the engine, the selector lever clutch pedal on the vehicles equipped
is in a position other than the “P” (Park) or
with M/T, press the accelerator pedal
the “N” (Neutral) position, or you pressed
NOTE the engine switch without depressing the halfway and hold it there, then crank the
brake pedal, warning display will appear engine. Release the accelerator pedal,
l Minor noises may be heard on engine start- (A/T or CVT). immediately after the engine starts.
up. These will disappear as the engine
3. If the engine still will not start, the en-
warms up.
gine could be flooded with too much
l When starting the engine, you pressed the Warning display (colour liquid crystal dis-
6 engine switch without depressing the clutch play)
petrol. While depressing the brake pedal
pedal, warning display will appear (M/T). on vehicles equipped with A/T or CVT
or the clutch pedal on the vehicles equip-
ped with M/T, push the accelerator pedal
Warning display (colour liquid crystal dis- all the way down and hold it there, then
play) press the engine switch to crank the en-
gine. If the engine does not start after 5
to 6 seconds, press the engine switch to
l For the 2000 models with Auto Stop & Go
(AS&G) system, if you replace the battery, it stop the engine, and release the accelera-
needs more time to start the engine in shortly tor pedal. Put the operation mode in
after the battery replacement. OFF. Wait a few seconds, and then press
the engine switch to crank the engine
When it is difficult to start the again while depressing the brake pedal
engine or the clutch pedal, but do not push the
accelerator pedal. If the engine fails to
After several attempts, you may experience
start, repeat these procedures. If the en-
that the engine still does not start.
gine still will not start, we recommend
1. Make sure that all electric devices, such
you to have the vehicle checked.
as lamps, air conditioning blower and
rear window demister, are turned off.

Using the MIVEC engine (3000 WARNING 3. On vehicles with M/T, press the engine
models) switch to stop the engine, move the gear-
l Do not operate the engine switch while
shift lever to the 1st (on a uphill) or “R”
The MIVEC engine automatically switches driving except in an emergency. If the en-
gine is stopped while driving, the brake (Reverse) (on a downhill) position.
its intake-valve control between a low-speed
servomechanism will cease to function On vehicles with A/T or CVT, move the
mode and a high-speed mode in accordance
and braking efficiency will deteriorate. selector lever to the “P” (Park) position,
with driving conditions for maximum engine
Also, the power steering system will not press the engine switch to stop the en-
performance. function and it will require greater man- gine.
ual effort to operate the steering. This
Stopping the engine could result in a serious accident.
[Except vehicles equipped with keyless op- If the keyless operation key is 6
eration system] not operating properly
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop. NOTE Insert the keyless operation key into the key
2. Firmly apply the parking brake while de- l If you have to bring the engine to an emer- slot. Starting the engine and changing the op-
pressing the brake pedal. gency stop while driving, press and hold the eration mode should now be possible.
3. For vehicles equipped with M/T, turn the engine switch for 3 seconds or more, or
Remove the keyless operation key from the
ignition switch to the “LOCK” position press it quickly 3 times or more. The engine
will stop and the operation mode will go to key slot after starting the engine or changing
to stop the engine, and then move the the operation mode.
ACC.
gearshift lever to the 1st (on a uphill) or
l Do not stop the engine with the selector lev-
“R” (Reverse) (on a downhill) position. er in any position other than the “P” (Park)
For vehicles equipped with A/T or CVT, position (A/T or CVT). If the engine is stop-
place the selector lever in the “P” (Park) ped with the selector lever in any position
position, and stop the engine. other than the “P” (Park) position, the opera-
tion mode will go to ACC rather than OFF.
Put the operation mode in OFF after placing
[For vehicles equipped with keyless opera- the selector lever in the “P” (Park) position.
tion system]
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake while de-
pressing the brake pedal.

Auto Stop & Go (AS&G) system*
NOTE If the operation mode is in OFF and the driv- NOTE

er’s door is opened with the keyless operation
l Do not insert into the key slot anything other key in the key slot, the warning lamp will l If the Auto Stop & Go (AS&G) system does
than the keyless operation key. This could not operate or it operates less frequently, the
blink and the outer buzzer sounds for approx-
cause damage or a malfunction. battery capacity may have decreased. Have
imately 3 seconds and the inner buzzer
l Remove the object or additional key from your vehicle inspected by a MITSUBISHI
the the keyless operation key before insert- sounds for approximately 1 minute or warn- MOTORS Authorized Service Point.
ing the key into the key slot. The vehicle ing display will appear to remind you to re-
may not be able to receive the registered ID move the key.
code from the registered key. Therefore, the Automatically stopping the en-
6 engine may not start and the operation mode
Auto Stop & Go (AS&G) gine
may not change.
system* The Auto Stop & Go (AS&G) system is auto-
l The keyless operation key is fixed in the key
slot when inserted in the illustrated direc- matically activated when the ignition switch
tion. Simply pull out the key to remove it The Auto Stop & Go (AS&G) system auto- is turned to the “ON” position or the opera-
from the key slot. matically stops and restarts the engine with- tion mode is put in ON.
out operating the ignition switch when the You can deactivate the system by pressing the
Keyless operation key remind- vehicle is stopped, such as at a traffic light or “Auto Stop & Go (AS&G) OFF” switch.
in a traffic jam, to reduce exhaust gases, in- Refer to “To deactivate” on page 6-30.
er* When the Auto Stop & Go (AS&G) system
crease fuel efficiency.
will operate, the indication lamp/ in-
Warning lamp (mono-colour liquid crystal dis-
dicator display will turn on to inform the
play) CAUTION driver.
l If the vehicle will be stopped for a long time
or if you will leave the vehicle unattended, Auto Stop & Go (AS&G) indication lamp
stop the engine.
Warning display (colour liquid crystal display)

NOTE
l The accumulated time the engine has been Auto Stop & Go (AS&G) indicator display
stopped by Auto Stop & Go (AS&G) system
is displayed in the multi information display.
Refer to “Auto Stop & Go (AS&G) moni-
tor” on page 5-12.
[For vehicles with M/T]

1. Stop the vehicle. 2. Depressing the brake pedal. The engine CAUTION
2. While depressing the brake pedal, fully will stop automatically.
depress the clutch pedal and place the l When the engine is automatically stopped,
do not attempt to exit the vehicle.
gearshift lever in the “N” (Neutral) posi-
Because the engine restarts automatically
tion. when the driver’s seat belt is unfastened or
the driver’s door is opened, an unexpected
5M/T accident might occur when the vehicle starts
moving.
l Observe the following precautions when the
engine is stopped automatically. Otherwise,
an unexpected accident might occur when 6
the engine restarts automatically.
6M/T
• Do not depress the accelerator pedal to
race the engine while the vehicle is stop-
ped (regardless of whether the engine is
NOTE running or stopped).
• On vehicles with M/T, do not move the
l When the engine is automatically stopped, gearshift lever to a position other than the
changes will occur in the driving operations.
3. Release the clutch pedal. The engine will “N” (Neutral) position.
Pay close attention to the following. If the gearshift lever is moved to a posi-
stop automatically.
• The brake booster becomes inoperative tion other than the “N” (Neutral) position,
and the pedal effort will increase.
the indication lamp/ indicator
If the vehicle is moving, press down the
display blinks and the buzzer sounds.
brake pedal harder than usual.
If the gearshift lever is returned to the “N”
• The electric power steering system (EPS)
becomes inoperative and it will become (Neutral) position, the indication lamp/
harder to turn the steering wheel. indicator display stops blinking and
• For vehicles equipped with the brake auto the buzzer stops sounding. The engine
hold system, it is possible to maintain the will not restart if the gearshift lever is in a
state of the engine stop while the brake position other than the “N” (Neutral) posi-
auto hold indication lamp is illuminating tion.
after the engine is stopped automatically
even if the brake pedal is released.
[For vehicles with CVT]

1. Stop the vehicle.

NOTE NOTE NOTE

l In the following cases, the indication • Electric power consumption is high, such l On vehicles with M/T, do not rest your foot
lamp/ indicator display will blink to as when the rear window demister or oth- on the clutch pedal while driving because
inform the driver and the engine will not er electrical components are operating or this will cause detection of clutch pedal
stop automatically. the blower speed is set to a high setting. switch malfunction and blinking of Auto
• Driver’s seat belt is not fastened. • Battery voltage or battery performance is Stop & Go (AS&G) OFF display/indicator,
low. and Auto Stop & Go (AS&G) system will
• Driver’s door is open.
• Check engine warning lamp is illuminated not operate.
• Bonnet is open.
or the indication lamp/ indicator l For vehicles equipped with the brake auto
l In the following cases, the indication hold system, the engine will not stop auto-
6 lamp/ indicator display will turn off
display is blinking.
• The selector lever is in another position matically even if the indication lamp/
and the engine will not stop automatically than in the “D” (Drive) position (CVT). indicator display turns on when the
even if the vehicle is stopped. • ASC operation indicator and ASC OFF brake auto hold indication lamp is illumina-
• After the engine starts, the vehicle speed indicator is turn on (CVT). ted. In this case, depress the brake pedal as
has not exceeded approximately 5 km/h • ABS warning lamp is turned on. the engine stops automatically.
(3 mph).
• CVT warning lamp will turn on/warning l If the Auto Stop & Go (AS&G) system oper-
• After the engine start, approximately 30 display will display (CVT). ates while the air conditioner is operating,
seconds or more have not elapsed. both the engine and the air conditioning
• While the catalyst is being purged auto-
• After the engine restarts automatically, the matically (diesel-powered vehicles). compressor will stop. Therefore, the win-
vehicle stops again within 10 seconds. dows may start to fog up. If this occurs,
• Engine coolant temperature is low.
l In the following cases, the engine will not
stop automatically even if indication press the demister switch to restart the en-
• Ambient temperature is low. lamp/ indicator display turn on. gine.
• When using the heater, vehicle interior • Push the accelerator pedal. Refer to“Demister switch” on page 7-11.
temperature is not warm enough. l If the windows become fogged up each time
• Brake booster vacuum pressure is low.
• Air conditioner is operating and passenger the engine is stopped, we recommend you to
compartment has not sufficiently cooled. • Operate the steering wheel. deactivate the Auto Stop & Go (AS&G) sys-
• Demister switch is pressed. • Brake pedal is not sufficiently depressed tem by pressing the “Auto Stop &
Refer to “Demisting of the windscreen (CVT). Go(AS&G) OFF” switch. Refer to “To deac-
and door windows: For quick demisting” • Parking on steep hill (CVT). tivate” on page 6-30.
on page 7-11. • Parking brake operates (CVT). l If the air conditioner is operating, set the
• When the air conditioner is operated in temperature control higher to lengthen the
AUTO mode where the temperature con- time that the engine is stopped automatical-
trol is set to the max. hot or the max. cool. ly.

Automatically restarting the NOTE NOTE

engine l If the engine does not restart automatically l The vehicles equipped with CVT have the
[On vehicles with M/T] or if the engine stalls, the charge warning function of preventing the unexpected start
Depress the clutch pedal while the gearshift lamp and check engine warning lamp will il- of the vehicle due to creeping, etc., by tem-
luminate. porarily maintain the braking force applied
is in the “N” (Neutral) position.
If this occurs, when the engine restarts automatically.
The indication lamp / indicator dis- [On vehicles with M/T] This function is deactivated if the selector
play turns off and the engine restarts auto- The engine will not restart even if the clutch lever is set into the “N” (Neutral) position.
matically. pedal is depressed again. While depressing While the function is activated, you might
[On vehicles with CVT] the brake pedal, fully depress the clutch ped- hear operation noise from under the vehicle
(When the brake auto hold indication lamp is al and turn the ignition switch to the or feel a shock from the brake pedal. 6
not illuminated) “START” position or press the engine switch This indicates that the system is operating
The engine is restarted automatically when to start the engine. normally. It does not indicate a malfunction.
the brake pedal is released.
[On vehicles with CVT] l For vehicles equipped with the brake auto
The engine will not restart even if release the hold system, the engine is not restarted when
(When the brake auto hold indication lamp is brake pedal again. Also, the indicator / the brake auto hold indication lamp is illu-
illuminated) indicator display blinks, and the buz- minated even if the brake pedal is released.
The engine is restarted automatically when zer sounds.
the accelerator pedal is depressed. While depressing the brake pedal, move the
selector lever to the “P” (Park) or “N” (Neu- CAUTION
tral) position and turn the ignition switch to
NOTE the “START” position or press the engine
l In the following cases, the engine will restart
automatically even if the engine was stopped
l On vehicles with M/T, do not move the gear- switch to start the engine. After the engine is by the Auto Stop & Go (AS&G) system. Pay
shift lever to a position other than the “N” started, the buzzer stops. attention, otherwise an unexpected accident
(Neutral) position or do not release the But the indicator / indicator dis- might occur when the engine restarts.
clutch pedal while the engine is restarting play is blinking until turning the ignition • Vehicle speed is 3 km/h (2 mph) or higher
automatically. The starter motor will stop switch to the “LOCK” position or putting when coasting down a slope.
and the engine will not restart automatically. the operation mode in OFF. • Brake booster vacuum pressure is low be-
For details, refer to “Starting and stopping cause the brake pedal is depressed repeat-
the engine” on page 6-21. edly or depressed harder than usual.
• Engine coolant temperature is low.
• When the air conditioner is operated by
pressing the air conditioning switch.

CAUTION NOTE To deactivate

• When the preset temperature of the air l In the following cases, the engine will not The Auto Stop & Go (AS&G) system is auto-
conditioner is changed significantly. restart automatically. matically activated when the ignition switch
• When the air conditioner is operated in • Bonnet is open is turned to the “ON” position or the opera-
AUTO mode where the temperature con- • On vehicles with M/T, when the engine tion mode put in ON. You can deactivate the
trol is set to the max. hot or the max. cool. stopped automatically, the “Auto Stop & system by pressing the “Auto Stop & Go
• When the air conditioner is ON, the pas- Go (AS&G) OFF” switch has to be press- (AS&G) OFF” switch.
senger compartment temperature rises and ed to deactivate the “Auto Stop & Go
the air conditioning compressor operates When the Auto Stop & Go (AS&G) system is
(AS&G) OFF” system.
to lower the temperature. deactivated, the indicator/ display
6 • Demister switch is pressed.
l When the engine restarts automatically, the
audio volume may temporarily decrease. will be turned on.
Refer to “For quick demisting” on page This does not indicate a malfunction. To reactivate the Auto Stop & Go (AS&G)
7-11. l While the engine is stopped automatically, system, press the “Auto Stop & Go (AS&G)
• Electric power consumption is high, such the air volume change of the air conditioner OFF” switch; the display/indicator will turn
as when the rear window demister or oth- may temporarily be experienced. This does off.
er electrical components are operating or not indicate a malfunction.
the blower speed is set to a high setting. l On vehicles with CVT, while the engine has
• Push the accelerator pedal (CVT). stopped automatically, if the selector lever is
• Battery voltage or battery performance is moved to the “P” (Park) position quickly
low. with the brake pedal firmly depressed, the
• Operate the steering wheel. engine does not restart automatically even if
• After the engine stop, 3 minute elapse you release the brake pedal. If this occurs,
(CVT). the indicator/ display will blink to
• Move the selector lever to the “R” (Re- inform the driver.
verse) position (CVT). If you want to restart the engine, depress the
• Move the selector lever from the “N” brake pedal again.
(Neutral) to “D” (Drive) position (CVT). If you want to put the operation mode in
• Driver’s seat belt is unfastened OFF, press the engine switch without de-
• Driver’s door is opened pressing the brake pedal. (Vehicles equipped
with the keyless operation system)
l When the electric parking brake is applied
by using the electric parking brake switch.
(for vehicles equipped with the electric park-
ing brake)

Manual transmission*
Auto Stop & Go (AS&G) OFF indication lamp Manual transmission* NOTE
l If it is hard to shift into 1st, depress the
The shift pattern is shown on the gearshift clutch pedal again; the shift will then be eas-
lever knob. Press the clutch pedal all the way ier to make.
down while shifting gears. l The gearshift indicator shows recommended
Auto Stop & Go (AS&G) OFF indicator display To start off, press the clutch pedal all the way gearshift points for fuel-efficient driving. It
down and shift into the 1st or “R” (Reverse) shows a / when an upshift is rec-
position, operating the gearshift lever slowly. ommended, and it shows a / when
Then gradually release the clutch pedal while a downshift is recommended.
depressing the accelerator pedal. Indication lamp
6
NOTE CAUTION
l This display/indicator will also turn on for a l Do not put the gearshift lever into the re-
few seconds when the ignition switch is verse position while the vehicle is moving
turned to the “ON” position or the operation forward. Doing so could damage the trans- Indicator display
mode put in ON. mission.
l Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal
If the indication lamp/ while driving as this will cause premature
clutch wear or damage.
indicator display blinks while l Do not coast in the “N” (Neutral) position.
driving l Do not use the gearshift lever as a handrest,
If the indication lamp/ indicator dis- because this can result in premature wear of Moving the gearshift lever to
play blinks, the Auto Stop & Go (AS&G)
the transmission shift forks. the “R” (Reverse) position
system is malfunctioning and will not oper- To shift into the “R” (Reverse) position from
ate. NOTE 5th gear, move the gearshift lever to the “N”
We recommend you to consult a (Neutral) position, and then move it to the
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service l During cold weather, shifting may be diffi-
cult until the transmission lubricant has “R” (Reverse) position.
Point. warmed up. This is normal and not harmful
to the transmission.

Automatic transmission INVECS-II 6A/T (Intelligent & Innovative Vehicle Electronic Control System II)*
Possible driving speed

Avoid shifting down at high speed, as this may cause excessive engine speed (the tachometer needle into the red zone) and damage the engine.

6 4th gear 175 km/h (109 mph)
Use 5 th gear whenever vehicle speed allows, for maximum fuel economy.
Automatic transmission NOTE The individual gears are selected automati-

cally, depending on the speed of the vehicle
INVECS-II 6A/T (Intelligent l During running-in period or immediately af- and the position of the accelerator pedal.
ter reconnection of the battery cable, there
& Innovative Vehicle may be a case where gear shifts are not
Electronic Control System made smoothly. This does not indicate a
faulty transmission.
II)* Gear shifts will become smooth after the
transmission has been shifted several times
Automatic transmission will automatically by the electronic control system.
change its gear depending on road and driv-
ing conditions. This helps achieve smooth Selector lever operation
driving and excellent fuel efficiency.
Also you can manually shift up and shift The transmission has 6 forward gears and 1
down the transmission. Refer to “Sport reverse gear.
mode” on page 6-35

NOTE 3. Insert a straight blade (or minus) screw-

driver with a cloth over its tip into notch
l To avoid erroneous operation, move the se- (A) or the cover. Pry gently as shown to
lector lever firmly into each position and
remove the cover.
briefly hold it there. Always check the posi-
tion shown by the selector lever position dis-
play after moving the selector lever.
l If the brake pedal is not depressed and held,
the shift-lock device activates to prevent the
selector lever from being moved from the
“P” (PARK) position.
6
While depressing the brake pedal, When the selector lever cannot
move the selector lever through the be shifted from the “P” (Park)
gate. position
Move the selector lever through the When the selector lever cannot be shifted
gate. from the “P” (Park) position to another posi- 4. Depress the brake pedal with the right
tion while the brake pedal is pressed and held foot.
down with the ignition switch at the “ON”
WARNING position or the operation mode in ON, the
l Always depress the brake pedal when battery may be flat or the shiftlock mecha-
shifting the selector lever into a gear from nism may be malfunctioning. Immediately
the “P” (PARK) or “N” (NEUTRAL) po- have your vehicle checked by a
sition.
Never put your foot on the accelerator
pedal while shifting the selector lever Point.
from the “P” (PARK) or “N” (NEU- If you need to move the vehicle, shift the se-
TRAL) position. lector lever as follows.
1. Make sure the parking brake is firmly
applied.
2. Stop the engine if it is running.

5. Insert a straight blade (or minus) screw- Selector lever position display “R” REVERSE
driver in the shiftlock release hole (B).
When the ignition switch is turned to the This position is to back up.
Shift the selector lever to the “N” (NEU-
TRAL) position while pressing the
ON, the position of the selector lever is indi-
straight blade (or minus) screwdriver
cated in the multi information display.
CAUTION
down
l Never shift into the “R” (Reverse) position
from the “D” (Drive) position while the ve-
hicle is in motion to avoid transmission
damage.
6
“N” NEUTRAL
At this position the transmission is disengag-
ed. It is the same as the neutral position on a
M/T, and should only be used when the vehi-
cle is stationary for an extended length of
time during driving, such as in a traffic jam.
Selector lever positions WARNING

l Never move the selector lever to the “N”
“P” PARK (Neutral) position while driving. A serious
accident could occur since you could acci-
This position locks the transmission to pre- dentally move the lever into the “P”
vent the vehicle from moving. The engine (Park) or “R” (Reverse) position or you
can be started in this position. will lose engine braking.
l On a gradient the engine should be star-
ted in the “P” (Park) position, not in the
CAUTION “N” (Neutral) position.
l Never shift into the “P” (Park) position l To prevent rolling, always keep your foot
on the brake pedal when the vehicle is in
while the vehicle is in motion to avoid trans-
“N” (Neutral) position, or when shifting
mission damage.
into or out of “N” (Neutral) position.

“D” DRIVE Sport mode - (SHIFT DOWN)

This position is used for most city and high- While the vehicle is stopped or being driven The transmission shifts down by one gear
way driving. The transmission will automati- with the selector lever in the “D” (Drive) or with each operation.
cally change its gear depending on road and “L” (Low) position, sports mode can be se- To return to “D” (Drive) or “L” (Low) opera-
driving conditions. lected by pulling one of the shift paddles to- tion, pull the shift paddle on the + (SHIFT
wards you. UP) side for longer than 2 seconds.
In sports mode, rapid shifting is possible sim- When returning to “D” (Drive) or “L” (Low)
CAUTION ply by operating the shift paddle. operation, the selector lever position display
l To prevent transmission damage, never shift Unlike the M/T, sports mode allows shifting will change to “D” (Drive) or “L” (Low) po-
into the “D” (Drive) position from the “R” with the accelerator pedal depressed. sition. 6
(Reverse) position while the vehicle is in
motion.
- (SHIFT DOWN) + (SHIFT UP) CAUTION
“L” LOW l In sports mode, the driver must execute up-
This position is for driving up very steep hills ward shifts in accordance with prevailing
road conditions, taking care to keep the en-
and for engine braking at low speeds when gine speed below the red zone.
driving down steep hills.
l Repeated continuous operation of the shift
paddles will continuously switch shift posi-
WARNING tion.
l Do not use the left- and right-hand shift pad-
l This position can be used for maximum dles at the same time. Doing so could cause
engine braking. a gearshift that you do not expect.
Be very careful not to shift into “L” (Low)
suddenly.
Sudden engine braking may cause the NOTE
tyres to skid.
Select this position according to the road l Only the 6 forward gears can be selected. To
reverse or park the vehicle, move the selec-
conditions and vehicle speed. + (SHIFT UP) tor lever to the “R” (Reverse) or “P” (Park)
The transmission shifts up by one gear with position as required.
each operation.

NOTE NOTE Shift paddles position display

The currently selected position is displayed
l To maintain good running performance, the l When driving away on a slippery road, pull
transmission may refuse to perform an up- the shift paddle on the + (SHIFT UP) side. on the multi information display.
shift when the shift paddles is moved to the This cause the transmission to shift into the
“+ (SHIFT UP)” position at certain vehicle 2nd gear which is better for smooth driving
speeds. Also, to prevent over-revving of the away on a slippery road. Pull the shift pad-
engine, the transmission may refuse to per- dle on the − (SHIFT DOWN) side to shift
form a downshift when the lever is moved to back to the 1st gear.
the “− (SHIFT DOWN)” position at certain l When the shift paddle is operated with the
vehicle speeds. When this happens, a buzzer
6 sounds to indicate that a downshift is not go-
selector lever in the “L” (Low) position, the
gear is not shifted because the selectable
ing to take place. shift range is limited.
l Downward shifts are made automatically l When the selector lever is in the “D” (Drive)
when the vehicle slows down. Before the ve- position and sports mode is selected, the
hicle stops, 1st gear is automatically selected. gearshift indicator shows recommended
l When the selector lever is in the “D” (Drive) gearshift points for fuel-efficient driving.
position and sports mode is selected, the ve- It shows a when an upshift is recom-
hicle will automatically return to “D” mended. (Except for vehicles for Russia, Ka- NOTE
(Drive) operation if the vehicle is stopped. zakhstan, Ukraine and Moldova)
l When the selector lever is in the “L” (Low) l While driving in manual shift, the display
position and sports mode is selected, the ve- may change to show “D” and shifting in
hicle will stay in sports mode and not return sports mode may no longer be possible.
to “L” (Low) operation even if the vehicle is This indicates that controls to drive in the
stopped. “D” position are operating normally in order
l The upward shift may be made automatical- to lower the temperature of the A/T fluid; it
ly in sports mode when the engine revolu- does not indicate a malfunction. Once the
tions rise and approach the tachometer’s red temperature of the A/T fluid drops, shifting
zone (the red-coloured part of the tachome- in the sports mode will be possible again.
ter dial).

When a malfunction occurs in CAUTION Operation of the A/T

the A/T l If malfunction occurs in the A/T while driv-
There could be a system malfunction if the ing, the warning display or the warning CAUTION
warning display or the warning display is display appears on the information screen in
displayed on the information screen in the the multi information display. l Before selecting a gear with the engine run-
In this case, immediately park your vehicle ning and the vehicle stationary, fully depress
multi information display. the brake pedal to prevent the vehicle from
in a safe place and follow these procedures:
creeping.
or
When warning display is showing The vehicle will begin to move as soon as
the gear is engaged, especially when the en-
The automatic transmission fluid is over-
heating. Stop your vehicle in a safe place, gine speed is high, at fast idle or with the air 6
put the selector lever in the “P” (Park) posi- conditioner operating, the brakes should on-
tion, and open the bonnet with the engine ly be released when you are ready to drive
NOTE running to allow the engine to cool down. away.
After a while, confirm that the warning l Depress the brake pedal with the right foot at
l The selector lever position indicator blinks all times.
at the same time as the warning display or display is no longer showing. It is safe to
continue driving if the display is no longer Using the left foot could cause driver move-
the warning display appears. ment delay in case of an emergency.
showing. If the warning display remains,
l The “A” indicator on the selector lever posi-
contact a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Author- l To prevent sudden acceleration, never race
tion display will blink only when there is a the engine when shifting from the “P”
ized Service Point immediately.
problem with the A/T position switch. It is (PARK) or “N” (NEUTRAL) position.
not seen during normal driving. l Operating the accelerator pedal while the
When warning display is showing
other foot is resting on the brake pedal will
It may be that there is something unusual
affect braking efficiency and may cause pre-
happening in the A/T, causing a safety de-
mature wear of brake pads.
vice to activate. Have the vehicle inspected
by a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized l Use the selector lever in the correct shift po-
sition in accordance with driving conditions.
Service Point immediately.
Never coast downhill backward with the se-
lector lever in the “D” (DRIVE) or “L”
(LOW) position or coast forward with the
selector lever in the “R” (REVERSE) posi-
tion.
The engine may stop and the unexpected in-
crease in brake pedal effort and steering
wheel weight could lead to an accident.

CAUTION DRIVING DOWNHILL NOTE

l Do not race the engine with brake pedal According to the conditions, the transmission l On a slope, be sure to apply the parking
pressed when the vehicle is stationary. will automatically shift to a lower gear to brake before moving the selector lever to the
This can damage the A/T. achieve stronger engine braking. This may “P” (Park) position. If you move the selector
Also, when you depress the accelerator ped- help reduce your need to use the service lever to the “P” (Park) position before apply-
al while holding down the brake pedal with ing the parking brake, it may be difficult to
brake.
the selector lever in the “D” (DRIVE) posi- disengage the selector lever from the “P”
tion, the engine revolutions may not rise as (Park) position when next you drive the ve-
high as when performing the same operation
Waiting hicle, requiring application of a strong force
with the selector lever in the “N” (NEU- For short waiting periods, such as at traffic to the selector lever to move from the “P”
6 TRAL) position. signals, the vehicle can be left in gear and (Park) position.
held stationary with the service brake.
For longer waiting periods with the engine
Passing acceleration running, place the selector lever in the “N” When the A/T makes no speed
To gain extra acceleration in “D” (DRIVE) (NEUTRAL) position and apply the parking change
position, push the accelerator to the floor. brake, while holding the vehicle stationary If the transmission does not change speeds
The A/T will automatically downshift. with the service brake. while driving, or your vehicle does not pick
up enough speed when starting on an uphill
NOTE CAUTION slope, it may be that there is something un-
usual happening in the transmission, causing
l When shift paddles is in operation, down-
l Never hold the vehicle stationary while in a safety device to activate. We recommend
shifts do not take place when the accelerator gear on a hill with the accelerator, always
is depressed all the way to the floor. you to have your vehicle checked immediate-
apply the parking brake and/or service
brake. ly.
Uphill/downhill driving
Parking
DRIVING UPHILL To park the vehicle, first bring it to a com-
The transmission prevents unnecessary up- plete stop, firmly apply the parking brake,
shifts even when the accelerator pedal is re- and then move the selector lever to the “P”
leased and ensures smooth driving. (Park) position.
If you are going to leave the vehicle unatten-
ded, always switch off the engine and carry
the key.

Automatic transmission INVECS-III 6CVT (Intelligent & Innovative Vehicle Electronic Control System III)*
Automatic transmission LHD RHD

Vehicles with shift paddles (Type 1)
INVECS-III 6CVT
(Intelligent & Innovative
Vehicle Electronic Control
System III)*
The CVT will automatically and continuous-
ly change its gear ratio depending on road 6
and driving conditions. This helps achieve Vehicles with shift paddles (Type 2)
smooth driving and excellent fuel efficiency.
If your vehicle is equipped with shift paddles, While depressing the brake pedal,
you can manually shift up and shift down the move the selector lever through
transmission. Refer to“Sport mode” on page the gate.
6-43 Move the selector lever through
the gate.
Selector lever operation
The CVT selects an optimum gear ratio auto-
matically, depending on the speed of the ve- WARNING
hicle and the position of the accelerator ped- Vehicles without shift paddles l Always depress the brake pedal when
al. shifting the selector lever into the other
position from the “P” (PARK) or “N”
(NEUTRAL) position.
LHD RHD
Never put your foot on the accelerator
pedal while shifting the selector lever
from the “P” (PARK) or “N” (NEU-
TRAL) position.

NOTE 3. Insert a straight blade (or minus) screw- 5. Insert a straight blade (or minus) screw-
driver with a cloth over its tip into notch driver in the shiftlock release hole (B).
l To avoid erroneous operation, move the se- (A) or the cover. Pry gently as shown to Shift the selector lever to the “N” (NEU-
lector lever firmly into each position and
remove the cover. TRAL) position while pressing the
briefly hold it there. Always check the posi-
tion shown by the selector lever position dis- straight blade (or minus) screwdriver
play after moving the selector lever. down
l If the brake pedal is not depressed and held,
the shift-lock device activates to prevent the
selector lever from being moved from the
“P” (PARK) position.
6
When the selector lever cannot
be shifted from the “P” (Park)
position
When the selector lever cannot be shifted
from the “P” (Park) position to another posi- 4. Depress the brake pedal with the right
tion while the brake pedal is pressed and held foot.
down with the ignition switch at the “ON” For RHD vehicles
position or the operation mode in ON, the
battery may be flat or the shiftlock mecha-
applied.
nism may be malfunctioning. Immediately
have your vehicle checked by a
3. Depress the brake pedal with the right
foot.
Point.
If you need to move the vehicle, shift the se-
lector lever as follows.
For LHD vehicles

applied.

4. Insert a straight blade (or minus) screw- Selector lever position display If the ambient temperature is low, the selector
driver in the shiftlock release hole (A). lever position display on the multi informa-
When the ignition switch is turned to the
Shift the selector lever to the “N” (NEU- tion display may blink when the selector lev-
“ON” position or the operation mode put in
TRAL) position while pressing the er is placed in other than the “P” (PARK) and
ON, the position of the selector lever is indi-
straight blade (or minus) screwdriver “N” (NEUTRAL) position immediately after
cated in the multi information display.
down. the engine has been started. This indicates
that the transmission requires warming up.
Type 1 Type 2
While the display is blinking, the vehicle will
not move, because the transmission keeps
disengaging until the warm up is completed 6
even if the selector lever is placed in the “D”,
“Ds”, “M”, “L” or “R” position.
When the selector lever position display is

blinking, perform the following procedure:
1. Depress the brake pedal with your right
foot and place the selector lever in the
“N” (NEUTRAL) position for several
When the selector lever position seconds.
display blinks 2. Keep depressing the brake pedal and
then place the selector lever in another
WARNING position than the “P” (PARK) and “N”
(NEUTRAL) position. If the selector
l To avoid unintended vehicle movement, lever position display stops blinking, the
keep the brake pedal applied with your
warm-up is completed and the transmis-
right foot and do not depress the accelera-
tor pedal, while the selector lever position sion will function normally.
display is blinking. 3. If the display is still blinking, repeat
steps 1 and 2 above.

NOTE “N” NEUTRAL CAUTION

l While the selector lever position display is At this position the transmission is disengag- l To prevent transmission damage, never shift
blinking, a buzzer will sound intermittently. ed. It is the same as the neutral position on a into the “D” (Drive) position from the “R”
M/T, and should only be used when the vehi- (Reverse) position while the vehicle is in
cle is stationary for an extended length of motion.
Selector lever positions time during driving, such as in a traffic jam.
“Ds” DOWNSHIFT & SPOR-
“P” PARK TY DRIVING*
WARNING
This position locks the transmission to pre-
6 vent the vehicle from moving. The engine l Never move the selector lever to the “N”
Use when engine braking is needed, or for
(Neutral) position while driving. A serious high-power sport drive.
can be started in this position. accident could occur since you could acci-
dentally move the lever into the “P” “M” MANUAL*
CAUTION (Park) or “R” (Reverse) position or you
Use this position when selecting the sports
will lose engine braking.
l Never shift into the “P” (Park) position mode.
l On a gradient the engine should be star-
while the vehicle is in motion to avoid trans- ted in the “P” (Park) position, not in the
mission damage. “N” (Neutral) position. “L” LOW*
l To prevent rolling, always keep your foot
This position is for driving up very steep hills
“R” REVERSE on the brake pedal when the vehicle is in
and for engine braking at low speeds when
“N” (Neutral) position, or when shifting
This position is to back up. into or out of “N” (Neutral) position. driving down steep hills.
CAUTION “D” DRIVE WARNING

l Never shift into the “R” (Reverse) position This position is used for most city and high- l This position can be used for maximum
from the “D” (Drive) position while the ve- way driving. The transmission will automati- engine braking.
hicle is in motion to avoid transmission cally and continuously change its gear ratio Be very careful not to shift into “L” (Low)
damage. suddenly.
depending on road and driving conditions.
Sudden engine braking may cause the
tyres to skid.
Select this position according to the road
conditions and vehicle speed.

Sport mode (for vehicles equip- The transmission shifts up by one gear with NOTE
ped with shift paddles) each operation.
l Only the 6 forward gears can be selected. To
Sports mode can be selected as follows: reverse or park the vehicle, move the selec-
- (SHIFT DOWN)
l While the vehicle is stopped or being tor lever to the “R” (Reverse) or “P” (Park)
The transmission shifts down by one gear position as required.
driven with the selector lever in the “D” with each operation.
(DRIVE) position, pull one of the shift l To maintain good running performance, the
transmission may refuse to perform an up-
paddles towards you. To return to “D” (DRIVE) operation when shift when the selector lever is moved to the
l Move the selector lever to the “M” the selector lever is in the “D” (DRIVE) posi- “+ (SHIFT UP)” position at certain vehicle
(MANUAL) position. speeds. Also, to prevent over-revving of the
tion, pull the shift paddle on the + (SHIFT
engine, the transmission may refuse to per- 6
UP) side for longer than 2 seconds.
In sports mode, rapid shifting is possible sim- form a downshift when the lever is moved to
To return to “D” (DRIVE) operation when the “- (SHIFT DOWN)” position at certain
ply by operating the shift paddle. the selector lever is in the “M” (MANUAL) vehicle speeds. When this happens, a buzzer
Unlike the M/T, sports mode allows shifting position, move the selector lever to the “D” sounds to indicate that a downshift is not go-
with the accelerator pedal depressed. (DRIVE) position. ing to take place.
When returning to “D” (Drive) operation, the l Downward shifts are made automatically
- (SHIFT DOWN) + (SHIFT UP) selector lever position display will change to when the vehicle slows down. Before the ve-
“D” (Drive) position. hicle stops, 1st gear is automatically selected.
l When driving in sports mode with the selec-
tor lever in the “D” (DRIVE) position, the
CAUTION vehicle will automatically return to “D”
(DRIVE) operation if the vehicle is stopped.
l In sports mode, the driver must execute up- When the selector lever is in the “M”
ward shifts in accordance with prevailing
(MANUAL) position, the vehicle will not
road conditions, taking care to keep the en-
return to “D” (DRIVE) operation even if the
gine speed below the red zone.
vehicle is stopped.
l Repeated continuous operation of the selec-
l The upward shift may be made automatical-
tor lever or the shift paddles will continuous-
ly in sports mode when the engine revolu-
ly switch shift position.
tions rise and approach the tachometer’s red
l For vehicles equipped with shift paddles, do
zone (the red-coloured part of the tachome-
not use the left- and right-hand shift paddles
ter dial).
at the same time. Doing so could cause a
gearshift that you do not expect. l When the selector lever is in the “L” (Low)
position, the sport mode is not selected even
+ (SHIFT UP) if you operate the shift paddle.

NOTE When a malfunction occurs in NOTE

l In sport mode, the gearshift indicator (if so the CVT l The “A” indicator on the selector lever posi-
equipped) shows recommended gearshift [For vehicles equipped with mono-colour liq- tion display will blink only when there is a
points for fuel-efficient driving. It shows a uid crystal display meter] problem with the CVT position switch.
/ when an upshift is recommen- It is not seen during normal driving.
When the selector lever position indicator
ded.
blinks while you are driving, there could be a
Type 1 Type 2 malfunction in the CVT system or CVT fluid CAUTION
temperature becomes abnormally high.
l If a malfunction occurs in the CVT while
6 driving, the indication lamp will blink.
[Except for vehicles equipped with shift paddles] In this case, immediately park your vehicle
in a safe place and follow these procedures:
[If the indication lamp blinks rapidly (once
per second), the CVT fluid is overheating.]
Park your vehicle in a safe place but do not
turn off the engine. Move the selector lever
to the “P” (Park) position and open the bon-
net. Keep the engine idling.
Shift paddles position display After a while, move the selector lever into
The currently selected position is displayed any position other than “P” (Park) position
on the multi information display. and confirm that the indication lamp stops
blinking. It is safe to continue driving if the
indication lamp no longer blinks.
Type 1 Type 2 [For vehicles equipped with shift paddles] If the indication lamp continues blinking,
contact a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Author-
ized Service Point immediately.
[If the indication lamp blinks slowly (once
per 2 seconds), the CVT safety device may
be operating due to a malfunction.]
Have the vehicle inspected by a
ice Point immediately.
[For vehicles equipped with colour liquid

crystal display meter]

There could be a system malfunction if the CAUTION CAUTION

warning display or the warning display is
displayed on the information screen in the • Stop your vehicle in a safe place, put the l Depress the brake pedal with the right foot at
selector lever in the “P” (Park) position, all times.
multi information display.
and open the bonnet with the engine run- Using the left foot could cause driver move-
or ning to allow the engine to cool down. ment delay in case of an emergency.
After a while, confirm that the warning l To prevent sudden acceleration, never race
display is no longer showing. It is safe to the engine when shifting from the “P”
continue driving if the display is no longer (PARK) or “N” (NEUTRAL) position.
showing. If the warning display remains, l Operating the accelerator pedal while the
other foot is resting on the brake pedal will
NOTE
ized Service Point immediately. affect braking efficiency and may cause pre- 6
[When warning display is showing] mature wear of brake pads.
l The selector lever position indicator blinks
l Use the selector lever in the correct shift po-
at the same time as the warning display or It may be that there is something unusual
happening in the CVT, causing a safety de- sition in accordance with driving conditions.
the warning display appears. Never coast downhill backwards with the se-
vice to activate. Have the vehicle inspected
l The “A” indicator on the selector lever posi-
by a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized lector lever in the “D” (DRIVE) or “Ds”
tion display will blink only when there is a (DOWNSHIFT & SPORTY DRIVING),
problem with the CVT position switch. “M” (MANUAL) or “L” (LOW) position or
It is not seen during normal driving. coast forward with the selector lever in the
Operation of the CVT “R” (REVERSE) position.
The engine may stop and the unexpected in-
CAUTION crease in brake pedal effort and steering
l If malfunction occurs in the CVT while driv- CAUTION wheel weight could lead to an accident.
ing, the warning display or the warning l Do not race the engine with brake pedal
display will appear on the information
l Before selecting a position with the engine pressed when the vehicle is stationary.
running and the vehicle stationary, fully de- This can damage the CVT.
screen in the multi information display. press the brake pedal to prevent the vehicle
In this case, follow these procedures: Also, when you depress the accelerator ped-
from creeping. al while holding down the brake pedal with
[When warning display is showing] The vehicle will begin to move as soon as the selector lever in the “D” (DRIVE) posi-
The CVT fluid is overheating. The engine the CVT is engaged, especially when the en- tion, the engine revolutions may not rise as
control may activate to lower the CVT fluid gine speed is high, at fast idle or with the air high as when performing the same operation
temperature, causing the engine revolutions conditioner operating, the brakes should on- with the selector lever in the “N” (NEU-
and vehicle speed to decrease. In this case, ly be released when you are ready to drive TRAL) position.
take one of the following measures. away.
• Slow down your vehicle.

Electronically controlled 4WD system*
Passing acceleration For longer waiting periods with the engine NOTE
To gain extra acceleration in “D” (DRIVE) running, place the selector lever in the “N”
(NEUTRAL) position and apply the parking l On a slope, be sure to apply the parking
position, push the accelerator to the floor. brake before moving the selector lever to the
The CVT will automatically downshift. brake, while holding the vehicle stationary
“P” (Park) position. If you move the selector
with the service brake. lever to the “P” (Park) position before apply-
ing the parking brake, it may be difficult to
NOTE
CAUTION disengage the selector lever from the “P”
l When shift paddles is in operation, down- (Park) position when next you drive the ve-
shifts do not take place when the accelerator l Never hold the vehicle stationary while in hicle, requiring application of a strong force
CVT on a hill with the accelerator, always to the selector lever to move from the “P”
6 is depressed all the way to the floor.
apply the parking brake and/or service (Park) position.
brake.
Uphill/downhill driving
When the CVT makes no speed
Parking
DRIVING UPHILL change
To park the vehicle, first bring it to a com-
The transmission prevents unnecessary up- If the transmission does not change speeds
plete stop, firmly apply the parking brake,
shifts even when the accelerator pedal is re- while driving, or your vehicle does not pick
and then move the selector lever to the “P”
leased and ensures smooth driving. up enough speed when starting on an uphill
(Park) position.
slope, it may be that there is something un-
If you are going to leave the vehicle unatten-
DRIVING DOWNHILL usual happening in the transmission, causing
ded, always switch off the engine and carry
According to the conditions, the transmission a safety device to activate. We recommend
the key.
will automatically shift to a lower gear ratio you to have your vehicle checked immediate-
to achieve stronger engine braking. This may ly.
help reduce your need to use the service
brake. Electronically controlled
Waiting 4WD system*
For short waiting periods, such as at traffic The electronically controlled 4WD is a sys-
signals the vehicle can be left in selector lev- tem that improves acceleration performance
er position and held stationary with the serv- and stability performance by controlling
ice brake. front-rear distribution of driving torque with
operating the electronic control coupling ar-
ranged in the rear differential assembly.
Drive mode Carefully read the “4-wheel drive operation” CAUTION

on page 6-53 and take care to drive safely.
Select the drive mode from the following l Driving on dry, paved roads in “4WD
LOCK” mode causes increased fuel con-
three types to suit the driving conditions. Drive mode-selector sumption and noise
Drive mode Function The drive mode can be switched by press the
This mode is for econom- switch while the ignition switch is in the NOTE
ical driving. “ON” position or the operation mode in ON.
l Even if the drive mode is selected in any
The usual driving mode is mode other than “4WD AUTO”, after turn-
4WD ECO
2WD for economy but ing off the ignition switch or the operation 6
4WD will engage depend- mode and turning on again, the drive mode
ing on wheel slip. is set to “4WD AUTO”.
However, for some models, the drive mode
This mode is for automat- is maintained in the state when turning off
ically controlling the dis- the ignition switch or the operation mode.
tribution of driving torque l The drive mode can be switched while driv-
4WD AUTO ing or stopped.
to all four wheels accord-
ing to the driving condi-
tions. Drive mode indicator
This mode is for driving Normally the indicator illuminates when the
in slippery conditions If you press the switch, you can change the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position
such as on snow-covered drive mode in the order of 4WD AUTO, or the operation mode put in ON, and then
roads or sand. 4WD LOCK, 4WD ECO, 4WD AUTO. the drive mode is displayed a few seconds af-
The large amount of driv- ter the engine is started.
4WD LOCK ing torque that is applied The status of each drive mode display is as
to the rear tyres enables CAUTION
follows.
getting out of slippery l Do not operate the drive mode-selector with
areas and powerful driv- the front wheels spinning on a snowy road or
ing is possible across all in similar conditions. The vehicle could
lunge in an unexpected direction.
ranges.
4-wheel drive operation requires special driv-
ing skills.

Drive mode indicator After a few seconds, the information screen CAUTION
returns from the drive mode display to the
colour liquid mono-colour previous screen. l If the selected drive mode indicator is blink-
Drive mode crystal dis- liquid crys- ing, the drive mode switches automatically
play meter tal display Drive mode Display to protect the drive-system components.
meter The warning display is also displayed in the
4WD ECO information screen in the multi information
4WD ECO 4WD ECO 4WD-E display.
4WD AUTO 4WD AUTO — Warning display (colour liquid crystal dis-
6 4WD LOCK 4WD LOCK LOCK play)
On vehicles with colour liquid crystal display 4WD AUTO

meter, the drive mode is displayed as an in-
terrupt display on the information screen in
the multi information display when the drive
mode is switched.
Reduce speed, and if the indicator goes out
4WD LOCK after driving a while, resume driving as be-
fore.
For vehicles equipped with mono-colour liq-
uid crystal display meter, drive mode indica-
tor (“4WD-E”, “LOCK”) is blinking alter-
nately.

S-AWC (Super All Wheel Control)*
CAUTION CAUTION S-AWC (Super All Wheel

l If the drive mode indicator “4WD” is blink- l Be sure to use tyres that are the same speci- Control)*
ing, a problem has occurred with the elec- fied size, type, and brand, and have no dif-
tronically controlled 4WD system and the ference in the amount of wear for all 4 S-AWC is an integrated vehicle dynamics
safety device has activated. The warning dis- wheels. control system that helps enhance driving
play is also displayed in the information Otherwise, the electronically 4WD system
screen in the multi information display. may not work properly, and 4WD system
performance, cornering performance, and ve-
warning (overheating or service required) hicle stability over a wide range of driving
Warning display (colour liquid crystal dis- may be indicated. conditions through integrated management of
the electronically controlled 4WD, the AYC
play)
(Active Yaw Control), the ABS and the ASC.
6
When the ECO mode switch is
ON*
CAUTION
While the drive mode is in the “4WD AU-
TO” position, if the ECO mode switch is l Do not over-rely on the S-AWC. Even the S-
AWC cannot prevent the natural laws of
switched ON, the drive mode will be changed physics from acting on the vehicle. This sys-
to “4WD ECO” mode. tem, like any other system, has limits and
If the ECO mode switch is switched OFF, the cannot help you to maintain traction and
drive mode will be returned to “4WD AU- control of the vehicle in all circumstances.
TO” mode. Reckless driving may lead to accidents. It is
Have an inspection made by a MITSUBISHI Refer to “ECO mode switch” on page 5-68 the driver’s responsibility to drive carefully.
MOTORS Authorized Service Point. This means taking into account the traffic,
For vehicles equipped with mono-colour liq- road and environmental conditions.
uid crystal display meter, drive mode indica- NOTE
tor (“4WD-E”, “LOCK”) is blinking at the
l If the drive mode is switched in any mode Electronically Controlled 4WD
same time. after the drive mode is switched in “4WD
ECO”, the drive mode will not be changed The electronically controlled 4WD is a sys-
even if the ECO mode switch is switched tem that improves acceleration performance
OFF. and stability performance by controlling
front-rear distribution of driving torque with
operating the electronic control coupling ar-
ranged in the rear differential assembly.

Active Yaw Control (AYC) S-AWC drive Function S-AWC drive Function
mode mode
The AYC is a system with a yaw control
function, that controls the left-right driving/ This mode is for econom- This mode is suitable
braking force using the brakes. ical driving. mainly for driving on un-
This mode is normally paved or rough roads.
Yaw control function AWC ECO 2WD for economy but GRAVEL This mode provides 4WD
provides 4WD perform- high driving performance
The yaw control function is a function that ance during wheel slip- and stable cornering per-
ping conditions. formance.
6 enhances vehicle cornering performance and
vehicle stability with management of vehicle Normal mode applied to 4-wheel drive operation requires special driv-
turning power (yaw moment) by controlling dry pavement road and ing skills.
the drive power difference of the left and wet road, etc. Carefully read “4-wheel drive operation” on
right wheels and the braking force when the This mode controls driv- page 6-53 and take care to drive safety.
vehicle does not turn in response to steering ing/braking torque be-
input, such as when the steering wheel is tween front right and S-AWC drive mode-selector
turned quickly or when driving on slippery NORMAL front left wheel and be- The drive mode can be switched by press the
road. tween front and rear switch while the ignition switch is in the
wheel according to the “ON” position or the operation mode in ON.
CAUTION driving condition, and
achieves low fuel con-
l Control of the braking force does not en-
sumption and agile driv-
hance the stopping performance of the vehi-
cle, therefore, pay careful attention to the ing.
safety of your surroundings when driving. This mode is chiefly suit-
able for the snow road.
SNOW
S-AWC drive mode Stability improves on a
slippery road.
Select the drive mode from the following
four types to suit the driving conditions.

If you press the switch, you can change the S-AWC drive mode display CAUTION
drive mode in the order of NORMAL,
SNOW, GRAVEL, AWC ECO, NORMAL. l If the selected drive mode indicator is blink-
ing, the drive mode switches automatically
to protect the drive-system components.
CAUTION The warning display is also displayed in the
information screen in the multi information
l Do not operate the drive mode-selector with display.
the front wheels spinning on a snowy road or
in similar conditions. The vehicle could Warning display (colour liquid crystal dis-
lunge in an unexpected direction.
l Driving on dry, paved roads in “GRAVEL”
play)
6
mode causes increased fuel consumption and
noise.
Example: “AWC ECO” mode is selected.
NOTE The currently selected drive mode is dis-

l Even if the S-AWC drive mode is selected in played on the multi information display.
any mode other than “NORMAL”, after In addition, when the drive mode is changed, Reduce speed, and if the indicator goes out
turning off the ignition switch or the opera- the selected mode appears on the interrupt after driving a while, resume driving as be-
tion mode and turning the vehicle on again, fore.
display screen of the information screen in
the drive mode is set to “NORMAL”. the multi information display.
However, for some models, the S-AWC
drive mode is maintained in its current state
The drive mode display will appear on the in-
when turning off the ignition switch or the formation screen for a few seconds, and then
operation mode. the original screen will return.
l The drive mode can be switched while driv-
ing or stopped.

CAUTION S-AWC operation display B,C- Anticlockwise yaw moment about

The S-AWC operation status can be dis- the vehicle’s centre of gravity
l If the drive mode indicator “4WD” is blink-
ing, a problem has occurred with the S-AWC played on the information screen in the multi
system and the safety device has activated. information display. Traction control level display
The warning display is also displayed in the To display the status, press the multi informa- The strength of the traction control operation
information screen in the multi information tion display switch to change the information (between the front and rear wheels) is dis-
display.
screen. played in section E of the meter as a bar
Warning display (colour liquid crystal dis- Refer to “Information screen (when the igni- graph.
tion switch or the operation mode is ON)” on
6 play)
page 5-05 WARNING
Display example l Always concentrate on your driving first.
Keep your eyes and mind on the road.
The S-AWC operation status is displayed. Distractions while driving can lead to an
accident.
When the ECO mode switch is

ON*
While the drive mode is in the “NORMAL”
Have an inspection made by a MITSUBISHI position, if the ECO mode switch is switched
MOTORS Authorized Service Point. ON, the drive mode will be changed to
l Be sure to use tyres that are the same speci- “AWC ECO” mode.
fied size, type, and brand, and have no dif-
If the ECO mode switch is switched OFF, the
ference in the amount of wear for all 4
wheels. Otherwise, the S-AWC system may drive mode will be returned to “NORMAL”
not work properly, and 4WD system warn- mode.
ing (overheating or service required) may be Yaw control function display Refer to “ECO mode switch” on page 5-68
indicated.
The amount of the yaw moment is displayed
as a bar graph.
A,D- Clockwise yaw moment about the

vehicle’s centre of gravity

4-wheel drive operation
NOTE WARNING NOTE

l If the drive mode is switched in any mode l Do not over-rely on the 4-wheel drive ve- l MITSUBISHI MOTORS is not responsible
after the drive mode is switched in “AWC hicles. Even 4-wheel drive vehicles have to the operator for any damage or injury
ECO”, the drive mode will not be changed limits to the system and ability to main- caused or liability incurred by improper and
even if the ECO mode switch is switched tain control and traction. Reckless driving negligent operation of a vehicle. All techni-
OFF. may lead to accidents. Always drive care- ques of vehicle operation depend on the skill
fully, taking account of the road condi- and experience of the operator and other par-
tions. ticipating parties. Any deviation from the
4-wheel drive operation l Improperly operating this vehicle on or recommended operating instructions above
off-paved roads can cause an accident or is at their own risk.
Your vehicle has been designed primarily for rollover in which you and your passengers l Note that the stopping distance required of a 6
use on paved roads. But its unique 4-wheel could be seriously injured or killed. 4-wheel drive vehicle differs very little from
drive system allows you to occasionally trav- • Follow all instructions and guidelines in that of a 2-wheel drive vehicle. When driv-
the owner’s manual. ing on a snow-covered road or a slippery,
el on unpaved roads, to campgrounds, picnic • Keep your speed low and do not drive muddy surface, make sure that you keep a
sites, and similar locations. faster than conditions allow you to. sufficient distance between your vehicle and
Not only does this ensure better handling on the one ahead of you.
dry, paved roads but also permits better trac- l The driving posture should be more upright;
tion when driving on slippery, wet or snow- CAUTION adjust the seat to a good position for easy
covered roads and when moving out of mud. steering and pedal operation. Be sure to wear
l Setting the drive mode-selector to “4WD
the seat belt.
But it is not suitable for heavy off road use or LOCK” (Electronically controlled 4WD) or
towing in rough conditions. “GRAVEL” (S-AWC) to drive on dry paved l After driving on rough roads, check each
part of the vehicle and wash it thoroughly
It is particularly important to note that 4- road will increase fuel consumption, with
with water. Refer to the “Inspection and
wheel drive may not give sufficient hill possible noise generation.
maintenance following rough road opera-
climbing ability and engine braking on steep tion” section and “Maintenance” sections.
slopes. You should try to avoid driving on NOTE
steep slopes.
Also, you must exercise caution when driving l Driving on rough roads can be hard on a ve-
hicle. Before you leave paved roads, be sure
on sand and mud and when driving through all scheduled maintenance and service has
water because sufficient traction may not be been done, and that you have inspected your
available in certain circumstances. vehicle. Pay special attention to the condi-
Please avoid driving the vehicle through tion of the tyres, and check the tyre pres-
areas where the tyres may get stuck in deep sures.
sand or mud.

4-wheel drive operation
Turning sharp corners NOTE CAUTION

When turning a sharp corner in “4WD l Maintain a safe distance between vehicles, l If the engine is overheating or the engine
avoid sudden braking, and use engine brak- power drops suddenly while the vehicle is
LOCK” (Electronically controlled 4WD) or ing (downshifting). being driven, immediately park your vehicle
“GRAVEL” (S-AWC) position at low speed, in a safe place.
a slight difference in steering may be experi- Refer to “Engine overheating” on page
enced similar to feeling as if the brakes were Driving on sandy or muddy 8-11 for details and take the required meas-
applied. This is called tight corner braking roads ures.
and results from each of the 4 tyres being at a
Set the drive mode-selector to “4WD LOCK”
6 different distance from the corner. The phe-
(Electronically controlled 4WD) or “GRAV- NOTE
nomenon is typical of 4-wheel drive vehicles.
If this occurs, either straighten out the steer- EL” (S-AWC) and then gradually depress the l Avoid sudden braking, sudden acceleration
ing wheel, or change to another mode. accelerator pedal for a smooth start. Keep the and sharp turning; such operations could re-
pressure on the accelerator pedal as constant sult in the vehicle becoming stuck.
On snowy or icy roads as possible, and drive at low speed. l If the vehicle becomes stuck in sandy or
muddy roads, it can often be moved with a
rocking motion. Move the selector lever al-
Set the drive mode-selector to “4WD AUTO” WARNING ternately between the “D” (DRIVE) and “R”
or “4WD LOCK” (Electronically controlled (REVERSE) positions, while pressing light-
4WD) or “SNOW” (S-AWC) in accordance l When attempting to rock your vehicle out ly on the accelerator pedal.
of a stuck position, be sure that the area
with the road conditions, and then gradually around the vehicle is clear of people and l Driving on rough roads can cause rust on the
depress the accelerator pedal for a smooth physical objects. The rocking motion may vehicle; wash the vehicle thoroughly as soon
start. cause the vehicle to suddenly launch for- as possible after such use.
ward or backward, causing injury or
CAUTION damage to nearby people or objects. Climbing/descending sharp
grades
l Avoid sudden braking, sudden acceleration
and sharp turning. Skidding occurs and con- CAUTION Your vehicle may not provide sufficient hill
trol of the vehicle could be lost.
l Do not force the vehicle or drive recklessly climbing ability and engine braking on steep
on sandy surfaces. In comparison with nor- slopes. Avoid driving on steep slopes even
mal road surfaces, the engine and other
NOTE drive-system components are put under ex-
though the vehicle is a 4-wheel drive vehicle.
l The use of snow tyres and/or snow traction cessive strain when driving on such a sur-
device (tyre chains) is recommended. face. This could lead to accidents.

Inspection and maintenance following rough road operation
Driving through water Inspection and maintenance Cautions on handling of 4-

If the electrical circuits become wet, further following rough road wheel drive vehicles
operation of the vehicle will be impossible;
therefore, avoid driving through water unless operation
absolutely necessary. If driving through water
After operating the vehicle in rough road
Tyres and wheels
is unavoidable, use the following procedure:
conditions, be sure to perform the following Since the driving torque can be applied to the
Check the depth of the water and the terrain inspection and maintenance procedures: 4 wheels, the driving performance of the ve-
before attempting to drive through it. Drive l Check that the vehicle has not been dam- hicle when operating in 4-wheel drive is
slowly to avoid creating excessive water aged by rocks, gravel, etc. greatly affected by the condition of the tyres. 6
splashing. l Carefully wash the vehicle with water.
Drive the vehicle slowly while lightly Pay close attention to the tyres.
depressing the brake pedal in order to
CAUTION l Install only the specified tyres on all
dry out the brakes. If the brakes still do wheels. Refer to “Tyres and wheels” on
l Never drive through water that is deep not function properly, we recommend page 11-11.
enough to cover wheel hubs, axles or ex- you to have the brakes checked as soon
haust pipe. Do not change the selector lever
l Be sure all 4 tyres and wheels are the
as possible. same size and type.
position while driving through water. l Remove the insects, dried grass, etc.
Frequent driving through water can adverse- When it is necessary to replace any of
clogging the radiator core. the tyres or wheels, replace all 4 tyres.
ly affect the life span of the vehicle; we rec-
ommend you to take the necessary measures l After driving through water, check the l All tyres should be rotated before the
to prepare, inspect, and repair the vehicle. engine, transmission and differential oil. wear difference between the front and
l After driving through water, apply the If the oil or grease is milky or cloudy be- rear tyres is recognizable.
brakes to be sure they are functioning prop- cause of water contamination, it must be
erly. If the brakes are wet and not function- replaced with new oil or grease.
ing properly, dry them out by driving slowly
Good vehicle performance cannot be expec-
l Check the inside of the vehicle. If water ted if there is a difference in wear between
while lightly depressing the brake pedal. In- entry is found, dry the carpet etc.
spect each part of the vehicle carefully. tyres. Refer to “Tyre rotation” on page 10-13.
l Inspect the headlamps, If the headlamp l Check the tyre inflation pressure regular-
bulb is flooded with water, we recom-
ly.
mend you to have it drained.

Braking
CAUTION CAUTION CAUTION

l Always use tyres of the same size, same l Do not tow 4-wheel drive vehicles with the l Avoid driving habits that cause heavy brak-
type, and same brand, and which have no front or rear wheels on the ground (Type A ing and never “ride” the brakes by resting
wear differences. Using tyres of different or Type B) as illustrated. This could result in your foot on the brake pedal while driving.
size, type, brands or degree of wear, will in- damage to the drivetrain, or unstable towing. It causes brake overheating and fade.
crease the differential oil temperature, result- If you tow 4-wheel drive vehicles, use Type
ing in possible damage to the driving sys- C or Type D equipment.
Brake system
tem. Further, the drive train will be subjected l Even in “4WD ECO” (Electronically con-
to excessive loading possibly leading to oil trolled 4WD) or “AWC ECO” (S-AWC)
leakage, component seizure, or other serious drive mode, the vehicle cannot be towed The service brake is divided into two brake
6 faults. with the front or the rear wheels on the circuits. And your vehicle is equipped with
ground. power brakes. If one brake circuit fails, the
other is available to stop the vehicle. If you
Towing
Jacking up a 4-wheel drive ve- should lose the power assist for some reason,
the brakes will still work. In these situations,
hicle even if the brake pedal moves down to the
very end of its possible stroke or resists being
WARNING depressed, keep depressing the brake pedal
l Do not crank the engine while jacking up down harder and further than usual; stop
the vehicle. driving as soon as possible and have the
The tyre on the ground may turn and the brake system repaired.
vehicle may roll off the jack.
WARNING
Braking l Do not turn off the engine while your ve-
hicle is in motion. If you turn off the en-
All the parts of the brake system are critical gine while driving, the power assistance
to safety. We recommend you to have the ve- for the braking system will stop working
hicle checked at regular intervals according and your brakes will not work effectively.
to the service booklet. l If the power assist is lost or if either brake
hydraulic system stops working properly,
have your vehicle checked immediately.

Brake auto hold*
Warning display WARNING Brake auto hold*

The brake warning lamp illuminates to indi- l Do not leave any objects near the brake
pedal or let a floor mat slide under it; do- When the vehicle is stopped at traffic signals
cate a fault in the braking system. A warning ing so could prevent the full pedal stroke etc., the vehicle can be held stationary with
is also displayed on the multi information that would be necessary in an emergency. the brake auto hold system even if you re-
display. Refer to “Brake warning lamp” on Make sure that the pedal can be operated lease your foot from the brake pedal.
page 5-53 and “Brake warning display” on freely at all times. Make sure the floor When the accelerator pedal is depressed, the
page 5-56. mat is securely held in place.
brakes are released.
When brakes are wet Brake pad 6
WARNING
Check the brake system while driving at a l Avoid hard braking situations. l Do not overly rely on the brake auto hold
low speed immediately after starting, espe- New brakes need to be broken-in by system. On a steep slope, depress the
cially when the brakes are wet, to confirm moderate use for the first 200 km brake pedal firmly because the system
they work normally. (124 miles). may not hold the vehicle stationary.
A film of water can be formed on the brake l The disc brakes are provided with a l Never leave the vehicle while it is being
discs and prevent normal braking after driv- stopped by the brake auto hold system.
warning device which emits a shrieking When leaving the vehicle, apply the park-
ing in heavy rain or through large puddles, or metallic sound while braking if the brake ing brake and move the selector lever to
after the vehicle is washed. If this occurs, dry pads have reached their wear limit. If the “P” (Park) position.
the brakes out by driving slowly while lightly you hear this sound, have the brake pads l Do not use the brake auto hold system
depressing the brake pedal. replaced immediately. when driving on slippery roads. The sys-
tem may not hold the vehicle stationary
When driving downhill and an accident could occur.
WARNING
It is important to take advantage of the en- l Driving with worn brake pads will make
gine braking by shifting to a lower shift posi- it harder to stop, and can cause an acci- NOTE
tion while driving on steep downhill roads in dent. l While operating the brake auto hold system,
order to prevent the brakes from overheating. you may hear an operation noise to increase
braking force when the system detected the
movement of the vehicle. This does not indi-
cate a malfunction.

Brake auto hold*
How to use brake auto hold NOTE NOTE

l If this warning appears, confirm that all of • When there is a malfunction in the sys-
To turn on brake auto hold the conditions for system operation are met
and that there is no malfunction in the sys-
tem.
If the brake auto hold switch is pressed while tem.

all of the following conditions are met, the
system will change to the standby state and
the indication lamp (A) on the switch comes
on.
6 l The ignition switch or the operation l If you keep pressing the brake auto hold
mode is in ON. switch after setting the brake auto hold to
l The driver’s seat belt is fastened. l If this warning appears, fasten the driver’s ON (stand by), the brake auto hold will re-
seat belt. turn to OFF as a protection function is oper-
l The driver’s door is closed. ated.
After returning to OFF, the brake auto hold
will not be switched to ON (stand by) even
if the brake auto hold switch is pressed. To
set the brake auto hold to ON, restart the en-
gine and press the brake auto hold switch
again.
l If any of the following occurs while the sys-
tem is standby state, the brake auto hold sys-
tem will be turned off automatically and the
To activate brake auto hold
indication lamp on the switch goes off. When the vehicle is stopped by depressing
A buzzer will sound and the message will the brake pedal with the selector lever in any
appear on the information screen in the multi
position other than “P” (Park) or “R” (Re-
information display.
verse), the brake auto hold activates and the
• When the driver’s seat belt is unfastened.
vehicle will be held stationary.
NOTE • When the driver’s door is opened.
l When the brake auto hold system cannot be
used, a buzzer will sound and the following
warning will appear on the information
screen in the multi information display.

Brake auto hold*
The brake auto hold indication lamp in the NOTE NOTE
instrument cluster will come on while the
system activates. l If the following operation is performed, the • When the system detects the vehicle slid-
brake auto hold will be deactivated and the ing down a slope.
brake auto hold indication lamp in the in-
strument cluster goes off.
• When shifting the selector lever to the “P”
(Park) or “R” (Reverse) position with de-
pressing the brake pedal.
• When the Electric parking brake is ap-
plied by using the Electric parking brake
switch. If the Electric parking brake cannot be ap-
6
l While the vehicle is held stationary with the plied automatically due to the system mal-
brake auto hold system, the Electric parking function, the message will appear on the
brake will be automatically applied under information screen in the multi informa-
the following conditions, and a buzzer will tion display. Depress the brake pedal.
sound and the message will appear on the in-
formation screen in the multi information
CAUTION display.
• After approximately 10 minutes have
l Release the brake pedal after the brake auto
elapsed while applying the brake auto
hold indication lamp is illuminated.
hold system.
• When the driver’s seat belt is unfastened.
NOTE • When the driver’s door is opened.
• When the ignition switch is turned to the
l In the following situations, the brake auto “LOCK” position or the operation mode
hold system may not operate temporarily. is put in OFF.
• The vehicle is stopped on a slippery road.
• The vehicle was stopped while the steer-
ing wheel was turned all the way to the
left or right.
• The vehicle is being turned on a parking
lot turntable.
If this occurs, the brake auto hold system
will return to the normal operation if you de-
press the accelerator pedal and the vehicle
starts moving again.

Hill start assist*
NOTE If you want to turn off the system while the CAUTION
brake auto hold indication lamp is illumina-
l If the ignition switch is turned to the ted, press the switch while depressing the l Do not overly rely on the hill start assist to
“LOCK” position or the operation mode is prevent backwards movement of the vehicle.
brake pedal.
put in OFF with the selector lever in any po- Under certain circumstances, even when hill
sition other than “P” (Park) position, the start assist is activated, the vehicle may
message may appear on the information NOTE move backwards if the brake pedal is not
screen in the multi-information display. sufficiently depressed, if the vehicle is heav-
If the message appears, shift the selector lev- l If the brake auto hold system is turned off ily loaded, or if the road is very steep or slip-
er to the “P” (Park) position while depress- without the brake pedal being depressed, a pery.
buzzer will sound and the message will ap-
6 ing the brake pedal. l The hill start assist is not designed to keep
pear on the information screen in the multi the vehicle stopped in place on uphill slopes
information display. for more than 2 seconds.
l When facing uphill, do not rely on using the
hill start assist to maintain a stopped position
as an alternative to depressing the brake ped-
al.
Doing so could result in an accident.
l Do not turn the ignition switch to the
To start the vehicle “LOCK” or “ACC” position or the operation
mode in ACC or OFF while the hill start as-
Depress the acceleration pedal with the selec- sist is operating. The hill start assist could
tor lever in any position other than “P” (Park) Hill start assist* stop operating, which could result in an acci-
or “N” (Neutral). dent.
The brakes are released, and the brake auto The hill start assist makes it easy to start off
hold indication lamp in the instrument cluster on a steep uphill slope by preventing the ve-
hicle from moving backwards. It keeps the To operate
will go off.
braking force for about 2 seconds when you 1. Stop the vehicle completely using the
To turn off brake auto hold move your foot from the brake pedal to the brake pedal.
accelerator pedal. 2. On vehicles equipped with M/T, place
Press the brake auto hold switch to turn brake the gearshift lever into the 1st position.
auto hold off. The indication lamp on the On vehicles equipped with A/T or CVT,
switch goes off. place the selector lever into the “D” po-
sition.

Brake assist system*
NOTE NOTE Warning lamp
l When reversing on an uphill slope, place the • On vehicles equipped with M/T, the gear-
gearshift lever or the selector lever into the shift lever is in the following position.
“R” position. [When starting an uphill slope forwards.]
Warning display
The gearshift lever is in any position other
than “R”.
3. Release the brake pedal and the hill start (The hill start assist will operate, even if
assist will maintain the braking force ap- the gearshift lever is in the “N” position.)
plied while stopped for approximately 2 [When starting an uphill slope back-
seconds. wards.]
4. Depress the accelerator pedal and the The gearshift lever is in the “R” position. 6
hill start assist will gradually decrease (The hill start assist will not operate when
the braking force as the vehicle starts the gearshift lever is in the “N” position.)
• On vehicles equipped with A/T or CVT, CAUTION
moving. the selector lever is in any position other
l If the warning is displayed, the hill start as-
than “P” or “N”. sist will not operate. Start off carefully.
NOTE • The vehicle is completely stationary, with l Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop
the brake pedal depressed. the engine. Restart the engine and check
l The hill start assist is activated when all of • The parking brake is released. whether the display/indicator goes out, in
the following conditions are met.
l The hill start assist will not operate if the ac- which case the hill start assist is again work-
• The engine is running. celerator pedal is depressed before the brake ing normally.
(The hill start assist will not be activated pedal is released. If they remain displayed or reappear fre-
while the engine is starting or immediate-
ly after the engine is started.)
l The hill start assist also operates when re- quently, it is not necessary to stop the vehi-
versing on an uphill slope. cle immediately, but the vehicle should be
inspected by a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Au-
thorized Service Point as soon as possible.
Warning display
If an abnormal condition occurs in the sys-
tem, the following Warning lamp/Warning Brake assist system*
display will be shown.
The brake assist system is a device assisting
drivers who cannot depress the brake pedal
firmly when it is necessary to do so (such as
in emergency stop situations) and provides
greater braking force.

Emergency stop signal system*
NOTE NOTE
If the brake pedal is depressed suddenly, the
brakes will be applied with more force than l When the anti-lock brake system warning l [Activating condition for the emergency stop
lamp or only Active Stability Control warn- signal system]
usual.
ing lamp illuminate, the brake assist system It activates when all of the following condi-
in not functioning. tions are met.
CAUTION • The vehicle speed is approximately
55 km/h (34 mph) or higher.
l The brake assist system is not a device de- Emergency stop signal • The brake pedal has been depressed, and
signed to exercise braking force greater than the system judges that it was sudden brak-
its capacity. Make sure to always keep a suf- system* ing from the vehicle deceleration and the
6 ficient distance between your vehicle and a operating condition of the anti-lock brake
vehicle in front of you without relying too This is a device that reduces the possibility of system (ABS).
much on the brake assist system. rear end collisions by the rapid and automatic [Deactivating condition for the emergency
blinking of the hazard warning lamps to alert stop signal system]
vehicles approaching from behind during It deactivates when one of the following
NOTE sudden braking. When the emergency stop conditions is met.
l Once the brake assist system is operational, signal system operates, the hazard warning • The brake pedal is released.
it maintains great braking force even if the indication lamp in the instrument cluster • The hazard warning flasher switch is
brake pedal is lightly released. pressed.
blinks rapidly at the same time.
To stop its operation, completely remove • The system judges that it was not sudden
your foot from the brake pedal. braking from the vehicle deceleration and
l When the brake assist system is in use, you CAUTION the operating condition of the anti-lock
may feel as if the depressed brake pedal is brake system (ABS).
soft, the pedal moves in small motions in l If the ABS warning or ASC warning is dis-
conjunction with the sound of the ABS oper- played, the emergency stop signal system
ation, or the vehicle body and the steering may not operate.
wheel vibrate. This occurs when the brake Refer to “ABS warning lamp/display” on
assist system is operating normally and does page 6-64.
not indicate faulty operation. Continue to Refer to “ASC warning lamp/display” on
firmly depress the brake pedal. page 6-68.
l You may hear an operation noise when the
brake pedal is depressed suddenly while sta-
tionary. This does not indicate a malfunction
and the brake assist system is operating nor-
mally.

Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
Anti-lock brake system l Operation of ABS is not restricted to sit- l The ABS will operate after the vehicle
uations where brakes are applied sud- has accelerated to a speed in excess of
(ABS) denly. This system may also operate to approximately 10 km/h (6 mph). It stops
prevent wheel lock when you are driving operating when the vehicle decelerates
Environmental conditions can have an effect over manholes, steel road-work plates, to a speed below about 5 km/h (3 mph).
on braking. During sudden braking when or the vehicle is driven over steps or lev-
there is snow, ice, oil, water etc. on the road el differences in the road, road markings,
surface, a skid may occur. In this situation, CAUTION
or other surfaces which are difficult for
steering control and braking effectiveness is the wheels to grip. l Even the ABS cannot prevent the natural
reduced and the stopping distance is in- laws of physics from acting on the vehicle. It
creased. The vehicle may also go into an un-
l When the ABS is activated, you may cannot for instance avoid accidents that may 6
feel the brake pedal pulsation and the vi- result from excessive speed on bends or fol-
controlled spin. brations of the vehicle body and steering lowing another vehicle too closely or aqua-
The ABS helps prevent the wheels from lock- wheel. You may also hear a characteris- planing. It should remain the driver’s task to
ing during braking, thus maintaining direc- tic noise. At this time, you may feel as if observe safety precautions to judge speeds
tional stability, ensuring controllability and the pedal attempts to resist being de- and brake applications correctly in such con-
providing optimum braking force. pressed. ditions.
This is a normal result of the ABS oper- l Be sure to use tyres of the same type and
Operating hints ation, and does not indicate a problem.
size on 4 wheels.
If tyre types or sizes are mixed, ABS may
If this situation occurs, depress the not function normally.
l Always maintain the same distance from brake pedal more firmly in order to
the vehicle in front of you as you would l Never install a limited-slip differential,
operate the ABS. Do not pump the which is not MITSUBISHI genuine parts, as
for a vehicle not equipped with ABS.
brake. This will result in reduced the ABS may not function normally.
Compared with vehicles not fitted with We recommend you to consult a
braking performance.
ABS, your vehicle may require a longer MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Serv-
stopping distance in the following cases:
l You will hear the operation sound of the
ice Point.
motor coming from the engine compart-
• Driving on gravel or snow-covered
ment immediately after starting the en-
roads.
gine. If the brake pedal is depressed at
• Driving with tyre chains installed.
that moment, you can feel the brake ped-
• Driving on roads where the road sur-
al pulsating.
face is pitted or has other differences
This pulsation is due to the self-diagno-
in surface height.
sis operation of the ABS and does not
• Driving on bumpy roads or other poor
indicate a malfunction.
driving surfaces.

Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
ABS warning lamp/display CAUTION If the ABS warning lamp/

display and brake warning
your vehicle to a MITSUBISHI MOTORS
Warning lamp Authorized Service Point.
lamp/display illuminate at the
• When the ignition switch is in the “ON”
same time
position or the operation mode is put in
Warning lamp
ON, the warning lamp does not come on
or it remains on and does not go off.
Warning display • The warning lamp comes on while driving
• The warning display appears while driv-
6 ing
Warning display
If the warning lamp/display il-
luminate while driving
If there is a malfunction in the system, the
If only the ABS warning lamp/
ABS warning lamp will come on and the
display illuminate
warning display will appear on the informa-
tion screen in the multi information display. Avoid hard braking and high-speed driving. The ABS and brake force distribution func-
Under normal conditions, the ABS warning Stop the vehicle in a safe place. tion may not work, so hard braking could
lamp only comes on when the ignition switch Restart the engine and check to see whether make the vehicle unstable.
is turned to the “ON” position or the opera- the lamp goes out after a few minutes driv- Avoid hard braking and high-speed driving.
tion mode is put in ON and goes off a few ing; if it then remains off during driving, Stop the vehicle in a safe place and we rec-
seconds later. there is no problem. ommend you to have it checked.
However, if the lamp does not go out, or if it
lights up again when the vehicle is driven, we
CAUTION recommend you to have the vehicle checked
NOTE
l Any of the following warning lamp/display as soon as possible. l The ABS warning lamp and brake warning
behaviour indicates that the ABS is not func- lamp illuminate at the same time and the
tioning and only the standard brake system warning displays appear alternately on the
is working. (The standard brake system is information screen in the multi information
functioning normally.) If this happens, take display.

Electric power steering system (EPS)
After driving on icy roads The power steering system has mechanical NOTE
steering capability in case the power assist is
After driving on snowy roads, remove any l If you turn the steering wheel while the vehi-
lost. If the power assist is lost for some rea-
snow and ice which may have become ad- cle is stationary with the headlamps on, the
son, you will still be able to steer your vehi-
hered to the wheel areas. headlamps may become dim. This behaviour
cle, but you will notice it takes much more is not abnormal. The headlamps will return
When doing this, be careful not to damage
effort to steer. If this happens, have your ve- to their original brightness after a short
the wheel speed sensors (A) and cables loca-
hicle inspected at a MITSUBISHI MOTORS while.
ted at each wheel on vehicles equipped with
an ABS.
Electric power steering system
WARNING warning lamp/warning display 6
Front Rear
l Do not stop the engine while the vehicle is
moving. Stopping the engine would make Warning lamp
the steering wheel extremely hard to turn,
possibly resulting in an accident.
NOTE
Warning display
l During repeated full-lock turning of the
steering wheel (for example, while you are
manoeuvring the vehicle into a parking
space), a protection function may be activa-
ted to prevent overheating of the power
Electric power steering steering system. This function will make the
system (EPS) steering wheel gradually harder to turn. In
this event, limit your turning of the steering If there is a malfunction in the system, the
The power steering system operates while the wheel for a while. When the system has warning lamp will come on and the warning
cooled down, the steering action will return display will appear on the information screen
engine is running.
to normal.
It helps reduce the effort needed to turn the in the multi information display.
steering wheel. Under normal conditions, the warning lamp
come on when the ignition switch is turned to
the “ON” position or the operation mode is
put in ON, and goes off after the engine has
started.

Active stability control (ASC)*

l If the warning lamp comes on and the warn- l Do not over-rely on the ASC. Even the ASC l When the ASC is activated, you may feel a
ing display appears while the engine is run- cannot prevent the natural laws of physics vibration in the vehicle body or hear a whin-
ning, have the vehicle inspected by a from acting on the vehicle. ing sound from the engine compartment.
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Serv- This system, like any other system, has lim- This indicates that the system is operating
ice Point as soon as possible. its and cannot help you to maintain traction normally. It does not indicate a malfunction.
It may become harder to turn the steering and control of the vehicle in all circumstan- l When the anti-lock brake system warning
wheel. ces. Reckless driving may lead to accidents. lamp is illuminated, the ASC is not active.
It is the driver’s responsibility to drive care-
fully. This means taking into account the
6 Active stability control traffic, road and environmental conditions. Traction control function
(ASC)* l Be sure to use the same specified type and On slippery surfaces, the traction control
size of tyre on all 4 wheels. Otherwise, the
function prevents the drive wheels from ex-
ASC may not work properly.
The Active Stability Control (ASC) takes cessive spinning, thus helping the vehicle to
l Do not install any aftermarket limited-slip
overall control of the anti-lock brake system, differential (LSD) on your vehicle. The ASC start moving from a stopped condition. It also
traction control function and stability control may stop functioning properly. provides sufficient driving force and steering
function to help maintain the vehicle’s con- performance as the vehicle turns while press-
trol and traction. Please read this section in ing the acceleration pedal.
conjunction with the page on the anti-lock NOTE
brake system, traction control function and l An operation noise may be emitted from the CAUTION
stability control function. engine compartment in the following situa-
tions. The sound is associated with checking l When driving a vehicle on a snowy or icy
the operations of the ASC. At this time, you road, be sure to install snow tyres and drive
Anti-lock brake system (ABS) ® p. 6-63 the vehicle at moderate speeds.
may feel a shock from the brake pedal if you
Traction control function ® p. 6-66 depress it. These do not indicate a malfunc-
Stability control function ® p. 6-66 tion.
• When the ignition switch is set to the Stability control function
“ON” position or the operation mode is The stability control function is designed to
put in ON. help the driver maintain control of the vehicle
• When the vehicle is driven for a while af- on slippery roads or during rapid steering ma-
ter the engine is turned on.
noeuvres. It works by controlling the engine
output and brake on each wheel.

Active stability control (ASC)*
NOTE CAUTION CAUTION

l The stability control function operates at l Be sure to keep the ASC on while driving in l When indicator blinks, ASC is operating,
speeds of about 15 km/h (9 mph) or higher. normal circumstances. which means that the road is slippery or that
your vehicle’s wheels are beginning to slip.
If this happens, drive slower with less accel-
ASC OFF switch NOTE erator input.
The ASC is automatically activated when the l When moving out of mud, sand or fresh l If the temperature in the braking system con-
ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position snow, pressing the accelerator pedal may not tinues to increase due to continuous brake
or the operation mode is put in ON. You can allow the engine speed to increase. In such control on a slippery road surface, the in-
deactivate the system by pressing down the situations, temporarily turning off the ASC dicator will blink.
To prevent the brake system from overheat-
6
ASC OFF switch for 3 seconds or longer. with the ASC OFF switch will make it easier
to move out your vehicle. ing, the brake control of the traction control
When the ASC is deactivated, the display/ function will be temporarily suspended.
indicator will turn on. To reactivate the ASC, l By pressing the “ASC OFF” switch, both the
The engine control of the traction control
stability control function and the traction
momentarily press the ASC OFF switch; the control function are turned OFF. function and normal brake operation will not
indicator is turned off. be affected. Park your vehicle in a safe
l If you continue to press the ASC OFF switch
place. When the temperature in the braking
after the ASC is turned off, the “mistaken
operation protection function” will activate system has come down, the indicator will
and the ASC will turn back on. be turned off and the traction control func-
tion will start operating again.
ASC operation indicator or

ASC OFF indicator NOTE
l The indicator may turn on when you start
- ASC operation indicator the engine. This means that the battery volt-
The indicator will blink when the age momentarily dropped when the engine
ASC is operating. was started. It does not indicate a malfunc-
tion, provided that the indicator goes out im-
- ASC OFF indicator mediately.
CAUTION This indicator will turn on when the l When a compact spare tyre has been put on
ASC is turned off with the ASC OFF your vehicle, the gripping ability of the tyre
l For safety reasons, the ASC OFF switch
switch. will be lower, making it more likely that the
should be operated when your vehicle is indicator will blink.
stopped.

Cruise control*
ASC warning lamp/display CAUTION CAUTION

If an abnormal condition occurs in the sys- l If the 2WD vehicle is towed with the igni- l When you do not wish to drive at a set
tem, the following warning lamp/warning tion switch in the “ON” position or the oper- speed, turn off the cruise control for safety.
display will turn on. ation mode in ON and only the front wheels l Do not use cruise control when driving con-
or only the rear wheels raised off the ground, ditions will not allow you to stay at the same
Warning lamp the ASC may operate, resulting in an acci- speed, such as in heavy traffic or on roads
dent. When towing the 2WD vehicle with that are winding, icy, snow-covered, wet,
- ASC operation indicator the front wheels raised, keep the ignition slippery, on a steep downhill slope.
switch in the “LOCK” or “ACC” position or l On vehicles with M/T, do not move the gear-
the operation mode in ACC or OFF. When shift lever to the “N” (Neutral) position
6 - ASC OFF indicator
towing the vehicle with the rear wheels while driving at a set speed without depress-
raised, keep the ignition switch in the ing the clutch pedal. The engine will run too
Warning display “ACC” position or the operation mode in fast and might be damaged.
ACC.
Refer to “Towing” on page 8-28.
NOTE
l Cruise control may not be able to keep your
speed on uphills or downhills.
l Your speed may decrease on a steep uphill.
You may use the accelerator pedal if you
want to stay at your set speed.
CAUTION l Your speed may increase to more than the
set speed on a steep downhill. You must use
l The system may be malfunctioning. the brake to control your speed. As a result,
Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the set speed driving is deactivated.
the engine. Restart the engine and check
whether the display/indicator goes out. If
they go out, there is no abnormal condition.
If they do not go out or appear frequently, it
is not necessary to stop the vehicle immedi- Cruise control*
ately, but we recommend you to have your
vehicle inspected. Cruise control is an automatic speed control
system that keeps a set speed. It can be acti-
vated at approximately 40 km/h (25 mph) or
more.

Cruise control*
Cruise control switches NOTE Indication lamp
l When operating the cruise control switches,

press the cruise control switches correctly.
The set speed driving may be deactivated
automatically if two or more switches of the
cruise control are pressed at the same time. Indicator display
To activate
1. With the ignition switch in the “ON” po- 6
sition or the operation mode in ON,
press the CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF 2. Accelerate or decelerate to your desired
switch (A) to turn on the cruise control. speed, then push down and release the
A- CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF switch The indication lamp/indicator display in “SET-” switch (B) when the indication
Used to turn on and off the cruise control. the meter cluster will come on. lamp/indicator display is illuminated.
The vehicle will then maintain the de-
B- “SET-” switch
sired speed. The “SET” indicator ap-
Used to reduce the set speed and to set the
pears on the information screen in the
desired speed.
meter cluster. (For vehicles equipped
with colour liquid crystal display meter)
C- “RES +” switch
Used to increase the set speed and to return to
the original set speed.
D- “CANCEL” switch
Used to deactivate the set speed driving.

Cruise control*
NOTE Each time you press the “RES+” switch (C), When you reach your desired speed, release
your vehicle will go approximately 1.6 km/h the switch. Your new cruising speed is now
l When you release the “SET-” switch (B), the (1 mph) faster. set.
vehicle speed will be set.
Accelerator pedal
To increase the set speed While driving at the set speed, use the accel-
There are two ways to increase the set speed. erator pedal to reach your desired speed and
then push down the “SET-” switch (B) and
“RES+” switch release the switch momentarily to set a new
6 Push up and hold the “RES+” switch (C) desired cruising speed.
while driving at the set speed, and your speed
will then gradually increase.
When you reach your desired speed, release
the switch. Your new cruising speed is now
set. To slow down your speed in small amounts,
push down the “SET-” switch (B) for less
than approximately 1 second and release it.
Each time you push down the “SET-” switch
(B), your vehicle will slow down by approxi-
mately 1.6 km/h (1 mph).
To decrease the set speed

There are two ways to decrease the set speed.
“SET-” switch
Push down and hold the “SET-” switch (B)
To increase your speed in small amounts,
while driving at the set speed, and your speed
push up the “RES+” switch (C) for less than
will slow down gradually.
approximately 1 second and release it.

Cruise control*
Brake pedal To temporarily increase or de- Refer to “To resume the set speed” on page
crease the speed 6-72.
While driving at the set speed, use the brake
pedal, which disengages the cruise control,
then push down the “SET-” switch (B) and To temporarily increase the
release the switch momentarily to set a new speed
desired cruising speed.
Depress the accelerator pedal as you would
normally. When you release the pedal, you
will return to your set speed.
6
To deactivate
The set speed driving can be deactivated as
follows:
l Press the CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF
switch (A) (Cruise control will be turned
off.)
l Press the “CANCEL” switch (D).
NOTE l Depress the brake pedal.
l In some driving conditions, the set speed
driving may be deactivated. If this happens,
refer to “To activate” on page 6-69 and re-
peat the speed setting procedure.
To temporarily decrease the

speed
Depress the brake pedal to decrease the
speed. To return to the previously set speed,
push up the “RES +” switch (C).

Speed Limiter*
The set speed driving is deactivated automat- CAUTION Under either of the following conditions,
ically in any of the following ways. however, using the switch does not allow you
l When you depress the clutch pedal (on l When the set speed driving is deactivated to resume the previously set speed. In these
automatically in any situation other than
vehicles with M/T). situations, repeat the speed setting procedure:
those listed above, there may be a system
l When your speed slows to approximate- malfunction. l The CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF
ly 15 km/h (9 mph) or more below the Press the CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF switch is pressed.
set speed because of a hill, etc. switch to turn off the cruise control and have l The ignition switch is turned OFF or the
l When your speed slows to approximate- your vehicle inspected by a MITSUBISHI operation mode is put in OFF.
ly 40 km/h (25 mph) or less. MOTORS Authorized Service Point. l Indication lamp goes off.
6 l When the Active Stability Control
(ASC) starts operating. (if so equipped) To resume the set speed
Refer to “Active stability control
Speed Limiter*
(ASC)*” on page 6-66. If the set driving speed is deactivated by the
condition described in “To deactivate” on The Speed Limiter is a driver assist function
page 6-71, you can resume the previously set to prevent from exceeding the speed set by
WARNING speed by pushing up the “RES +” switch (C) driver while engine power control.
l On vehicles equipped with A/T or CVT, while driving at a speed of approximately
although the set speed driving will be de- 40 km/h (25 mph) or higher. The “SET” indi- CAUTION
activated when shifting to the “N” (Neu- cator appears on the information screen in the
tral) position, never move the selector lev- meter cluster. (For vehicles equipped with l Because the system does not use service
er to the “N” (Neutral) position while brake (hydraulic brake), the vehicle speed
colour liquid crystal display meter) may exceed the set speed on the downhill.
driving.
You would have no engine braking and If a driver wants to keep the vehicle speed in
could cause a serious accident. such a situation, he/she must put on a service
brake or downshift.
Also, the set speed driving may be deactiva-

ted as follows: NOTE
l When the engine speed rises and ap-
proaches the tachometer’s red zone (the l If the clutch pedal (M/T) is depressed, the
Speed Limiter does not activate.
red-coloured part of the tachometer di-
al).
If the vehicle speed exceeds the set speed
(approximately 3 km/h (2 mph)), the indica-
tor will blink in the combination meter.

Speed Limiter*
If the vehicle speed exceeds the set speed ap- Speed Limiter control switches NOTE
proximately +3 km/h (2 mph) more than ap-
There are four switches which relate to the l Press the switch one by one.
proximately 5 seconds after indicated alert
Speed Limiter on the steering wheel.
message, beep alert is sounded for approxi- l The Speed Limiter may be cancelled auto-
mately 10 seconds at the most. matically, if two or more switches are press-
ed at the same time.
While running without alert message, if you
decrease the set speed and vehicle speed is
more than set speed approximately +3 km/h Speed Limiter information on
(2 mph), alert message is displayed but beep the multi information display
alert is delayed. area 6
In this case, when vehicle speed keeps ex-
ceeding set speed approximately +3 km/h The Speed Limiter information is displayed
(2 mph) for approximately 30 seconds after on the multi information display area in the
the alert message is appeared, beep alert is combination meter.
sounded for approximately 10 seconds at the
most. A-SPEED LIMITER ON/OFF switch Mono-color liquid crystal display
If the vehicle speeds decreases less than set To turn on/off the Speed Limiter.
speeds after the alert message is appeared,
the message is disappeared. When beep alert B- “SET -” switch
is sounding, the beep alert also goes off. To set the current vehicle speed to a set speed
decrease the set speed.
NOTE
C- “RES +” switch
l However, this gives priority to audio and
To resume the Speed Limiter with set speed
visual signal of safety reasons or driver’s de-
mand. memorized or increase the set speed.
l If the set speed is too lower based on current
shift position, the Speed Limiter may not D- “CANCEL” switch
limit the vehicle speed to prevent engine To cancel the Speed Limiter.
stall.

Speed Limiter*
Color liquid crystal display Set speed is appeared if it is stored. To activate
To start up Accelerate or decelerate to your desired
speed, and push down the “SET -” switch
First of all, press the ON/OFF switch in order
(B). The Speed Limiter memorizes the cur-
to power up the Speed Limiter when the igni-
rent vehicle speed when you release the “SET
tion switch in the “ON”, position or the oper-
-” switch (B). Now, the Speed Limiter starts
ation mode in ON,
controlling in order not to exceed the set
The Speed Limiter indication will be ap-
speed.
peared in the combination meter.
6 Mono-colour liquid crystal display
A-Control state
There are three control states as below.
LIMIT OFF
Colour liquid crystal display
When the Speed Limiter is in STAND-
BY, the vehicle speed can exceed the set
speed.
LIMIT
When the Speed Limiter is in operation.
The vehicle is controlled in order not to
exceed the set speed. If the current vehicle speed is lower than ap-
OVER LIMIT proximately 30 km/h (19 mph) (settable min-
When the vehicle speed is exceeding the imum speed), the set speed is set at approxi-
set speed by more than approximately mately 30 km/h (19 mph).
3 km/h (2 mph) (Except for mono-colour The set speed is displayed in the combination
liquid crystal display) meter.
And, control state “LIMIT” is displayed in
B-SPEED LIMITER ON indication the combination meter.
When the Speed Limiter is started up, the
Speed Limiter’s symbol is appeared.
C-Set speed

Speed Limiter*
Mono-colour liquid crystal display If a driver wants to increase the set speed a Mono-colour liquid crystal display
little, push up “RES +” switch for less than
approximately 0.5 second and release it.
The set speed is increased 1 km/h (1 mph)
Colour liquid crystal display each taps. Colour liquid crystal display
By using the “CANCEL”
switch, the accelerator pedal
and the “SET -” switch
To increase the set speed Press the “CANCEL” switch (D) to deacti- Accelerate to driver’s desired vehicle speed 6
vate the Speed Limiter. and push down “SET -” switch (B) and re-
By using the “RES +” switch lease.
Push up the “RES +” switch continuously.
Then the set speed displayed in the combina-

tion meter is gradually increased.
If the set speed reaches your desired speed,
release the “RES +” switch (C).
Control state “LIMIT” is disappeared and

change control state “LIMIT OFF” in the Control state “LIMIT” is displayed again and
combination meter. the set speed is updated.
To decrease the set speed

By using the “SET -” switch
Push down the “SET -” switch (B).
The set speed is increased each approximate-
ly 5 km/h (3 mph) per approximately 0.5 sec-
ond.
Speed Limiter*
Then the set speed displayed in the combina- By using the “CANCEL” Decelerate to driver’s desired speed and push
tion meter is gradually decreased. down “SET -” switch (B) and release.
If the set speed reaches to your desired speed,
switch, the service brake and
release the “SET -” switch (B). the “SET -” switch
Press the “CANCEL” switch (D) to deacti-
vate the Speed Limiter.
The Speed Limiter indication is displayed

again and the set speed is updated.
The set speed decreases approximately
5 km/h (3 mph) per approximately 0.5 sec- To increase the vehicle speed
ond. Control state “LIMIT” is disappeared and temporarily
If a driver wants to decrease the set speed a change control state “LIMIT OFF” in the A driver can temporarily accelerate for emer-
little, press the “SET -” switch (B) for less combination meter. gency use.
than approximately 0.5 second and release it.
The set speed is decreased 1 km/h (1 mph) The Speed Limiter is temporarily deactiva-
each taps. Mono-colour liquid crystal display
ted, and the vehicle speed can be increased.

Speed Limiter*
The Speed Limiter will resume when the ve- Mono-colour liquid crystal display CAUTION
hicle speed goes down to enough less than
the set speed. l There is a possibility for the Speed Limiter
to allow abrupt acceleration corresponding
to accelerator pedal position when the Speed
Limiter is deactivated. Be careful.

NOTE
l If the Speed Limiter is cancelled by other
states, it may be a system malfunction. 6
Stop using the Speed Limiter and turn off
the Speed Limiter. Have your vehicle in-
spected by a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Au-
CAUTION
Put on an accelerator pedal to the pedal l Be careful about over speed. To resume
stroke end. (over a detent that makes pedal
reaction force bigger before pedal stroke end) The Speed Limiter memorizes the set speed
NOTE when the system has been deactivated, the
Speed Limiter can resume by pushing up the
CAUTION l A driver can change the set speed during this “RES +” switch (C).
emergency use.
l There is a possibility for the Speed Limiter
to allow abrupt acceleration corresponding
to accelerator pedal position. So be careful To deactivate
of the abrupt acceleration.
Use whichever following ways to deactivate.
l Press the “CANCEL” switch
If the vehicle speed exceeds the set speed by
approximately +3 km/h (2 mph), alert mes-
l Press the Speed Limiter ON/OFF switch
sages appear in the combination meter. l If CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF switch
or ACC ON/OFF switch is pressed, the
Speed Limiter will be cancelled.

Adaptive Cruise Control System (ACC)*
However, the Speed Limiter immediately If you desire, a cruise control without inter- WARNING
starts controlling and the vehicle decreases as vention of the following distance control is
if an accelerator pedal is closed fully, when also selectable. l This system may not correctly detect the
actual situation depending on the type of
the vehicle speed is higher than the set speed.
vehicle in front and its conditions, the
weather conditions, and the road condi-
CAUTION tions.
Additionally, the system may be unable to
l There is a possibility to occur jerk, depend- decelerate sufficiently if the vehicle in
ing on a running resistance. Be careful. front applies the brakes suddenly or an-
other vehicle cuts into your path, so your
6 vehicle approaches the front vehicle. Im-
Adaptive Cruise Control proper usage of this system or loss of at-
System (ACC)* tention to the front by the over-rely on the
ACC, may result in a serious accident.
The ACC maintains a set speed with no need
for you to use the accelerator pedal. Using a CAUTION
sensor (A), the system also measures the rela- WARNING l In the following situations, the system may
tive speed and distance between your vehicle
l A driver is responsible for driving safely. become transiently unable to detect a vehicle
and a vehicle in front, and maintains a set fol- in front or triggers its control and alarm
Even if the ACC is in use, always grasp
lowing distance between your vehicle and the the surrounding circumstances and pro- functions by detecting something other than
vehicle in front by automatically decelerating vide for safe driving. a vehicle in front.
your vehicle if it becomes too close to the ve- l Never rely solely on the ACC. The ACC is
hicle in front. the system to reduce load on the driver.
The ACC is the driver assist system to aid The ACC is not a collision avoidance sys-
comfortable driving on a freeway. Stop lamps tem or an automatic driving system. The
system is not intended to compensate for
are illuminated during automatic braking.
driver’s loss of attention to the front dur-
ing driving due to distraction or careless-
ness or supplement a drop in visibility due
to the rain and fog.
It is never a substitute for your safe and
careful driving. Always be ready to apply
the brakes manually.


• When driving in curved sections of road • On roads with slippery surfaces, such as • Do not cover the sensor mounted area
including their entrance/outlet or running frozen, snow-covered, and dirt roads. (shaded area as shown in the illustration)
beside a closed lane in a traffic work or • Under adverse weather conditions (rain, with a sticker, licence plate or anything
similar zone. snow, sand storms, etc.). such as a grill guard, etc.
• On steep downslopes.
• On roads including steep up and down
slopes or many changes in inclination.
• In traffic requiring frequent acceleration
and deceleration.
• When the proximity alarm sounds fre-
6
quently.
• When your vehicle is towed or your vehi-
cle tows another vehicle.
• When your vehicle position in a lane is in- • When your vehicle is on a chassis dyna-
stable, is frequently steered to right and mometer or free rollers.
left, or running unstably due to a traffic • When the air pressure in the tyres is not
accident, trouble with some vehicles, etc. correct.
• When driving on the road that the vehicle • When installing the spare tyre for emer-
in front runs in offset position from your gency.
vehicle. • When snow traction device (tyre chains)
are attached.
l Be sure to take the following precautions to
keep the system in good operating condi-
tions.
Improper handling of the system compo- *: Triangular projection
nents may result in degraded sensor per- • The sensor front cover should not be
formance. modified or painted.
• Avoid application of strong shock loads to • Avoid using different size tyres from
the sensor and never tamper with or re- those specified and maintain even tyre
wear.
l Never use the ACC in any of the following move the sensor mounting screws.
situations. Failure to follow this instruction • The cover in front of the sensor and the • Do not modify the suspension of your ve-
could lead to an accident. sensor should be kept clean. hicle.
• On roads with heavy traffic or roads in-
cluding many windings or steep curves.

CAUTION When ACC detects a vehicle in CAUTION

l When the cover in front of the sensor or the
front within the set distance l Never leave the vehicle when it is stopped
sensor itself is deformed by an accident, The ACC makes control to maintain a fol- by automatic braking.
please do not use the ACC and contact a lowing distance (time gap) matched with the
vehicle speed between your vehicle and a ve-
ice Point.
hicle in front while also activating brakes as
NOTE
necessary. l If you do not depress the brake pedal within
When ACC detects no vehicle 2 seconds after an automatic stop, you are
alerted to automatic cancellation of the ACC
6 in front within the set distance by a buzzer and display message and the
Your vehicle runs at a speed to which you set. ACC shifts into the ‘standby state’.
Setting is possible to a speed between 40 and The vehicle will then start creeping as the
brakes are released.
180 km/h (112 mph).
When ACC no longer detects any vehicle in

NOTE front, a buzzer sounds and the symbol of ve-
l If the vehicle speed exceed the set speed on hicle running ahead disappears from the
down slope, the system automatically ap- screen. The vehicle slowly accelerates to re-
plied the brake to maintain the vehicle
If the vehicle in front stops, the ACC reacts sume the set speed and continues running at
speed.
to it by stopping your vehicle. that speed.
l When depressing the brake pedal while auto-
matic brake is applied, the brake pedal is felt Depress the brake pedal as soon as your vehi-
solidly, but it is not abnormal. You can more cle comes to a stop.
depress the pedal and it provides greater
braking force.
l Sound is heard while automatic brake, but it
is operated a brake control and not abnor-
mal.

WARNING Proximity alarm CAUTION

l Your vehicle may accelerate up to the set While the ACC is active, if your vehicle ap- • Something other than a vehicle ap-
speed in the following situations. Apply proaches too closely to a vehicle in front be- proaches, such as a pedestrian.
the brake, if necessary, to slow down. cause the ACC cannot allow for an adequate • When there is an abnormality in the sys-
• When your vehicle no longer follows deceleration in such cases as rapid decelera- tem (When the ACC detectes an abnor-
the vehicle in front, e.g. at a freeway ex- tion of the vehicle in front or apparition of a mality, “ACC SERVICE REQUIRED” is
it or when your vehicle or the vehicle in indicated.)
vehicle cutting in front of your vehicle, the
front changes its lane.
ACC gives a warning by sounding a buzzer l The ACC makes neither acceleration nor de-
celeration control and only issues warning in
and displaying a message. the following situation.
If this happens, increase the following dis- • The vehicle in front is in a park or moving
6
tance by depressing the brake pedal or mak- at an extremely slow speed.
ing other decelerating control. l The ACC may not be able to maintain the
set speed or the distance to a vehicle in front
and may not alert the driver, if the system
cannot detect the vehicle in front properly, in
the following situations.
• When driving on a curve • When a vehicle cuts in front of your vehi-
cle very closely.
• When a vehicle in front is offset to the left
or right.
• When a vehicle in front is towing a trailer.
• The vehicle in front is moving at a speed
much lower than your vehicle’s.
• A motorcycle or a bicycle.
CAUTION • A freight trailer that is not carrying a con-
tainer.
l If the vehicle in front turns off or changes
l When the ACC is not in use, turn off the sys- • The vehicle has a protruding load from
lane and another stationary vehicle is lo- tem to prevent it from operating by mistake the carrier.
cated in front of that vehicle, the ACC will and an unexpected accident. • The vehicle has a low vehicle height.
not make deceleration control to the sta-
tionary vehicle.
l Never operate the ACC from outside the ve- • The vehicle has an extremely high ground
hicle. clearance.
l Neither control nor a warning are performed • When there is repeated steep uphill and
in the following situation. downhill driving.

CAUTION Cruise control switch NOTE

• When driving on an irregular or uneven l Operate the individual switches correctly
road surface. and one after another.
• When being driven in a tunnel. ACC may be turned off or its control func-
• When you are carrying extremely heavy tion may be cancelled if two or more
loads in the rear seats or luggage area. switches are pressed concurrently.
• After the engine starting for a while.
• When driving in curved sections of road Driving aid display
including their entrance/outlet or running
6 beside a closed lane in a traffic work or
similar zone.
• When the cover part in front of the sensor
and the sensor become dirty or have snow
and ice* adhering to it.
• When water, snow or sand on the road are 1- “ACC ON/OFF” switch
extorted by the vehicle in front or an on- Used to turn on and off ACC or the cruise
coming vehicle*. control function.
*: After the ACC control has been cancelled
automatically due to detection of a state of 2- “SET -” switch
decline in performance, the ACC will not
operate in the temporary condition and will
Used to set a desired speed and to reduce the
inform the driver by buzzer and indication. set speed.
When the ACC is in the state in which it can 1- ACC indicator:
operate, indication is cancelled. 3- “RES +” switch
Indicate that ACC is ON.
Should the indications not be cancelled, then Used to make ACC operate at the originally
there is a possible abnormality in the system. 2- Control state indicator:
set speed and also to increase the set speed.
Please contact a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Indicate that ACC is active.
Authorized Service Point. 3- Set speed:
4- “CANCEL” switch
Indicate the target speed.
Used to cancel the control function of ACC
or the cruise control.
5- ACC distance switch

Used to change the setting of the following
distance between your vehicle and a vehicle
in front.
4- Vehicles in front symbol: How to use ACC
Comes on when the radar detects a vehi-
cle ahead. Two types of indication; To start up (place in ‘standby
“Stand by” and “Active” state’) the system
State With the ignition switch or operation mode
Display
Stand by Active set to “ON”, press “ACC ON/OFF” switch
shortly to activate the ACC.
Vehicle in
front detected
6
NOTE
5- Following distance setting symbol: l Even if the ACC is in the activated state
Indicate the set following distance. Two when the ignition switch or operation mode
is set to “OFF”, the system does not auto-
types of indication; “Stand by” and “Ac-
matically become activated when the igni-
tive” tion switch or operation mode is set to “ON”
next time.
Following State
distance set- To activate ACC control
ting symbol Stand by Active
The display on the information screen of the With the ACC turned on (in the ‘standby
Long multi information display will switch to show state’), push down the “SET -” switch while
information on the ACC. driving.
When the ACC is activated, it is placed in the
Middle
‘standby state’ at which any control function
is not started.
Short

When your desired speed is reached, release When the ACC is initialized, a buzzer sound NOTE
the “SET -” switch; then this speed is set and is heard and the “SET” indicator lights up on
the ACC initiates the speed control to the set the screen. At the same time, the display • When the selector lever is in the “P”
(Park), the “R” (Reverse), the “N” (Neu-
speed. showing the following distance setting and
tral) or the “L” (Low) position.
the running-ahead vehicle symbol (only when While the brake pedal is being depressed.
•
the ACC is detecting a vehicle in front) is When the parking brake is applied.
•
switched to the in-control mode display. When the system determines that its per-
•
formance has been degraded due to con-
taminants adhered to the sensor.
6 • When there is any abnormality in the sys-
tem.
To increase the set speed

There are two ways to increase the set speed.
By using the “RES +” switch:

The set speed is indicated on the information The set speed increases by 1 km/h (1 mph)
screen of the multi-information display. every time you push up the “RES +” switch
The ACC can be selected between approxi- NOTE while the ACC control is working. If you
mately 40 km/h (25 mph) to 180 km/h hold the switch pushed up, the set speed in-
(112 mph). l The ACC cannot start the control when any creases in 5 km/h (3 mph) increments.
of the following conditions is present. You
You can set and initiate the speed control are alerted to this state by a sounding buzzer.
when driving at approximately 10-40 km/h • When the vehicle speed is lower than ap-
(6-25 mph) while a vehicle in front is being proximately 10 km/h (6 mph) or 180 km/h
detected. In this case, the target speed is set (112 mph) or higher.
to 40 km/h (25 mph). Setting to any speed • When the vehicle is running at a speed be-
outside this range does not cause the ACC to tween approximately 10 and 40 km/h and
the ACC is not detecting any vehicle in
start the control.
front.
• When the ASC is in the OFF state.
• When ABS, ASC or TCL is working.

CAUTION At the point where the vehicle speed is raised NOTE

to your desired speed, push down and release
l The setting speed should be set up the suita- the “SET -” switch; the new speed is then set l Set speed adjustment is impossible while the
ble speed according to a situation. accelerator pedal is in a depressed position.
in the system.
NOTE To decrease the set speed

There are two ways to decrease the set speed.
l There is some time lag between the setting
to a new speed and actually accelerating to
that speed. By using the “SET -” switch:
l Speed setting operation is possible even in The set speed decreases by 1 km/h (1 mph) 6
presence of a vehicle in front. In this case, every time you push down the “SET -”
however, the set speed alone increases with- switch while the ACC control is working. If
out actual acceleration taking place.
you hold the switch pushed down, the set
l When the switch is held pushed, a buzzer
speed decreases in increments of 5 km/h
sounds every time the set speed changes.
(3 mph).
By using the accelerator pedal: CAUTION
When the accelerator pedal is depressed
while driving with the ACC control working, l The ACC braking control and proximity
alarm functions will not work while the ac-
you can accelerate the vehicle temporarily celerator pedal is depressed.
beyond the presently set speed.
NOTE
l The set speed indication on the display turns
to “---” when the accelerator pedal is de-
pressed. This indication remains as long as
the pedal is in a depressed position.
l The ACC control at the original set speed re-
sumes as soon as you release the accelerator
pedal. Under certain conditions, however, CAUTION
the braking control and alarming functions l The setting speed should be set up the suita-
of the ACC may not work for a short while ble speed according to a situation.
after releasing the accelerator pedal.

NOTE NOTE NOTE

l There is some time lag between the setting l The ACC control is cancelled if you depress l The set speed indication on the display turns
to a new speed and actually decelerating to the brake pedal and the ACC control does to “---” when the accelerator pedal is de-
that speed. not resume even when you release the pedal. pressed. This indication remains as long as
l If there is a vehicle in front and your vehicle the pedal is in a depressed position.
is following that vehicle at a speed lower To temporarily accelerate the l In certain conditions, the braking control and
than the set speed, the set speed alone de- alarming functions of the ACC may not
creases with no actual deceleration taking
vehicle work for a short while after releasing the ac-
place. Simply depress the accelerator pedal to tem- celerator pedal.
6 l When the switch is held pushed, a buzzer porarily accelerate the vehicle. Releasing the l Set speed adjustment is impossible while the
sounds every time the set speed changes. accelerator pedal is in a depressed position.
pedal automatically slows down the vehicle
to the set speed and the ACC restarts its con-
By using the brake pedal: trol. To terminate ACC control
If you depress the brake pedal while the ACC
control is working, the control is cancelled, To cancel of ACC control
allowing you to decelerate the vehicle.
At the point where the vehicle slows down to You can cancel the ACC control by using ei-
your desired speed, push down the “SET -” ther of the methods below.
switch; the new speed is then set in the sys-
tem. When the control is cancelled, the system is
placed in the ‘standby state’. You can make
the system restart the control by using the
“SET -” or “RES +” switch if the conditions
for activating the control are met.
CAUTION l Press the “CANCEL” switch.

l The ACC braking control and proximity
alarm functions will not work while the ac-
celerator pedal is depressed.
l The setting speed should be set up the suita-
ble speed according to a situation.

l Depress the brake pedal. l When the parking brake is applied.
l When the selector lever is in the “P”
(Park), the “R” (Reverse), the “N” (Neu-
tral) or the “L” (Low) position.
WARNING
• Although the set speed driving will be de-
activated when shifting to the “N” (Neu-
tral) position, never move the selector lev-
er to the “N” (Neutral) position while en- 6
The ACC control is automatically cancelled gine braking and could cause a serious ac-
and the ACC is placed in the ‘standby’ state cident.
in any of the situations listed below; you are
NOTE alerted to this condition by the sound of a
When the ACC system determines that
buzzer and a message on the display. You can
l You can also cancel the ACC control by its performance has been degraded, a
pressing the “ACC ON/OFF” switch. If this
make the system restart the control by using
buzzer will sound and a message will be
switch is pressed, the ACC is turned off. the “SET -” or “RES +” switch if the condi-
displayed in the multi information dis-
tions for resuming the control are reestablish-
play.
ed.
When the system shifts into the ‘standby
state’ as a result of cancellation of the ACC
control, the “SET” indicator goes out. At the
same time, the display of the following dis-
tance setting and running-ahead vehicle sym-
bol (only when the ACC is detecting a vehi-
cle) is placed in the standby state of display.
This can occur when:

l When your vehicle stops as the vehicle
in front stops.
l When ASC is turned off. l Foreign objects, such as dirt, snow or
ice, adhere to the surface of the sensor.
l When ABS, ASC or TCL is in operation.
l There are adverse weather conditions, NOTE
such as rain, snow or sand storms, etc.
l A vehicle in front or an oncoming vehi- l If the ACC is in the ‘ON state’ when the ig-
nition switch or operation mode is set to
cle is splashing water, snow or dirt.
“OFF”, the system is set to the ‘OFF state’
l Driving on a nonbusy road with a few when the ignition switch or operation mode
vehicles and obstacles in front. is set to “ON” next time.
l The brake system is overheating due to
continuous brake control on long down-
hill slope. To resume the control
6 To turn off ACC
After cancelling the ACC control (i.e. placing
the system in the ‘standby state’) by pressing
If the display keeps showing the message, Press the “ACC ON/OFF” switch when ACC the “CANCEL” switch or depressing the
there is a possibility that the ACC has a mal- is in the ‘ON state’ to turn off ACC. brake pedal, you can resume the ACC control
function. Contact a MITSUBISHI MOTORS at the originally set speed if you push up the
Authorized Service Point. “RES +” switch.
When the ACC system detects an abnormali-

ty in the system, the ACC system will be
turned off, a buzzer will sound and a message
will be displayed in the multi information
display. If the message remains after the op-
eration mode has been turned to the “OFF”
position and then turned back to the “ON”
position, contact a MITSUBISHI MOTORS
NOTE
l Pressing the switch turns off the ACC even NOTE
if it is engaged.
l The set speed is cancelled when the ACC is l The conditions to be met before the ACC
turned off or the ignition switch or operation control can be resumed are the same as those
mode is set to “OFF”. for starting the ACC control.

Forward Collision Mitigation System (FCM)*
To change the following dis- Following distance setting: “Long” CAUTION

tance setting l Cruise control (automatic vehicle speed con-
Every time you press the following distance trol system) does not alert by proximity
setting switch, the setting changes sequential- alarm and control distance between vehicles
to the vehicle in front.
ly through three options “Long”, “Middle” Following distance setting: “Middle”
and “Short”, cycling back to “Long” after
“Short”. The distance setting is reset when Forward Collision
the ignition switch or operation mode is set to
“OFF” or when ACC is set to “OFF,” and is Mitigation System (FCM)*
automatically set to “long” when you set Following distance setting: “Short”
6
The Forward Collision Mitigation System
ACC to “ON” next time.
(FCM) uses a sensor (A) to determine the
distance and relative speed to a vehicle and a
pedestrian in front. When your vehicle is ap-
proaching a vehicle or a pedestrian straight-
To activate cruise control (au- ahead in your path and the FCM judges that
tomatic speed control) there is the risk of a collision, the system
If you hold the “ACC ON/OFF” switch gives audible and visual warnings (forward
pressed with the ignition switch or operation collision warning function), increases the
mode set to “ON” and the ACC in the "OFF" brake fluid pressure (FCM brake prefill func-
state, the cruise control is activated. The in- tion), and also provides braking force assis-
formation screen of the multi information tance when you depress the brake pedal
display then changes to the cruise control (FCM brake assist function) to avoid frontal
screen and a buzzer sounds at the same time. collision.
NOTE Cruise control is turned off if you set the ig- When the risk of collision increases more, the
nition switch or operation mode to “OFF”. system causes the brakes to work moderately
l The following distance varies as a function
→ “Cruise control (automatic speed control to encourage you to apply brakes. If the sys-
of the speed; the faster is the speed, the lon-
ger becomes the distance. system)” on page 6-68 tem judges that a potential collision is immi-
nent, it initiates emergency braking to miti-
gate collision-caused damages or to avoid
possible collision (FCM braking function).
Stop lamps are illuminated during automatic
braking.
If you turn the FCM ON/OFF, the Ultrasonic WARNING Forward collision warning
misacceleration Mitigation System (UMS) al- function
so turns ON/OFF at the same time. (Vehicles l A driver is responsible for driving safely.
The FCM is the system to mitigate colli- If the system judges that there is a risk of
equipped with the UMS)
sion-caused damages or to avoid collisions your vehicle colliding with a vehicle or a pe-
as much as possible.
destrian in front, this function warns you of
The system is not intended to compensate
for driver’s loss of attention to the front
the potential hazard with visual and audible
during driving due to distraction or care- alarms.
lessness or supplement a drop in visibility When this function is triggered, a buzzer
due to the rain and fog. sounds and, at the same time, a “BRAKE!”
6 It is never a substitute for your safe and message appears on the information screen of
careful driving. Always be ready to apply the multi information display.
the brakes manually.
l The FCM works to avoid frontal collisions
as much as possible. However, the effect of
its operation varies depending on situa-
tions and conditions, such as driving con-
ditions, road conditions, and steering, ac-
celeration and braking operations, so that
the performance the function can deliver
is not always the same.
If your vehicle is in danger of collision,
take all necessary collision-evading ac-
tions, such as depressing the brake pedal
strongly regardless of whether the system The forward collision warning function oper-
is activated or not. ates at the following vehicle speed:
l Do not try to confirm the operation of the l Against a vehicle: Approximately
FCM. In certain situations, this can cause 15 km/h ( 9 mph) to 140 km/h
an accident resulting in serious injury or ( 87 mph).
death.
l Against a pedestrian: Approximately
7km/h ( 4 mph) to 65 km/h ( 40 mph).

CAUTION l Against a vehicle: Approximately Once the emergency braking has worked, you
15 km/h (9 mph) to 80 km/h (50 mph). are alerted to this by a message on the infor-
l Under certain conditions, the audible alarm
l Against a pedestrian: Approximately mation screen of the multi-information dis-
may not work at all or may be scarcely audi-
15 km/h (9 mph) to 65 km/h (40 mph). play.
ble. Do not overly rely on the system; if your
vehicle is in danger of collision, take all nec-
essary collision-evading actions, such as de- CAUTION
pressing the brake pedal strongly regardless
of whether the system is activated or not. l The brake assist function may not be trig-
gered when the brake pedal is operated in
certain ways.
FCM brake prefill function Do not overly rely on the system; if your ve- 6
hicle is in danger of collision, take all neces-
If the system judges that there is a risk of sary collision-evading actions, such as de-
your vehicle colliding with a vehicle or a pe- pressing the brake pedal strongly regardless
destrian in front, this function prefills the of whether the system is activated or not.
brake line with additional brake fluid to make The FCM braking function operates at the
the brakes more responsive to your brake following vehicle speed:
pedal operation. FCM braking function
l Against a vehicle: Approximately
The FCM brake prefill function operates at If the system judges that there is a high risk 5 km/h (3 mph) to 80 km/h (50 mph)
the following vehicle speed: of your vehicle colliding with a vehicle or a l Against a pedestrian: Approximately
l Against a vehicle: Approximately pedestrian in front, this function causes the 5 km/h (3 mph) to 65 km/h (40 mph)
5 km/h (3 mph) to 80 km/h (50 mph). brakes to work moderately to encourage you
l Against a pedestrian: Approximately to apply the brakes.
5 km/h (3 mph) to 65 km/h (40 mph). If the system judges that a collision is un- CAUTION
avoidable, it initiates emergency braking con- l Do not use the FCM as a normal braking.
FCM brake assist function trol to mitigate collision-caused damages or, l After your vehicle has stopped following the
if the situation permits, to avoid a collision. activation of the FCM, automatic braking is
If the system judges that there is a risk of When the emergency braking control is trig- released. As the vehicle will then start creep-
your vehicle colliding with a vehicle or a pe- gered, you are warned of the hazard with vis- ing, be sure to depress the brake pedal to
destrian in front, this function deploys the ual and audible alarms like with the forward hold the vehicle stationary.
brake assist sooner than the brake assist oper- collision warning function.
ation.
The FCM brake assist function operates at
the following vehicle speed:


l When applying the brake during the auto- • When the vehicle in front is towing a • When a road surface is surging, and there
matic braking condition the pedal will feel trailer. is unevenness.
firm. • A freight trailer that is not carrying a con- • When driving in dark areas, such as in a
This is not abnormal. tainer. tunnel or at night.
You can apply more pressure to the pedal to • The vehicle has a protruding load from • When your vehicle changed lanes, and
assist in braking. the carrier. your vehicle approached immediately be-
l In the following situations, the system pro- • The vehicle has a low vehicle height. hind the vehicle in front.
vides neither control nor alarming. • The vehicle has an extremely high ground • During a certain time after your vehicle
• When a vehicle or a pedestrian suddenly turns left or right.
6 cuts in front of your vehicle. •
clearance.
When a vehicle in front is extremely dirty. • When you are carrying extremely heavy
• When the distance from a vehicle or a pe- • When a vehicle in front is covered with loads in the rear seats or luggage area.
destrian in front is extremely short. snow. • After the engine has been running for an
• To an oncoming vehicle. • When a vehicle in front has a large glass extended period of time.
• When the selector lever is in the “P” surface. • When using a windscreen washer.
(Park) or “R” (Reverse) position. • When a vehicle in front does not have re- • If windscreen wipers are not
• When the FCM has detected a problem in flectors (lamp reflector) or the position of MITSUBISHI MOTORS GENUINE
the system. the reflector is low. parts or equivalent.
l If the ASC is deactivated, the FCM braking • When a vehicle in front is a car carrier or • When the sensor becomes extremely hot
function will not operate. Refer to “Active a similar shaped vehicle. or cold.
Stability Control (ASC)” on page 6-66. • When there is a different object near the • If the battery becomes weak or runs
l The FCM may or may not detect a motorcy- vehicle. down.
cle, bicycle or wall depending on the situa- • When driving on a road with many and • When the sensor is affected by strong
tion. The FCM is not designed to detect successive curves, including when pass- light, such as direct sunlight or the head-
these objects. ing their entrances and outlets. lamps of an oncoming vehicle.
l The forward collision warning function • When accelerating and decelerating • Under adverse weather conditions (rain,
and/or the FCM braking function may not quickly. snow, sand storms, etc.)
activate in the following situations. • When the system recognizes driver’s • When the windscreen of the sensor por-
• When a vehicle suddenly appears just in steering, accelerating, braking or gear tion is covered with dirt, water droplets,
front of your vehicle. shifting actions as evasive actions to snow and ice, etc.
• When a vehicle cuts in front of your vehi- avoid collision. • When water, snow or sand on the road are
cle very closely. • When you are driving on a road with extorted by the vehicle in front or an on-
• When the vehicle in front is offset to the steep and alternating up and down slopes. coming vehicle.
left or right. • When driving on a slippery road covered l The FCM may not detect a pedestrian in cer-
by rain water, snow, ice etc. tain situations. Some of these include:


• It the pedestrian is shorter than approxi- l When the system recognizes driver’s steer- • When passing close to a vehicle or an ob-
mately 1 m or taller than approximately ing or accelerating actions as evasive actions ject.
2 m. to avoid collision, the FCM control and
• If the pedestrian is wearing loose-fitting alarm functions may be cancelled.
clothes. l The FCM control and alarm functions may
• If part of a pedestrian’s body is hidden, be triggered in the following situations.
such as when holding an umbrella, large • When there is a structure (B) beside the
bag, etc. entrance of a curve and intersection.
• If a pedestrian bends forward, sits or lies
on the road. 6
• When a pedestrian is pushing/pulling
something, such as a stroller, bicycle or • When driving on the road that the vehicle
wheelchair. in front runs in offset position from your
• When pedestrians gather in a group. vehicle.
• When a pedestrian's clothing appears to
be nearly the same colour or brightness as
its surroundings.
• When a pedestrian is very close to an ob- • When running on a narrow iron bridge.
ject, such as a vehicle. • When passing through a gate with small
• When a pedestrian is in a dark area, such head or side clearances.
as at night or in a tunnel. • When there are metallic objects, steps or
• When the pedestrian is walking fast or projections on the road surface.
running. • When quickly approaching a vehicle in
• When a pedestrian suddenly rushes in front to overtake it. • When passing through an area where ob-
front of the vehicle. • When passing an electronic toll collection jects may contact the vehicle, such as
• When the position of a pedestrian is close gate. thick grass, tree branches, or a banner.
to the edge of the vehicle. • When running under an overpass, an pe- • When there are patterns on the road that
l Factors such as the positional relationship destrian overpass or a small tunnel. may be mistaken for a vehicle or a pedes-
between your vehicle and a vehicle in front, • When running in Multi-storey car park. trian.
driver’s own technique of steering the vehi- • When the road gradiently and suddenly • When a vehicle cuts into your path in the
cle and irregularly moving traffic due to ac- changes while running. detecting range of the sensor.
cidents or vehicle trouble may deter the • When stopping very close to a wall or a • When an oncoming vehicle is positioned
FCM control and alarm from functioning. vehicle in front. straight ahead of your vehicle on a curved
road.

CAUTION NOTE NOTE

• When passing through a plastic curtain l A sound will be heard during the activation l When the FCM and UMS ON/OFF switch is
etc. of automatic braking, this is a function of the held pressed to change the ON/OFF state of
• When the FCM detects a long object car- brake control and is not abnormal. the FCM, the ON/OFF state of the UMS is
ried on your vehicle, such as skies or a also changed at the same time.
roof carrier.
• When driving through fog, steam, smoke FCM and UMS ON/OFF To turn on/off the system
or dust. switch
• When the windscreen of the sensor por- You can switch the system from OFF to ON
tion is covered with dirt, water droplets, This switch is used to turn on and off the
6 snow and ice, etc. FCM and UMS and also to select your de-
or ON to OFF if you hold the FCM and UMS
ON/OFF switch pressed when the operation
l Turn off the system beforehand when the ve- sired collision alarm timing.
mode is set to “ON”.
hicle is placed in any of the following situa- When the switch is held pressed, the
tions as the system can operate unexpected- Once the system is turned on, the information
ON/OFF state of the FCM and UMS changes
ly. screen of the multi information display shows
from ON to OFF and vice versa. If you give
• When using an automatic car wash. the collision alarm timing currently selected,
the switch a short press with the FCM in the
• When your vehicle’s wheels are driven by and the indicator on the instrument cluster
ON state, you can change the collision alarm
the engine on a lift. goes out.
• When your vehicle is towed or your vehi- timing.
cle tows another vehicle.
• When your vehicle is carried on a truck.
• When enjoying sports driving on a circuit.
• When your vehicle is on a chassis dyna-
mometer or free rollers.
• When the tyre pressure is not correct.
• When installing the spare tyre for emer- When you turn off the system, the following
gency. message appears on the screen and the in-
• When snow traction device (tyre chains) dicator comes on.
are attached.
• If the windscreen on or surrounding the
sensor is cracked or scratched.

Cycling the operation mode to ON will set When “FAR” is selected System problem warning
the FCM back ON. If there is a malfunction in the system, a
warning will appear on the information
NOTE screen of the multi information display de-
pending on the situation.
l The indicator is combined with the “UMS
OFF” indicator.
When the sensor cannot detect
When “MIDDLE” is selected
To change alarm timing When the FCM system determines that its
performance has been degraded, the FCM
Give a short press to the FCM and UMS will become inoperative. 6
ON/OFF switch to change the timing at This can occur when:
which the frontal collision alarm is triggered. l Foreign objects, such as dirt, snow or
Every time you press the switch, the alarm ice, adhere to the windscreen of the sen-
timing changes between three levels: “FAR” sor portion.
When “NEAR” is selected
(earlier alarming), “MIDDLE” (normally l There are adverse weather conditions,
alarming) or “NEAR” (later alarming). such as rain, snow, sand storms, etc.
As you make selection, the selected alarm l A vehicle in front or an oncoming vehi-
timing is displayed on the information screen cle is splashing water, snow or dirt.
of the multi information display. Even after
turning off the FCM or setting the operation The following message will appear on the in-
mode to “OFF”, the system retains your last formation screen of the multi information
selected alarm timing in memory. display and the indicator will come on in
CAUTION the instrument cluster.
l For the FCM brake prefill, the FCM brake
assist and the FCM braking functions, the
function triggering timing cannot be
changed.
When the sensor performance returns, the

FCM functions will resume operation.

If the display keeps showing the message, If the display keeps showing the message,
there is a possibility that the sensor has a there is a possibility that the FCM has a mal-
malfunction. Contact a MITSUBISHI function. Contact a MITSUBISHI MOTORS
MOTORS Authorized Service Point for in- Authorized Service Point for inspection of
spection of the sensor. the system.
If the display keeps showing the message, FCM deactivation due to fault
NOTE there is a possibility that the FCM has a mal- If the FCM detects a malfunction in the sys-
l The “DRIVER ASSISTANCE CAMERA function. Contact a MITSUBISHI MOTORS tem, either one of the following messages
BLOCKED” message may temporarily ap- Authorized Service Point for inspection of
6 pear on the information screen when the sen- the system.
will appear on the information screen of the
sor cannot detect a vehicle, a pedestrian or multi information display, the indicator
an object within range. This is not a mal- will come on in the instrument cluster and the
Sensor is too hot or cold
function. When a vehicle or an object comes FCM will automatically be turned off.
within range, the FCM function will resume If the system becomes temporarily unavaila-
and the message will go off. ble due to a high or low temperature of the
l The “DRIVER ASSISTANCE CAMERA sensor, the following warning message will
BLOCKED” message may appear on the in- appear on the information screen of the multi
formation screen when driving on a nonbusy
information display, the indicator will
road with a few vehicles and obstacles in
front.
come on in the instrument cluster, and the
FCM will automatically be turned off.
After the temperature of the sensor has been
When the system cannot operate tempora-
in range, the system will automatically return
rily
to operation.
If the system becomes temporarily unavaila-
ble for some reason, the following message
will appear on the information screen of the
multi information display, the indicator If the message remains even after the opera-
will come on in the instrument cluster, and tion mode is put in OFF and then turned back
the FCM will automatically be turned off. to ON, please contact a MITSUBISHI


l If the sensor or its surrounding area reaches l To maintain proper performance of the • Maintain the wiper blades in good condi-
an extremely high temperature when parking FCM, LDW and AHB; tion.
the vehicle under a blazing sun, the “FCM • Always keep clean the windscreen. Refer to “Wiper blades” on page 9-05.
SERVICE REQUIRED” message may ap- If the inside of the windscreen where the When replacing the wiper blades, use on-
pear. sensor is installed becomes dirty or fog- ly MITSUBISHI MOTORS GENUINE
After the temperature of the sensor or its sur- ged, contact a MITSUBISHI MOTORS parts or equivalent.
rounding area has been in range, if the mes- Authorized Service Point. • Do not dirty or damage the sensor.
sage remains even after restarting the en- • Do not apply an impact or load on the • Do not spray glass cleaner on the sensor.
gine, please contact a MITSUBISHI sensor or its surrounding area.
MOTORS Authorized Service Point. • Do not put anything including a sticker or
Also, do not spill liquid, such as a bever-
age, on the sensor.
6
film to the outer side of the windscreen in • Do not install an electronic device, such
front of or surrounding area of the sensor. as an antenna, or a device that emits
Handling of the sensor Also, do not put anything including a strong electric waves near the sensor.
The sensor (A) is located inside the wind- sticker or film to the inner side of the • Always use tyres of the same size, same
windscreen under the sensor. type and same brand and that have no sig-
screen as shown in the illustration.
nificant wear differences.
The sensor is shared in the following sys-
• Do not modify the vehicle’s suspensions.
tems:
l FCM l If the windscreen on the sensor or in the sur-
rounding area of the sensor is cracked or
l Lane Departure Warning (LDW) scratched, the sensor may not detect an ob-
l Automatic High-Beam (AHB) ject properly. This could cause a serious ac-
cident. Turn off the FCM and have your ve-
hicle inspected as soon as possible at a
ice Point.
• Do not attempt to detach or disassemble If you need to replace the windscreen, con-
the sensor. tact a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized
• If the windscreen is misted, remove the Service Point.
mist from the windscreen by using the de- l The sensor emits infrared rays when the op-
mister switch. eration mode is in ON. Do not look into the
sensor by using optical goods such as a mag-
nifying glass. The infrared ray might injure
your eyes.

Laser radar specifications For Israel Laser warning label
Laser classification
Max average power 45 mW

Pulse duration 33 ns
Wavelength 905 nm
Divergent angle (ho- 28° x 12°
rizon x vertical)
6
Laser classification label
For Europe
Laser explanatory label
For Russia, Kazakchstan and Belarus

Ultrasonic misacceleration Mitigation System (UMS)*

The Ultrasonic misacceleration Mitigation System (UMS) operates to prevent sudden starts and mitigate collision-caused damages by suppress-
ing the engine output for up to approximately 5 seconds when the system judges that the system is detected the vehicle or obstacles within ap-
proximately 4 m in front and behind your vehicle and judges that accelerator pedal was depressed promptly and too strongly such as misopera-
tion of it. This system operates when the vehicle is at stop or is moving forward or backward at less than approximately 10 km/h.
When the UMS operates, the warning display appears on the information screen of the multi information display, and the buzzer sounds intermit-
tently.
The UMS ON/OFF is switched in conjunction with the ON/OFF state of the Forward Collision Mitigation (FCM). (Vehicles equipped with
FCM) 6
Situation Operation display Buzzer
When an obstacle is detected in front of your vehicle with the Intermittent
selector lever in the “D” (Drive), “L” (Low) or in the sport beeping sound.
mode, if the accelerator pedal is depressed promptly and too
strongly, the engine output is suppressed for up to approxi-
mately 5 seconds.

Situation Operation display Buzzer

When an obstacle is detected behind your vehicle with the se-
lector lever in the “R” (Reverse) position, if the accelerator
pedal is depressed promptly and too strongly, the engine out-
put is suppressed for up to approximately 5 seconds.
WARNING
l Do not overly rely on the UMS. It is never a substitute for your safe and careful driving. Always be careful to operate the accelerator pedal perceiv-
ing the environmental conditions. Misoperation can lead to a serious accident.
l As the UMS is not a function to keep the stop condition of the vehicle, depress the brake pedal according to the environmental condition.
l Depending on the situation, the system does not operate even if the vehicle or the obstacle in front and behind your vehicle and this may cause the
vehicle to start suddenly and lead to a serious accident.
l If the vehicle is trapped in the railway crossing because the system is activated as the crossing barrier is misrecognised as an obstacle, escape from
the railway crossing without any panic by one of the following methods.
• Release the foot from the accelerator pedal and lightly depress the pedal again.
• Turn the system OFF. (Continuously press the FCM and UMS ON/OFF switch for more than 3 seconds.)
• Continuously depress the accelerator pedal for more than 5 seconds.
• Repeat to press the accelerator pedal quickly to its full stroke more than three times.
l Do not perform inspection of the system operation on your own. Depending on the situation, this may cause the system to not operate properly and
lead to a serious accident.

CAUTION
l The UMS does not operate in the following conditions:
• The ignition switch or the operation mode is other than ON.
• The UMS is set to OFF by operating the FCM and UMS ON/OFF switch.
• The selector lever is in the “P” or “N” position.
• The Active stability control (ASC) is set to OFF by operating the “ASC OFF switch” on page 6-67.
l It sometimes happens that a motorcycle, bicycle or pedestrian are detected as obstacles, but these are not the object of the UMS operation.
l The UMS may not operate in the following conditions.
• The sensors or surroundings have been wiped by hand.
• The stickers or accessories have been attached to the sensors or surroundings. 6
• When driving in the place which the outside temperature changes suddenly (tunnel or garage etc.).
• Under adverse weather conditions (rain, strong winds, snow, sand storms, etc.).
• When approaching an obstacle too closely.
• When a vehicle cuts in front or behind your vehicle very closely.
• When your vehicle changed the course and approached immediately behind an obstacle.
• When only a part of the obstacle is within the detection areas of the sensor.
• When the rain, snow, water or dirt adheres to the sensor.
• When the sensor is extremely hot or cold (while the vehicle is parked for a long period of time under a blazing sun or in cold weather).
• Immediately after engine starting.
• When driving on a road with many and successive curves, including when passing their entrances and outlets.
• When you are driving on a road with steep and alternating up and down slopes.
• When a road surface is surging, and there is unevenness.
• When the system judges driver’s steering or gear shifting actions as evasive actions to avoid collision.
• For a short period after the system judges the repeated depression of the accelerator pedal at a few seconds interval as a release operation.
• When the vehicle body is extremely inclined by carrying heavy loads or improper adjustment of the tyre pressure.
• When the driving is unstable due to an accident or trouble.
• The system receives ultrasonic noise from other sources (the horns of other vehicles, motorcycle engines, brakes, radios, pouring rain, splashing water,
snow traction device (tyre chains), etc.).
• Obstacle is not vertical to the ground, the obstacle is not at right angles to vehicle traveling direction, or when there is uneven walls and wavy walls.

CAUTION
l The UMS operation may be cancelled when the system judges the handle operation as evasive actions or when the obstacle moves out of the detectable area
of the sensor.
l The UMS may be triggered in the following situations.
• When water, snow or sand on the road are extorted by the vehicle in front or an oncoming vehicle.
• When there are objects, steps or projections on the road surface.
• When the parking gate or railway barrier is raised imperfectly.
• When running the road, the gradient changes suddenly.
• When passing through the mass of the steam, fog or smoke.
6 • When driving in close to the vehicle ahead, and when stopping in close to the forward/backward vehicle or a wall.
• When there is an obstacle in a curb or an intersection.
• When your vehicle joins the main line from parallel parking.
• When there is a ultrasonic near your vehicle by horn of other vehicle, engine sound of a motorcycle, air brake noise of a large vehicle, a vehicle detector
and sonar of a vehicle etc.
• When an electrical equipment on the market (radio antenna etc.) is installed near the sensor.
• When driving on a gravel road.
• When the surrounding area is overgrown with weeds.
l Turn off the system by pressing the FCM and UMS ON/OFF switch beforehand when the vehicle is placed in any of the following situations as the system
can operate unexpectedly.
• When getting out from a road groove or a mud.
• When using an automatic car wash.
• When an elevator for vehicle or a mechanical parking is used.
• When your vehicle’s wheels are driven by the motor on a lift.
• When your vehicle is towed or your vehicle tows another vehicle.
• When your vehicle is carried on a truck.
• When driving on a circuit.
• When your vehicle is on a chassis dynamometer or free rollers.
• When the tyre pressure is not correct.
• When snow traction device (tyre chains) are attached.

CAUTION
l Improperly handling the system components may result in such problems as degraded sensor performance and ultimately in an accident.
Be sure to take the following precautions to keep the system in good operating conditions.
• Avoid application of strong shock loads to the sensor.
• The sensor should be kept clean.
• Do not cover the sensor with a sticker or anything.
• Do not modify the suspension of your vehicle.
l If the bumper has been exposed to an impact, the sensors may fail and prevent the system from functioning properly. Have the vehicle inspected a
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point.
6
Obstacle detection areas Sensor locations CAUTION

The detection areas of the sensors are limited. There are the sensors (A) on each of four pla- • A freight trailer that is not carrying a con-
Moreover, the sensors are unable to detect ces of the front bumper and the rear bumper. tainer.
low or thin objects or objects near the rear • Vehicle that has a protruding load from
bumper. Make sure to check the surroundings the carrier.
as you operate the vehicle in a safe manner. • An obstacle with a low height.
• Vehicle that has an extremely high ground
clearance.
• Vehicle that is extremely stained.
• Vehicle or obstacle that is covered with
snow.
• The vehicle is the specific shape such as
the carrier car.
• Obstacles that have the shape of the pole
such as the road marker or the streetlight.
• Obstacles that exists in the high position
from the ground.
CAUTION • Obstacles that are soft and absorb ultra-
sonic easily, such as spongy material or
l The UMS may not operate because the sen- snow.
sor cannot detect the vehicle in front or ob- • Obstacles that are shaped with a sharp an-
stacle as follows. gle.
• Vehicle towing a trailer etc.
Blind Spot Warning (BSW) (with Lane Change Assist)*
CAUTION Warning display When the warning display appears, the Ultra-
sonic misacceleration Mitigation System
• A fence with large mesh When the sensor is temporarily does not operate normally because there are
• Moving object not available some malfunctions in the system. Have the
• When there is a loud noise or an ultrason- vehicle inspected at a MITSUBISHI
ic near your vehicle by horn of other vehi- Example: When the front and/or rear sensors
are temporarily not available MOTORS Authorized Service Point as soon
cle, engine sound of a motorcycle, air
brake noise of a large vehicle, a vehicle as possible.
detector and sonar of a vehicle etc.
• When an electrical equipment on the mar- Blind Spot Warning (BSW)
6 ket (radio antenna etc.) is installed near
the sensor. (with Lane Change Assist)*
• When there is a obstacle that is not recog-
nized between your vehicle and the obsta- The Blind Spot Warning (BSW) is a driving
cle that can be recognized. When the warning display appears, the sen- aid system that alerts the driver when another
sors are temporarily not available for some vehicle, which may not be visible through the
reason such as the environmental condition outside rear-view mirror, is travelling in the
NOTE or increase of the sensor temperature. When next lane behind your vehicle.
l The sensors do not detect objects located in the warning display appears continuously, When a vehicle in the next lane is travelling
the area directly below or near the bumper. contact a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Author- at the same speed or faster in the detection
If the height of an object is lower than the ized Service Point. areas, the Blind Spot Warning lamp in the
mounted position of the sensors, the sensors corresponding outside rear-view mirror will
may not continue detecting it even if they When there is a malfunction in illuminate. If the turn-signal lever is operated
detected it initially.
the sensor or the system to the side where the Blind Spot Warning
Example: When there is a malfunction in lamp is illuminated, the Blind Spot Warning
To turn on/off the UMS both sensors lamp will blink and the system will beep
The UMS is automatically turned ON by set- three times to alert the driver.
ting the ignition switch or the operation mode
to ON. In addition, the UMS ON/OFF is
switched in conjunction with the ON/OFF
state of the FCM.
Refer to “FCM and UMS ON/OFF switch”
on page 6-94.

Depending on the relative speed between Detection areas
your vehicle and a vehicle in the next lane,
The BSW uses two sensors (A) located inside
the Blind Spot Warning system will detect up
the rear bumper.
to approximately 70 m from your vehicle.
The detection areas are shown as illustrated.
(Lane Change Assist)
WARNING
l Before using the BSW, read this entire
section to fully understand the limitations
of this system. Failure to follow instruc-
tions could result in an accident.
l Never rely solely on the BSW system WARNING
when changing lanes. The BSW is an aid
only. It is not a substitute for your safe l In certain situations, the BSW may not
and careful driving. Always check visually detect a vehicle in the detection areas or
behind and all around your vehicle for the detection may be delayed. Some of
other vehicles. these include:
The performance of the BSW may vary • When a small motorcycle or a bicycle is
depending on driving, traffic and/or road behind your vehicle.
conditions.

WARNING WARNING To operate

• When a vehicle is travelling alongside • When the sensor is extremely hot or When the BSW switch is pressed while the
of your vehicle at nearly the same speed cold (while the vehicle is parked for a operation mode is ON, the BSW indication
for prolonged periods of time. long period of time under a blazing sun lamp in the instrument cluster comes on and
• When the heights of the next lane and or in cold weather). the BSW goes into the stand by state. When
your lane are different. • When a bicycle carrier or accessory is the BSW switch is pressed again, the BSW
• Immediately after the BSW has been installed to the rear of the vehicle.
indication lamp in the instrument cluster goes
turned on.
Immediately after the engine switch is off and the BSW turns off.
•
6 turned on. CAUTION Indication lamp
• Under adverse weather conditions,
such as rain, snow, strong winds or l To maintain proper performance of the
BSW, follow the instructions below.
sand storms.
When your vehicle comes too close to • Always keep the bumper surface around
• the sensor clean.
another vehicle.
While multiple vehicles are overtaking • Avoid impacting the sensor or its sur-
• rounding area.
your vehicle.
When driving near a pot hole and • Do not put a sticker on the sensor or its
• surrounding bumper surface.
tramline.
When a surrounding vehicle or an on- • Do not paint the sensor or its surrounding
• bumper surface.
coming vehicle is splashing water, snow
or dirt. • Do not modify the sensor or its surround-
ing area.
• When driving on a curve including the
beginning and the end of the curve. l If the bumper has experienced an impact, the
sensor may have been damaged and the
• When driving on a road with alternat-
BSW may not function properly. Have the
ing up and down steep slopes.
vehicle inspected at a MITSUBISHI
• When driving on a bumpy or rough
road.
• When the rear of your vehicle is weigh-
ed down or your vehicle is leaning to If you turn the BSW ON/OFF, the Rear Cross
the right or left due to the weight of Traffic Alert (RCTA) also turns ON/OFF at
passengers and luggage or the improp- the same time.
er adjustment of tyre pressure.
• When the bumper surface around the
sensor is covered with dirt, snow and
ice, etc.

NOTE If the turn-signal lever is operated to the side NOTE

where the Blind Spot Warning lamp is illumi-
l When the operation mode is set to OFF, the nated, the Blind Spot Warning lamp will • When your vehicle drives with blowing
selected condition just before setting to OFF up the water, snow or sand etc. on the
blink and the system will beep three times to
is retained. road.
alert the driver.
l The BSW operates when all of the following • When driving near a pothole and tramline.
conditions are met. l Set the BSW to OFF when towing.
• The operation mode is put in ON. l The Blind Spot Warning lamp in the outside
• The selector lever is in positions other rear-view mirror may not be visible due to
than “P” (Park) and “R” (Reverse). strong direct sunlight or the glare from the
• The speed of your vehicle is approximate-
ly 10 km/h (6 mph) or higher.
headlamps of vehicles behind you during 6
night driving.
When the sensor detects an ap-

proaching vehicle System problem warning
If a problem occurs with the system, a visual
When the BSW indication lamp in the instru-
warning specific to the type of the problem is
ment cluster is on, if a vehicle is approaching
given together with an audible alarm.
your vehicle in the detection area, the Blind
The warnings are combined with the Rear
Spot Warning lamp in the outside rear-view
mirror illuminates.
NOTE Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) system.
l The Blind Spot Warning lamp in the outside When there is a malfunction in
rear-view mirror may come on or blink in
the following conditions. the system or the sensor
• When driving very near the guardrail or a
concrete wall.
• When driving on the entrance and outlet
of a tunnel or very near to the wall or near
the evacuation area inside a tunnel.
• When turning at an intersection in a town
area.
• Under adverse weather conditions (rain,
snow, sand storms etc.).

Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)*
When the warning display appears, the BSW When there are foreign objects Rear Cross Traffic Alert
does not operate normally because there are
some malfunctions in the system or the sen-
on the sensor (RCTA)*
sor. Have the vehicle inspected at a
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service The Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) is an
Point as soon as possible. aid system for backing up. When the RCTA
system detects vehicles approaching from
sides while your vehicle is reversing, the
NOTE Blind Spot Warning lamps in the outside rear-
view mirrors on both sides will blink and a
6 l When the warning display appears, the BSW
will be deactivated.
When the warning display appears, the sensor
buzzer will sound to alert the driver. A warn-
cannot detect a vehicle travelling side by side
or an approaching vehicle, because foreign ing message will also appear on the informa-
tion screen of the multi-information display.
When the sensor is temporarily objects, such as dirt, snow or ice, adhere to
the bumper surface around the sensor.
not available Remove dirt, freezing or foreign material on
the bumper surface around the sensor.
When the warning display does not disappear
after having cleaned the sensor, contact a
Point.
When the warning display appears, the sensor

is temporarily not available for some reason
such as the environmental condition or in-
crease of the sensor temperature. When the
warning display does not disappear after
waiting for a while, contact a MITSUBISHI

Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)*
WARNING Detection areas

l Never rely solely on the RCTA when The detection area is shown as illustrated.
backing up. The RCTA is an aid system.
It is not a substitute for your safe and
careful driving. Always check visually be-
hind and all around your vehicle for other
vehicles, persons, animals or obstructions.
The performance of the RCTA may vary
depending on driving, traffic and/or sur-
rounding conditions.
6
NOTE
l The Blind Spot Warning lamps in the outside
rear-view mirrors on both sides will blink,
even when only one vehicle is approaching
from one side.
WARNING
l Before using the RCTA, read this entire
section to fully understand the limitations
of this system. Failure to follow instruc- CAUTION
tions could result in an accident. l In certain situations, the RCTA may not de-
tect a vehicle in the detection areas. Some of
these situations include:

Lane Departure Warning (LDW)*
CAUTION CAUTION Lane Departure Warning

• When the reversing speed of your vehicle l If the bumper has experienced an impact, the (LDW)*
is approximately 18 km/h (11 mph) or sensor may have been damaged and the
higher. RCTA may not function properly. Have the By recognizing through a camera (A) the lane
• When an approaching vehicle speed is ap- vehicle inspected at a MITSUBISHI in which your vehicle is running, LDW gives
proximately 7 km/h or less. MOTORS Authorized Service Point.
If the sensor detection area is blocked by
you warning when your vehicle is likely to
•
a nearby object, such as a wall or parked drift from its lane with an audible alarm and a
vehicle.
To operate visual alarm displayed on the information
• When a vehicle is approaching from 1. Press the BSW switch while the opera- screen of the multi information display.
6 straight behind your vehicle. tion mode is put in ON.
• When your vehicle is exiting from an an- (Refer to “Blind Spot Warning (BSW):
gled parking spot.
To operate” on page 6-106.)
2. When the gearshift lever or the selector
lever is moved to the “R” position, the
RCTA will operate.
NOTE
l Set the RCTA to OFF when towing.
l The Blind Spot Warning lamp in the outside
rear-view mirror may not be visible due to
• Immediately after the RCTA has been strong direct sunlight or the glare from the
turned on. headlamps of vehicles behind you during
• Immediately after the operation mode has night driving.
been put in ON.
• When the bumper surface around the sen- When a problem is detected in
sor is covered with dirt, snow and ice, etc. the system
• When the sensor becomes extremely hot
or cold, such as after the vehicle has been If the system detects a problem, a warning is
parked for a prolonged time under the displayed on the information screen in the
blazing sun or in cold weather. multi-information display.
Refer to “Blind Spot Warning (BSW): Sys-
tem problem warning” on page 6-107.

How to operate LDW To turn off the LDW, press the LDW switch. l Environmental conditions are adequate
The “LDW” indicator on the information for the system to recognize the lane
The indication on the information screen of
screen of the multi information display will markings on both sides.
the multi information display changes as fol-
lows depending on the state of the system.
then go out, showing that the system is l The system has been placed in the ‘ON
placed in the ‘OFF state’. state’.
To turn on/off the LDW To return the LDW to the ‘ON state’, press
the LDW switch again.
NOTE
l The LDW is turned on when the vehicle is
shipped from the factory. 6
l The currently selected LDW setting (on or
off) is stored even when the ignition switch
is turned to the “LOCK” position or the op-
eration mode is put in OFF.
To turn on the LDW, press the LDW switch.

The “LDW” indicator will appear on the in- NOTE
formation screen of the multi information
display, showing that the system is placed in Standby state l The system stays in the “ON” state for ap-
proximately 7 seconds after the hazard lamp
the ‘ON state’. has stopped flashing or the turn-signal lever
In the standby mode, the system is capable of
has returned to the home position.
recognizing the lane in which your vehicle is
positioned and issuing audible warning when
your vehicle goes out of the lane. Lane departure warning
The system automatically shifts from the A buzzer sounds intermittently and indication
‘ON state’ to the ‘standby state’ if all of the of “LANE DEPARTURE” appears in the in-
following conditions are simultaneously met. formation display, indicator flashing in
The “LDW” indicator in the information dis- amber when your vehicle is about to leave or
play changes to indicator (green). has left the lane in the standby mode.
l The vehicle speed is approximately
65 km/h (40 mph) or higher.
l The turn-signal lever is not operated.
l The hazard lamp is not activated.
If the alarm continues showing, there is a LDW deactivation due to fault
possibility that the LDW has a malfunction. The alarm shown below is displayed if the
Contact a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Author- LDW goes into a non-initialized state due to
ised Service Point for inspection of the sys- a fault.
tem. If this happens, please contact a
Point for inspection of the system.
6
NOTE Windscreen is dirty
l If the warning continues for approximately 3 The alarm shown below is displayed if the
seconds or more, the system switches to the
system becomes temporarily unavailable due
standby mode before the warning stops.
to dirt on the windscreen at the sensor por-
l If the lane markers are only on one side of
the road, the LDW will operate only for the tion.
appropriate side where the lane marker is After having cleaned the windscreen, the sys-
drawn. tem will automatically return to operation.
If the alarm continues showing, there is a
possibility that the sensor has a malfunction.
System problem warning Contact a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Author-
If a problem occurs with the system, a visual ized Service Point for inspection of the sen-
warning specific to the type of the problem is sor.
given together with an audible alarm.
Too hot or cold sensor

The alarm shown below is displayed if the
system becomes temporarily unable due to
too high or low temperature of the sensor.
If the temperature of the sensor becomes the
predetermined temperature, the system auto-
matically recovers the normal state.


l If the sensor or its surrounding area reaches • When the vehicle is moving in a place • When driving on a slippery road covered
an extremely high temperature when parking where lane markings are interrupted, such by rain water, snow, ice, etc.
the vehicle under a blazing sun, the “LDW as a toll booth entrance and motorway • When passing through a place where the
SERVICE REQUIRED” message may ap- junction. brightness suddenly changes, like the inlet
pear. • When running on a road portion with in- or outlet of a tunnel.
If the message remains even after the tem- completely removed old lane markings, • When turning steep curves.
perature of the sensor or its surrounding area shadows, lingering snow, truck-like pud- • When the road surface is reflecting the
has been in range, please contact a dles mistakable for lane markings (espe- light shining from the direction opposite
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Serv- cially after the rain when road surface is
ice Point. reflecting light) or similar confusing fac-
to the running direction.
• Vehicle largely lurches when it is running
6
tors. over steps or other irregularities of the
• When running in a lane other than the road surface.
CAUTION cruising lane and passing lane. • When the headlamp illumination is inade-
• When running beside a closed lane sec- quate because of contaminated or deterio-
l LDW has its performance limitations. Do
tion or in a provisional lane in a traffic rated lenses or improperly aimed head-
not over-rely on the system.
work zone. lamps.
l LDW is not designed to lessen risks associ-
• When running in an extremely narrow
ated with not looking ahead carefully (atten- • When the vehicle is leaning much to one
lane. side due to heavy luggage on it or improp-
tion drawn to something on the side, absent-
• When the following distance between erly adjusted tyre pressures.
mindedness, etc.) or poor visibility caused
your vehicle and a vehicle in front be- • When oncoming vehicles’ headlamps
by bad weather etc. Keep steering your vehi-
comes extremely reduced (especially shine the sensor.
cle correctly and drive safely.
when a marking is hidden by a vehicle in • When the vehicle is equipped with non-
l The system may not operate correctly in the
front this is running too close to the mark- standard tyres (including excessively
following conditions. If required, set the
ing). worn tyres and temporary spare tyre),
LDW switch to “OFF.”
• When entering a junction or other point of uses snow traction device (tyre chains), or
• When driving on a road whose lane mark- road where lanes are laid out complicated-
ings (white or yellow) are worn out or has non-specified components such as a
ly. modified suspension.
smeared with dirt to an extent not recog-
• When passing a road section where the • When the windscreen is covered with wa-
nizable by the system.
number of lanes increases/decreases or ter droplets, snow, dust, etc.
• When lane markings are vague, typically multiple lanes are crossing each other.
during a drive in the rain, snow or fog, or l Follow the instructions given below to keep
• When the lane is marked by double or your LDW in good operating conditions.
when running against the sun.
otherwise special lines. • Always keep the windscreen clean.
• When driving on a winding or rough road.

Speed Limit Display function (Vehicles equipped with Smartphone-link Display Audio (SDA) navigation system)
CAUTION Speed Limit Display function

• Avoid applying a strong shock or pressure setting
to the sensor. Do not attempt to detach or
disassemble it. The Speed Limit Display function setting can
• Do not put anything like a sticker on the be changed by the following procedure.
area in front of the sensor of the wind- 1. Press and hold the multi information dis-
screen. play switch for approximately 2 seconds
• Use only MITSUBISHI MOTORS GEN- or more to switch from the setting mode
UINE Parts when replacing the wind-
screen to the menu screen.
screen wipers.
6 Refer to “Changing the function set-
CAUTION tings” on page 5-13.
Speed Limit Display l The speed limit displayed on the multi infor-
play switch to select “ ”
function (Vehicles equipped mation display and the SDA navigation sys-
(Speed Limit Display function setting).
tem was prepared based on information
with Smartphone-link when the map data was prepared, so they 3. Press and hold the multi information dis-
may differ from the actual traffic regula- play switch for approximately 2 seconds
Display Audio (SDA) tions. Always follow the actual traffic regu- or more to switch from ON (display on)
navigation system) lations. to OFF (display off), or from OFF to
ON.
The Speed Limit Display function supports The setting is changed to the selected
safer driving by also displaying the speed
NOTE
condition.
limit which is displayed in the Smartphone- l When the speed limit is not displayed in the
link Display Audio (SDA) navigation system SDA navigation system, the Speed Limit
on the multi information display while the Display on the multi information display is Tyre pressure monitoring
displayed as follows.
vehicle is driven. system (TPMS)*
The tyre pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
uses tyre inflation pressure sensors (A) on the
wheels to monitor the tyre inflation pressures.
The system only indicates when a tyre is sig-
nificantly under-inflated.

Tyre pressure monitoring system (TPMS)*
The base tyre pressure can be set at desired WARNING NOTE
value by the driver with the reset function ex-
ecution. (The low pressure warning threshold l The spare tyre with a speed limit label
Type 1
does not have a tyre inflation pressure
is set based on the reset.)
sensor.
The tyre inflation pressure sensor IDs for two When the spare tyre with a speed limit la-
sets of tyres can be registered by a bel is used, the tyre pressure monitoring
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service system (TPMS) will not work properly.
Point, and the valid ID set can be switched by See an MITSUBISHI MOTORS Author-
the Multi-information display switch (It’s ized Service Point as soon as possible to
replace or repair the original tyre.
beneficial in case of seasonal tyre change be- 6
tween summer tyre and winter tyre.)
NOTE Type 2
l The tyre pressure monitoring system
(TPMS) is not a substitute for regularly
checking tyre inflation pressures.
Be sure to check the tyre inflation pressures
as described in “Tyres” on page 10-11.
l The tyre inflation pressure sensor (B) is in-
stalled in the illustrated location.
• On vehicles with the type 1 sensor which
has the metallic air valve (C), replace l The spare tyre with aluminium wheel has the
grommet and washer (D) with the new tyre inflation pressure sensor, so it can be
ones when the tyre is replaced. used for tyre rotation.
• On vehicles with Type 2 sensor which has
the rubber air valve (E), replace rubber air
valve (E) with new one when the tyre is Tyre pressure monitoring sys-
replaced. tem warning lamp/display
For details, please contact your
ice Point.

When the ignition switch is turned to the CAUTION CAUTION
ON, the tyre pressure monitoring system l If the warning lamp does not illuminate l If a malfunction is detected in the tyre pres-
when the ignition switch is turned to the sure monitoring system (TPMS), the warn-
warning lamp normally illuminates and goes
“ON” position or the operation mode is put ing lamp will blink for approximately 1 mi-
off a few seconds later. in ON, it means that the tyre pressure moni- nute and then remain continuously illumina-
toring system (TPMS) is not working prop- ted.
If one or more of the vehicle tyres are signifi- erly. Have the system inspected at a The warning lamp will issue further warn-
cantly under-inflated, the warning lamp will MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Serv- ings each time the engine is restarted as long
remain illuminated while the ignition switch ice Point. as the malfunction exists.
In such situations, a malfunctioning of the Check to see whether the warning lamp goes
6 or the operation mode is in ON.
system may prevent the monitoring of the off after few minutes driving.
Refer to “If the warning lamp/display illumi-
tyre pressure. Avoid sudden braking, sharp If it then goes off during driving, there is no
nates while driving” on page 6-117 and take turning and high-speed driving. problem.
the necessary measures. However, if the warning lamp does not go
off, or if it blinks again when the engine is
restarted, have the vehicle inspected by a
NOTE MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Serv-
l The type pressure monitoring system does ice Point.
not monitor the spare tyre in the tyre hanger, In such situations, a malfunctioning of the
even if the inflation pressure sensor is equip- system may be preventing the monitoring of
ped. the tyre pressure. For safety reasons, when
l On vehicles with colour liquid crystal dis- the warning lamp appears while driving,
play meter, in addition, the warning display avoid sudden braking, sharp turning and
is displayed on the information screen in the high-speed driving.
multi-information display.
NOTE
l On vehicles with colour liquid crystal dis-
play meter, in addition, the warning display
is displayed on the information screen in the
multi-information display.

NOTE Please note that the tyre pressure monitoring The tyre pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
system (TPMS) is not a substitute for proper malfunctions may occur for a variety of rea-
tyre maintenance, and it is the driver’s re- sons, including the installation of replace-
sponsibility to maintain correct tyre pressure, ment or alternate tyres or wheels on the vehi-
even if under-inflation has not reached the cle that prevent the tyre pressure monitoring
level to trigger illumination of the tyre pres- system (TPMS) from functioning properly.
sure monitoring system (TPMS) low tyre Always check the tyre pressure monitoring
pressure telltale. system (TPMS) malfunction telltale after re-
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a placing one or more tyres or wheels on your
Each tyre, including the spare should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to
warning lamp to indicate when the system is vehicle to ensure that the replacement or al- 6
not operating properly. ternate tyres and wheels allow the tyre pres-
the inflation pressure recommended by the The warning lamp is combined with the low sure monitoring system (TPMS) to continue
vehicle manufacturer on the tyre inflation tyre pressure telltale. to function properly.
pressure label. (If your vehicle has tyres of a When the system detects a malfunction, the
different size than the size indicated on the telltale will flash for approximately one mi- If the warning lamp/display il-
tyre inflation pressure label, you should de- nute and then remain continuously illumina- luminates while driving
termine the proper tyre inflation pressure for ted. This sequence will continue upon subse-
those tyres.) 1. If the warning lamp illuminates, avoid
quent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal- hard braking, sharp steering manoeuvres
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has function exists.
been equipped with the tyre pressure moni- and high speeds. You should stop and
When the warning lamp is illuminated, the adjust the tyres to the proper inflation
toring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low system may not be able to detect or signal
tyre pressure telltale when one or more of pressure as soon as possible. Adjust the
low tyre pressure as intended. spare tyre at the same time. Refer to
your tyres is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tyre pressure tell- “Tyres” on page 10-11.
tale illuminates, you should stop and check
your tyres as soon as possible, and inflate NOTE
them to the proper pressure. Driving on a sig-
nificantly under-inflated tyre causes the tyre
l In addition, the warning display will be dis-
played on the information screen in the mul-
to overheat and can lead to tyre failure. ti-information display.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency l When inspecting or adjusting the tyre pres-
and tyre tread life, and may affect the vehi- sure, do not apply excessive force to the
cle’s handling and stopping ability. valve stem to avoid breakage.

NOTE CAUTION l Wheels other than MITSUBISHI

MOTORS GENUINE wheels are being
l After inspecting or adjusting the tyre pres- l The warning lamp/display may not illumi- used.
sure, always reinstall the valve cap on the nate immediately in the event of a tyre blow-
valve stem. out or rapid leak.
l Wheels that are not fitted with tyre infla-
Without the valve cap, dirt or moisture could tion pressure sensors are being used.
get into the valve, resulting in damage to the l Wheels whose ID codes are not memo-
tyre inflation pressure sensor. NOTE rized by the vehicle are used.
l Do not use metal valve caps, which may l A window tint that affects the radio
cause a metal reaction, resulting in corrosion l To avoid the risk of damage to the tyre infla- wave signals is installed.
tion pressure sensors, have any punctured
and damage of the tyre inflation pressure
6 sensors.
tyre repaired by a MITSUBISHI MOTORS
Authorized Service Point. If the tyre repair is NOTE
l Once adjustments have been made, the
not done by a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Au-
warning lamp will go off after a few minutes
of driving.
thorized Service Point, damage to the tyre l Tyre inflation pressures vary with the ambi-
inflation pressure sensor is not covered by ent temperature. If the vehicle is subjected to
your warranty. large variations in ambient temperature, the
2. If the warning lamp remains illuminated l Do not use an aerosol puncture-repair spray tyre inflation pressures may be underinflated
after you have been driving for about 10 on any tyre. (causing the warning lamp/display come on)
Such a spray could damage the tyre inflation when the ambient temperature is relatively
minutes after you adjust the tyre infla-
pressure sensors. low. If the warning lamp/display comes on,
tion pressure, one or more of the tyres adjust the tyre inflation pressure.
Have any puncture repaired by a
may have a puncture. Inspect the tyre MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Serv-
and if it has a puncture, have it repaired ice Point.
by a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Author-
ized Service Point as soon as possible.
The tyre pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
may not work normally in the following cir-
WARNING cumstances:
l If the warning lamp/display illuminates l A wireless facility or device using the
while you are driving, avoid hard brak- same frequency is near the vehicle.
ing, sharp steering manoeuvres and high l Snow or ice is stuck inside the fenders
speeds. and/or on the wheels.
Driving with an under-inflated tyre ad- l The tyre inflation pressure sensor’s bat-
versely affects vehicle performance and tery is dead.
can result in an accident.

Whenever the tyres and wheels 1. Operate the multi-information meter NOTE
are replaced with new ones switch to switch the information screen
to the menu screen. l The reset function should be executed every
If new wheels with new tyre inflation pres- time when the tyre pressure or tyre rotation
Refer to “Multi information display
sure sensors are installed, their ID codes must is adjusted.
switch” on page 5-04
be programmed into the tyre pressure moni- l The reset function should be executed when
Refer to “Changing the function set- the tyre is cold. If it is executed when the
toring system. Have tyre and wheel replace- tings” on page 5-13 tyre is warm (e.g. after driving), there may
ment performed by a MITSUBISHI 2. Lightly press the multi-information dis- be a low tyre pressure warning earlier than
MOTORS Authorized Service Point to avoid play switch to select “ ” (reset usual.
the risk of damaging the tyre inflation pres-
sure sensors. If the wheel replacement is not
of low tyre pressure warning threshold). 6
3. Hold down the multi-information dis- [For vehicles equipped with mono-colour liq-
done by a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Author- play switch for about 3 seconds or more, uid crystal display meter]
ized Service Point, it is not covered by your the buzzer sounds.
warranty. 1. Transit the display by multi-information
display switch until the tyre pressure
CAUTION monitoring system (TPMS) SET indica-
tor is displayed.
l The use of non-genuine wheels will prevent
the proper fit of the tyre inflation pressure 2. Hold down the multi-information dis-
sensors, resulting air leakage or damage of play switch for 3 seconds or more. (A
the sensors. beep is heard.)
Reset of low tyre pressure

warning threshold
The threshold is set based on the tyre pres- 4. The warning lamp start flashing slowly.
sure which the reset function is executed by 5. Drive for a while. The reset is completed
following procedure. if the warning lamp goes out.
[For vehicles equipped with colour liquid

crystal display meter]

3. The warning lamp start flashing slowly. 2. Lightly press the multi-information dis- NOTE
4. Drive for a while. The reset is completed play switch to select “ ” (tyre
if the warning lamp goes out. ID set change). l When changing the tyre ID set, the reset
function of low tyre pressure warning
3. Hold down the multi-information dis-
threshold is automatically started. (The
NOTE play switch for about 3 seconds or more. warning lamp start flashing slowly.) If the
The setting changes the selected tyre ID tyre is warm at this time. the reset function
l The reset function should be executed every set. should be executed again when the tyre is
time when the tyre pressure or tyre rotation cold.
is adjusted.
l The reset function should be executed when
6 the tyre is cold. If it is executed when the [For vehicles equipped with mono-colour liq-
tyre is warm (e.g. after driving), there may uid crystal display meter]
be a low tyre pressure warning earlier than
usual. 1. Transit the display by multi-information
display switch until the tyre pressure
Tyre ID set change monitoring system (TPMS) SET indica-
tor is displayed.
In case that 2 sets of tyre inflation pressure
sensor ID are registered in the receiver, the
valid tyre ID set can be changed by following
procedure. 4. The valid tyre ID set is changed, and the
number of the tyre pressure monitoring
[For vehicles equipped with colour liquid system (TPMS) SET indicator is
crystal display meter] changed.
1. Operate the multi-information display NOTE

switch to switch the information screen
to the menu screen. l Each time this procedure is done, the tyre ID
set is changed. (1 - 2 - 1 - 2 …)
Refer to “Multi information display l The tyre ID set is NOT changed, in case that
switch” on page 5-04 only 1 set of ID is registered.
Refer to “Changing the function set-
tings” on page 5-13

Reversing sensor system*
2. Hold down the multi-information dis- NOTE CAUTION
play switch for 10 seconds or more. (A
beep is heard.) l When changing the tyre ID set, the reset l Make sure to check the surroundings with
function of low tyre pressure warning your own eyes to ensure safety. Do not oper-
(Although the reset execution starts at
threshold is automatically started. (The ate the vehicle by relying on the reversing
holding down the switch for 3 seconds, warning lamp start flashing slowly.) If the sensor system alone.
keep holding down the switch continu- tyre is warm at this time. the reset function
ously.) should be executed again when the tyre is
cold. Obstacle detection areas
The detection areas of the corner and back
Reversing sensor system* sensors are limited to those shown in the il- 6
lustration. Moreover, the sensors are unable
to detect low or thin objects or objects near
This system operates when you are backing
the rear bumper. Thus, make sure to check
the vehicle. It uses corner and back sensors to
the surroundings as you operate the vehicle in
detect an obstacle and the information screen
a safe manner.
in the multi information display and the buz-
zer to inform you of the approximate distance Corner and back sensor loca-
to the obstacle. tions
3. The valid tyre ID set is changed, and the There are two corner sensors (A) at the cor-
number of the tyre pressure monitoring CAUTION ners of the rear bumper, and two back sensors
system (TPMS) SET indicator is l The reversing sensor system assists you in (B) in the centre of the rear bumper.
changed. determining the approximate distance be-
tween the vehicle and an obstacle located
behind the vehicle. It has limitations in terms
NOTE of detectable areas and objects, and may not
properly detect some objects. Therefore, do
l Each time this procedure is done, the tyre ID not place excessive confidence in the revers-
set is changed. (1 - 2 - 1 - 2 …)
ing sensor system and operate the vehicle as
l The tyre ID set is NOT changed, in case that carefully as you would do with a vehicle not
only 1 set of ID is registered.
equipped with this system.

Reversing sensor system detec- The detection areas are within approximately CAUTION
tion areas 60 cm (A) from the corner sensors, 125 cm
(B) from the back sensors. The non-detection l The reversing sensor system may not operate
Depending on whether the vehicle is equip- properly under the following conditions:
areas (C) are within approximately 20 cm (D)
ped with a towing bar, you can change the re- • The sensors or surroundings have been
from the bumper. wiped by hand.
versing sensor system between the standard
mode and the towing bar mode. The towing • The stickers or accessories have been at-
tached to the sensors or surroundings.
bar mode changes the system to exclude the
• The sensors or surroundings are covered
area in which the towing bar is mounted from with water droplets, ice, snow, mud, etc.
the detection areas. • When the temperature difference is too
6 Vehicles without a towing bar large.
The detection areas are within approximately • The sensors are frozen.
60 cm (A) from the corner sensors, 125 cm • The system receives ultrasonic noise from
(B) from the back sensors. other sources (the horns of other vehicles,
motorcycle engines, brakes, radios, pour-
ing rain, splashing water, snow traction
device (tyre chains), etc.).
• The sensors are extremely hot or cold
(while the vehicle is parked for a long pe-
NOTE riod of time under a blazing sun or in cold
weather).
l The sensors do not detect objects located in • The vehicle tilts significantly.
the area directly below or near the bumper.
If the height of an object is lower than the
• The vehicle is driven on a rough road
(with a bumpy, gravel, hilly, or grassy sur-
mounted position of the corner or back sen-
face).
sors, the sensors may not continue detecting
it even if they detected it initially.
• The vehicle is too close to an obstacle.
l The reversing sensor system may not proper-
Vehicles with a towing bar For information on how to change the detec- ly detect the following:
tion areas, please refer to “Changing the de- • Objects that are thin, such as wire nets or
tection areas” on page 6-124. ropes.
• Objects that absorb sound waves, such as
snow.

CAUTION To operate Warning for obstacles

• Objects that are shaped with a sharp an- To operate the system, move the gearshift If there is an obstacle behind the vehicle, a
gle. lever or selector lever to the “R” position warning will be issued with the information
• Objects with a smooth surface, such as while the ignition switch is in the “ON” posi- screen in the multi information display and a
glass. tion or the operation mode is put in ON. warning buzzer.
• Objects that are low, such as kerbstones. When the reversing sensor system is operat-
l If the bumper has been exposed to an im- ed, the reversing sensor system operation in-
pact, the sensors may fail and prevent the
dication lamp (A) will turn on. To stop the
system from functioning properly. Have the
operation, push the “SONAR” switch; the re-
MOTORS Authorized Service Point. versing sensor system operation indication 6
lamp (A) is turned off.
NOTE
l The buzzer may sound lower than the nor-
mal warning sound when the reversing sen-
sor system is receiving ultrasonic noise from
other sources, but this is not a malfunction.
The buzzer will stop sounding and the sys- 1- Corner sensor (left)
tem will return to normal operation after the 2- Back sensor
noise is no longer received. 3- Corner sensor (right)
Corner sensor
Vehicle to obstacle Warning display/

distance sound cycle
NOTE
Approx. 60 to 40 cm Intermittent
l Only when the gearshift lever or selector
lever is in the “R” position, the reversing Approx. 40 to 30 cm Fast intermittent
sensor system can be operated or be stopped
by using the “SONAR” switch. Within approx. Continuous
30 cm

Back sensor (vehicles without a towing NOTE NOTE

bar)
l When the sensors are detecting different ob- l The detection area will not change if you
stacles at the same time, the information keep the “SONAR” switch pushed for 10
Vehicle to obstacle Warning display/ screen in the multi information display indi- seconds or more.
distance sound cycle cates the directions of the obstacles each l After pushing the “SONAR” switch, revers-
sensors are detecting. However, closer obsta- ing sensor system operation differs accord-
Approx. 125 to Intermittent cles are given priority over other detected ing to the detection area setting.
80 cm obstacles and the warning buzzer sounds to • Setting when towing bar is not equipped
Approx. 80 to 40 cm Fast intermittent inform you of closer obstacles. When the gearshift lever or selector lever
is moved to the “R” position, the revers-
6 Within approx. Continuous ing sensor system will operate even if cor-
40 cm Changing the detection areas ner sensor operation was stopped by push-
The detection areas can be changed as fol- ing the “SONAR” switch.
Back sensor (vehicles with a towing bar) lows: • Setting when towing bar is equipped
When reversing sensor system operation
Vehicles with a towing bar was stopped by pushing the “SONAR”
Vehicle to obstacle Warning display/ switch, the reversing sensor system will
distance sound cycle While the operation of the system is stopped not operate until the engine has been stop-
at the “SONAR” switch, push the “SONAR” ped even if the gearshift lever or selector
Approx. 125 to Intermittent
switch approximately 3 seconds or more, and lever is moved to the “R” position.
100 cm To resume reversing sensor system opera-
release it. The buzzer sounds twice to indi-
Approx. 100 to Fast intermittent cate that the detection area has been changed. tion, push the “SONAR” switch or stop
60 cm and restart the engine, and then move the
gearshift lever or selector lever to the “R”
Vehicles without a towing bar
Within approx. Continuous position.
60 cm While the operation of the system is stopped
at the “SONAR” switch, push the “SONAR”
switch approximately 3 seconds or more, and
CAUTION release it. The buzzer sounds once to indicate
l The distances given are to be used for refer- that the detection area has been changed.
ence only, as errors may be caused by vari-
ous factors, such as temperature, humidity,
or the shape of the obstacles.

Parking sensors (Front/Rear)*
Reversing sensor system warn- Even after the buzzer and display has stopped CAUTION
ing display warning, the indication lamp (A) on “SO-
NAR” switch will continue blinking until the l The parking sensors assist you in determin-
In case there is a malfunction in the reversing ing the approximate distance between the
system reverts to the normal state. Have the
sensor system, the display for the malfunc- vehicle and any objects. It has limitations in
vehicle inspected at a MITSUBISHI terms of detectable areas and objects, and
tioning sensor will blink and the warning MOTORS Authorized Service Point. may not properly detect some objects.
buzzer will sound for approximately 5 sec- Therefore, do not place excessive confidence
onds. in the parking sensors, and operate the vehi-
cle as carefully as you would do with vehicle
not equipped with this system.
Example: Corner sensor (left) malfunctioning
l Make sure to check the surroundings with 6
your own eyes to ensure safety. Do not oper-
ate the vehicle by relying on the parking sen-
sors alone.
Obstacle detection areas

The detection areas of the corner and back
sensors are limited to those shown in the il-
lustration. Moreover, the sensors are unable
Parking sensors (Front/ to detect low or thin objects or objects near
Rear)* the front or rear bumper. Thus, make sure to
check the surroundings as you operate the ve-
When parking in a garage or during parallel hicle in a safe manner.
parking, these sensors alert the driver to any
objects near the vehicle and their distance,
through a buzzer and the sensor display on
the information screen in the multi-informa-
tion display.

Corner and back sensor loca- The detection areas are within approximately NOTE
tions 60 cm (A) from the front and corner sensors
and 125 cm (B) from the back sensors. l The sensors do not detect objects located in
There are eight sensors (A) in the front and the area directly below or near the bumper.
rear bumper. If the height of an object is lower than the
mounted position of the sensors, the sensors
may not continue detecting it even if they
detected it initially.
For information on how to change the detec-

6 tion areas, please refer to “Changing the de-
tection areas” on page 6-128.
CAUTION
l The parking sensors may not operate proper-
ly under the following conditions:
Vehicles with a towing bar
• The sensors or surroundings have been
Detection areas The detection areas are within approximately wiped by hand.
60 cm (A) from the front and corner sensors • The stickers or accessories have been at-
Depending on whether the vehicle is equip- and 125 cm (B) from the back sensors. The tached to the sensors or surroundings.
ped with a towing bar, you can change the non-detection areas (C) are within approxi- • The sensors or surroundings are covered
parking sensors between the standard mode mately 20 cm (D) from the bumper. with water droplets, ice, snow, mud, etc.
and the towing bar mode. The towing bar • When the temperature difference is too
mode changes the system to exclude the area large.
in which the towing bar is mounted from the • The sensors are frozen.
detection areas. • The system receives ultrasonic noise from
other sources (the horns of other vehicles,
Vehicles without a towing bar motorcycle engines, brakes, radios, pour-
ing rain, splashing water, snow traction
device (tyre chains), etc.).
• The sensors are extremely hot or cold
(while the vehicle is parked for a long pe-
riod of time under a blazing sun or in cold
weather).

CAUTION To operate Warning for obstacles

• The vehicle tilts significantly. To operate the system, the operation mode is If there is an obstacle in the vicinity of the
• The vehicle is driven on a rough road put in ON. When the parking sensors are op- vehicle, a warning will be issued with the in-
(with a bumpy, gravel, hilly, or grassy sur- erated, the indication lamp (A) will turn on. formation screen in the multi information dis-
face). To stop the operation, press the “SONAR” play and a warning buzzer.
• The vehicle is too close to an obstacle. switch and the indication lamp (A) goes off.
l The parking sensors may not properly detect
the following objects:
• Objects that are thin, such as wire nets or 6
ropes.
• Objects that absorb sound waves, such as
snow.
• Objects that are shaped with a sharp an-
gle.
• Objects with a smooth surface, such as
glass.
• Objects that are low, such as kerbstones.
l If the bumper has been exposed to an im- 1- Corner sensor
pact, the sensors may fail and prevent the 2- Front sensor
system from functioning properly. Have the 3- Back sensor
MOTORS Authorized Service Point. Front and corner sensor
Vehicle to obstacle Warning display/

NOTE distance sound cycle
l When the sensor is received ultrasonic noise Approx. 60 to 40 cm Intermittent
from outside, the sensor of the correspond-
ing portion will blink at a constant frequen- Approx. 40 to 30 cm Fast intermittent
cy. When they are not received the noise and
return to normal operation. Within approx.
Continuous
30 cm

Back sensor (vehicles without a towing NOTE NOTE
bar)
l When the sensors are detecting different ob- l The detection area will not change if you
Vehicle to obstacle Warning display/ stacles at the same time, the information keep the “SONAR” switch pressed for 10
distance sound cycle screen in the multi information display indi- seconds or more.
cates the directions of the obstacles each l After pressing the “SONAR” switch, the
Approx. 125 to sensors are detecting. However, closer obsta- parking sensors operation differs according
Intermittent
80 cm cles are given priority over other detected to the detection area setting.
obstacles and the warning buzzer sounds to • Setting when towing bar is not equipped
Approx. 80 to 40 cm Fast intermittent inform you of closer obstacles. When the selector lever is moved to the
“R” (Reverse) position, the parking sen-
6 Within approx.
Continuous sors will operate even if corner sensor op-
40 cm Changing the detection areas eration was stopped by pressing the “SO-
Back sensor (vehicles with a towing bar) The detection areas can be changed as fol- NAR” switch.
lows: • Setting when towing bar is equipped
Vehicle to obstacle Warning display/ When parking sensors operation was stop-
Vehicles with a towing bar ped by pressing the “SONAR” switch, the
distance sound cycle While the operation of the system is stopped parking sensors will not operate until the
Approx. 125 to at the “SONAR” switch, press the “SONAR” engine has been stopped even if the selec-
Intermittent switch approximately 3 seconds or more, and tor lever is moved to the “R” (Reverse)
100 cm
release it. The buzzer sounds twice to indi- position.
Approx. 100 to cate that the detection area has been changed. To resume parking sensors operation,
Fast intermittent
60 cm Vehicles without a towing bar press the “SONAR” switch or stop and re-
start the engine, and then move the selec-
Within approx. While the operation of the system is stopped tor lever to the “R” (Reverse) position.
Continuous
60 cm at the “SONAR” switch, press the “SONAR”
switch approximately 3 seconds or more, and
release it. The buzzer sounds once to indicate
CAUTION that the detection area has been changed.
l The distances given are to be used for refer-
ence only, as errors may be caused by vari-
ous factors, such as temperature, humidity, NOTE
or the shape of the obstacles. l The mode of the detection area can be
switched only when the selector lever is in
the “R” (Reverse) position.

Rear-view camera*
Warning display Even after the buzzer and display has stopped CAUTION
warning, the indication lamp (A) on “SO-
In case there is a malfunction in the parking l The rear-view camera is an assistance sys-
NAR” switch will continue blinking until the
sensors, the display for the malfunctioning tem that enables the driver to check for ob-
system reverts to the normal state. Have the
sensor will blink and the warning buzzer will stacles behind the vehicle. Its range of view
vehicle inspected at a MITSUBISHI is limited, so you should not overly depend
sound for approximately 5 seconds.
MOTORS Authorized Service Point. on it. Please drive just as carefully as you
would if the vehicle did not have the rear-
Example: Corner sensor (left) malfunctioning view camera.
l Be sure to visually confirm safety around the
vehicle with your own eyes. Do not depend
entirely on the rear-view camera. 6
Range of view of rear-view
camera
The range of view of the rear-view camera is
limited to the area shown in the illustrations.
It cannot show both sides and the lower part
of the rear bumper, etc.
Rear-view camera* When reversing, be sure to visually confirm
safety around the vehicle.
The rear-view camera is a system that shows
the view behind the vehicle on a screen of the
DISPLAY AUDIO, the Smartphone-link Dis-
play Audio (SDA) or the Smartphone-link
Display Audio (SDA) navigation system.

Rear-view camera*
Location of rear-view camera NOTE
The rear-view camera (A) is integrated into l Because the rear-view camera has a special
the part near the tailgate handle. lens, the lines on the ground between park-
ing spaces may not look parallel on the
screen.
l In the following situations, the screen indi-
cation may be difficult to see. There is no
abnormality.
• Low light (nighttime)
6 • When the light of the sun or the light from
a vehicle’s headlamps shines directly into
How to use the rear-view cam- the lens
era l If the camera is hot and is then cooled by
rain or a car wash, the lens can mist up. This
phenomenon does not indicate a malfunc-
When you place the gearshift lever or the se-
tion.
lector lever in the “R” position with the igni-
l It is not possible to fully see obstacles when
Range of view of rear-view cam- tion switch in the “ON” position or the opera- the lens is dirty. If the lens becomes conta-
era tion mode in ON, the view behind the vehicle minated by water droplets, snow, mud or oil,
will automatically appear on the screen of the wipe off the contamination, taking care not
DISPLAY AUDIO, the SDA or the SDA to scratch the lens.
navigation system. When you move the gear- l Please observe the following cautions. Ig-
shift lever or the selector lever to any other noring them could lead to a camera malfunc-
tion.
position, the screen will return to its original
• Do not subject the camera to physical
indication. shock.
• Do not apply wax to the camera.
CAUTION • Do not splash the camera with boiling wa-
ter.
l The rear-view camera has a special lens that • Do not disassemble the camera.
can make objects shown on the screen ap-
pear to be closer or further away than they
actually are. Reference lines on the screen
Reference lines and upper surface of the rear
bumper (A) are displayed on the screen.

Rear-view camera*
l Red line (B) indicates approximately NOTE NOTE
50 cm behind the rear bumper.
tion of the road surface, the lines in the view
l Two Green lines (C) indicate approxi-
from the rear-view camera may not be accu-
mately 20 cm outside of the vehicle
rately positioned relative to the actual road.
body. The reference lines for distance and vehicle
l Short transverse lines (1 to 3) indicate width are based on a level, flat road surface.
distance from the rear bumper. In the following cases, objects shown on the
screen will appear to be farther off than they
actually are.
• When the rear of the vehicle is weighed
down with the weight of passengers and 6
luggage in the vehicle. A- Actual objects
B- Objects shown on the screen
l The reference lines for distance and vehicle
width are intended to indicate the distance to
Check surroundings for safety. a flat object such as a level, flat road surface.
This may make the distance to a projecting
object shown on the screen differ from the
actual distance to the projecting object. Do
1. Approximately at the rear edge of the not use them as a guide for distances to solid
rear bumper (if so equipped) objects.
2. Approximately 100 cm Example: On the screen the point B appears
3. Approximately 200 cm A- Actual objects the nearest, then the point C and A in order
of distance. The points A and B actually are
B- Objects shown on the screen the same distances from the vehicle, and the
NOTE • When there is an upward slope at the point C is farther off than the points A and
back. B.
l On vehicles equipped with SDA or the SDA
navigation system, it is possible to change
the display language of the screen.
For details, please refer to the separated
owner’s manual.
l When the vehicle is tilting because of the
number of people in the vehicle, the weight
and positioning of luggage, and/or the condi-

Multi Around Monitor*
NOTE CAUTION Location of each cameras

l The Multi Around Monitor is an assistance The cameras are integrated into the location
system that enables the driver to check the
safety around the vehicle. The range where
as shown below.
the image can be displayed is limited. Do
not place too much confidence in the Multi
Around Monitor and try to drive carefully in
the same way as for the vehicle not equipped
Check surroundings for safety.
with the Multi Around Monitor.
Its range of view is limited, so you should
6 not overly depend on it. Please drive just as
carefully as you would if the vehicle did not
have the Multi Around Monitor.
Multi Around Monitor* l Be sure to visually confirm safety around the
vehicle with your own eyes. Especially, the
The Multi Around Monitor is a system that four corners of the vehicle become blind
shows the view combined with four cameras, spots where an object is not displayed on the
Multi Around Monitor. Do not depend en- A- Rear-view camera
i.e., “Front-view camera”, “Side-view cam- B- Front-view camera
tirely on the Multi Around Monitor.
eras (right and left)” and “Rear-view camera” C- Side-view camera
l Do not use the Multi Around Monitor with
on a screen of the DISPLAY AUDIO, the the door mirrors folded in and/or with the
Smartphone-link Display Audio (SDA) or the doors and/or the tailgate open. It will prevent
Smartphone-link Display Audio (SDA) navi- the Multi Around Monitor from displaying WARNING
gation system. It assists drivers to park their the appropriate range. l Do not install anything which will disturb
vehicles in parking spaces and to parallel the operation of the cameras around the
park their vehicles. location of them.

Range of view of the Multi Range of view of the Multi

Around Monitor Around Monitor cameras
The range of view of the Multi Around Mon-
itor cameras is limited to the area shown in
the illustrations. It cannot show around the
both sides and the lower part of the front and
rear bumpers, etc. While driving, be sure to
visually confirm safety around the vehicle.
6
A: Front-view camera Types of views of the Multi

B: Side-view camera (Right)
Around Monitor
C: Side-view camera (Left) Two different types of views are displayed on
the left side and the right side respectively.
D: Rear-view camera

Bird’s eye-view/Rear-view mode Bird’s eye-view/Front-view CAUTION
Views of the surroundings of the vehicle and
mode
l The cameras have special lenses that can
behind the vehicle are displayed. Views of the surroundings of the vehicle and make objects shown on the screen appear to
the front of the vehicle are displayed. be closer or further away than they actually
are.
NOTE
l Because the cameras have a special lens, the
6 lines on the ground between parking spaces
may not look parallel on the screen.
l In the following situations, the screen indi-
cation may be difficult to see. There is no
abnormality.
• Low light (nighttime)
• When the light of the sun or the light from
Side-view/Rear-view mode a vehicle’s headlamps shines directly into
the lens.
Views of the passenger’s side of the vehicle
Side-view/Front-view mode • If a fluorescent light shines directly into
and behind the vehicle are displayed. Views of the passenger’s side of the vehicle the lens, the screen indication may be
and the front of the vehicle are displayed. flicker.
There is no abnormality.
l If the camera is hot and is then cooled by
rain or a car wash, the lens can mist up. This
phenomenon does not indicate a malfunc-
tion.
l If the atmospheric temperature is extremely
hot or extremely cold, the camera images
may not be clear.
There is no abnormality.
Check surroundings for safety. l If a radio set is installed near the camera, the
camera images may cause electrical system
interference and the system may stop func-
tioning properly.

NOTE Operation with the selector lev- NOTE

l It is not possible to fully see obstacles when er l If there is no operation for 3 minutes after
the lens is dirty. If the lens becomes conta- When you place the selector lever in the “R” the Multi Around Monitor is displayed by
minated by water droplets, snow, mud or oil, (REVERSE) position, the bird’s eye-view/ pressing the switch with the selector lever in
wipe off the contamination, taking care not a position other than “R”, the display disap-
rear-view is displayed on the screen of the
to scratch the lens. pears.
DISPLAY AUDIO, the SDA or the SDA
l Please observe the following cautions. Ig-
navigation system. When you move the se-
noring them could lead to a camera malfunc-
tion. lector lever to any other position, the display Switching of the screen (selector
• Do not subject the camera to physical disappears.
shook such as striking it strongly or
lever position is “R”) 6
throwing a thing. If the switch is pressed, the mode of Multi
• Do not adhere organic substances, waxes, NOTE Around Monitor is switched as follows.
oil remover, and glass cleaner to the cam-
l The passenger’s side screen can be switched
era. to the side-view by pressing the switch. Bird’s eye-view/Rear-view mode Side-
If adhered to them, immediately wipe off. view/ Rear-view mode
• Do not splash the camera with boiling wa-
ter. Operation with the switch Switching of the screen (selector
• Never spray or splash water on the cam- When the switch (A) is pressed, the bird’s
era or around it. lever position is other than “R”)
eye-view/front-view is displayed.
• Do not disconnect, disassemble or modify If the switch is pressed, the mode of Multi
the camera. Around Monitor is as follows:
• Do not scratch the camera, as this may
cause damage to the camera images.
Bird’s eye-view/Front-view mode Side-
view/Front-view mode OFF
How to use the Multi Around
Monitor
The Multi Around Monitor can only be used
when the ignition switch is set to the “ON”
position or the operation mode is put in ON.

NOTE Front-view mode NOTE

l When you move the selector lever to the “R” Reference lines for the distance and the vehi- l When the expected course lines are dis-
position with the front-view displayed on the cle width and upper surface of the front played in the front-view, the expected course
driver’s side screen, the driver’s side screen bumper (A) are displayed on the screen. lines are also displayed in the bird’s eye-
switches to the Rear-view mode. When you l The Red line (B) indicates approximate- view (Front: solid line, Rear: broken line).
move the selector lever to any other position, ly 50 cm from the front edge of the front
the driver’s side screen switches to the
Front-view mode.
bumper.
l When the switch is pressed at the vehicle l The Two Green lines (C) indicate the ap-
speed of approximately 10 km/h or higher, proximate vehicle width.
6 only the side-view can be displayed on the l The Orange line (D) indicates an expec-
passenger’s side screen. ted course when the vehicle moves for-
l The front-view will not be displayed when ward with the steering wheel turned. It
the vehicle speed exceeds approximately 10 disappears when the steering wheel is in
km/h (6 mph).
the neutral position.
l The display of the view may be delayed dur-
ing switching of the screen. l The approximate distance from the vehi-
cle body is as follows:
Rear-view mode
l
How to read the screen Reference lines for the distance and the vehi-
cle width and upper surface of the rear bump-
In any mode other than the Bird’s eye-view
er (A) are displayed on the screen.
mode, the lines in the screen give the follow-
ing information. Use them only as a guide. l The Red line (B) indicates approximate-
ly 50 cm behind the rear edge of the rear
bumper.
CAUTION l The Two Green lines (C) indicate the ap-
l When you accidentally hit the camera and its Check surroundings for safety. proximate vehicle width.
circumference against something, the view l The Orange line (D) indicates an expec-
and the lines in the screen may not be dis- ted course when the vehicle is reserved
played correctly. Be sure to have it inspected with the steering wheel turned. It disap-
by a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized 1- Approximately 100 cm from the
front edge of the front bumper pears when the steering wheel is in the
Service Point.
neutral position.
l The approximate distance from the vehi-
cle body is as follows:

NOTE Therefore when there is an obstacle on the

upward slope, it appears farther than its ac-
l When the expected course lines are dis- tual position.
played in the rear-view, the expected course
lines are also displayed in the bird’s eye-
view (Front: broken line, Rear: solid line).
6
1- Approximately 100 cm from the rear
edge of the rear bumper
2- Approximately 200 cm from the rear
edge of the rear bumper A- Actual objects
B- Objects shown on the screen
Errors between the display and
CAUTION When there is an upward slope behind the
the actual road surface vehicle
l Due to the number of people in the vehicle, The reference lines for distance and vehicle
the fuel quantity, the weight and positioning The reference lines are displayed closer than
of luggage, and/or the condition of the road width are based on a level, flat road surface. the actual distance.
surface, the lines in the view from the rear- In the following cases, errors are produced
view camera may not be accurately posi- between the display reference lines and the
tioned relative to the actual road. distance on the actual road surface.
Use the reference lines only as a guideline,
and always do a safety check of your behind When the rear of the vehicle is weighed
and surroundings directly while driving. down with the weight of passengers and
luggage in the vehicle
The reference lines are displayed closer than
the actual distance.

Therefore when there is an obstacle on the Therefore when there is an obstacle on the However, the vehicle may hit the truck be-
upward slope, it appears farther than its ac- downward slope, it appears closer than its ac- cause the body of the truck strays onto the
tual position. tual position. course in reality.
A- Actual objects A- Actual objects

B- Objects shown on the screen B- Objects shown on the screen
When there is a downward slope behind When solid objects are located close to the
the vehicle vehicle
The reference lines are displayed farther than When solid objects are located close to the
the actual distance. vehicle, the displayed distance on the screen
may differ from the actual distance.
Because the reference lines do not contact the
body of the truck, it looks as if it would not
hit the vehicle in following illustration.

When approaching to solid objects 2- Approximate location of the axle centre CAUTION
The reference lines for distance and vehicle of the front wheel.
width are intended to indicate the distance to 3- Approximate 50 cm from the front edge l The bird’s eye-view is an simulated view
processed by combining view captured by
a flat object such as a level, flat road surface. of the front bumper.
“Front-view camera”, “Side-view cameras
This may make the distance to a projecting (right and left)” and “Rear-view camera”.
object shown on the screen differ from the Because of this, in the Bird’s eye-view
actual distance to the projecting object. Do mode, objects will appear to be farther away
not use them as a guide for distances to solid than they actually are. In addition, there are
objects. blind spots in the vicinity of the actual vehi-
cle which are not displayed on the screen.
Example: On the screen the point B appears
You may crash your vehicle even if there 6
the nearest, then the point C and A in order of
seems to be a little distance between your
distance. The points A and B actually are the vehicle and an object, and there may be an
same distances from the vehicle, and the object in the area where there seems to be
point C is farther off than the points A and B. nothing. Be sure to check the safety around
the vehicle with your own eyes.
l The vehicle icon displayed in the Bird’s eye-
view mode differs from the actual vehicle in
Bird’s eye-view mode colour and size. Because of this, an object
An overhead view in which the vehicle is near the vehicle may appear to be in contact
with the vehicle, and the positional relation-
looked down is displayed so that you can
ship between the vehicle and the object may
easily identify the location of your vehicle differ from the actual one.
and the course to enter the parking space. l The view composition processing regions
are present in the four corners of the Bird’s
eye-view display, mainly at the boundary
sections of views from each camera. Be-
cause of this, in the vicinity of the boundary
sections, the sharpness of the views may de-
Side-view mode crease and an object may disappear and re-
appear on the screen.
Reference lines for the vehicle width and the
front end of the vehicle are displayed on the
screen.
1- Approximate vehicle width including the
door mirror.

Cargo loads
NOTE Cargo loads NOTE

l In the Bird’s eye-view mode, since the views l We recommend you to use a MITSUBISHI
captured by the four cameras, “Front-view MOTORS GENUINE roof carrier, since the
camera”, “Side-view cameras (right and Cargo loads precautions brackets to be used have a special shape. For
left)” and “Rear-view camera” are processed details, we recommend you to consult a
based on a level flat road surface, an image
may be displayed as follows:
CAUTION MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Serv-
ice Point.
• An object appears to have fallen down l Do not load cargo or luggage higher than the
and looks longer or larger. top of the seatback. Be sure that your cargo
• An object having a height from the road or luggage cannot move once your vehicle is Roof carrier precaution
6 surface may seem to appear from the joint moving. Having the driver’s vision blocked,
of the view composition processing re- and your cargo being thrown inside the cabin CAUTION
gions. if you suddenly have to brake can cause a
l The brightness of the views from each cam- serious accident or injury. l Make sure that the weight of the luggage
does not exceed the allowable roof load.
era may vary depending on the illuminance l Load heavy cargo or luggage in the front of
If the allowable roof load is exceeded, this
conditions. the vehicle. If the load in the back of the ve-
hicle is too heavy, steering may become un- may cause damage to the vehicle.
l An object above the camera is not displayed.
The roof load is the total allowable load on
stable.
l The object displayed in the Front-view mode the roof (the weight of the roof carrier plus
or the Rear-view mode may not be displayed the weight of luggage placed on the roof car-
in the Bird’s eye-view mode. Loading a roof carrier rier).
l The view in the Bird’s eye-view mode may For the specific value, refer to “Maximum
be displaced from its true position when the
mounting location and angle of each camera CAUTION roof load” on page 11-05.
are changed. l Use a roof carrier that properly fits your ve-
l The lines on the road may appear to be dis- hicle. Do not load luggage directly onto the
placed or bent at the joint of the views. roof.
For installation, refer to the instruction man-
ual accompanying the roof carrier.

Trailer towing
CAUTION NOTE If you tow a trailer at an altitude of more than

1,000 m above sea-level, reduce your weight
l When luggage is loaded onto the vehicle, l Be sure that adequate clearance is main- by 10 % of the gross combination weight for
please make sure to drive slowly and avoid tained for raising the tailgate while loading
every increase of 1,000 m above sea-level, as
excessive manoeuvres such as sudden brak- luggage on the roof carrier.
ing or quick turning. the engine output is lowered owing to de-
In addition, place the luggage on the carrier crease in atmospheric pressure.
so that its weight is distributed evenly with Trailer towing
the heaviest items on the bottom. Do not Towing bar mounting specifica-
load items that are wider than the roof carri- In order to tow a trailer with your vehicle, tions
er.
The additional weight on the roof could raise
when having a trailer towing device mounted 6
that meets all relevant regulations in your See the following table for fixing points (A)
the vehicle’s centre of gravity and affect ve-
hicle handling characteristics. area, consult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Au- for the towing bar.
As a result, driving errors or emergency ma- thorized Service Point.
noeuvres could lead to a loss of control and The regulations concerning the towing of a
result in an accident. trailer may differ from country to country.
l Before driving and after travelling a short You are advised to obey the regulations in
distance, always check the load to make sure each area.
it is securely fastened to the roof carrier.
Check periodically during your travel that
the load remains secure. CAUTION
l Danger of Accident!
NOTE A towing bar should be fitted according to
MITSUBISHI MOTORS guidelines.
l To prevent wind noise or reduction in fuel
economy, remove the roof carrier when not
in use. Maximum towable weight with
l Remove the roof carrier before using an au- brake and maximum trailer-
tomatic car wash. nose weight
l Be sure that adequate clearance is main-
tained for raising the sunroof (if so equip-
Never exceed the maximum towable weight
ped) when installing a roof carrier.
with brake and the maximum trailer-nose
weight as listed in the specifications.
(Refer to page 11-05.)

Trailer towing
1 698 mm l Be sure that the driving speed does not CAUTION

exceed 100 km/h (62 mph) for trailer op-
2 69 mm eration. l On vehicles equipped with A/T or CVT, if
It is also recommended that you obey the the warning display is showing, the tem-
3 369 mm
perature of the automatic transmission fluid,
local regulations in case driving speed
4 102 mm CVT fluid is high.
with a trailer is limited to less than Read the reference page and take the re-
5 815 mm 100 km/h (62 mph). quired measures.
6 448 mm l To prevent shocks from the overrun Refer to “When a malfunction occurs in the
(at kerb weight condition) brake, depress the brake pedal lightly at A/T” on page 6-37, “When a malfunction
6 7 496 mm
first and then more strongly. occurs in the CVT” on page 6-44.
l To make full use of engine braking,
(at kerb weight condition) change to a lower shift point before de-
8 534 mm scending a slope.
(at kerb weight condition)
Overheating
9 544 mm
(at kerb weight condition) This will normally occur as a result of some
mechanical failure. If your vehicle should
10 473 mm overheat, stop and check for a loose or bro-
11 528 mm ken water pump/alternator drive belt, a
blocked radiator air intake or a low coolant
12 583 mm
level. If these items are satisfactory the over-
heating could be caused by a number of me-
Operating hints chanical causes that would have to be
checked at a competent service centre.
l To prevent the clutch from slipping (Ve-
hicle with a M/T only), do not rev the
engine more than is required when start- CAUTION
ing off.
l If the engine overheats, reference should be
made to “Engine overheating” section of
“For emergencies” prior to taking any cor-
rective action.

For pleasant driving
Ventilators........................................................................................... 7-02 Accessory socket.................................................................................7-73

Automatic climate control air conditioner.......................................... 7-05 USB port (for charging)*.................................................................... 7-74
Important operation tips for the air conditioning................................ 7-12 Interior lamps...................................................................................... 7-75
Air purifier.......................................................................................... 7-13 Storage spaces..................................................................................... 7-77
LW/MW/FM radio/CD player*.......................................................... 7-13 Cup holder...........................................................................................7-80
Handling of Discs................................................................................7-17 Bottle holder........................................................................................7-81
Audio Files (MP3/WMA/AAC)..........................................................7-18 Cargo area cover*............................................................................... 7-82 7
Important Points on Safety for the Customer......................................7-22 Assist grips..........................................................................................7-83
Operation Keys................................................................................... 7-22 Coat hook............................................................................................ 7-83
Listen to Radio.................................................................................... 7-25 Luggage hooks.................................................................................... 7-83
Listening to DAB*.............................................................................. 7-26
Listen to Traffic Messages.................................................................. 7-28
Listen to CDs...................................................................................... 7-28
Listen to MP3s.................................................................................... 7-29
Listening to an iPod............................................................................ 7-30
Listen to Audio Files on a USB Device..............................................7-32
To play iPod/USB memory device tracks via voice opera-
tion (vehicles with Bluetooth® 2.0 interface)................................. 7-34
Listen to Bluetooth® Audio*.............................................................. 7-37
Display Indicator.................................................................................7-39
Audio Quality and Volume Balance Adjustment................................ 7-40
System Settings................................................................................... 7-41
Troubleshooting.................................................................................. 7-45
Link System*...................................................................................... 7-47
Bluetooth® 2.0 interface*....................................................................7-47
USB input terminal*........................................................................... 7-68
Sun visors............................................................................................7-71
Ashtray*.............................................................................................. 7-71
Cigarette lighter*.................................................................................7-72
OGFE20E1
Ventilators
Ventilators Air flow and direction adjust- Passenger’s ventilators

ments Move the knob (A) to adjust the air flow di-
rection.
To close the ventilator, fully move the knob
NOTE (A) to the left side.
l Be careful not to spill drinks, etc., into the
ventilators.
Doing so might cause the air conditioner not
to function normally.
Driver’s ventilators
7
Move the knob (A) to adjust the air flow di-
rection.
1- Driver’s ventilators To close the ventilator, fully move the knob
2- Passenger’s ventilators (A) to the outer side.
3- 2nd seat ventilators*
1- Close
NOTE 2- Open
l Do not place beverages on top of the instru-
ment panel. If they splash into the air condi- 2nd seat ventilators*
tioning ventilators, they could damage the
The ventilators can be opened and closed
system.
with the dial (A).
- Open
- Close
1- Close
2- Open
7-02 For pleasant driving OGFE20E1

Ventilators
Adjust the direction of the air flow by mov-
ing the knob (B).
Changing the mode selection

To change the position and amount of air flowing from the ventilators, press the MODE switch or demister switch. (Refer to “MODE switch” on
page 7-10, “Demister switch” on page 7-11.)
The mode selection and air flowing from the ventilators
These symbols are used in the next several illustrations to demonstrate the quantity of air coming from the ventilators.
: Small amount of air from the ventilators

: Medium amount of air from the ventilators
: Large amount of air from the ventilators
OGFE20E1 For pleasant driving 7-03

Ventilators
Face position Foot/Face position Foot position
7 Foot/Demister position Demister position
NOTE
l For vehicles with the Auto Stop & Go (AS&G) system, the windows may start to fog up while the Auto Stop & Go (AS&G) system is operating. If this
occurs, press the demister switch to remove fog from the windows.
l The foot/face air flow ratio can be adjusted with the mode selection in the “ ” position and the foot/demister air flow ratio can be adjusted with the mode
selection in the “ ” position.
For further information, we recommend you to consult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point.
On vehicles equipped with the Smartphone-link Display Audio (SDA) or the Smartphone-link Display Audio (SDA) navigation system, screen operations
can be used to make the adjustment. Refer to the separate owner’s manual for details.

Automatic climate control air conditioner
Automatic climate control CAUTION Control panel

air conditioner l The engine speed may increase when the air
conditioner is operating.
The air conditioner can only be used while With an increased engine speed, an A/T or
the engine is running. CVT vehicle will creep to a greater degree
than with a lower engine speed. Fully de-
press the brake pedal to prevent the vehicle
from creeping.
1- Air conditioning switch 4- Passenger’s side temperature control dial 10- Air selection switch
2- Driver’s side temperature control dial (LHD vehicles) 11- OFF switch
(LHD vehicles) Driver’s side temperature control dial 12- Driver’s side temperature display (LHD
Passenger’s side temperature control dial (RHD vehicles) vehicles) ® p. 7-11
(RHD vehicles) 5- MODE switch Passenger’s side temperature display
3- AUTO switch 6- Demister switch (RHD vehicles) ® p. 7-11
7- Blower speed selection switch 13- Mode selection display
8- SYNC switch 14- Blower speed display
9- Rear window demister switch ® p. 5-74 15- SYNC indicator

16- Passenger’s side temperature display NOTE The selected blower speed (A) will be shown
(LHD vehicles) ® p. 7-11 in the display.
Driver’s side temperature display (RHD l Even if the ECO mode is operating, you can
select normal operation of the air condition-
vehicles) ® p. 7-11
er.
NOTE link Display Audio (SDA) or the Smart-
l There is an interior air temperature sensor system, screen operations can be used to
(A) in the illustrated position. change the setting. Refer to the separate
Never place anything on top of the sensor, owner’s manual for details.
since doing so will prevent it from function-
l In extreme cold, the air conditioning control
ing properly. panel screen may operate sluggishly. This
7 does not indicate a problem.
It will disappear when the vehicle interior
temperature rises to a normal temperature. 1- Increase
2- Decrease
Blower speed selection switch
Press the blower speed selection switch (1) to Temperature control dial
increase the blower speed. Turn the temperature control dial clockwise
Press the blower speed selection switch (2) to to make the air warmer. Turn it anticlockwise
decrease the blower speed. to make the air cooler.
l Since the air conditioning operation is con-
trolled while the ECO mode is operating,
you may feel that effectiveness of the air
conditioner is weak.
ECO mode switch ® p. 5-68

The selected temperature (A) will be shown NOTE The settings described above are the factory
in the display. settings.
l While the engine coolant temperature is low, The air selection and air conditioning
the temperature of the air from the heater
switches can be customised (function setting
will be cool/cold until the engine warms up,
even if you have selected warm air with the changed), and the automatic switching of out-
dial. side air and the air conditioner according to
To prevent the windscreen and windows operating conditions can be changed as de-
from fogging up, the ventilator mode will be sired.
changed to “ ” and the blower speed will For further information, we recommend you
be reduced while the system is operating in to consult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Au-
the AUTO mode. thorized Service Point.
l When you feel that it is hot or cold to the
setting temperature, it is possible to adjust so
Refer to “Customizing the air conditioning 7
that you can feel more comfortable. switch” on page 7-09.
For further information, we recommend you Refer to “Customizing the air selection” on
to consult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Au- page 7-08.
NOTE thorized Service Point.
l The temperature value of air conditioner is l When the temperature is set to the highest or
switched in conjunction with outside temper- the lowest, the air selection and the air con-
ature display unit of the multi information ditioner will be automatically changed as
display. follows.
On vehicles equipped with multi information Also, if the air selection is operated manual-
display - Type 1, refer to “Changing the tem- ly after an automatic changeover, manual
perature unit” on page 5-16. operation will be selected.
On vehicles equipped with multi information • Quick Heating (When the temperature is
display - Type 2, refer to “Changing the tem- set to the highest setting)
perature unit” on page 5-51. Outside air will be introduced and the air
conditioner will stop.
• Quick Cooling (When the temperature is
set to the lowest setting)
Inside air will be recirculated and the air
conditioner will operate.

To control the driver’s side and the pas- Air selection switch NOTE
senger’s side temperature independently To change the air selection, simply press the
l Normally, use the outside position to keep
When the “SYNC” indicator (A) goes off by air selection switch. the windscreen and side windows clear and
turning the passenger’s side temperature con- l Outside air: Indication lamp (A) is OFF quickly remove fog or frost from the wind-
trol dial (B) or pressing the SYNC switch, the Outside air is introduced into the passen- screen.
ger compartment. If high cooling performance is desired, or if
driver’s side and the passenger’s side temper-
l Recirculated air: Indication lamp (A) is the outside air is dusty or otherwise contami-
ature can be controlled independently. nated use the recirculation position. Switch
ON
to the outside position periodically to in-
Air is recirculated inside the passenger crease ventilation so that the windows do not
compartment. become fogged up.
7 l When the engine coolant temperature rises
to a certain level, the air selection is auto-
matically switched to the recirculation posi-
tion and the indication lamp (A) comes on.
At this time, the system will not switch to
the outside position even if the air selection
switch is pushed.
Customizing the air selection

Functions can be changed as desired, as sta-
NOTE ted below.
l When the “SYNC” indicator (A) appears by l Enable automatic air selection control
pressing the SYNC switch, the passenger’s When the AUTO switch is pressed, the
side temperature will be controlled to the CAUTION air selection switch is also controlled au-
same setting temperature as the driver’s side. l Use of the recirculation position for exten- tomatically.
While the “SYNC” indicator (A) is dis- ded time may cause the windows to fog up.
played, if the driver’s side temperature con-
trol dial is turned, the passenger’s side set- l Disable automatic air selection control
ting temperature will be synchronized to the Even when the AUTO switch is pressed,
driver’s side. the air selection switch is not controlled
automatically.
l Setting change method

Hold down the air selection switch for AUTO switch Air conditioning switch
approximately 10 seconds or more. When the AUTO switch is pressed, the indi- Push the switch to turn the air conditioner on,
• When the setting is changed from ena- cation lamp (A) comes on and the mode se- the indication lamp (A) will come on.
ble to disable lection, blower speed adjustment, recircula-
Three sounds are emitted and the indi- ted/ outside air selection, temperature adjust-
cation lamp (A) flashes three times. ment, and air conditioner ON/OFF status are
• When the setting is changed from dis- all controlled automatically.
able to enable
Two sounds are emitted and the indi-
cation lamp (A) flashes three times.
On vehicles equipped with the Smart-
phone-link Display Audio (SDA) or the 7
Smartphone-link Display Audio (SDA)
also be used to change the setting. Refer
to the separate owner’s manual for de-
tails. Push the switch again to switch it off.
NOTE NOTE
l The factory setting is “Enable automatic air l If a problem is detected in the air condition-
selection control”. ing system, the indication lamp (A) blinks.
l When the demister switch is pressed, in or- Press the air conditioning switch once to
der to prevent misting of the windows the turn it off, then once more to turn it back on.
ventilator automatically switches to outside If the indication lamp (A) does not blink for
air even if “Disable automatic air selection a while, there is nothing wrong. If it starts to
control” is set. blink again, we recommend you to have it
checked.
Customizing the air conditioning switch

Functions can be changed as desired, as sta-
ted below.

l Enable automatic air conditioning con- NOTE MODE switch
trol Each time the MODE switch is pressed, the
When the AUTO switch is pressed, or l The factory setting is “Enable automatic air
conditioning control”. mode changes to the next one in the follow-
the temperature control dial is set to the ing sequence: “ ” → “ ” → “ ” →
minimum temperature, the air condition- l When the demister switch is pressed, in or-
der to prevent misting of the windows the air “ ” → “ ”. The selected mode (A) is
ing switch is controlled automatically. conditioner operates automatically even if shown in the display. (Refer to “Changing the
“Disable automatic air conditioning control” mode selection” on page 7-03.)
l Disable automatic air conditioning con- is set.
trol
The air conditioning switch is not con-
trolled automatically as long as the air
OFF switch
7 conditioning switch is not operated. Push the OFF switch to turn off the air condi-
tioning system.
l Setting change method
Hold down the air conditioning switch
for approximately 10 seconds or more.
• When the setting is changed from ena-
ble to disable
Three sounds are emitted and the indi-
• When the setting is changed from dis-
able to enable
Two sounds are emitted and the indi-
On vehicles equipped with the Smart-
phone-link Display Audio (SDA) or the
Smartphone-link Display Audio (SDA)
also be used to change the setting. Refer
to the separate owner’s manual for de-
tails.

Demister switch Operating the system in auto- NOTE

When this switch is pressed, the mode matic mode l If the blower speed selection switch, air con-
changes to the “ ” mode. The indication ditioning switch, MODE switch, or air selec-
lamp (A) will come on. The selected mode tion switch is operated while the system is
(B) is shown in the display. (Refer to operating in the AUTO mode, the activated
“Changing the mode selection” on page function overrides the corresponding func-
7-03.) tion of automatic control. All other functions
remain under automatic control.
Operating the system in man-

ual mode 7
Blower speed and ventilator mode will be
controlled manually by setting the blower
speed selection switch and the MODE switch
In normal conditions, use the system in the to the desired positions.
AUTO mode and follow these procedures: To return to automatic operation, press the
1. Push the AUTO switch. AUTO switch.
2. Set the temperature control dial to the
desired temperature.
Demisting of the windscreen
NOTE and door windows
The mode selection, blower speed ad-
l When the demister switch is pressed, the air
justment, recirculated/outside air selec-
conditioning system automatically operates CAUTION
and outside air (as opposed to recirculated tion, temperature adjustment, and air
air) is selected. This automatic switching conditioner ON/OFF status are all con- l For safety, make sure you have a clear view
control is carried out to prevent misting of trolled automatically. through all the windows.
the windows even if “Disable automatic air
conditioning control” or “Disable automatic
air selection control” is set. (Refer to “Cus-
tomizing the air conditioning switch” on
page 7-09, “Customizing the air selection”
on page 7-08.)

Important operation tips for the air conditioning
For ordinary demisting For quick demisting NOTE

l For vehicles with the Auto Stop & Go
(AS&G) system, if the demister switch is
pressed, the Auto Stop & Go (AS&G) sys-
tem will not operate and the engine will not
stop automatically even if the vehicle is
stopped. This is to ensure that good visibility
is maintained.
Important operation tips for

7 the air conditioning
1. Set the air selection switch to the outside 1. Push the demister switch to change to l Park the vehicle in the shade.
position. the “ ” position. Parking in the hot sun will make the ve-
2. Set the MODE switch to the “ ” posi- 2. Set the blower to the maximum speed. hicle inside extremely hot, and it will re-
tion. 3. Set the temperature to the highest posi- quire more time to cool the interior.
3. Select your desired blower speed by tion. If it is necessary to park in the sun, open
pressing the blower speed selection the windows for the first few minutes of
switch. air conditioning operation to expel the
NOTE hot air.
4. Select your desired temperature by turn-
ing the temperature control dial. l To demist effectively, direct the air flow l Close the windows when the air condi-
from the side ventilators towards the door tioner is in use. The entry of outside air
5. Push the air conditioning switch.
windows.
through open windows will reduce the
l Do not set the temperature to the max. cool
cooling efficiency.
position. Cool air will blow against the win-
dow glasses and prevent demisting. l Too much cooling is not good for the
health. Keep the difference between the
vehicle interior temperature and outside
temperature at 5 to 6 °C.

Air purifier
l When operating the system, make sure During a long period of disuse LW/MW/FM radio/CD
the air intake, which is located in front
of the windscreen, is free of obstructions The air conditioner should be operated for at player*
such as leaves and snow. Leaves collec- least five minutes each week, even in cold
ted in the air-intake plenum may reduce weather. This is to prevent the compressor The audio system can only be used when the
air flow and plug the plenum water from seizing and to maintain the air condi- ignition switch or the operation mode is in
drains. tioner in the best operating condition. ON or ACC.
Air conditioning system refrig- Air purifier NOTE

erant and lubricant recommen- l To listen to the audio system while the en-
dations An air filter has been incorporated into this gine is not running, turn the ignition switch
air conditioner so that dirt and dust are to the “ACC” position or put the operation 7
If the air conditioner seems less effective cleaned from the air. mode in ACC.
than usual, the cause might be a refrigerant Replace the air filter periodically as its ability If the ignition switch or the operation mode
to clean the air will be reduced as it collects is left in ACC, the accessory power will au-
leak. We recommend you to have the system
tomatically turn off after a certain period of
inspected. pollen and dirt. For the maintenance interval, time and you will no longer be able to use
[Except for vehicles for Russia, Kazakhstan, refer to the “SERVICE BOOKLET”. the audio system. The accessory power
Belarus, Ukraine and Moldova] comes on again if the ignition switch or the
The air conditioning system in your vehicle NOTE engine switch is operated with it in the
must be charged with the refrigerant “ACC” position. Refer to “ACC power auto-
HFO-1234yf and the lubricant PAG46A. l Operation in certain conditions such as driv- cutout function” on pages 6-15 and 6-18 .
ing on a dusty road and frequent use of the l If a cellular phone is used inside the vehicle,
[Vehicles for Russia, Kazakhstan, Belarus,
air conditioner can lead to reduction of serv- it may create noise from the audio equip-
Ukraine and Moldova] ice life of the filter. When you feel that the ment. This does not mean that anything is
The air conditioning system in your vehicle air flow is lower than normal or when the wrong with your audio equipment. In such a
must be charged with the refrigerant windscreen or windows start to fog up easi- case, use the cellular phone at a place as far
HFC-134a and the lubricant PAG46A. ly, replace the air filter. away as possible from the audio equipment.
Use of any other refrigerant or lubricant will We recommend you to have it checked.
cause severe damage which will result in the
need to replace your vehicle’s entire air con-
ditioning system. The release of refrigerant
into the atmosphere is not recommended.
We recommend you to recover and recycle
the refrigerant for reuse.
LW/MW/FM radio/CD player*
NOTE Trademarks NOTE

l If foreign objects or water get into the audio l Product names and other proper names l iPod and iTunes licensing allows individual
equipment, or if smoke or a strange odour are the trademarks or registered trade- users to privately reproduce and play back
comes from it, immediately turn off the au- marks of their respective owners. non- copyrighted material as well as material
dio system. We recommend you to have it l Furthermore, even if there is no specific that may be legally copied and reproduced.
checked. Never try to repair it by yourself. denotation of trademarks or registered Infringement of copyright is prohibited.
Avoid continuous usage without inspection
trademarks, these are to be observed in l For vehicles with a Bluetooth® 2.0 interface,
by a qualified person. the types of devices that can be connected
their entirety.
may vary.
For details, access the MITSUBISHI
Important Points on Usage MOTORS website.
7 iPod/iPhone Playback Func-
Please read and agree to the “Warning about
Links to the Web Sites of Other Compa-
tion* nies”. The websites mentioned above may
connect you to websites other than the
l This product supports audio playback MITSUBISHI MOTORS website.
from iPod/iPhone devices, however dif- http://www.mitsubishi-motors.com/en/prod-
“Made for iPod”, “Made for iPhone”
fering versions mean that playback can- ucts/index.html
mean that an electronic accessory has
not be guaranteed. been designed to connect specifically to Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of
l Please be aware that depending on the iPod or iPhone, respectively, and has BLUETOOTH SIG, INC.
iPod/iPhone model or version, operation been certified by the developer to meet
may differ. Apple performance standards.
iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano,
How to Clean and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple
l If the product becomes dirty, wipe with a Inc., registered in the U.S. and other
soft cloth. countries.
l If very dirty, use a soft cloth dipped in Apple is not responsible for the opera-
neutral detergent diluted in water, and tion of this device or its compliance with
then wrung out. Do not use benzene, safety and regulatory standards.
thinners, or other chemical wipes. This
may harm the surface.

5th generation 5th generation

(video) (video)
6th generation 5th generation 4th generation (video)

(video camera)
3rd generation 2nd generation 1st generation

(video) (aluminium)

4th generation 3rd generation 2nd generation 1st generation

8GB 32GB 64GB 32GB 64GB 8GB 16GB 32GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
7
16GB 32GB 64GB 16GB 32GB 8GB 16GB 32GB 8GB 16GB

Handling of Discs
Handling of Discs Important Points on Storage Maxi-

mum
This explains care that should be taken in the l When not using discs, ensure these are Type Size play- Comments
handling of discs. kept in cases, and stored out of direct back
sunlight. time
Important Points on Handling l If discs are not going to be used for a
long period of time, remove these from CD-DA 12 74 mi- —
the product. cm nutes
l Fingerprints or other marks on the read
surface of the disc may result in its con-
tent being more difficult to read. When Disc Playback Environment CD-TEXT 12 74 mi- —
holding the disc, grip both edges, or one cm nutes
edge and the centre hole, in order that In cold environments such as in mid-winter 7
the read surface is not touched. when the interior of the vehicle is cold, turn-
l Do not affix paper or stickers, or other- ing the heater on and immediately trying to
wise damage the disc. use the product may cause condensation (wa- CD-R/RW 12 — •Disc con-
l Do not forcefully insert a disc if another ter droplets) to form on the disc and internal cm taining
is already within the device. This can re- optical components, and this may prevent the MP3 files
sult in damage to discs, or malfunction. product from operating correctly.
In these conditions, remove the disc, and wait
Cleaning a short time before use.
l Periodically clean the read surface of the Copyright

disc. When cleaning, do not wipe in a Discs That May Not Be Played
circular motion. Instead, wipe gently Actions such as unauthorized reproduction, Back
outwards from the centre of the disc to broadcast, public performance, or rental of
discs that comprise other than personal use l Playback of discs other than those de-
the outer edge. scribed in “Types of Disc That Can Be
l New discs may have burring around the are prohibited by law.
Played Back” is not guaranteed.
outer edge or in the hole in the centre. Types of Disc That Can Be l 8 cm discs may not be used.
Ensure you check for these. If there are
burrs, these may lead to faulty operation, Played Back
therefore ensure these are removed. The following marks are printed on the disc
label, package, or jacket.

Audio Files (MP3/WMA/AAC)
l Do not insert irregularly-shaped discs l Playback of other than standard CDs is There are limitations on the files and media
(for example, heart-shaped), as these not guaranteed. Even if the audio can be that can be used, therefore read the following
may result in malfunction. Additionally, played back, the audio quality cannot be prior to recording MP3/WMA/AAC format
discs that have transparent portions may guaranteed. audio files on discs or USB devices. Addi-
not be played back. l When playing back other than standard tionally, ensure you read the user manuals for
l Discs that have not been finalized cannot CDs, the following may occur. your CDR/RW drive and the writing soft-
be played back. • There may be noise during playback. ware, and ensure these are used correctly.
l Even if recorded using the correct for- • There may be jumping in the audio. If the MP3/WMA/AAC format audio files in-
mat on a recorder or computer, applica- • The disc may not be recognized. cludes title information or other data, then
tion software settings and environments; • The first track may not be played this can be displayed.
disc peculiarities, damage, or marking; back.
7 or dirt or condensation on the lens inside • It may take longer than usual until CAUTION
the product may render the disc unplaya- start of playback of tracks.
ble. • Playback may start from within the l CD-ROM and CD-R/RW media can only
play back MP3 format audio files.
l Depending on the disc, some functions track.
may not be used, or the disc may not • Some parts may not be played back. l Actions such as copying audio CDs or files
and either distributing these to others for
play back. • Tracks may freeze during playback. free or for charge, or uploading files via the
l Do not use discs with cracks or warps. • Tracks may be displayed erroneously. Internet or other means to servers is an in-
l If the disc has stickers affixed, remains fringement of the law.
from removed stickers, or affixed adhe- Audio Files (MP3/WMA/ l Do not append the file extensions “.mp3”,
sive, then do not use the disc. “.wma”, or “.m4a”, to other than
l Discs that have decorative labels or AAC) MP3/WMA/AAC format files. Playing back
discs with these types of files recorded upon
stickers may not be used. them may cause the files to be incorrectly
This product can play back MP3/WMA/AAC
identified for playback, which may lead to
Nonstandard CDs format audio files recorded on CD-ROM,
loud noise, resulting in speaker damage or
CD-R/RW, and USB devices. accident.
This product will play back audio CDs, how-
ever please be aware of the following points
regarding CD standards.
l Ensure that you use discs with on the
label surface.

NOTE You can create a folder structure as in Genre - Speci-

Artist - Album - Track (MP3/WMA/AAC Name fica- Explanation
l Depending on the condition of the disc re- format audio files) for management of tracks. tion
corder or recording software used, correct
playback may not be possible. In these ca- ISO96 Joliet Files names up
ses, refer to the user manual for your product 60 ex- to a maximum
or software. ROOT
Folder tension 64 characters
l Depending on your computer’s operating
can be used.
system, version, software, or settings, files Audio file
may not have a file extension appended. In Multises- Not supported (only first session
these cases, append the file extensions sion supported)
“.mp3”, “.wma”, or “.m4a” when copying
the files. Maxi- 8 levels (if the root is the 1st lev-
l Files larger than 2GB in size cannot be mum el)
7
played back. number
of levels
Data Formats That Can Be Maxi- 700 folders (including root)
Played Back 1 level 2 level 3 level 4 level 5 level mum
Data formats that can be played on discs folder
(CD-ROM, CDR/RW) and USB devices dif- number
fer. Speci- Maxi- 65,535 files (total number on
Name fica- Explanation mum file media. Other than MP3, WMA,
Data format DISC USB device tion number*1 and AAC files not included)
MP3 ISO96 Level Maximum 8 File name Maximum 64 bytes (for Uni-
WMA X 60 1 character file and fold- code, 32 characters), files/folders
name, and 3 er name with file/folder names longer
AAC X character file restric- than this will not be displayed or
Format
Folder Structure extension. (sin- tions played back.
specifica-
gle-byte alpha-
Up to 8 folder levels can be recognized. tions USB sup- The recommended file system is
numeric capital
ported FAT32.
letters, numer-
formats 1 partition only
als, “_” may be
used)

*1: Do not include other than CAUTION Item Details
MP3/WMA/AAC files. However, if
l MP3 files different to the standards at right Supported tag ID3 tag Ver. 1.0, Ver. 1.1,
storing many tracks within the same may not play back correctly, or file/folder information Ver. 2.2, Ver. 2.3, Ver. 2.4
folder, these may not be recognized names may not be displayed correctly. (ISO-8859-1, UTF-16 (Uni-
even if less than the maximum number
code)), Titles, Artist name,
of tracks. In these cases, divide the Standards for MP3 Files That Album name
tracks up into multiple folders. Can Be Played Back Maximum 64 characters
Specifications for MP3 files that can be number of
NOTE played are as shown below. characters
l The order in which folders and audio files that can be
7 are displayed on this product may be differ- Item Details indicated on
ent to how they are displayed on a computer. Specification MPEG-1 AUDIO LAYER3 the display
Specification MPEG-2 AUDIO LAYER3 What Is WMA?
What Is MP3? Sampling fre- MPEG-1: 32/44.1/48 WMA is the abbreviation of Windows Media
MP3 is the abbreviation of “MPEG-1 Audio quency [kHz] Audio, and this is an audio compression for-
Layer 3”. MPEG is an abbreviation of “Mo- MPEG-2: 16/22.05/24
mat from Microsoft. This is a compression
tion Picture Experts Group”, and this is a vid- Bit rate [kbps] MPEG-1: 32 to 320 format that has a higher compression ratio
eo compression standard used in video CDs, than MP3.
etc. MPEG-2: 8 to 160
MP3 is one of the audio compression meth- VBR (varia- Support
ods contained in the MPEG audio standard, ble bit rate) NOTE
and reduces the quality of sounds that are be- l Microsoft, Windows Media, and Windows
Channel Stereo/ Joint stereo/ Dual
yond the auditory resolution of the human ear are registered trademarks of Microsoft Cor-
mode channel/ Monaural
and that are hidden by louder sounds, thus poration (USA) and in other countries.
creating high-quality data with a lower data File exten- mp3
size. sion
This can compress CD audio to approximate-
CAUTION
ly 1/10 its original data size without percepti- l WMA supports digital rights management
ble loss, approximately 10 CDs can be writ- (DRM). This product cannot play back
WMA files protected using this system.
ten to a single CD-R/RW disc.

CAUTION Item Details Item Details

l WMA files different to the standards at right Maximum 64 characters Specification Advanced Audio
may not play back correctly, or file/folder number of Coding
names may not be displayed correctly. characters MPEG4/AAC-LC
l “Pro”, “Lossless”, and “Voice” are not sup- that can be MPEG2/AAC-LC
ported.
indicated on Sampling MPEG4 8/11.025/12/16/22.05
the display frequency
Standards for WMA Files That /24/32/44.1/48
[kHz]
Can Be Played Back What is AAC? MPEG2 8/11.025/12/16/22.05
Specifications for WMA files that can be AAC is the abbreviation of Advanced Audio /24/32/44.1/48
played are as shown below. Coding, and this is an audio compression
standard used in “MPEG-2” and “MPEG-4”.
Bit rate MPEG4 8 to 320 7
[kbps]
Item Details This features 1.4x the compression of MP3, MPEG2 8 to 320
Specification Windows Media Audio Ver- with comparable audio quality. VBR (variable bit Support
sion7.0/8.0/9.0 rate)
Sampling fre- 32/44.1/48 CAUTION Channel mode Stereo/Monaural
quency [kHz] l AAC supports digital rights management File extension m4a
(DRM). This product cannot play back AAC
Bit rate 48 to 320 files protected using this system. Supported tag infor- AAC tags or ID3
[kbps] l AAC files different to the standards at right mation tags
VBR Support may not play back correctly, or file/folder Title, Artist name,
names may not be displayed correctly. Album name
(variable bit
rate) Maximum number of 64 characters
Standards for AAC Files That characters that can be
Channel Stereo/Monaural Can Be Played Back indicated on the dis-
mode
Specifications for AAC files that can be play
File exten- wma played are as shown below.
sion
Supported tag WMA tags
information Title name, Artist name, Al-
bum name

Important Points on Safety for the Customer
Important Points on Safety WARNING CAUTION

for the Customer l Do not insert foreign objects into the disc l Do not turn the volume up to the extent that
slot. you cannot hear sounds from outside the ve-
This product features a number of pictorial This may lead to fire, electric shock, or hicle while driving.
indications as well as points concerning han- malfunction. Driving without being able to hear sounds
dling so that you can use the product correct- l In the event of abnormalities occurring from outside the vehicle may result in an ac-
when foreign objects or water enter the cident.
ly and in a safe manner, as well as prevent in- product, resulting in smoke or a strange l Do not insert your hand or fingers into the
jury or damage to yourself, other users, or smell, immediately stop using the product, disc slot.
property. and consult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS This may result in injury.
Continuing to use the product may result
7 WARNING in accident, fire, or electric shock. Operation Keys
l The driver should not pay close attention l Do not disassemble or modify the prod-
uct.
to the display while driving.
This may lead to malfunction, fire, or
Turn the Power ON/ OFF
This may prevent the driver looking
where they are going, and cause an acci- electric shock. 1. Press the PWR/VOL key.
dent. l During thunderstorms, do not touch the
l The driver should not perform complica- antenna or the front panel.
ted operations while driving. This may lead to electrical shock from
Performing complicated operations while lightning.
driving may prevent the driver looking
where they are going, and cause an acci-
dent. CAUTION
Therefore stop the vehicle in a safe loca-
tion before performing such operations.
l Do not block ventilation holes or heat sinks
on the product.
l Do not use during malfunctions, such as Blocking ventilation holes or heat sinks may
when no sound is audible. prevent heat from escaping from within the
This may lead to accident, fire, or electric product, leading to fire or malfunction.
shock.
l Ensure water or other foreign objects do Turn the power on, and resume playback
not enter the product. from the previous status.
This may lead to smoking, fire, electric
shock, or malfunction.
2. Press the PWR/VOL key.
Turn the power OFF.

Operation Keys
NOTE Insert/Eject Discs

l Hold down the steering MODE button to al- 1. Insert the disc into the disc slot with the
so turn the audio function ON/OFF. label surface up.
Adjust Volume
1. Turn the PWR/VOL key to adjust the
volume.
Disc slot
Disc
*Label side
7
Push the disc in a certain amount, and

the product will pull the disc in, and
playback will start.
2. Press the key.

Turn the PWR/VOL key clockwise to in- This will eject the disc from the product,
crease, and counter- clockwise to de- so remove the disc.
crease the volume.
CAUTION
NOTE
l When replacing discs, first ensure that the
l The maximum value for volume is 45, and vehicle is stopped in an area in which stop-
the minimum is 0. ping is permitted.
l The initial setting for volume is “17”. l Do not insert your hand, fingers, or foreign
objects into the disc slot. This may lead to
injury, smoking, or fire.
l 8 cm CDs are not supported.

Operation Keys
Explanation of Buttons
This explains names and functions of each part.
1- key 6- PWR/VOL key 12- PAGE key

Use to eject a disc. Adjust the volume, and turn the power Display indicator page advance.
2- 3 key/4 key ON/OFF. 13- 5 key
For audio, rewind/fast forward. 7- MEDIA key Play/Pause Bluetooth® Audio*, and use
For radio, use as preset keys 3 and 4. Switch between CD and other sources. as preset key 5 for radio.
3- 2RDM key 8- DISP key 14- 6 key
For audio, play random playback; for ra- Switch the content of the display. Return during audio track search, and
dio, use as preset key 2. 9- PTY/SCAN key stop Bluetooth® Audio*.
4- 1RPT key For audio, play scan playback; for radio, For radio, use as preset key 6.
For audio, play repeat playback; for ra- search PTY. 15- key/ key
dio, use as preset key 1. 10- TP key For audio, select audio track/file; for ra-
5- RADIO key Receive traffic messages. dio, perform automatic station selection
Switch the radio and the band. 11- Disc slot or ensemble/service station selection.

Listen to Radio
16- MENU key 17- /SEL key
Switch to Menu mode. Adjust audio quality and select items.
For radio, manually select stations.
*: Requires a separately-purchased Bluetooth®-capable audio device in equipment by type (vehicles with a Bluetooth® 2.0 interface).
Steering wheel audio remote 3- MODE button *2: Requires a separately-purchased Blue-
control switches* Hold down to turn the audio function tooth®-capable audio device (vehicles
ON/OFF. Additionally, each time this is with a Bluetooth® 2.0 interface).
pressed, this switches the audio source. 7
The order of switching is as shown be- *3: Requires DAB tuner connection.
low.
If devices are not connected, then these Listen to Radio
are to be skipped, and the next source se-
lected. This explains how to listen to FM, MW, and
LW radio broadcasts.
CD or MP3
To Listen to the Radio
iPod*1 or USB device
Bluetooth Audio*2
Press the RADIO key to switch the band.
1- button, button FM1, 2, 3
Adjust audio functions and the mobile DAB1, 2, 3*3 Switch between FM1, FM2, FM3, MW, and
phone function volume.
MW LW bands.
2- button, button
LW The selected band is indicated on the display.
Select CD and other audio source tracks
and radio stations. NOTE
Hold down to skip up and down through
*1: An iPod cable (available separately) is l This switches in the order FM1, FM2, FM3,
tracks. DAB1*, DAB2*, DAB3*, MW, and LW.
required.
*:When a DAB tuner is connected.

Listening to DAB*
Manual/Seek Station Selection NOTE PTY Search

Turn the /SEL key to the frequency to lis- l The preset memory can register a maximum Select PTY (program content), and automati-
of 6 stations for each band (FM1, FM2,
ten to. FM3).
cally scan for stations.
1. During FM reception, press the PTY/
l If a preset key that already has a station reg-
/SEL key Reduces the frequency being istered is selected, then this is overwritten SCAN key.
(counter- received. with the new preset. This switches to the PTY selection
clockwise) l Pressing the preset key will select the previ- mode.
ously registered frequency. 2. Turn the /SEL key to select PTY.
/SEL key Increases the frequency be- The PTY (program content) indicator
(clockwise) ing received. Auto Memory (Auto Store) will flash, and station selection will au-
7 key
Release the button to start tomatically start. When a station is re-
seek station selection, and The top 6 stations with a strong signal can be ceived, the station name is displayed.
(hold down) automatically registered in order with preset
when a station is received,
scanning stops. keys.
key
Hold down the RADIO key.
NOTE
(hold down)
l This receives the station detected first.
After completion of auto store operations, the l 10 seconds after reception, PTY search
Preset Memory product will receive the station registered in mode will be cancelled.
Register the broadcast station in advance, and the preset key [1].
select this at a later time. Listening to DAB*
CAUTION
1. Tune in to the frequency to register. This explains how to listen to DAB.
2. Hold down any of the keys from the
l Please be aware that the formerly-registered
frequency in the memory will be overwrit-
1RPT key to the 6 key. ten. To listen to DAB
A “Beep” sounds, and the preset key is 1. Press the RADIO key to switch the
registered. NOTE band.
l Using auto store for FM1 and FM2 switches Switch between DAB1, DAB2, and
to FM3. DAB3 bands.
The selected band is indicated on the
display.

Listening to DAB*
NOTE Register the Service NOTE

l This switches in the order FM1, FM2, FM3, Register the service in advance, and select l If the text information for the service name
DAB1, DAB2, DAB3, MW, and LW. cannot be obtained, then nothing is dis-
this at a later time. played.
1. Tune in to the service to register.
Select a Service l If there is no operation for 10 seconds, then
2. Hold down any of the keys from the service search mode will be cancelled.
1RPT key to the 6 key.
1. Hold down the key or the key. A “Beep” sounds, and the preset key is
Receives the lead services of the ensem- PTY Search
registered.
bles that can be received.
2. Press the key or the key to select Select PTY (program content), and automati-
NOTE cally scan for services.
the service.
1. Press the PTY/SCAN key. 7
l If a preset key that already has a service reg- This switches to the PTY selection
Automatically receives low- istered is selected, then this is overwritten
key with the new preset. mode.
er lead services within en- 2. Turn the /SEL key to select PTY.
(hold down) sembles that can be received. l Pressing the preset key will select the previ-
ously registered service. 3. Press the key or key.
Automatically receives high- This starts PTY search.
key er lead services within en-
(hold down) sembles that can be received.
Search for a Service
key Lower PTY search starts.
Search for ensembles and services that can be
key Switches to lower services.
received. key Higher PTY search starts.
key Switches to higher services. 1. Turn the /SEL key to select the en-
semble.
2. Press the /SEL key. NOTE
NOTE The service name within the selected en- l When selecting PTY, press any of the keys
semble is displayed. from the 1RPT key to the 6 key to
l Going to the first service or last service
within the ensemble switches to the next en- 3. Turn the /SEL key to select the serv- switch to the PTY registered as a preset.
semble. ice. l When selecting PTY, select the PTY to reg-
4. Press the /SEL key. ister, and hold down any of the keys from
Receive the selected service. the 1RPT key to the 6 key to register the
PTY as a preset.

Listen to Traffic Messages
NOTE NOTE Listen to CDs

l While in PTY select status, if there is no op- l If traffic messages are received, then this
eration for 2 seconds, then an upwards will switch to the volume of the previously This explains how to listen to audio CDs
search within the selected PTY will start. received traffic messages or emergency (CD-DA/CD-TEXT).
broadcasts. The volume when receiving traf-
fic messages or emergency broadcasts is that Play CDs
Listen to Traffic Messages at which subsequent broadcasts will be re-
ceived. Insert the disc.
This explains how to listen to traffic messag-
es. Traffic Message Standby Mode Insert a disc to automatically start playback.
When the broadcast of traffic messages starts, → “Insert/Eject Discs” on page 7-23
7 To Listen to Traffic Messages this automatically switches to the station that If a disc is already within the product, press
is broadcasting traffic messages. the MEDIA key to switch to CD as the
1. When not in MW or LW mode, press the source.
TP key. 1. When not in MW or LW mode, press the
TP key.
If traffic messages are being broadcast,
“TP” is indicated on the display, and the Select the Track
these are received.
product switches to standby mode.
Press the key or key to select the
If traffic messages are being broadcast,
CAUTION track.
these are received.
l When receiving a MW or LW signal, traffic 2. When not in MW or LW mode, press the
This enables selection of the next or previous
messages cannot be received. TP key.
track.
“TP” disappears from the display, and
standby mode will be cancelled.
NOTE Fast Forward or Rewind
l Receiving traffic messages will indicate
CAUTION Hold down the 3 key or the 4 key.
“TRAF INF” on the display, and if text in-
formation can be received, the station name l When receiving a MW or LW signal, traffic
is displayed. message standby mode will be cancelled. Fast forward/rewind is possible.
Switch Playback Mode

Repeat playback, random playback, and scan
playback are possible.

Listen to MP3s
Repeat Playback (RPT) NOTE Select the Track (File)
Press the 1RPT key. l Press this button again during playback if Press the key or key to select the
you wish to hear that track, and that track
will play normally.
track.
Repeat playback of the track currently being
played.
Listen to MP3s track.
NOTE
l Pressing again will cancel. This explains how to listen to audio files on a Fast Forward or Rewind
disc.
l Selecting a track, ejecting, fast forwarding,
Hold down the 3 key or the 4 key.
or rewinding will cancel.
CAUTION 7
Fast forward/rewind is possible.
Random Playback (RDM)
l CD-ROM and CD-R/RW media can only
Press the 2RDM key. play back MP3 format audio files. Switch Playback Mode
Play the tracks on the disc in a random order. To Listen to MP3s Repeat playback, random playback, and scan
Insert the disc.
NOTE Repeat Playback (RPT)
l Pressing again will cancel. Insert a disc to automatically start playback. Press the 1RPT key.
l Ejecting will cancel this. → “Insert/Eject Discs” on page 7-23
If a disc is already within the product, press Repeat playback of the track currently being
Scan Playback (SCAN) the MEDIA key to switch to CD as the played.
source.
Press the PTY/SCAN key.
NOTE
Play the first 10 seconds of each of the tracks NOTE
l Pressing again will cancel.
on the whole disc in order. l Depending on the file structure, it may take
some time to read the contents of the disc. l Selecting a file, ejecting, fast forwarding, or
rewinding will cancel.

Listening to an iPod
Folder Repeat Playback NOTE NOTE
Hold down the 1RPT key. l Pressing again will cancel. l Select the folder, and hold down the /SEL
key to start playback from the first track in
Repeat playback of the tracks within the fold- that folder.
Scan Playback (SCAN)
er currently being played. l While the file is selected, press the 6 key
Press the SCAN key. to return to the previous operation.
l While the file is selected, hold down the 6
NOTE Play the first 10 seconds of each of the tracks key to cancel track search mode.
l Pressing again will cancel. in the folder currently being played in order. l If there is no operation for five seconds after
selecting the file, that file is played back.
l Even if the file is selected, folder repeat
playback will not be cancelled. Search Tracks l Disc operations such as selecting a track will
7 cancel track search mode.
Random Playback (RDM) Search folders and files, and select a track.
Press the 2RDM key.
1. Turn the /SEL key to select the folder. Listening to an iPod
2. Press the /SEL key.
By connecting commercially-available iPod/
Play the tracks in the folder in a random or-
Files within the selected folder are dis- iPhone devices to this product, you can play
der.
played. back tracks on these through the product.
3. Turn the /SEL key to select the file.
NOTE 4. Press the /SEL key.
CAUTION
This plays the selected file (track). l Do not leave the iPod/iPhone unattended in
the vehicle.
Folder Random Playback l Never hold these devices in your hand to op-
NOTE erate while driving, as this is dangerous.
Hold down the 2RDM key. l No indemnification for data loss resulting
l While the folder is selected, press the 6 when the iPod/iPhone is connected to the
key to cancel track search mode.
Play all tracks in folders on the disc in a ran- product will be possible.
dom order. l If there is no operation for 10 seconds after l Depending on how the devices are handled,
selecting the folder, then track search mode
audio files being damaged or lost, therefore
will be cancelled.
it is recommended that data be backed up.

Listening to an iPod
NOTE NOTE Select the Track (File)

l Depending on the generation, model, or soft- l Buttons on the product will not operate Press the key or key to select the
ware version of the iPod/iPhone, playback while iPod/iPhone is connected.
track.
on this product may not be possible. (→ l iPod/iPhone specifications and settings may
page 7-14) Additionally, playback as ex- mean that connection is not possible, or re-
plained in this document may not be possi- sult in differences in operation or display. This enables selection of the next or previous
ble. l Depending on audio data in the iPod/iPhone, track.
l For vehicles with a Bluetooth® 2.0 interface, track information may not be displayed cor-
the types of devices that can be connected rectly. Fast Forward or Rewind
may vary. l Depending on the status of the vehicle and
For details, access the MITSUBISHI device, the iPod/iPhone may not play back Hold down the 3 key or the 4 key.
after starting the engine.
MOTORS website.
Please read and agree to the “Warning about l Data containing copyright information may 7
not play back.
Links to the Web Sites of Other Compa-
nies”. The websites mentioned above may l It is recommended that the iPod/iPhone
connect you to websites other than the equaliser settings be set to flat. Switching Playback Mode
MITSUBISHI MOTORS website. l Operate the iPod/iPhone while connected to
http://www.mitsubishi-motors.com/en/prod- this product. Repeat playback and shuffle playback are
ucts/index.html l If the iPod/iPhone is connected via Blue- possible.
l Usage of iPod/iPhone hardware with the lat- tooth® as a Bluetooth®-capable audio de-
est software version is recommended. vice, then do not connect the iPod/iPhone Repeat Playback (RPT)
l Regarding how to connect the iPod/iPhone, using an iPod cable. Connection using both
refer to “How to connect an iPod” on page methods will result in erroneous operation. Press the 1RPT key.
7-69. l If an iPod/iPhone does not operate correctly,
l When connecting the iPod/iPhone, use a then remove the iPod/iPhone from the prod- Repeat playback of the track currently being
commercially available iPod connection ca- uct, reset, then reconnect. played.
ble.
l Set up the device in order that no unsafe ac-
Play iPod
tions, such as plugging in the connection ca- NOTE
ble are taken while driving.
Press the MEDIA key to set the iPod as the l Pressing again will cancel.
l When inserting and removing the iPod/
iPhone, for safety’s sake first stop the vehi- source.
cle. Shuffle Playback (RDM)
l Depending on the status of the iPod/iPhone, The selected source is indicated on the dis-
it may take some time until the device is rec- play. Press the 2RDM key.
ognized, or playback starts.

Listen to Audio Files on a USB Device
Play tracks in the category currently being 4. Press the /SEL key. CAUTION
played in a random order. Repeat steps 1 to 4, and search for
tracks. l Do not leave the USB device unattended in
the vehicle.
NOTE Select the track, and press the /SEL
key to play. l Never hold these devices in your hand to op-
erate while driving, as this is dangerous.
l Do not use hard discs, card readers, or mem-
NOTE ory readers, as damage may occur to these or
Album Shuffle Playback to the data contained therein. If these are er-
l While the category (1st level) is selected, roneously connected, then turn the ignition
Hold down the 2RDM key. press the 6 key to cancel track search switch to the “LOCK” position or put the
mode. operation mode in OFF, then remove.
Play back the album in a random order l Because of the risk of data loss, it is recom-
7 (tracks in any order on the album).
l If there is no operation for 10 seconds after
selecting the category, then track search mended that files be backed up.
mode will be cancelled. l No guarantee is made as regards damage to
l Select the category, and hold down the the USB device, nor regarding loss or dam-
NOTE /SEL key to start playback from the first age to data contained therein.
l Pressing again will cancel. track in that category. l Depending on how the devices are handled,
l While the track is selected, press the 6 audio files being damaged or lost, therefore
key to return to the previous operation. it is recommended that data be backed up.
Search Tracks l While the track is selected, hold down the 6
key to cancel track search mode.
Search categories or track names, and select a l If there is no operation for five seconds after NOTE
track. selecting the track, that file is played back. l Digital audio players that support the mass
1. Turn the /SEL key to select the cate- l iPod operations such as selecting a track will storage class specifications can be connec-
gory. cancel track search mode. ted.
2. Press the /SEL key. Categories or l For details regarding the types of USB devi-
ces that can be connected and the types of
tracks within the selected category are Listen to Audio Files on a files that can be played back in vehicles with
displayed.
USB Device a Bluetooth® 2.0 interface), refer to “ Types
3. Turn the /SEL key to select the cate- of connectable devices and supported file
gory or track. specifications” on page 7-70.
By connecting commercially-available USB
devices such as USB memory to this product,
l Regarding how to connect USB devices, re-
fer to “How to connect a USB memory de-
you can play back audio files on these vice” on page 7-69.
through the product.

Listen to Audio Files on a USB Device
NOTE NOTE Repeat Playback (RPT)

l When connecting a USB device, use a con- l The maximum supported capacity for USB Press the 1RPT key.
nection cable. Failure to use a connection ca- memory is 32GB.
ble when connecting may place undue load l Operate the USB device containing recorded Repeat playback of the track currently being
on, or damage the USB connector. audio files while connected to this product. played.
l Set up the device in order that no unsafe ac-
tions, such as plugging in the connection ca-
ble are taken while driving.
Play Back of Audio Files on a NOTE
l When inserting and removing the USB de- USB Device
vice, for safety’s sake first stop the vehicle. l Pressing again will cancel.
l Do not insert other than audio devices into Press the MEDIA key to set l Selecting a file will cancel this.
the USB port. Damage to the device or
equipment may result. 7
USB as the source. The selected source is in- Folder Repeat Playback
l Depending on the status of the USB device, dicated on the display.
it may take some time until the device is rec- Hold down the 1RPT key.
ognized, or playback starts.
l Buttons on the product will not operate Select the Track (File)
Repeat playback of the tracks within the fold-
while USB device is connected.
Press the key or key to select the er currently being played.
l USB device specifications and settings may
mean that connection is not possible, or re- track.
sult in differences in operation or display. NOTE
l Depending on audio data in the USB device, This enables selection of the next or previous
track information may not be displayed cor- track. l Pressing again will cancel.
rectly. l Even if the file is selected, folder repeat
l Depending on the status of the vehicle and
Fast Forward or Rewind playback will not be cancelled.
device, the iPod/iPhone may not play back
after starting the engine. Folder Random Playback
Hold down the 3 key or the 4 key.
l Data containing copyright information may
(RDM)
not play back.
l This product can play back MP3, WMA, and Fast forward/rewind is possible. Press the 2RDM key.
AAC format audio files.
l Depending on the type of USB device, usage Switch Playback Mode Play tracks in the folder currently being
may not be possible, or functions that can be
used may be restricted. played in a random order.
Repeat playback, random playback, and scan
l The recommended file system for USB playback are possible.
memory is FAT32.

To play iPod/USB memory device tracks via voice operation (vehicles with Bluetooth® 2.0 interface)
NOTE NOTE
Play the first 10 seconds of the first track in
l Pressing again will cancel. each folder on the USB device in order. l While the file is selected, press the 6 key
l Even if the file is selected, folder random to return to the previous operation.
playback will not be cancelled. l While the file is selected, hold down the 6
NOTE key to cancel track search mode.
All Folder Random Playback l Press this button again during playback if l If there is no operation for five seconds after
you wish to hear that track, and that track selecting the file, that file is played back.
Hold down the 2RDM key. will play normally. l Operations such as selecting a track will
cancel track search mode.
Play the tracks in all folders in a random or-
der.
Search Tracks
7 To play iPod/USB memory
Search folders and files, and select a track.
NOTE 1. Turn the /SEL key to select the folder.
device tracks via voice
2. Press the /SEL key. operation (vehicles with
l Even if the file is selected, all folder random Files within the selected folder are dis- Bluetooth® 2.0 interface)
playback will not be cancelled.
played.
Desired tracks on the iPod/USB memory de-
3. Turn the /SEL key to select the file.
Scan Playback (SCAN) 4. Press the /SEL key.
vice which is connected to the USB input ter-
minal can be selected and played via voice
Press the PTY/SCAN key.
operation.
This plays the selected file (track).
For information concerning the voice recog-
Play the first 10 seconds of each of the tracks
nition function or speaker registration func-
on the whole USB device in order. NOTE tion, refer to “Bluetooth® 2.0 interface” on
l While the folder is selected, press the 6 page 7-47.
NOTE key to cancel track search mode. The following explains how to prepare for
l Press this button again during playback if l If there is no operation for 10 seconds after voice operation and play the tracks.
you wish to hear that track, and that track selecting the folder, then track search mode
will play normally. will be cancelled.
l Select the folder, and hold down the /SEL
key to start playback from the first track in
Folder Scan Playback that folder.
Hold down the PTY/SCAN key.

Preparation for voice operation NOTE NOTE

To use the voice operation, press the l If you say “Artist <name>,” you can skip l If the confirmation function is active, the
SPEECH button (A) first. step 3. voice guide confirms if the artist name is
correct. If the artist name is correct, say
“Yes”. If not, say “No”. After the voice
3. After the voice guide says “What Artist guide says “Artist not found, please try
would you like to play?,” say the artist again,” the system returns to step 2.
name.
4. If there is only one match, the system
7. The system exits the voice recognition
proceeds to step 6.
mode and starts playback.
5. If there are two or more matches, the
voice guide will say “More than one
To search by album title
7
match was found, would you like to play
<artist name>?” If you say “Yes,” the 1. Say “Play” on the main menu.
system proceeds to step 6.
If you say “No,” the next matching artist
is uttered by the system.
NOTE
To search by artist name
l The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface starts recogniz-
1. Say “Play” on the main menu. ing the connected device.
NOTE If the connected device cannot be recognized
or a connection error occurs, the Bluetooth®
NOTE l If you say “No” to three or all artist names
2.0 interface starts an appropriate voice
uttered by the system, the voice guide will
l The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface starts recogniz- say “Artist not found, please try again” and guide. Follow the voice guide.
ing the connected device. the system returns to step 2.
If the connected device cannot be recognized l Search time is dependant on the number of
2. After the voice guide says “Would you
or a connection error occurs, the Bluetooth® songs on your connected device. Devices
2.0 interface starts an appropriate voice containing a large number of songs may take like to play by Artist, Album, Playlist or
guide. Follow the voice guide. longer to return search results. Genre?,” say “Album”.
2. After the voice guide says “Would you 6. After the voice guide says “Playing <ar- NOTE
like to play by Artist, Album, Playlist or tist name>,” the system creates a playlist
l If you say “Album <title>,” you can skip
Genre?,” say “Artist”. index for the artist. step 3.

3. After the voice guide says “What Album 7. The system exits the voice recognition 5. If there are two or more matches, the
would you like to play?” say the album mode and starts playback. voice guide will say “More than one
title. match was found, would you like to play
4. If there is only one match, the system To search by playlist <playlist>?” If you say “Yes,” the sys-
proceeds to step 6. tem proceeds to step 6.
1. Say “Play” on the main menu.
5. If there are two or more matches, the If you say “No,” the next matching play-
voice guide will say “More than one list name is uttered by the system.
match was found, would you like to play NOTE
<album title>?” If you say “Yes,” the NOTE
l The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface starts recogniz-
system proceeds to step 6. ing the connected device.
If you say “No,” the next matching al- If the connected device cannot be recognized l If you say “No” to three or all playlist names
7 bum is uttered by the system. or a connection error occurs, the Bluetooth®
uttered by the system, the voice guide will
say “Playlist not found, please try again” and
2.0 interface starts an appropriate voice the system returns to step 2.
guide. Follow the voice guide.
NOTE
l If you say “No” to three or all album titles 6. After the voice guide says “Playing
2. After the voice guide says “Would you
uttered by the system, the voice guide will <playlist>,” the system creates an index
say “Album not found, please try again” and like to play by Artist, Album, Playlist or
for the playlist.
the system returns to step 2. Genre?,” say “Playlist”.
NOTE NOTE
6. After the voice guide says “Playing <al-
bum title>,” the system creates a playlist l If the confirmation function is active, the
l If you say “Playlist <playlist>,” you can skip voice guide confirms if the playlist name is
index for the album title. step 3. correct. If the playlist name is correct, say
If the device has no playlist, the voice guide “Yes”. If not, say “No”. After the voice
will say “There are no playlists stored on de-
NOTE vice” and the system returns to step 2.
guide says “Playlist not found, please try
again,” the system returns to step 2. Refer to
l If the confirmation function is active, the “Confirmation function setting” on page
voice guide confirms if the album title is 7-50.
3. After the voice guide says “What Play-
correct. If the album title is correct, say
“Yes”. If not, say “No”. After the voice list would you like to play?,” say the
guide says “Album not found, please try playlist name. 7. The system exits the voice recognition
again,” the system returns to step 2. 4. If there is only one match, the system mode and starts playback.
proceeds to step 6.

Listen to Bluetooth® Audio*
To search by genre NOTE CAUTION

1. Say “Play” on the main menu. l If you say “No” to three or all genres uttered l Do not leave the Bluetooth® audio device
by the system, the voice guide will say unattended in the vehicle.
“Genre not found, please try again” and the l Depending on how the devices are handled,
NOTE system returns to step 2. audio files being damaged or lost, therefore
l The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface starts recogniz- it is recommended that data be backed up.
ing the connected device.
6. After the voice guide says “Playing
If the connected device cannot be recognized
<genre>,” the system creates an index NOTE
or a connection error occurs, the Bluetooth®
2.0 interface starts an appropriate voice for the genre.
guide. Follow the voice guide.
l Depending on the type of Bluetooth®-capa-
ble audio devices, usage may not be possi-
NOTE ble, or functions that can be used may be re- 7
2. After the voice guide says “Would you stricted.
l If the confirmation function is active, the
like to play by Artist, Album, Playlist or voice guide confirms if the genre is correct. l Confirm together with the user manuals for
Genre?,” say “Genre”. If the genre is correct, say “Yes”. If not, say the commercially- available Bluetooth®-ca-
“No”. After the voice guide says “Genre not pable audio devices.
found, please try again,” the system returns l Depending on the type of Bluetooth®-capa-
NOTE to step 2. Refer to “Confirmation function ble audio devices, volume levels may differ.
setting” on page 7-50. There is the danger of loud volumes, so prior
l If you say “Genre <type>,” you can skip
to use, it is recommended that you turn the
step 3.
volume down.
7. The system exits the voice recognition → “Adjust Volume” on page 7-23
3. After the voice guide says “What Genre mode and starts playback. l Depending on the status of the Bluetooth®
would you like to play?,” say the music audio device, it may take some time until the
device is recognized, or playback starts.
type.
4. If there is only one match, the system
Listen to Bluetooth® Audio* l Bluetooth® audio device specifications and
proceeds to step 6. settings may mean that connection is not
This product can play back tracks on com- possible, or result in differences in operation
5. If there are two or more matches, the
mercially-available Bluetooth®-capable audio or display.
devices. l Depending on audio data in the Bluetooth®
match was found, would you like to play audio device, track information may not be
<genre>?” If you say “Yes,” the system displayed correctly.
proceeds to step 6. CAUTION
If you say “No,” the next matching l Never hold these devices in your hand to op-
genre is uttered by the system. erate while driving, as this is dangerous.

Listen to Bluetooth® Audio*
NOTE 2. Press the 5 key. Bluetooth® Audio NOTE

playback starts.
l Depending on the status of the vehicle and l Each time the 1RPT key is pressed, this
device, the iPod/iPhone may not play back switches in the order Repeat OFF, 1 track re-
after starting the engine. NOTE peat, All track repeat, and Repeat OFF.
l Hold down the 5 key to pause.

Connect a Bluetooth®-capable Random Playback (RDM)
l Press the 6 key to stop.
Audio Device Press the 2RDM key.
Select the Track (File)
Regarding how to connect your Bluetooth® Play the tracks in the Bluetooth® Audio de-
device, refer to “Connecting the Bluetooth® Press the key or key to select the vice in a random order.
7 2.0 interface and Bluetooth® device” on page track.
7-53.
Operation methods below describe situations NOTE
once connection has been completed. track. l Pressing again will cancel.
NOTE Fast Forward or Rewind Scan Playback (SCAN)

l If the iPod/iPhone is connected via Blue- Hold down the 3 key or the 4 key. Press the PTY/SCAN key.
tooth® as a Bluetooth®-capable audio de-
vice, then do not connect the iPod/iPhone Play the first 10 seconds of each of the tracks
using an iPod cable. Connection using both on the whole Bluetooth® Audio device in or-
methods will result in erroneous operation.
Switching Playback Mode der.
Play Bluetooth® Audio Repeat playback, random playback, and scan NOTE
1. Press the MEDIA key to set Bluetooth® l Press this button again during playback if
Audio as the source. Repeat Playback (RPT) you wish to hear that track, and that track
will play normally.
Press the 1RPT key.
The selected source is indicated on the
display.
Repeat playback of the track currently being
played.

Display Indicator
Display Indicator
This explains content of the display indicator.
Change the Display Mode CAUTION During DAB Reception*

You can change the content of the display in- l The operation of changing display contents This switches in the order “Service name”,
dicator. may impede safe driving, therefore check “Ensemble name”, and “CH no. (CH ID)”.
Press the DISP key to switch the display con- safety before operation.
tent.
NOTE
Each time the DISP key is pressed, the dis-
NOTE l If the text information for the service name
and ensemble name cannot be obtained, then
play content changes. l Up to 11 characters may be displayed at one
time. To display 12 or more characters, press nothing is displayed.
the PAGE key, and subsequent characters
will be displayed.

Audio Quality and Volume Balance Adjustment
During CD-DA playback NOTE Adjust Audio Quality and Vol-
This switches in the order “Disc title”, “Track l During display of the ID3tag, hold down the
ume Balance
title”, and “Operating status”. DISP key to switch to the folder title display.
l The genre name display may not be possible. 1. Press the /SEL key to select settings
items.
NOTE Each time the /SEL key is pressed,
l If there is no text information to display, During iPod Playback this switches in the order BASS, TRE-
then “NO TITLE” is displayed. This switches in the order “Albums”, “Track BLE, FADER, BALANCE, SCV (speed
name”, “Artist name”, “Genre name”*, and compensated volume), and Cancel.
During MP3/WMA/AAC Play- “Operating status”. 2. Turn the /SEL key to adjust.
back
7
This switches in the order “Folder title”, NOTE Ad-
“File title”, and “Operating status”. just- Turn counter-
l If there is no text information to display, Turn clockwise
ment clockwise
then “NO TITLE” is displayed.
items
NOTE l Displayed genre name in equipment by type
(vehicles with a Bluetooth® 2.0 interface). BASS -6 to 0 0 to +6
l If there is no text information to display, l The genre name display may not be possible. (low low-pass (high low-pass
then “NO TITLE” is displayed.
volume) volume)
Display the ID3tag During Bluetooth® 2.0 Audio TRE- -6 to 0 0 to +6
BLE (Low high-pass (High high-pass
Hold down the DISP key. Playback* volume) volume)
Operating details are the same as in “During
This switches the ID3tag display. iPod Playback” on page 7-40. FAD- CENTER to FRONT 11 to
[DISP] Each time the key is pressed, this ER REAR 11 CENTER
switches in the order “Album name”, “Track Audio Quality and Volume (emphasise (emphasise
name”, “Artist name”, “Genre name”*, and REAR) FRONT)
“Operating status”. Balance Adjustment BAL- LEFT 11 to CEN- CENTER to
Change audio quality settings. ANC TER RIGHT 11
E (emphasise (emphasise
*: Displayed when playing back audio
LEFT) RIGHT)
files on a USB device (vehicles with a
Bluetooth® 2.0 interface).

System Settings
Ad- DAB Setting* RDS Setting

just- Turn counter-
Turn clockwise
ment clockwise
items Change DAB settings Change RDS settings
SCV OFF, LOW MID, HIGH (“Set value” bold typeface indicates factory (“Set value” bold typeface indicates factory
(SCV effect is (SCV effect is default settings.) default settings.)
OFF/low) middle/high)
Settings Settings val-
Settings con- Settings Settings val- Settings con-
name ue tent name ue tent
System Settings DAB-DAB OFF If low recep- AF AF ON Automatical-
Link settings tion sensitivi- ly track the
Change system settings such as product time. ON ty, switch to same station
7
1. Press the MENU key. another serv- as the pro-
2. Press the /SEL key to select settings ice. gram being
items.
DAB Band BAND III Set used received.
settings broadcast
Each time the /SEL key is pressed, it AF OFF Do not auto-
switches in the following order the DAB band to 174 matically
to 239 MHz. track the
setting*1, Gracenote DB*2, AF, REG,
TP-S, PI-S, PTY language settings, L-BAND Set used same station
PHONE settings, CT, Adjust time, and broadcast as the pro-
Cancel. band to 1452 gram being
3. Turn the /SEL key to set. to 1490 MHz. received.
4. Press the /SEL key to determine. BOTH Set used REG REG ON Do not auto-
broadcast matically
This completes settings, and displays the band to Band track the lo-
next settings item. III and L- cal station for
Band. the program
being re-
ceived.
*1 Displayed when a DAB tuner is connected.
*2 Displayed when playing back audio files
(vehicles with a Bluetooth® 2.0 interface).
System Settings
Settings Settings val- Settings con- Settings Settings val- Settings con- Settings Settings val- Settings con-
name ue tent name ue tent name ue tent
REG OFF Automatical- PI-S OFF Do not search SVENSK Set the dis-
ly track the for the same play language
local station station or lo- for the pro-
for the pro- cal station for gram content
gram being that regis- search (PTY
received. tered in the search) to
TP-S TP-S ON Automatical- preset chan- Swedish.
nel.
ly search for ESPAÑOL Set the dis-
7 traffic mes- PTY ENGLISH Set the display language
sages (TP sta- play language for the pro-
tions). for the program content
TP-S OFF Do not auto- gram content search (PTY
matically search (PTY search) to
search for search) to Spanish.
traffic mes- English.
ITALIANO Set the dis-
sages (TP sta- FRANÇAIS Set the display language
tions). play language for the pro-
PI-S PI-S ON Search for the for the program content
same station gram content search (PTY
or local sta- search (PTY search) to
tion for that search) to Italian.
registered in French. CT CT ON Update the
the preset DEUTSCH Set the dis- time if time
channel. play language data is re-
for the pro- ceived.
gram content
search (PTY
search) to
German.
System Settings
Settings Settings val- Settings con- PHONE Settings NOTE

name ue tent
Change the mobile phone voice cut-in set- l Some models may not be confirmed as con-
CT OFF Do not up- nected, or may not connect.
tings and the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface lan-
date the time
guage.
even if time
Depending on the vehicle, PHONE settings Supported profiles
data is re-
may not be possible.
ceived. Hands-free HFP(v1.5)
*: It is necessary to press the [TP] key and NOTE Phone book trans- OPP(v1.1),
turn traffic message standby mode fer PBAP(v1.0)
l Cancel functions such as the mobile phone
“ON”. “dial lock”, and connect while on the stand-
by screen. Vehicles without a Bluetooth®
7
Time Setting l While connected, mobile phone (receiving 2.0 Interface
calls, etc.) operations may not function cor-
Turning the RDS setting CT setting “CT rectly. A hands-free kit (available separately) is re-
OFF” enables manual setting of the time. l Depending on the distance between the
quired.
product and the mobile phone, the condi-
1. Select “YES” at the “Adjust time” tions within the vehicle, and types of screen- (“Set value” bold typeface indicates factory
screen, and press the /SEL key. ing, connection may not be possible. In these default settings.)
cases, situate the mobile phone as close as
The hour can be adjusted. Press the possible to the product. Settings value Settings content
/SEL key again to adjust the minutes. l Even though a Bluetooth®-capable mobile Do not use mobile phone
2. Turn the /SEL key to adjust the time. phone, characteristics and specifications PHONE OFF
voice cut-in.
3. Press the /SEL key. may mean that correct operation may not be
possible. PHONE During mobile phone voice
This completes the adjustment. l For safety’s sake, do not operate the mobile MUTE cut-in, mute the audio.
phone while driving. When operating the
mobile phone, first stop the vehicle in a safe During mobile phone voice
NOTE location. PHONE ATT cut-in, output audio from
l Even though a Bluetooth®-capable mobile all speakers.
l In order to finish adjusting the time, hold phone, phone specifications and settings
down the /SEL key until the seconds are may result in differences in display, or pre-
During mobile phone voice
reset to “00”. vent correct operation. PHONE IN-L cut-in, output sound from
the left front speaker.

System Settings
Settings value Settings content Settings

Settings con- 3. Press the /SEL key.
Settings name The DB Version is displayed.
During mobile phone voice value tent
PHONE IN-R cut-in, output sound from HFM voice lan- ENG- Change the
the right front speaker. guage settings LISH hands free mod-
ule voice lan-
During mobile phone voice FRENCH guage.
cut-in, output sound from
PHONE IN-LR GER-
the left and right front
MAN
speakers.
SPANISH
Vehicles with a Bluetooth® 2.0 ITALIAN
7 Interface DUTCH
(“Set value” bold typeface indicates factory PORTU-

default settings.) GUESE
RUSSI-
Settings Settings con- AN
Settings name
value tent
PHONE IN set- PHONE During mobile
tings IN-R phone voice
NOTE
cut-in, output l Depending on the vehicle model, this may
sound from the not display.
right front
speaker. Gracenote DB (Vehicles with a
PHONE During mobile Bluetooth® 2.0 interface)
IN-L phone voice
cut-in, output The version number can be confirmed.
sound from the 1. Select “Gracenote DB” and press the
left front /SEL key.
speaker. 2. Turn the /SEL key and select “DB
Version”.

Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Please check these items if a message appears on the display, or if you think something is not working properly.
If This Message Appears...
A message is displayed on this product according to the situation.
Mode Message Cause Response

CD CHECK DISC The disc is inserted upside down. Insert with the label side up.
The disc has condensation on it. Wait a while before inserting again.
DISC ERROR The disc is damaged. Clean the read surface of the disc. 7
The disc is dirty.
INTERNAL E The drive has malfunctioned for some reason. Check that there is no problem with the disc, and insert
the disc again. If the problem persists, consult a
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point.
HEAT ERROR The temperature inside the product is high. Remove the disc, and wait for the internal temperature
to return to normal.
USB FILE ERROR Files that cannot be played are selected. Select files that can be played.
→ “Audio Files (MP3/WMA/AAC)” on page 7-18
USB BUS PWR There is high or low electrical current or voltage. Turn the power OFF and wait a short while. If the prob-
lem persists, consult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Author-
LSI ERROR There is an internal malfunction for some reason. ized Service Point.
UNSUPPORTED Unsupported audio files have been played. Confirm audio files that can be played.
FORMAT → “Audio Files (MP3/WMA/AAC)” on page 7-18
UNSUPPORTED An unsupported USB device has been connected. Please connect a USB memory device.
DEVICE
iPod NO SONG An iPod/iPhone not containing any tracks has been Connect an iPod/iPhone containing tracks.
connected.

Troubleshooting
Mode Message Cause Response

VER ERROR This iPod/iPhone software version is not supported. Please change to a supported software version.
Other ERROR DC An abnormal direct voltage has been sent to the speak- Turn the power OFF and wait a short while. If the prob-
ers. lem persists, consult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Au-
If You Think Something Is Not Working Properly...
Here is a list of symptoms, causes and responses if you think something is not working properly.
Symptoms Cause Response

7 There is no sound or quiet The volume is turned to its minimum. Adjust the volume.
sound. → “Adjust Volume” on page 7-23
The balance or fader is turned to one side. Adjust the balance or fader.
→ “Adjust Audio Quality and Volume Balance” on page
7-40
The disc cannot be inserted. A disc is already in the product. Eject the disc.
→ “Insert/Eject Discs” on page 7-23
There is no disc in the product, but the product says it is Press the eject button once.
loading. → “Insert/Eject Discs” on page 7-23
The disc cannot be played. The disc is inserted upside down. Insert with the label side up.
The disc has condensation on it. Wait a while before inserting.
The disc is dirty. Clean the read surface of the disc.
The sound skips in the The disc is damaged or dirty. Check the disc.
same place.
There is no sound, even if Damage to or dirt on the disc means that its data cannot Check the disc. Additionally, if using CD-R/RW discs,
the disc is inserted. be read. their characteristics may render them unable to be
played.

Link System*
Link System* Link System End User Licence The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface can be used
Agreement when the ignition switch or the operation
The Link System takes overall control of the mode is in ON or ACC.
You have acquired a device that includes
devices connected via the USB input terminal software licensed by MITSUBISHI
or the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface allowing the Before you can use the Bluetooth® 2.0 inter-
MOTORS CORPORATION from Visteon
connected devices to be operated by using the Corporation, and their subsequent 3rd party face, you must pair the Bluetooth® device
switches in the vehicle or voice commands. suppliers. For a complete list of these 3rd and Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. Refer to “Con-
See the following section for details on how party products and their end user licence necting the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface and
to operate. agreements, please go to the following web- Bluetooth® device” on page 7-53.
site.
Refer to “Bluetooth® 2.0 interface” on page Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of
7-47.
http://www.jciblueconnect.com/faq/fulldi-
BLUETOOTH SIG, INC.
7
sclosure.pdf
Refer to “USB input terminal” on page
7-68.
Refer to “Listening to an iPod” on page 7-30.
Bluetooth® 2.0 interface* WARNING
Refer to “Listening to Audio Files on a USB l Although the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface al-
The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface allows for mak- lows you to make hands-free calls, if you
Device” on page 7-32.
ing/receiving hands-free calls in the vehicle choose to use the cellular phone while
Refer to “To play iPod/USB memory device
using a Bluetooth® compatible cellular phone driving, you must not allow yourself to be
tracks via voice operation” on page 7-34. distracted from the safe operation of your
based on the wireless communication tech-
Refer to “Listening to Bluetooth® Audio” on vehicle. Anything, including cellular
nology commonly known as Bluetooth®. It
page 7-37. phone usage, that distracts you from the
also allows the user to play music, saved in a safe operation of your vehicle increases
Bluetooth® music player, from the vehicle’s your risk of an accident.
Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of
speakers. l Refer to and comply with all state and lo-
BLUETOOTH SIG, INC. cal laws in your area regarding cellular
The system is equipped with a voice recogni-
tion function, which allows you to make phone usage while driving.
hands-free calls by simple switch operations
and voice command operations using a de-
fined voice tree.

Bluetooth® 2.0 interface*
NOTE NOTE Steering control switch and mi-

l If the ignition switch or the operation mode l Software updates by cellular phone/digital crophone
is left in ACC, the accessory power will au- audio device manufacturers may change/
tomatically turn off after a certain period of alter device connectivity.
time and you will no longer be able to use l For vehicles equipped with the
the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. The accessory ERA-GLONASS, the Bluetooth® 2.0 inter-
power comes on again if the ignition switch face cannot be used while an emergency call
or the engine switch is operated. is activated.
Refer to “ACC power auto-cutout function”
on pages 6-15 and 6-18 .
Steering control switch and microphone
l The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface cannot be used
® p. 7-48
7 if the Bluetooth® device has a flat battery or
Voice recognition function ® p. 7-49
the device power is turned off.
l Hands-free calls will not be possible if your Useful voice commands ® p. 7-50
phone does not have service available. Speaker enrollment function ® p. 7-52
l If you place the Bluetooth® device in the ve- Connecting the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface and
hicle’s third seat or luggage compartment, Bluetooth® device ® p. 7-53
you may not be able to use the Bluetooth® Operating a music player connected via Blue-
2.0 interface. tooth® ® p. 7-58
l Some Bluetooth® devices are not compatible 1- Volume up button
How to make or receive hands-free calls
with the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. 2- Volume down button
® p. 7-58
l You can confirm the Link System software 3- SPEECH button
Phone book function ® p. 7-61
version by pressing the HANG-UP button 3 4- PICK-UP button
times (press and hold 2 times and then press 5- HANG-UP button
briefly) within 10 seconds. 6- Microphone
l For details on the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface,
you can see them by accessing the Volume up button
MITSUBISHI MOTORS website.
Please read and agree on the “Warning about Press this button to increase the volume.
Links to the Web Sites of Other Companies”
because it connects to other than Volume down button
MITSUBISHI MOTORS website.
http://www.mitsubishi-motors.com/en/prod- Press this button to decrease the volume.
ucts/index.html

SPEECH button HANG-UP button NOTE
l Press this button to change to voice rec- l Press this button when an incoming call l If a cellular phone is brought close to the mi-
ognition mode. is received to refuse the call. crophone, it may create noise in the voice on
While the system is in voice recognition l Press this button during a call to end the the phone. In such a case, take the cellular
mode, “Listening” will appear on the au- current call. phone at a place as far as possible from the
dio display. When another call is on hold, you will microphone.
l If you press the button briefly while in switch to that call.
voice recognition mode, it will interrupt l If this button is pressed in the voice rec- Voice recognition function
prompting and allow voice command in- ognition mode, the voice recognition
The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface is equipped
put. mode will be deactivated.
with a voice recognition function.
Pressing the button longer will deacti-
vate the voice recognition mode.
Simply say voice commands and you can 7
NOTE perform various operations and make or re-
l Pressing this button briefly during a call
l When you press the SPEECH button to enter ceive hands-free calls.
will enable voice recognition and allow
voice recognition mode with a cellular
voice command input.
phone paired to the system, current informa- With the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface, voice rec-
tion on the cellular phone, such as “remain-
PICK-UP button ing battery life,” “signal strength” or “roam-
ognition is possible for English, French,
Spanish, Italian, German, Dutch, Portuguese
l Press this button when an incoming call ing,” will be displayed on the audio dis-
play.* and Russian. The factory setting is “English”
is received to answer the telephone. or “Russian.”
*: Some cellular phones will not send this
l When another call is received during a information to the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface.
call, press this button to put the first call-
er on hold and talk to the new caller.
l Call waiting and three-way calls can be used NOTE
by the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface, only if it is
• In such circumstances, you can press possible to use those services with your cel- l If the voice command that you say differs
the button briefly to switch between lular phone. from the predefined command or cannot be
callers. You will switch to the first recognised due to ambient noise or some
other reason, the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface
caller and the other caller will be put Microphone will ask you for the voice command again up
on hold.
Your voice will be recognized by a micro- to 3 times.
• To establish a three-way call in such
situations, press the SPEECH button phone in the overhead console, allowing you
to enter voice recognition mode and to make hands-free calls with voice com-
then say “Join calls”. mands.

NOTE NOTE NOTE

l For best performance and further reduction l If many entries are registered in the vehicle l You can return to the previous menu by say-
of ambient noise, close the vehicle windows, phone book, changing the language will take ing “Go Back.” (if so equipped)
lower the blower speed and refrain from longer.
conversation with your passengers while en- l Changing the language deletes the mobile
gaging the voice recognition function. phone book imported to the Bluetooth® 2.0 Confirmation function setting
l Some voice commands have alternative interface. If you wish to use it, you will have The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface is equipped
commands. to import it again. with a confirmation function.
l Depending on the selected language, some
With the confirmation function activated, you
functions may not be available.
6. When the voice guide says “English are given more opportunities than normal to
(French, Spanish, Italian, German, confirm a command when making various
7 Selecting the Language Dutch, Portuguese or Russian) selected,” settings to the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. This
1. Press the SPEECH button. the language change process will be allows you to decrease the possibility that a
2. Say “Setup”. completed and the system will return to setting is accidentally changed.
3. Say “Language.” the main menu. The confirmation function can be turned on
4. The voice guide will say “Select a lan- or off by following the steps below.
guage: English, French, Spanish, Italian, Useful voice commands 1. Press the SPEECH button.
German, Dutch, Portuguese or Russian” 2. Say “Setup”.
Say the desired language. (Example: Say Help function 3. Say “Confirmation prompts”.
“English.”) The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface is equipped 4. The voice guide will say “Confirmation
5. The voice guide will say “English with a help function. prompts are <on/off>. Would you like to
(French, Spanish, Italian, German, If you say “Help” when the system is waiting turn confirmation prompts <off/on>”.
Dutch, Portuguese or Russian) selected. for a voice command input, the system will Answer “Yes” to change the setting or
Is this correct?” Say “Yes.” tell you a list of the commands that can be answer “No” to keep the current setting.
Answer “No” to return to Step 4. used under the circumstances. 5. The voice guide will say “Confirmation
prompts are <off/on>” and then the sys-
NOTE Cancelling tem will return to the main menu.
There are two cancel functions.
l The voice guide will repeat the same mes- If you are at the main menu, say “Cancel” to
sage twice. The first message is in the cur- Security function
exit from the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface.
rent language, and the second message is in It is possible to use a password as a security
the selected language. If you are anywhere else within the system,
function by setting a password of your choice
say “Cancel” to return to the main menu.
for the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface.
When the security function is turned on, it is NOTE NOTE
necessary to make a voice input of a 4-digit
password in order to use all functions of the l Password will be required to access the sys- l If you have forgotten your password, say
tem after the next ignition cycle. “Cancel” to quit the voice input mode and
Bluetooth® 2.0 interface, except for recep-
l It is required for a little time after engine then check with a MITSUBISHI MOTORS
tion. stop that the entered password is actually re- Authorized Service Point.
corded in the system.
Setting the password If the ignition switch or the operation mode Disabling the password
Use the following procedure to turn on the is made to ACC or ON or the engine is star-
ted immediately after engine stop, there is a Use the following procedure to turn off the
security function by setting a password.
case when the entered password is not recor- security function by disabling the password.
1. Press the SPEECH button. ded in the system. At this time, please try to
2. Say “Setup”. enter the password again.
3. Say “Password.” NOTE 7
4. The voice guide will say “Password is Entering the password l System must be unlocked to disable the
disabled. Would you like to enable it?” password.
Answer “Yes.” If a password has been set and the security
Answer “No” to cancel the setting of the function is enabled, the voice guide will say
“Hands-free system is locked. State the pass- 1. Press the SPEECH button.
password and return to the main menu. 2. Say “Setup”.
5. The voice guide will say “Please say a 4- word to continue” when the SPEECH button
is pressed to enter voice recognition mode. 3. Say “Password.”
digit password. Remember this pass- 4. The voice guide will say “Password is
word. It will be required to use this sys- Say the 4-digit password number to enter the
password. enabled. Would you like to disable it?”
tem”. Answer “Yes.”
Say a 4-digit number which you want to If the entered password is wrong, the voice
guide will say “<4- digit password>, Incor- Answer “No” to cancel the disabling of
set as a password. the password and return to the main
6. For confirmation purposes, the voice rect password. Please try again”. Enter the
correct password. menu.
guide will say “Password <4-digit pass- 5. When the disabling of the password is
word>. Is this correct?” Answer “Yes.” completed, the voice guide will say
Answer “No” to return to the password NOTE “Password is disabled” and the system
input in Step 5. will return to the main menu.
l You can re-enter the password as many
7. When the registration of the password is times as you want.
completed, the voice guide will say
“Password is enabled” and the system
will return to the main menu.

Speaker enrollment function NOTE ted in table “Enrollment commands” on

page 7-68.
The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface can use the l Speaker enrollment is not possible unless the The system will register your voice and
speaker enrollment function to create a voice vehicle is parked. Make sure you park the
then move on to the registration of the
model for one person per language. vehicle in a safe area before attempting
speaker enrollment. next command. Continue the process un-
This makes it easier for the Bluetooth® 2.0 til all phrases have been registered.
interface to recognise voice commands said
by you. 2. Press the SPEECH button.
You can turn a voice model registered with 3. Say “Voice training”. NOTE
the speaker enrollment function on and off 4. The voice guide will say “This operation l To repeat the most recent voice training
whenever you want. must be performed in a quiet environ- command, press and release the SPEECH
button.
7 Speaker enrollment
ment while the vehicle is stopped. See
the owner’s manual for the list of re- l If you press the HANG-UP button anytime
quired training phrases. Press and re- during the process, the system will beep and
It takes about 2 to 3 minutes to complete the
stop the speaker enrollment process.
speaker enrollment process. lease the SPEECH button when you are
To ensure the best results, run through the ready to begin. Press the HANG-UP but-
process while in the driver’s seat, in an envi- ton to cancel at any time”. 6. When all enrollment commands have
ronment that is as quiet as possible (when Press the SPEECH button to start the been read out, the voice guide will say
there is no rain or strong winds and the vehi- speaker enrollment process. “Speaker enrollment is complete”. The
cle windows are closed). Please turn off your system will then end the speaker enroll-
phone while in speaker enrollment to prevent ment process and return to the main
NOTE menu.
interruption of the process.
Use the following procedure for speaker en- l If you do not start the speaker enrollment
process within 3 minutes of pressing the
rollment.
SPEECH button, the speaker enrollment NOTE
1. Stop your vehicle in a safe area, put the function will time out.
gearshift lever (M/T) in the “N” (Neu- l Completing the speaker enrollment process
The voice guide will say “Speaker Enroll- will turn on the voice model automatically.
tral) position, or the selector lever (A/T ment has timed out”. The system will then l The commands “Help” and “Cancel” will
or CVT) in the “P” (Park) position, and beep and the voice recognition mode will be not work in this mode.
apply the parking brake. deactivated.
5. The voice guide will prompt for phrase

1. Repeat the corresponding phrase lis-

Enabling and disabling the Connecting the Bluetooth® 2.0 To pair

voice model and retraining interface and Bluetooth® de- To pair a Bluetooth® device with the Blue-
You can turn a voice model registered with vice tooth® 2.0 interface, use either one of the fol-
the speaker enrollment function on and off lowing 2 methods (Type 1 or Type 2).
Before you can make or receive hands-free
whenever you want.
You can also retrain the system. calls or play music using the Bluetooth® 2.0 Pairing procedure- Type 1*
Use the following procedure to perform these interface function, you must pair the Blue-
tooth® device and Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. 1. Stop your vehicle in a safe area, put the
actions.
gearshift lever (M/T) in the “N” (Neu-
1. Press the SPEECH button.
tral) position, or the selector lever (A/T
2. Say “Voice training”. NOTE or CVT) in the “P” (Park) position, and
3. If you have completed a speaker enroll-
l Pairing is required only when the device is apply the parking brake. 7
ment process once already, the voice used for the first time. Once the device has
guide will say either “Enrollment is ena- been paired with the Bluetooth® 2.0 inter-
bled. Would you like to disable or re- face, all you need is to bring the device into NOTE
train?” or “Enrollment is disabled. the vehicle next time and the device will l You cannot pair any Bluetooth® device with
Would you like to enable or retrain?” connect to the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface auto- the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface unless the vehi-
4. When enrollment is “enabled”, the voice matically (if supported by the device). The cle is parked. Before pairing a Bluetooth®
model is on; when enrollment is “disa- device must have Bluetooth® turned ON to device with the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface,
bled”, the voice model is off. Say the connect. confirm that the vehicle is parked in a safe
command that fits your needs. location.
Say “Retrain” to start the speaker enroll- Up to 7 Bluetooth® devices can be paired
ment process and recreate a new voice with the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. 2. Press the SPEECH button.
model. (Refer to “Speaker enrollment” 3. Say “Setup.”
If multiple paired Bluetooth® devices are
on page 7-52.) 4. Say “Pairing options.”
available in the vehicle, the cellular phone or
music player most recently connected is auto- 5. The voice guide will say “Select one of
matically connected to the Bluetooth® 2.0 in- the following: pair, edit, delete, or list.”
terface. Say “Pair.”
You can also change a Bluetooth® device to

be connected.

NOTE NOTE NOTE

l If 7 devices have already been paired, the l The pairing code entered here is only used l If you enter the wrong number, the voice
voice guide will say “Maximum devices for the Bluetooth® connection certification. guide will say “Pairing failed” and the pair-
paired” and then the system will end the It is any 4-digit number the user would like ing process will be cancelled. Confirm the
pairing process. To register a new device, to select. number is right, and try pairing it again.
delete one device and then repeat the pairing Remember the pairing code as it needs to be
process. keyed into the Bluetooth® device later in the
(Refer to “Selecting a device: Deleting a de- 8. The voice guide will say “Please say the
pairing process.
vice” on page 7-56.) name of the device after the beep.” You
Depending on the connection settings of the
can assign a desired name for the Blue-
Bluetooth® device, this code may have to be
6. The voice guide will say “Please say a 4- entered each time you connect the Blue- tooth® device and register it as a device
7 digit pairing code.” Say a 4-digit num- tooth® device to the Bluetooth® 2.0 inter- tag. Say the name you want to register
ber. face. For the default connection settings, re- after the beep.
fer to the instructions for the device.
When the confirmation function is on,
the system will confirm whether the NOTE
number said is acceptable. Answer 7. The voice guide will say “Start pairing
procedure on the device. See the device l When the confirmation function is on, after
“Yes.” repeating the device tag you have said, the
Answer “No” to return to pairing code manual for instructions.” Enter in the voice guide will ask “Is this correct?” An-
selection. Bluetooth® device the 4-digit number swer “Yes.”
you have registered in Step 6. To change the device tag, answer “No” and
then say the device tag again.
NOTE
NOTE
l Some Bluetooth® devices require a specific 9. The voice guide will say “Pairing com-
pairing code. Please refer to the device man- l According to the corresponding device to plete,” and the pairing process will end.
ual for pairing code requirements. Bluetooth®, it might take a few minutes to
pair the Bluetooth® device with the Blue- Pairing procedure- Type 2*
tooth® 2.0 interface.
l If the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface cannot recog- 1. Stop your vehicle in a safe area, put the
nize the Bluetooth® device, the voice guide gearshift lever (M/T) in the “N” (Neu-
will say “Pairing has timed out” and the tral) position, or the selector lever (A/T
pairing process will be cancelled. or CVT) in the “P” (Park) position, and
Confirm that the device you are pairing sup- apply the parking brake.
ports Bluetooth®, and try pairing it again.

NOTE manual for instructions.” and then will NOTE

say “The pairing code is <pairing
l You cannot pair any Bluetooth® device with code>.” l If the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface cannot recog-
the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface unless the vehi- nize the Bluetooth® device, the voice guide
cle is parked. Before pairing a Bluetooth® will say “Pairing has timed out” and the
device with the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface, NOTE pairing process will be cancelled.
confirm that the vehicle is parked in a safe Confirm that the device you are pairing sup-
l Some Bluetooth® devices require a specific
location. pairing code. Please refer to the device man- ports Bluetooth®, and try pairing it again.
ual for pairing code requirements and read l If you enter the wrong number, the voice
the next section “If your device requires a guide will say “Pairing failed” and the pair-
2. Press the SPEECH button. ing process will be cancelled.
specific pairing code” on page 7-56 to set
3. Say “Pair Device.” Confirm the number is right, and try pairing
the pairing code.
l The pairing code entered here is only used it again. 7
If your device requires a specific pairing
NOTE for the Bluetooth® connection certification.
code, you need to set the pairing code. Refer
Depending on the connection settings of the
l The following procedure ( to ) can also to the device manual for pairing code re-
Bluetooth® device, this code may have to be quirements and read the next section “If
be used instead of saying “Pair Device.” Re- entered each time you connect the Blue-
place this step 3 with the following proce- your device requires a specific pairing code”
tooth® device to the Bluetooth® 2.0 inter- on page 7-56.
dure if you prefer.
face. For the default connection settings, re-
Say “Setup.” fer to the instructions for the device.
Say “Pairing Options.” 6. The voice guide will say “Please say the
The voice guide will say “Select one of name of the device after the beep.” You
the following: pair, edit, delete, list or set 5. Enter in the Bluetooth®
device the 4-dig- can assign a desired name for the Blue-
code.” it number that has been read out in Step
Say “Pair.” tooth® device and register it as a device
4.
l If 7 devices have already been paired, the tag. Say the name you want to register
voice guide will say “Maximum devices after the beep.
paired” and then the system will end the NOTE
pairing process. To register a new device,
delete one device and then repeat the pairing l According to the corresponding device to NOTE
Bluetooth®, it might take a few minute to
process. l When the confirmation function is on, after
(Refer to “Selecting a device: Deleting a de- pair the Bluetooth® device with the Blue-
repeating the device tag you have said, the
vice” on page 7-56.) tooth® 2.0 interface. voice guide will ask “Is this correct?” An-
swer “Yes.”
To change the device tag, answer “No” and
4. The voice guide will say “Start pairing
then say the device tag again.
procedure on the device. See the device
7. The voice guide will say “Pairing Com- 8. The voice guide will say “Do you want correct. Answer “Yes” to continue and
plete. Would you like to import the con- to pair a device now?” Answer “Yes,” connect to the cellular phone.
tacts from your mobile device now?” the system will proceed to Step 3 in the Answer “No,” and the voice guide will
Answer “Yes,” and the voice guide will pairing process. Refer to the “Pairing say “Please say.”
say “Please wait while the contacts are procedure- Type 2.” Say the number of the phone that you
imported. This may take several mi- want to connect to.
nutes.” Answer “No” to end the pairing Selecting a device
process. NOTE
If multiple paired Bluetooth® devices are
available in the vehicle, the cellular phone or l You can connect to a phone at any time by
If your device requires a specific pairing
music player most recently connected is auto- pressing the SPEECH button and saying the
code
7 If your device requires a specific pairing matically connected to the Bluetooth® 2.0 in- number, even before all of the paired num-
terface. bers and device tags of corresponding cellu-
code, you need to set the pairing code. Fol- lar phones are read out by the system.
low the procedures below. You can connect to the other paired cellular
1. Press the SPEECH button. phone or music player by following setting
change procedures. 5. The selected phone will be connected to
2. Say “Setup.”
3. Say “Pairing Options.” the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. The voice
To select a cellular phone guide will say “<device tag> selected”
4. Say “Set Code.”
5. The voice guide will say “Do you want 1. Press the SPEECH button. and then the system will return to the
the pairing code to be random or fixed?” 2. Say “Setup”. main menu.
Say “Fixed.” 3. Say “Select phone.”
4. After the voice guide says “Please say,” To select a music player
6. The voice guide will say “Please say a 4-
digit pairing code.” Say a 4-digit num- the numbers of the cellular phones and 1. Press the SPEECH button.
ber. device tags of corresponding cellular 2. Say “Setup”.
7. The voice guide will say “Pairing code phones will be read out in order, starting 3. Say “Select music player.”
set to <pairing code>.” with the cellular phone that has been 4. After the voice guide says “Please say,”
When the confirmation function is on, most recently connected. the numbers of the music players and de-
the system will confirm whether the Say the number of the cellular phone vice tags of corresponding music players
number said is acceptable. Answer that you want to connect to. will be read out in order, starting with
“Yes.” When the confirmation function is on, the music player that has been most re-
Answer “No,” the system will return to the system will ask you again whether cently connected.
Step 6. the phone that you want to connect to is Say the number of the music player that
you want to connect to.

When the confirmation function is on, 4. The voice guide will say “Select one of To check a paired Bluetooth®
the system will ask you again whether the following: pair, edit, delete, or list.”
the music player that you want to con- Say “Delete.” device
nect to is correct. Answer “Yes” to con- 5. After the voice guide says “Please say,” You can check a paired Bluetooth® device by
tinue and connect to the music player. the numbers of the devices and device following the steps below.
Answer “No,” and the voice guide will tags of corresponding devices will be 1. Press the SPEECH button.
say “Please say.” read out in order, starting with the device 2. Say “Setup”.
Say the number of the music player that that has been most recently connected. 3. Say “Pairing options.”
you want to connect to. After it completes reading all pairs, the 4. The voice guide will say “Select one of
voice guide will say “or all.” the following: pair, edit, delete, or list.”
Say the number of the device that you Say “List.”
NOTE
want to delete from the system. 5. The voice guide will read out device tags 7
l You can connect to a music player at any If you want to delete all paired phones of corresponding devices in order, start-
time by pressing the SPEECH button and
from the system, say “All.” ing with the Bluetooth® device that has
saying the number, even before all of the
paired numbers and device tags of corre-
6. For confirmation purposes, the voice been connected most recently.
sponding music players are read out by the guide will say “Deleting <device tag> 6. After the device tags of all paired Blue-
system. <number>. Is this correct?” or “Deleting tooth® devices have been read, the sys-
all devices. Is this correct?” tem will say “End of list, would you like
Answer “Yes” to delete the phone(s). to start from the beginning?”
5. The selected music player will be con-
Answer “No” to return to Step 4. To hear the list again from the begin-
nected to the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface.
7. The voice guide will say “Deleted,” and ning , answer “Yes.”
The voice guide will say “<device tag>
then the system will end the device dele- When you are done, answer “No” to re-
selected” and then the system will return
tion process. turn to the main menu.
to the main menu.
Deleting a device NOTE

Use the following procedure to delete a l If the device deletion process fails for some
paired Bluetooth® device from the Blue- reason, the voice guide will say “Delete
failed” and then the system will cancel delet-
ing the device.
2. Say “Setup”.
3. Say “Pairing options.”

NOTE tooth® devices and device tags of corre- Operating a music player con-
sponding devices in order, starting with
l If you press and release the SPEECH button nected via Bluetooth®
and say “Continue” or “Previous” while the the Bluetooth® that has been most re-
cently connected. For the operation of a music player connected
list is being read, the system will advance or
rewind the list. After all paired device tags have been via Bluetooth®, refer to “Listening to Blue-
Say “Continue” to proceed to the device read, the voice guide will say “Which tooth® Audio*” on page 7-37. On vehicles
with the next highest number or “Previous” device, please?” Say the number of the equipped with DISPLAY AUDIO, Smart-
to return to the phone with the previous device tag you want to change. phone-link Display Audio (SDA) or Smart-
number. phone-link Display Audio (SDA) navigation
l You can change the device tag by pressing system, refer to separate owner’s manual.
and releasing the SPEECH button and then NOTE
7 saying “Edit” while the list is being read.
l You can press and release the SPEECH but- How to make or receive hands-
l You can change the phone to be connected
by pressing and releasing the SPEECH but-
ton while the list is being read, and immedi- free calls
ately say the number of the device tag you
ton and then saying “Select phone” while the You can make or receive hands-free calls us-
want to change.
list is being read.
ing a Bluetooth® compatible cellular phone
l You can change the music player to be con-
nected by pressing and releasing the 6. The voice guide will say “New name, connected to the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface.
SPEECH button and then saying “Select mu- please.” Say the name you want to regis- You can also use the phone books in the
sic player” while the list is being read. ter as a new device tag. Bluetooth® 2.0 interface to make calls with-
When the confirmation function is on, out dialling telephone numbers.
Changing a device tag the voice guide will say “<New device
tag>. Is this correct?” Answer “Yes.” To make a call ® p. 7-59
You can change the device tag of a paired
Answer “No,” to say the new device tag SEND function ® p. 7-60
cellular phone or music player.
you want to register again. Receiving calls ® p. 7-60
Follow the steps below to change a device
7. The device tag is changed. MUTE function ® p. 7-61
tag.
When the change is complete, the voice Switching between hands-free mode and pri-
guide will say “New name saved” and vate mode ® p. 7-61
2. Say “Setup”.
3. Say “Pairing options.” then the system will return to the main
4. The voice guide will say “Select one of menu.
the following: pair, edit, delete, or list.”
Say “Edit.”
5. The voice guide will say “Please say,”
and read out the numbers of the Blue-
NOTE 4. The voice guide will say “Dialing <num- 2. Say “Call.”
ber recognised>.”
l The hands-free calls might not be operated
The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface will then
correctly when it makes calling or receiving NOTE
by operating the cellular phone directly. make the call.
When the confirmation function is on, l If you say “Call” when the vehicle phone
book and the mobile phone book are empty,
the system will confirm again the tele- the voice guide will say “The vehicle phone
To make a call phone number. To continue with that book is empty. Would you like to add a new
You can make a call in the following 3 ways number, answer “Yes.” entry now?”
using the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface: To change the telephone number, answer Answer “Yes,” and the voice guide will say
Making a call by saying a telephone number, “No.” The system will say “Number “Entering the phone book - new entry
please” then say the telephone number menu.” You can now create data in the vehi-
making a call using the Bluetooth® 2.0 inter-
face’s phone book, and making a call by re- again. cle phone book.
Answer “No,” to return to the main menu.
7
dialing.
NOTE 3. After the voice guide says “Name
Making a call by using the telephone num-
ber l In the case of English, the system will recog- please,” say the name you want to call,
nise both “zero” and “oh” (Letter “o”) for from those registered in the phone book.
You can make a call by saying the telephone the number “0.” 4. If there is only one match, the system
number. l The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface supports num- proceeds to Step 5.
1. Press the SPEECH button. bers (0 to 9) and characters (+, # and *).
If there are two or more matches, the
2. Say “Dial.” l The maximum supported telephone number
3. After the voice guide says “Number length is as follows:
• International telephone number: + and tel- match was found, would you like to call
please,” say the telephone number.
ephone numbers (to 18 digits). <returned name>.” If that person is the
• Except for international telephone num- one you want to call, answer “Yes.”
ber: telephone numbers (to 19 digits). Answer “No,” and the name of the next
matching person will be uttered by the
Making a call using a phone book voice guide.
You can make calls using the vehicle phone
book or mobile phone book of the Blue-
For details on the phone books, refer to
“Phone book function” on page 7-61.
NOTE NOTE SEND function

During a call, press the SPEECH button to
l If you say “No” to all names read by the sys- l If the name you selected has matching data
tem, the voice guide will say “Name not in the mobile phone book but no telephone enter voice recognition mode, then say
found, returning to main menu” and the sys- number is registered under the selected loca- “<numbers> SEND” to generate DTMF
tem will return to the main menu. tion, the voice guide will say “{home/work/ tones.
mobile/other} not found for <name>. For example, if during a call you need to sim-
Would you like to try again?” ulate the press of a phone button as a re-
5. If only one telephone number is regis- Answer “Yes,” and the system will return to
tered under the name you just said, the sponse to an automated system, press the
Step 3.
voice guide proceeds to Step 6. Answer “No,” and the call will be cancelled. SPEECH button and speak “1 2 3 4 pound
If two or more telephone numbers are Start over again from Step 1. SEND” and the 1234# will be sent on your
cellular phone.
7 registered that match the name you just
said, the voice guide will say “Would 6. The voice guide will say “Calling Receiving calls
you like to call <name> at [home], <name> <location>” and then the sys-
[work], [mobile], or [other]?” Select the If an incoming phone call is received while
tem will dial the telephone number. the ignition switch or the operation mode is
location to call.
in ON or ACC, the audio system will be au-
NOTE tomatically turned on and switched to the in-
NOTE coming call, even when the audio system was
l When the confirmation function is on, the
l If the name you selected has matching data system will ask if the name and location of originally off.
in the vehicle phone book but no telephone the receiver are correct. The voice guide announcement for the in-
number is registered under the selected loca- If the name is correct, answer “Yes.” coming call will be output from the front pas-
tion, the voice guide will say “{home/work/ If you want to change the name or location senger’s seat speaker.
mobile/other} not found for <name>. to call, answer “No.” The system will return If the CD player or radio was playing when
Would you like to add location or try to Step 3.
again?” the incoming call was received, the audio
Say “Try again,” and the system will return system will mute the sound from the CD
Redialing player or radio and output only the incoming
to Step 3.
Say “Add location” and you can register an You can redial the last number called, based call.
additional telephone number under the selec- on the history of dialed calls in the paired cel- To receive the call, press the PICK-UP button
ted location. lular phone. on the steering wheel control switch.
Use the following procedure to redial. When the call is over, the audio system will
1. Press the SPEECH button. return to its previous state.
2. Say “Redial.”

MUTE function NOTE To register by reading out a telephone

At any time during a call, you can mute the number
l Disconnecting the battery cable will not de-
vehicle microphone. lete information registered in the phone 1. Press the SPEECH button.
Pressing the SPEECH button and then saying book. 2. Say “Phone book.”
“Mute” during a call will turn ON the MUTE 3. The voice guide will say “Select one of
function and mute the microphone. the following: new entry, edit number,
Saying “Mute off” in the same way will turn Vehicle phone book
edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or
off the MUTE function and cancel the mute This phone book is used when making calls
import contact.” Say “New entry.”
on the microphone. with the voice recognition function.
4. The voice guide will say “Name please.”
Up to 32 names can be registered in the vehi-
Say your preferred name to register it.
Switching between hands-free cle phone book per language.
Also, each entry has 4 locations associated 7
mode and private mode with: home, work, mobile and other. You can NOTE
The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface can switch be- register one telephone number for each loca-
tween Hands-free mode (Hands-free calls)
l If the maximum number of entries are al-
tion. ready registered, the voice guide will say
and private mode (calls using cellular phone). “The phone book is full. Would you like to
If you press the SPEECH button and say You can register a desired name as a name for delete a name?” Say “Yes” if you want to
“Transfer call” during a Hands-free call, you any phone book entry registered in the vehi- delete a registered name.
can stop the Hands-free mode and talk in pri- cle phone book. Say “No,” to return to the main menu.
vate mode. Names and telephone numbers can be
To return to Hands-free mode, press the changed later on. 5. When the name has been registered, the
SPEECH button again and say “Transfer voice guide will say “home, work, mo-
call”. The vehicle phone book can be used with all bile, or other?” Say the location for
paired cellular phones. which you want to register a telephone
Phone book function number.
The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface has 2 types of To register a telephone number in the vehi-
unique phone books that are different from cle phone book
the phone book stored in the cellular phone. You can register a telephone number in the
They are the vehicle phone book and the mo- vehicle phone book in the following 2 ways:
bile phone book. Reading out a telephone number, and select-
These phone books are used to register tele- ing and transferring 1 phone book entry from
phone numbers and to make calls to desired the phone book of the cellular phone.
numbers via the voice recognition function.
NOTE 7. The voice guide will repeat the tele- NOTE

phone number you have just read, and
l When the confirmation function is on, the then register the number. l Transfer is not permitted unless the vehicle
voice guide will say “<Location>. Is this is parked. Before transferring, make sure
When the telephone number has been
correct?” Answer “Yes.” that the vehicle is parked in a safe location.
registered, the voice guide will say
If a telephone number has been registered l All or part of data may not be transferred,
for the selected location, the voice guide will “Number saved. Would you like to add even when the cellular phone supports Blue-
say “The current number is <telephone num- another number for this entry?” tooth®, depending on the compatibility of
ber>, number please.” To add another telephone number for a the device.
If you do not want to change the telephone new location for the current entry, an- l The maximum supported telephone number
number, say “cancel” or the original number swer “Yes.” The system will return to lo- length is 19 digits. Any telephone number of
to keep it registered. 20 digits or more will be truncated to the
cation selection in Step 5.
7 Answer “No” to end the registration
l
first 19 digits.
If telephone numbers contain characters oth-
6. The voice guide will say “Number process and return to the main menu. er than 0 to 9, *, # or +, these characters are
please.” Say the telephone number to deleted before the transfer.
register it.
NOTE l For the connection settings on the cellular
phone side, refer to the instructions for the
NOTE l When the confirmation function is on, after cellular phone.
repeating the telephone number you have
l In the case of English, the system will recog- read, the voice guide will ask “Is this cor-
nise both “zero” and “oh” (Letter “o”) for rect?” Answer “Yes.” 1. Press the SPEECH button.
the number “0.” Answer “No” to return to telephone number 2. Say “Phone book.”
registration in step 6. 3. The voice guide will say “Select one of
the following: new entry, edit number,
To select and transfer one phone book en- edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or
try from the phone book of the cellular import contact.” Say “Import contact.”
phone 4. The voice guide will say “Would you
You can select 1 phone book entry from the like to import a single entry or all con-
phone book of the cellular phone and register tacts?” Say “Single entry.”
it in the vehicle phone book. The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface will be-
come ready to receive transferred phone
book data.

NOTE NOTE 10. The voice guide will say “Would you
like to import another contact?”
l If the maximum number of entries are al- l Pressing the HANG-UP button or pressing Answer “Yes” if you want to continue
ready registered, the voice guide will say and holding the SPEECH button will cancel
with the registration. You can continue
“The phone book is full. Would you like to the registration.
delete a name?” Say “Yes” if you want to to register a new phone book entry from
delete a registered name. Step 5.
Say “No,” to return to the main menu. 7. When the reception is complete, the Answer “No,” to return to the main
voice guide will say “<Number of tele- menu.
phone numbers that had been registered
5. After the voice guide says “Ready to rein the import source> numbers have
ceive a contact from the phone. Only a been imported. What name would you To change the content registered in the ve-
home, a work, and a mobile number can hicle phone book
be imported,” the Bluetooth® 2.0 inter-
like to use for these numbers?”
You can change or delete a name or tele-
7
Say the name you want to register for
face will receive the phone book data this phone book entry. phone number registered in the vehicle phone
from the Bluetooth® compatible cellular book.
phone. You can also listen to the list of names regis-
6. Operate the Bluetooth® compatible cel-
NOTE tered in the vehicle phone book.
lular phone to set it up so that the phone l If the entered name is already used for other
book entry you want to register in the phone book entry or similar to a name used
for other phone book entry, that name cannot NOTE
vehicle phone book can be transferred to be registered.
the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. l The system must have at least one entry.
8. The voice guide will say “Adding Editing a telephone number

NOTE <name>.” 1. Press the SPEECH button.
l If the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface cannot recog- When the confirmation function is on, 2. Say “Phone book.”
nise the Bluetooth® compatible cellular the system will ask if the name is cor- 3. The voice guide will say “Select one of
phone or the connection takes too much rect. Answer “Yes.” the following: new entry, edit number,
time, the voice guide will say “Import con- Answer “No,” and the voice guide will edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or
tact has timed out” and then the system will say “Name please.” Register a different import contact.” Say “Edit number.”
cancel the registration. In such case, start name. 4. The voice guide will say “Please say the
over again from Step 1. 9. The voice guide will say “Numbers name of the entry you would like to edit,
saved.” or say list names.” Say the name of the
phone book entry you want to edit.

NOTE 7. The voice guide will repeat the tele- NOTE

phone number.
l Say “List names,” and the names registered When the confirmation function is on, l Say “List names,” and the names registered
in the phone book will be read out in order. in the phone book will be read out in order.
the system will ask if the number is cor-
Refer to “Vehicle phone book: Listening to Refer to “Vehicle phone book: Listening to
the list of registered names” on page 7-61. rect. Answer “Yes.” the list of registered names” on page 7-61.
Answer “No” to return to Step 3.
8. Once the telephone number is registered,
5. The voice guide will say “Home, work, the voice guide will say “Number saved” 5. The voice guide will say “Changing
mobile or other?” and then the system will return to the <name>.”
Select and say the location where the tel- main menu. When the confirmation function is on,
ephone number you want to change or the system will ask if the name is cor-
7 add is registered.
When the confirmation function is on, NOTE
rect. Answer “Yes” if you want to con-
tinue with the editing based on this in-
the system will check the target name l If the location where a telephone number formation.
and location again. Answer “Yes” if you was already registered has been overwritten Answer “No” to return to Step 4.
want to continue with the editing. with a new number, the voice guide will say 6. The voice guide will say “Name please.”
Answer “No” to return to Step 3. “Number changed” and then the system will Say the new name you want to register.
6. The voice guide will say “Number return to the main menu. 7. The registered name will be changed.
please.” Say the telephone number you Editing a name When the change is complete, the sys-
want to register. 1. Press the SPEECH button. tem will return to the main menu.
2. Say “Phone book.”
NOTE 3. The voice guide will say “Select one of Listening to the list of registered
the following: new entry, edit number, names
l If the telephone number is already registered 1. Press the SPEECH button.
in the selected location, the voice guide will edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or
import contact.” Say “Edit name.” 2. Say “Phone book.”
say “The current number is <current num-
ber>. New number, please.” Say a new tele- 4. The voice guide will say “Please say the 3. The voice guide will say “Select one of
phone number to change the current number. name of the entry you would like to edit, the following: new entry, edit number,
or say list names.” Say the name you edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or
want to edit. import contact.” Say “List names.”
4. Bluetooth® 2.0 interface will read out
the entries in the phone book in order.

5. When the voice guide is done reading the phone book entry in which the tele- 6. The system will ask if you really want to
the list, it will say “End of list, would phone number you want to delete is reg- delete the selected telephone number(s)
you like to start from the beginning?” istered. to go ahead with the deletion, answer
When you want to check the list again “Yes.”
from the beginning, answer “Yes.” NOTE Answer “No,” the system will cancel de-
When you are done, answer “No” to re- leting the telephone number(s) and then
turn to the previous or main menu. l Say “List names,” and the names registered return to Step 4.
in the phone book will be read out in order.
7. When the deletion of the telephone num-
Refer to “Vehicle phone book: Listening to
NOTE the list of registered names” on page 7-61.
ber is completed, the voice guide will
say “<name> <location> deleted” and
l You can call, edit or delete a name that is be- then the system will return to the main
ing read out.
Press the SPEECH button and say “Call” to
5. If only one telephone number is regis-
tered in the selected phone book entry,
menu. 7
call the name, “Edit name” to edit it, or “De-
If all locations are deleted, the system
the voice guide will say “Deleting will say “<name> and all locations de-
lete” to delete it.
<name> <location>.” leted” and the name will be removed
The system will beep and then execute your
command. If multiple telephone numbers are regis- from the phone book. If numbers still re-
l If you press the SPEECH button and say tered in the selected phone book entry, main under the entry, the name will re-
“Continue” or “Previous” while the list is the voice guide will say “Would you like tain the other associated numbers.
being read, the system will advance or re- to delete [home], [work], [mobile], [oth-
wind the list. Say “Continue” to proceed to er], or all?”
the next entry or “Previous” to return to the Select the location to delete, and the Erasing the phone book
previous entry. voice guide will say “Deleting <name> You can delete all registered information
<location>.” from the vehicle phone book.
Deleting a telephone number 1. Press the SPEECH button.
1. Press the SPEECH button. NOTE 2. Say “Phone book.”
2. Say “Phone book.” 3. The voice guide will say “Select one of
3. The voice guide will say “Select one of l To delete the telephone numbers from all lo- the following: new entry, edit number,
cations, say “All.”
the following: new entry, edit number, edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or
edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or import contact.” Say “Erase all.”
import contact.” Say “Delete.”
4. The voice guide will say “Please say the
name of the entry you would like to de-
lete, or say list names.” Say the name of

4. For confirmation purposes, the voice The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface automatically NOTE
guide will ask “Are you sure you want to converts from text to voice the names regis-
erase everything from your handsfree tered in the transferred phone book entries, l All or part of data may not be transferred,
even when the cellular phone supports Blue-
system phone book?” Answer “Yes.” and creates names.
tooth®, depending on the compatibility of
Answer “No” to cancel the deletion of
the device.
all registered information in the phone
book and return to the main menu.
NOTE l Only a home, a work, and a mobile number
can be imported.
5. The voice guide will say “You are about l Only the mobile phone book transferred
l The maximum supported telephone number
to delete everything from your hands- from the connected cellular phone can be length is 19 digits. Any telephone number of
used with that cellular phone. 20 digits or more will be truncated to the
free system phone book. Do you want to
continue?” Answer “Yes” to continue. l You cannot change the names and telephone first 19 digits.
numbers in the phone book entries registered
7 Answer “No” to cancel the deletion of in the mobile phone book. You cannot select
l If telephone numbers contain characters oth-
er than 0 to 9, *, # or +, these characters are
all registered information in the phone and delete specific phone book entries, ei- deleted before the transfer.
book and return to the main menu. ther.
l For the connection settings on the cellular
6. The voice guide will say “Please wait, To change or delete any of the above, change phone side, refer to the instructions for the
erasing the handsfree system phone the applicable information in the source cellular phone.
book” and then the system will delete all phone book of the cellular phone and then
transfer the phone book again.
data in the phone book. 1. Press the SPEECH button.
When the deletion is complete, the voice 2. Say “Phone book.”
guide will say “Hands-free system phone To import a devices phone book
3. The voice guide will say “Select one of
book erased” and then the system will Follow the steps below to transfer to the mo-
the following: new entry, edit number,
return to the main menu. bile phone book the phone book stored in the
edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or
cellular phone.
import contact.” Say “Import contact.”
Mobile phone book 4. The voice guide will say “Would you
All entries in the phone book stored in the NOTE like to import a single entry or all con-
cellular phone can be transferred in a batch tacts?” Say “All contacts.”
l Transfer should be completed while the ve-
and registered in the mobile phone book. hicle is parked. Before transferring, make 5. The voice guide will say “Importing the
Up to 7 mobile phone books, each containing sure that the vehicle is parked in a safe loca- contact list from the mobile phone book.
up to 1,000 names, can be registered. tion. This may take several minutes to com-
l The already stored phone book in the mobile plete. Would you like to continue?” An-
phone book is overwritten by the stored swer “Yes,” transferring to the mobile
phone book in the cellular phone.
phone book the phone book stored in the
cellular phone will start.
Answer “No,” to return to the main
menu.
NOTE
l The transfer may take some time to com-
plete depending on the number of contacts.
l If the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface could not be
connected to the Bluetooth® compatible cel-
lular phone, the voice guide will say “Un-
able to transfer contact list from phone” and
then the system will return to the main
menu. 7
l If you press the HANG-UP button or press
and hold the SPEECH button during the data
transfer, the transfer will be cancelled and
the system will return to the main menu.
l If an error occurs during the data transfer, all
transfer will be cancelled and the voice
guide will say “Unable to complete the
phone book import” and then the system will
return to the main menu.
l If there are no contacts in the phone book,
the voice guide will say “There are no con-
tacts on the connected phone.”
6. When the transfer is complete, the voice

guide will say “Import complete” and
then the system will return to the main
menu.

USB input terminal*
Enrollment commands
Phrase English French Spanish Italian German Dutch Portuguese Russian
1 0123456789 0123456789 0123456789 0123456789 0123456789 0123456789 0123456789 0123456789
2 888 555 1212 888 555 1212 888 555 1212 888 555 1212 888 555 1212 888 555 1212 888 555 1212 888 555 1212
3 Call Appeler Llamar Chiama Anrufen Bellen Ligar Вызов
4 Dial Composer Marcar Componi Wählen Nummer keuze Marcar Набор
5 Setup Configurer Configuración Configura Einrichtung Setup Configurar Настройка
7 6 Cancel Annuler Cancelar Annulla Abbrechen Annuleren Cancelar Отмена

7 Continue Continuer Continuar Continua Weiter Doorgaan Continuar Продолжить
8 Help Aide Ayuda Aiuto Hilfe Help Ajuda Справка
USB input terminal* Refer to “Listening to Audio Files on a USB USB input terminal locations
Device” on page 7-32.
The USB input terminal (A) is located in the
You can connect your USB memory device Refer to “To play iPod/USB memory device
illustrated positions.
or iPod* to play music files stored in the tracks via voice operation” on page 7-34.
USB memory device or iPod.
Instrument panel
*: “iPod” is a registered trademark of Apple

Inc. in the United States and other countries.
This section explains how to connect and re-

move a USB memory device or iPod. See the
following section for details on how to play
music files.
Refer to “Listening to an iPod” on page 7-30.

USB input terminal*
Floor console box* How to connect a USB memory 5. To remove the USB connector cable,
device turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”
position or put the operation mode in
1. Park your vehicle in a safe place and OFF first and perform the installation
turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK” steps in reverse.
OFF.
2. Open the USB input terminal cover.
How to connect an iPod
3. Connect a commercially available USB 1. Park your vehicle in a safe place and
connector cable (A) to the USB memory turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”
device (B). position or put the operation mode in
OFF.
7
CAUTION 2. Open the USB input terminal cover.
3. Connect the connector cable to the iPod.
l Keep the lid of the floor console box closed
while driving the vehicle. A lid or the con-
tents of the floor console box could other- NOTE
wise cause injuries.
l Use a genuine connector cable from Apple
Inc.
NOTE
4. Connect the connector cable to the USB
l When closing the floor console box, be care-
ful not to trap the connector cable. input terminal.
5. To remove the connector cable, turn the
ignition switch to the “LOCK” position
Back of floor console box* 4. Connect the USB connector cable to the or put the operation mode in OFF first
USB input terminal. and perform the installation steps in re-
verse.
NOTE
l Do not connect the USB memory device to
the USB input terminal directly.
The USB memory device may be damaged.

USB input terminal*
Types of connectable devices Model name Condition NOTE

and supported file specifica- USB memory device Storage capacity l It is recommended to use an iPod with firm-
tions of 256 Mbytes or ware updated to the latest version.
Except for vehicles equipped with the more l You can charge your iPod by connecting it to
(File System is the USB input terminal when the ignition
Bluetooth® 2.0 interface switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.
For details about the types of connectable de- FAT16/32)
l Do not keep your USB memory device or
vices and supported file specifications, refer Models other than USB Digital audio play- iPod in your vehicle.
to the following pages and manuals. memory devices and er supporting mass l It is recommended that you back up files in
iPods storage class case of data damage.
[For vehicles equipped with the l Do not connect to the USB input terminal
For connectable device type for “iPod*,” any device (hard disk, card reader, memory
7 LW/MW/FM radio/CD player]
“iPod classic*,” “iPod nano*,” “iPod touch*” reader, etc.) other than the connectable devi-
Refer to “Listening to an iPod” on page 7-30, ces specified in the previous section. The de-
and “iPhone*,” access the MITSUBISHI
“Listen to Audio Files on a USB Device” on vice and/or data may be damaged. If any of
MOTORS website.
page 7-32 and “Audio Files (MP3/WMA/ these devices was connected by mistake, re-
Please read and agree to the “Warning about move it after turning the ignition switch to
AAC)” on page 7-18.
Links to the Web Sites of Other Companies”. the “LOCK” position.
The websites mentioned above may connect
[Except for vehicles equipped with the
you to websites other than the MITSUBISHI
LW/MW/FM radio/CD player] File specifications
MOTORS website.
Refer to the separate owner’s manual. You can play music files of the following
http://www.mitsubishi-motors.com/en/prod-
ucts/index.html specifications that are saved in a USB memo-
For vehicles equipped with the Bluetooth® *: “iPod,” “iPod classic,” “iPod nano,” “iPod ry device or other device supporting mass
2.0 interface touch” and “iPhone” are registered trade- storage class. When you connect your iPod,
For details about the types of connectable de- marks of Apple Inc. in the United States and playable file specifications depend on the
vices and supported file specifications, refer other countries. connected iPod.
to the following section.
Item Condition
Device types NOTE
MP3, WMA, AAC,
Devices of the following types can be con- l Depending on the type of the USB memory File format
WAV
nected. device or other device connected, the con-
nected device may not function properly or
the available functions may be limited.

Sun visors
Item Condition Operating the lid of the vanity mirror will au- Ticket holder
tomatically turn on the mirror lamp (A).
Maximum number of The holder (B) is located on the back of the
levels (including the Level 8 sun visor.
root)
Number of folders 700
Number of files 65,535
Sun visors
7
CAUTION
l If the lid of vanity mirror with lamp is kept
open for prolonged periods of time, the vehi- CAUTION
cle’s battery will be discharged.
l Do not leave plastic cards in the ticket hold-
er. Because the inside of the vehicle will be-
come hot if the vehicle is parked in strong
sunlight, the cards could deform or crack.
1- To eliminate front glare
2- To eliminate side glare
Ashtray*
Vanity mirror
A vanity mirror is fitted to the back of the CAUTION
sun visor. l Put out matches and cigarettes before they
are placed in the ashtray.
l Don’t put papers and other things that burn
into your ashtrays. If you do, cigarettes or
other smoking materials could set them on
fire, causing damage.

Cigarette lighter*
CAUTION Mounting position for movea- Cigarette lighter*

l Always close the ashtray. If left open, other
ble ashtray
cigarette butts in the ashtray may be rekin- The cigarette lighter can be used while the ig-
dled. The moveable ashtray can be fitted at the in- nition switch or the operation mode is in ON
dicated position. or ACC.
To use the ashtray, open the lid.
1- Push all the way in.
The cigarette lighter will automatically return

to its original position with a “click” when
ready. Pull it out for use.
After use, insert the cigarette lighter to its
original position in the socket.
NOTE
l Do not leave the cigarette lighter removed
from its socket, because the socket might be-
come clogged by foreign material and be
short-circuited.

Accessory socket
CAUTION Accessory socket The accessory socket can be used while the
ignition switch or the operation mode is in
l Do not touch the heating element or the cig- ON or ACC.
arette lighter housing, hold the knob only to CAUTION
prevent burns.
l Do not allow children to operate or play with l Be sure to use a “plug-in” type accessory op- Instrument panel*
the cigarette lighter as burns may occur. erating at 12 V and at 120 W or less.
When using more than one socket at the
l Something is wrong with the cigarette light-
same time, make sure that the electrical ac-
er if it does not pop back out within approxi-
mately 30 seconds of being pushed in. cessories are 12 V accessories and that the
Pull it out and have the problem corrected at total power consumption does not exceed
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Serv- 120 W.
ice Point. l Long use of the electric appliance without
l Do not use any electric appliance that is not running the engine may run down the bat- 7
approved by MITSUBISHI MOTORS. Do- tery.
ing so could damage the socket. If you used l When the accessory socket is not in use, be
the cigarette lighter after damaging the sock- sure to close the lid or install the cap, be-
et, the cigarette lighter might pop out or fail cause the socket might become clogged by
to come out after being pushed in. foreign material and be short-circuited. Floor console box*
l When the cigarette lighter socket is used as a
power source for an electric appliance, be To use a plug-in type accessory, open the lid
sure that the electric appliance operates at or remove the cap, and insert the plug in the
12 V and has an electric capacity of 120 W
or less. In addition, long use of the electric
accessory socket.
appliance without running the engine may
run down the battery.

USB port (for charging)*
Rear When using the USB port (for charging), CAUTION

open the lid and connect the USB connector
cable to it. l Do not use the reversible USB connector ca-
ble on the USB connector board that is loca-
ted in the centre.
The USB port (for charging) might be dam-
aged.
l Long use of the electric appliance without
running the engine may run down the bat-
tery.
B
7 NOTE
USB port (for charging)* l The USB ports (for charging) can be used
only as a power source. They are not con-
The USB port (for charging) can be used as a nected to the audio devices of the vehicles.
power source of the USB appliances when l Do not charge many mobile devices together
by using a multi-plug adapter of the USB
the ignition switch or the operation mode is CAUTION port (for charging).
in ON or ACC.
l When the USB port (for charging) is not in l If water or spillt beverages has splashed on
There are two USB ports (for charging) loca- use, be sure to close the lid, because the the USB ports (for charging), stop using it
ted on the back of the floor console box. USB port (for charging) might be short- and have the vehicle checked by a
circuited by clogging foreign materials and MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Serv-
the connected devices and the USB port (for ice Point.
charging) might be damaged.
l Insert the USB connector cable in the USB
port (for charging) firmly.
If the USB connector cable does not insert in
it firmly, it may become extremely hot and
the fuses may blow.
l Be sure that the power consumption does not
exceed 10.5 W {The peak outlet current or
voltage of the USB port (for charging) is DC
5 V-2.1 A}.
The connected devices or the USB port (for
charging) may be damaged.

Interior lamps
Interior lamps Room lamps Position On/off control

of lamp
switch
Front
2-DOOR The lamp illuminates when a
(•) door or the tailgate is opened. It
goes off approximately 15 sec-
onds after all doors and the tail-
gate are closed.
However, the lamp goes off im-
mediately with all doors and the
tailgate closed in the following
cases:
7
l When the ignition switch is
1- Luggage room lamp Rear turned to the “ON” position
2- Room lamp (rear) or the operation mode is put
3- Map & room lamps (front) in ON.
4- Downlight
5- Front foot lamps l When the central door lock
function is used to lock the
vehicle.
NOTE
l When the keyless entry key
l If you leave the lamps on without running or the keyless operation key
the engine, you will run down the battery.
Before you leave the vehicle, make sure that
is used to lock the vehicle.
the lamps are turned off. l If the vehicle is equipped
Position On/off control with the keyless operation
of lamp system, when the keyless
switch operation function is used to
lock the vehicle.
1-ON The lamp illuminates regardless
of whether a door or the tailgate 3-OFF The lamp goes off regardless of
( ) ( ) whether a door or the tailgate is
is open or closed.
open or closed.

Interior lamps
NOTE Map lamps The lamp illuminates when the tailgate is

opened, and goes off when the tailgate is
l When the key was used to start the engine, if Push the lens (A) to turn on the lamp. Push it
closed.
the key is removed while the doors and tail- again to turn it off.
3- ( )
gate are closed, the lamp is illuminated and
after approximately 15 seconds it goes off. The lamp goes off regardless of whether the
l When the keyless operation function was tailgate is open or closed.
used to start the engine, if the operation
mode is put in OFF while the doors and tail-
gate are closed, the lamp illuminates and af-
ter approximately 15 seconds it goes off. (if
so equipped)
7 l The time until the lamp goes off can be ad-
justed. For details, please consult a
ice Point.
Luggage room lamp
1- ( )
The lamp illuminates regardless of whether
the tailgate is open or closed.
2- ( )
Storage spaces
Downlight Front foot lamps NOTE

The downlight illuminates when the lamp The front foot lamps (A) come on when the l The interior lamp auto-cut function can be
switch is in the or position. When the front door is opened and go off when the deactivated. The time until the lamps auto-
lamp switch is in the “AUTO” position, the door is closed. matically go off can be adjusted. For details
downlight illuminates when the position and support, consult your nearest
lamps illuminate. MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Serv-
ice Point.
owner’s manual for details. 7
Storage spaces
CAUTION
Interior lamp* auto-cutout
l Never leave lighters, cans of carbonated
function drink, and spectacles in the cabin when park-
*: Map & room lamps (front), room lamp ing the vehicle in hot sunshine. The cabin
(rear) and luggage room lamp will become extremely hot, so lighters and
other flammable items may catch fire and
If any of the interior lamps are left switched unopened drink cans may rupture. Also,
on with the ignition switch in the “LOCK” spectacles with plastic lenses or materials
position or the operation mode in OFF, it could deform or crack.
goes off automatically after approximately 30 l Keep the lids of storage spaces closed while
minutes. driving the vehicle. A lid or the contents of a
The lamps will illuminate again after they au- storage space could otherwise cause injuries.
tomatically go off if the ignition switch or the
engine switch is operated, if one of the doors
or the tailgate is opened or closed, or if the
keyless entry system or keyless operation
system is operated.

Storage spaces
NOTE The floor console box can also be used as an

armrest.
l When the lamps are illuminated with the
lamp switch in the “ ”, “ ”, or “AUTO”
position, the glove box lamp illuminates.
Card holder
There is a card holder inside the glove box.
1- Luggage floor box*

7 2- Floor console box
3- Glove box
4- Sunglasses holder* The tissue holder (B), pen holder (C) and tray
(D) are located in the illustrated positions
Glove box (except for vehicles equipped with 2nd seat
To open, pull the lever (A). ventilators).
Floor console box

To open the console box, lift the release lever
(A) and raise the lid.
B- Tissue holder
C- Pen holder
D- Tray

Storage spaces
NOTE The luggage floor board can be folded at

the indicated positions (A).
l When the lamps are illuminated with the
lamp switch in the “ ”, “ ”, or “AUTO”
position, the floor console box lamp illumi-
nates (except for vehicles equipped with 2nd
seat ventilators).
l The USB input terminal is located in the
floor console box (if so equipped). For de-
tails, refer to “USB input terminal” on page
7-68.
Luggage floor box*

*: Front of the vehicle 7
The box for storing articles is located inside 3. To access the centre of the luggage floor
the luggage compartment. 4- Luggage floor board (front) box (front), insert your hand in the gap
To use the box, raise the luggage floor board. 5- Luggage floor board (rear) (C) and raise the board as illustrated.
5 persons To access the luggage floor box (front)

1. Fold the second seatback forward.
Refer to “Folding the second seats” on
page 4-08.
2. Insert your hand in the gap (B) and fold
the board as illustrated.
1- Luggage floor box (front)

2- Luggage floor box (centre)
3- Luggage floor box (rear)

Cup holder
To access the luggage floor box (centre) 7 persons NOTE

1. Raise the luggage floor board (rear) by l The holder may not be able to accomodate
pulling up on the strap (D). every possible size and shape of sunglasses;
it is advisable to check compatibility before
use.
Cup holder
WARNING
7 l Do not spray water or spill beverages in-
side the vehicle. If the switches, wires or
Sunglasses holder* electrical components become wet, they
could malfunction or cause a vehicle fire.
To open, push the lid.
If you accidentally spill a beverage, wipe
2. Insert your hand in the gap (E) and raise up as much liquid as possible and imme-
the board as illustrated. diately consult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS
CAUTION
l Do not drink beverages while driving. This
is distracting and could cause an accident.
For the front seat

The cup holder is located in front of the floor
console.
CAUTION
l The holder should not be used to store any-
thing heavier than sunglasses. These objects
could drop out.

Bottle holder
To use the cup holder, push the lid. For the third seat CAUTION
The cup holder is located at the right side of l Drinks could be spilled by the vibration and
the third seat. jolts while driving. If the spilt drink is very
hot, you could be burnt.
There are bottle holders located on both sides

of front and rear doors.
For the second seat

In order to use the cup holder, allow the arm-
rest to drop down. Bottle holder
WARNING
l Do not spray water or spill beverages in- NOTE
side the vehicle. If the switches, wires or
electrical components become wet, they l Do not store cup or drink can in the bottle
could malfunction or cause a vehicle fire. holder.
If you accidentally spill a beverage, wipe l Tightly close the cap on drink bottles before
up as much liquid as possible and imme- storing them.
diately consult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS l Some bottles may be too big or the wrong
Authorized Service Point. shape to fit in the holder.
CAUTION
l Do not drink beverages while driving. This
is distracting and could cause an accident.

Cargo area cover*
Cargo area cover* To change position 2. After changing the position, gently
shake the entire cover to make sure it is
There are two installation holes (B) for the securely retained.
To use cover.
NOTE
1. Draw out the cover retracted by spring
and insert it in the mounting grooves l If the second seatback touches the cover,
move the cover rearward.
(A). The cover could break if it supports the seat-
back of the second seat.
7 To remove
1. Roll the cover into the retracted position.
2. Move one of the sliders (C) towards the
inside of the vehicle and lift it to remove
the cover.
1. Move one of the sliders (C) towards the
inside of the vehicle, and fit the tab (D)
into the installation hole that is to be
used. Move the opposite slider in the
same fashion.
2. Remove the cover from the mounting

grooves, and the cover will roll back into
the retracted position.
To refit
NOTE
l Do not put luggage on the cover. Refit the cover by performing the removal
steps in reverse.

Assist grips
Gently shake the entire cover after fitting it to Assist grips Coat hook
make sure it is securely retained.
The assist grips (located above the doors on There is a coat hook on the second seat assist
To store* the headliner) are not designed to support grip of the driver’s side.
body weight. They are intended for use only
The cover can be fitted at the indicated posi-
while seated in the vehicle.
tion when not in use.
On vehicles with luggage floor box, raise the
luggage floor board and store the cover.
Type 1
7
Type 2
WARNING
l Do not put a hanger or any heavy or poin-
CAUTION ted object on the coat hook. If the curtain
airbag was activated, any such item could
l Do not use the assist grips when getting into
or out of the vehicle. The assist grips could be propelled away with great force and
detach causing you to fall. could prevent the curtain airbag from in-
flating correctly. Hang clothes directly on
the coat hook (without using a hanger).
Make sure there are no heavy or sharp
objects in the pockets of clothes that you
NOTE hang on the coat hook.
l On vehicles with premium sound system,
you can not use this storing position.
Luggage hooks
There are 4 hooks located on the side walls of
the luggage compartment.

Luggage hooks
Use the hooks for securing the luggage.
7
CAUTION
l Do not pile up the luggage beyond the seat-
back height. Also, firmly secure the luggage.
Otherwise, serious accidents could result due
to hindered rearward view or flying objects
during sudden braking.

For emergencies
ERA-GLONASS*...............................................................................8-02
If the vehicle breaks down.................................................................. 8-09
If the operation mode cannot be changed to OFF (vehicles
equipped with the keyless operation system)................................. 8-09
Emergency starting............................................................................. 8-09
Engine overheating..............................................................................8-11
Tools and jack..................................................................................... 8-13
Tyre repair kit*....................................................................................8-14
How to change a tyre.......................................................................... 8-20 8
Towing................................................................................................ 8-28
Operation under adverse driving conditions....................................... 8-31
OGFE20E1
ERA-GLONASS*
ERA-GLONASS* WARNING Flow of the emergency call

l In a place where radio waves cannot be
ERA-GLONASS is a system designed to re- transmitted and received, you cannot call
duce the severity of accidents. The location the emergency call centre. (for example,
and vehicle information is transmitted from indoor, a basement parking area, a moun-
the system to the emergency call centre in tainous area, inside a tunnel, etc.)
case of an accident or sudden illness, and the In addition, if the line to the emergency
call centre is busy, it may be difficult to
emergency call centre arranges for despatch
call the emergency call centre even in a
of emergency vehicles as required. place where you can transmit and receive
radio waves. In this case, directly arrange
WARNING an emergency vehicle or road service with
a cellular phone, etc.
l If an emergency occurs and you notice a
8 fuel smell or bad smell, do not stay inside
the vehicle and escape to a safe place im- NOTE
mediately.
l While waiting for the rescue after the l This system reports to the emergency call
emergency call, take action to prevent sec- centre, but does not directly arrange an
ondary accidents such as a rear end colli- emergency vehicle or pass to the road serv-
sion with the following vehicle, and escape ice.
to a safe place. l This system helps to make an emergency
call for a traffic accident or sudden illness,
l If the system fails because of a collision,
but does not have a function to protect the
etc. the system does not operate. In this
case, directly arrange an emergency vehi- occupants.
cle or road service with a cellular phone,
etc.
A- Red lamp
B- Green lamp
C- Cover
D- SOS switch
8-02 For emergencies OGFE20E1

ERA-GLONASS*
E- Microphone WARNING WARNING
F- Door speaker (only front passenger side)
l If the red lamp remains illuminated or il- l Before pressing the SOS switch, stop the
luminates again after approximately 20 vehicle in a safe place. If you operate it
WARNING seconds has elapsed after setting the igni- while driving, your attention to the sur-
tion switch or the operation mode to rounding circumstances becomes insuffi-
l Do not remove or install the above parts. “ON”, there is a possible failure in the cient, enough to cause an unexpected acci-
This can cause failure of contact or equip-
system or the battery for exclusive use of dent.
ment, and the system may not operate
the ERA-GLONASS may be exhausted.
normally.
The battery life is approximately 3 years.
l Do not replace the speakers. If they are
Have the system inspected or the battery CAUTION
replaced, the buzzer sound or the voice of
replaced by a MITSUBISHI MOTORS
the operator at the emergency call centre l Do not open the cover except when you
Authorized Service Point immediately.
may not be audible. If the speakers need press the SOS switch. You may press the
to be replaced due to a failure etc., we rec- l When the system is not in the standby
SOS switch by mistake. In addition, if the
state, the system does not operate. When
ommend you to consult a MITSUBISHI
you drive, make sure to check that the
cover is opened while driving, the cover can 8
MOTORS Authorized Service Point. cause injury in case of an emergency.
system is in the standby state.
1. After setting the ignition switch or the NOTE

2. The system operates as follows.
operation mode to “ON”, the red lamp
[Automatic Report]
(A) and the green lamp (B) illuminate l Before the manual report gets connected, it
When the vehicle receives an impact can be cancelled by long pressing the SOS
for approximately 10 seconds. When ap-
above a certain level. button again for more than 2 seconds.
proximately 10 seconds have elapsed af-
ter the lamps extinguish, the system is in
l Do not press the SOS switch except in case
an emergency such as an accident or sudden
the standby state. NOTE illness. When an emergency vehicle, etc. is
l Depending on the level of impact or the an- despatched for mischief, the applicable cost
may be charged.
WARNING gle of the collision, the system may not oper-
ate.
l If the red lamp and/or the green lamp do 3. The green lamp blinks and the system
not illuminate after setting the ignition
switch or the operation mode to “ON”, [Manual Report] calls the emergency call centre.
there is a possible failure in the system. When you open the cover (C) and press
Have the system inspected by a the SOS switch (D).
OGFE20E1 For emergencies 8-03

ERA-GLONASS*
WARNING 5. When the green lamp changes from a NOTE

blinking state to an illumination state
l If the red lamp illuminates as follows, di- and the buzzer sounds once, a conversa- l If the vehicle side microphone (E) and/or the
rectly arrange an emergency vehicle or speakers fail, you cannot talk with the opera-
tion with an operator of the emergency
road service with a cellular phone, etc. tor of the emergency call centre.
call centre is available.
• When the red lamp remains illumina- l A call cannot be disconnected from the vehi-
ted. (There is a possible failure in the cle side.
system.) WARNING
• When the red lamp illuminates for 60
6. The emergency call centre arranges for
seconds. (The vehicle may be in a place l An error may occur between the actual
where radio waves cannot be transmit- report point and the point reported to the despatch of the emergency vehicle as re-
ted and received.) emergency call centre. Mutually confirm quired.
the report point and the object through
4. The green lamp blinks slowly, and the

the phone call with the operator of the Indicator list
emergency call centre.
8 location and vehicle information is trans-
mitted to the emergency call centre.

ERA-GLONASS*
Indication lamp
Situation Cause Solution Buzzer sound
Red lamp Green lamp
When setting the ignition Illuminates (for ap- Illuminates (for ap- The system check is in progress. Wait for a No sound
switch or the operation proximately 10 sec- proximately 10 sec- while.
mode to “ON” onds) onds) The indication
lamps extin-
guish when the
system check is
complete.
If the red lamp
and/or the green
lamp do(es) not
illuminate, there 8
is a possible
failure in the
system. In this
case, immedi-
ately have the
system inspec-
ted at a
MITSUBISHI
MOTORS Au-
thorized Service
Point.
After approximately 20 Extinguishes Extinguishes The system works normally. − No sound
seconds after setting the
ignition switch or the oper-
ation mode to “ON”

ERA-GLONASS*
Indication lamp
Red lamp Green lamp
Illuminates Extinguishes There is a possible failure in the Immediately 3 times
system or the battery may be ex- have the system
hausted. inspected at a
MITSUBISHI
MOTORS Au-
thorized Service
Point.
While the emergency call Extinguishes Blinks (at a 0.5-sec- The system calls the emergency − No sound
is activated ond interval) call centre.
8 Extinguishes Blinks (at a 2-second The system transmits the location − No sound
interval) and vehicle information to the

ERA-GLONASS*
Indication lamp
Red lamp Green lamp
Extinguishes Illuminates A conversation with an operator Mutually con- Once
of the emergency call centre is firm the details
available. of the emergen-
cy call with the
operator of the
emergency call
centre.
If the green
lamp does not
extinguish even
after the emer- 8
gency call ends,
have the system
inspected at a
MITSUBISHI
MOTORS Au-
thorized Service
Point.
When the emergency call Illuminates (for ap- Extinguishes The emergency call failed. Make an emer- 3 times
failed proximately 60 sec- gency call
onds) again, or direct-
ly arrange an
emergency ve-
hicle or road
service with the
nearest public
telephone, etc.

ERA-GLONASS*
Test Mode NOTE NOTE

The system can be checked if it is in the nor- l If the buzzer does not sound, repeat the l If you drive a certain distance in the test
process from Step 1. mode, the test mode ends.
mal standby state by the following process.
Before operation, stop the vehicle in a safe
place, with good visibility, where radio 6. Approximately 60 seconds later, the Report test to the emergency
waves can be transmitted and received. green lamp blinks. If you press the SOS call centre
switch within 20 seconds, the mode 1. The green lamp illuminates, and the re-
changes to the test mode. port test to the emergency call centre is
NOTE
started.
l The test emergency call must be carried out
NOTE
by qualified personnel only.
Therefore, if you want to check the system, l When the red lamp blinks instead of the NOTE
8 please consult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS
green lamp, move the vehicle in a safe place,
with good visibility, where radio waves can l If the red lamp illuminates for approximately
60 seconds, the vehicle is in a place where
be transmitted and received, then repeat the
radio waves cannot be transmitted and re-
Change to Test Mode process from Step 1.
ceived. Therefore you cannot report to the
1. When the ignition switch or the opera-
7. Within approximately 20 seconds after
tion mode is set to “OFF”, set the igni-
the mode has changed to the test mode, 2. When the green lamp extinguishes, the
tion switch or the operation mode to
press the SOS switch for one of the fol- test mode is completed.
“ON” while pressing the SOS switch.
lowing periods to select the desired test
2. After setting the ignition switch or the
operation mode to “ON”, perform Steps
type. Test of the ERA-GLONASS sys-
3 and 4 within 10 seconds. l 10 seconds or more: Report test to the tem equipment of the vehicle
emergency call centre
3. Release your finger from the SOS 1. After the buzzer sounds once, press the
switch. l Less than 10 seconds: Test of the
ERAGLONASS system equipment of SOS switch.
4. Press the SOS switch 3 or more times. [Lamp Check]
the vehicle
5. After approximately 10 seconds from When the buzzer sounds once and both
Step 2, the red lamp and the green lamp the red and green lamp illuminate alter-
extinguish. After that, the buzzer sounds NOTE nately, they are working normally.
3 times. l If you do not press the SOS switch within
approximately 20 seconds, the test mode
ends.

If the vehicle breaks down
2. When the lamps are normal, press the 6. When the green lamp extinguishes, the 1. Move the selector lever to the “P”
SOS switch. When the lamps do not illu- test mode is completed. (PARK) position, and then change the
minate normally, wait for approximately operation mode to OFF. (For vehicles
20 seconds. with A/T or CVT)
[Speaker Check]
If the vehicle breaks down 2. One of the other causes could be low
When the buzzer sounds twice and con- If the vehicle breaks down on the road, move battery voltage. If this occurs, the key-
tinues sounding, they are working nor- it to the shoulder and use the hazard warning less entry system, keyless operation
mally. flashers and/or the warning triangle etc. function, and steering wheel lock will al-
3. When the speakers are normal, press the Refer to “Hazard warning flasher switch” on so not operate. Contact a MITSUBISHI
SOS switch. When the buzzer does not page 5-67. MOTORS Authorized Service Point.
sound normally, wait for approximately
20 seconds.
[Microphone Check]
If the engine stops/fails Emergency starting
After the buzzer sounds 3 times, say Vehicle operation and control are affected if If the engine cannot be started because the
8
something towards the microphone. the engine stops. battery is weak or dead, the battery from an-
If your voice sounds from the speakers, Before moving the vehicle to a safe area, be other vehicle can be used with jumper cables
they are working normally. aware of the following: to start the engine.
4. When the microphone is normal, press l The brake booster becomes inoperative
the SOS switch. When it does not oper- and the pedal effort will increase. Press
ate normally, wait for approximately 20 down the brake pedal harder than usual. WARNING
seconds. l Since the power steering system is no l To start the engine using jumper cables
5. If all check results are normal, the green longer operative, the steering wheel feels connected to another vehicle, perform the
lamp illuminates (for approximately 5 heavy when turning it. correct procedures according to the in-
seconds) and the buzzer sounds once. struction below. Incorrect procedures
could result in a fire or explosion or dam-
If the operation mode age to the vehicles.
WARNING l Keep sparks, cigarettes and flames away
cannot be changed to OFF from the battery because the battery may
l If any of the check results are not normal,
the red lamp illuminates (for approxi- (vehicles equipped with the produce an explosion.
mately 5 seconds) and the buzzer sounds 3
times. In this case, there is a possible fail-
keyless operation system)
ure in the system. Have the system inspec-
ted by a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Author- If the operation mode cannot be changed to
ized Service Point immediately. OFF, perform the following procedure.

Emergency starting
CAUTION 4. Make sure battery electrolyte is at the hicle with the discharged battery at the
proper level. point farthest from the battery.
l Do not attempt to start the engine by pulling Refer to “Battery” on page 10-09.
or pushing the vehicle. It could damage your
vehicle.
2000 and 2400 models
l Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12- WARNING
volt battery. If the other system isn’t 12-volt,
shorting can damage both vehicles. l If electrolyte fluid is not visible, or ap-
pears to be frozen, Do Not Attempt Jump
l Use the proper cables suitable for the battery
Starting!
size to prevent overheating of the cables.
A battery might rupture or explode if the
l Check the jumper cables for damage and
temperature is below the freezing point or
corrosion before use.
if it is not filled to the proper level.
l Always wear protective eye goggles when
working near the battery. l Electrolyte is corrosive diluted sulphuric
acid.
8 l Keep the battery out of the reach of children.
If electrolyte (battery acid) comes into
contact with your hands, eyes, clothes and
1. Get the vehicles close enough so the the painted surface of your vehicle, it 3000 models
jumper cables can reach, but be sure the should be thoroughly flushed with water.
If electrolyte gets in your eyes, flush them
vehicles aren’t touching each other.
with water immediately and thoroughly,
2. Turn off all lamps, heater and other elec- and get prompt medical attention.
trical loads.
3. Set the parking brake firmly on each ve-
hicle. Put an A/T or CVT in “P” (PARK) 5. Connect one end of one jumper cable
or a M/T in “N” (Neutral). Stop the en- to the positive (+) terminal of the dis-
gine. charged battery (A), and the other end
to the positive (+) terminal of the booster
battery (B).
WARNING Connect one end of the other jumper ca-
l Turn off the ignition on both vehicles be- ble to the negative (-) terminal of the
forehand. Make sure that the cables or booster battery, and the other end to
your clothes cannot be caught by the fan the designated ground location of the ve-
or drive belt. Personal injury could result.

Engine overheating
WARNING NOTE l The high coolant temperature warning

lamp illuminates. (Mono-colour liquid
l Make sure that the connection is made l For vehicles equipped with the Auto Stop & crystal display type)
to the appointed position (shown in the il- Go (AS&G) system, press the “Auto Stop &
lustration). If the connection is made di- Go (AS&G) OFF” switch to deactivate the
rectly to the negative (-) side of the bat- Auto Stop & Go (AS&G) system and pre-
tery, the inflammable gases generated vent the engine from automatically stopping If this occurs, take the following corrective
from the battery might catch fire and ex- before the battery is sufficiently charged. measures:
plode. Refer to “To deactivate” on page 6-30. 1. Stop the vehicle in a safe place.
l When connecting the jumper cables, do 2. Check whether steam is coming from the
not connect the positive (+) cable to the engine compartment.
7. After the engine is started, disconnect
negative (-) terminal. Otherwise sparks
might cause explosion of the battery. the cables in the reverse order and keep
the engine running for several minutes. [If steam does not come from the engine
compartment]
CAUTION With the engine still running, raise the 8
NOTE bonnet to ventilate the engine compart-
l Take care not to get the jumper cable caught l If the vehicle is put in motion without fully ment.
in the cooling fan or other rotating part in
charging the battery, it might cause the loss
the engine compartment.
of smooth engine operation and the anti-lock
brake warning lamp to illuminate. NOTE
6. Start the engine in the vehicle which has Refer to “Anti-lock brake system (ABS)” on
l For vehicles equipped with the Auto Stop &
the booster battery, let the engine idle a page 6-63. Go (AS&G) system, press the “Auto Stop &
few minutes, then start the engine in the Go (AS&G) OFF” switch to deactivate the
vehicle with the discharged battery. Auto Stop & Go (AS&G) system before
Engine overheating stopping the vehicle.
Refer to “To deactivate” on page 6-30.
CAUTION When the engine is overheating, the warning
will be displayed in the instrument cluster as
l Keep the engine of the vehicle giving assis- [If steam is coming from the engine
tance running. follows.
compartment]
l The information screen in the multi in- Stop the engine, and when the steam
formation display will be interrupted and
stops, raise the bonnet to ventilate the
the engine coolant temperature warning
engine compartment. Restart the engine.
display will appear. Also “ ” will blink.
(Colour liquid crystal display type)

Engine overheating
WARNING Stop the engine immediately and contact

a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized
l Do not open the bonnet while steam is Service Point for assistance.
coming from the engine compartment. It FULL
could cause steam or hot water to spurt
out, causing burns. Hot water could spurt
LOW
out even when there is no steam coming
out, and some parts will be very hot. Be
very careful when opening the bonnet.
l Be careful of hot steam, which could be
blowing off the reserve tank cap.
l Do not attempt to remove the radiator cap
while the engine is hot.
*: Front of the vehicle
8 5. Add coolant to the radiator and/or re-
serve tank if necessary. (Refer to the
“Maintenance” section.)
WARNING
l Be careful not to get your hands or clothes WARNING
caught in the cooling fan.
l Make sure that the engine has cooled
down before removing the radiator cap
4. Check the coolant level in the reserve (C), because hot steam or boiling water
tank (B). otherwise will gush from the filler port
and may scald you.
CAUTION
3. Confirm that the cooling fans (A) are
turning. l Do not add coolant while the engine is hot.
Suddenly adding cold coolant could damage
[If the cooling fans are turning] the engine. Wait for the engine to cool down,
After the high coolant temperature warn- then add coolant a little at a time.
ing has gone off, stop the engine.
[If the cooling fans are not turning]

Tools and jack
6. Examine the radiator hoses for coolant Tools NOTE
leakage and the drive belt for looseness
or damage. • The business name, full address of the
manufacturer and of his authorized repre-
If there is anything wrong with the cool-
sentative and the designation of the jack
ing system or drive belt, we recommend are described in the EC declaration of
you to have it checked and repaired. conformity.
Tools and jack To remove

1. Remove the jack lid.
2. Retract the jack and remove it from its
Storage installation fitting (A).
1- Jack bar
The tools and jack are stowed on the right
side of the luggage area.
2- Wheel nut wrench 8
The storage location of the tools and jack Jack
should be remembered in case of an emer-
gency. The jack is used only for the purpose of To retract
changing a tyre when a tyre is punctured.
NOTE
l The jack is maintenance-free.
l The jack is in conformity with EC law as ap-
proximated by the Machinery Directive To store
2006/42/EC.
l The EC declaration of conformity is attached 1. Retract the jack, then return it to its orig-
to the section “Declaration of Conformity” inal position.
in the end of this owner’s manual.
1- Tools
2- Jack

Tyre repair kit*
2. Extend the jack and firmly secure it, The storage location of the tyre repair kit 2- Tyre sealant bottle
then install the jack lid. should be remembered in case of an emer- 3- Filler hose
gency. 4- Valve remover
5- Valve insert (spare)
6- Speed restriction sticker
To retract How to use the tyre repair kit
WARNING
To extend
l Using the tyre repair kit may damage the
wheel and/or the tyre inflation pressure
sensor for the tyre.
8 The vehicle must promptly be inspected
Tyre repair kit* and repaired by a MITSUBISHI
MOTORS Authorized Service Point after
using the tyre repair kit.
This kit enables emergency repair of a small
puncture in the tread area of a tyre that has
run over a nail, screw, or similar object. CAUTION
Storage l The tyre sealant can cause health damage if
swallowed. If you accidentally swallow it,
drink as much water as possible and imme-
The tyre repair kit is stored beneath the lug- diately consult a doctor.
gage floor board of the luggage compartment. l If the tyre sealant gets in your eyes or on
your skin, rinse with lots of water. If you
still sense an abnormality, consult a doctor.
l Consult a doctor immediately if any allergic
reactions occur.
l Do not allow children to touch the tyre seal-
ant.
*1: Except for vehicles equipped with the l Do not breathe in the vapours of tyre sealant.
third seats
*2: Vehicles equipped with the third seats
1- Tyre compressor
Tyre repair kit*
CAUTION NOTE NOTE

l Be sure to use a MITSUBISHI MOTORS • The tyre is punctured in the side wall (A), l Check the tyre sealant’s expiry date regular-
GENUINE tyre sealant. not in the tread (B). ly, be sure to purchase a new one from a
ice Point before the expiry date.
NOTE
l The tyre sealant cannot be used in any of the Before repairing a tyre, first stop your vehicle
situations listed below. If any of these situa- in a safe, flat location.
tions occurs, please contact a MITSUBISHI 1. Park the vehicle on level and stable
MOTORS Authorized Service Point or an-
ground.
other specialist.
2. Set the parking brake firmly.
• The tyre sealant’s expiry date has passed.
(The expiry date is shown on the bottle la- 3. On vehicles with M/T, stop the engine
bel.) • The vehicle has been driven with the tyre and move the gearshift lever to the “R” 8
almost completely flat. (Reverse) position.
• The tyre has completely slipped over the On vehicles with CVT, move the selec-
wheel rim and has come off the wheel. tor lever to the “P” (PARK) position and
• The wheel is damaged. stop the engine.
l Use the tyre sealant only at ambient temper-
4. Turn on the hazard warning flashers and
atures of -30 °C to +60 °C.
set up a warning triangle, flashing signal
l Effect an emergency repair without pulling
out the object (nail, screw, etc.) that is stuck lamp, etc., at an adequate distance from
in the tyre. the vehicle, and have all your passengers
l Do not use the tyre sealant if the tyre has leave the vehicle.
been damaged by being driven when insuffi- 5. Take out the tyre repair kit.
• More than one tyre is punctured.
ciently inflated (e.g. bumps, cuts, cracks etc.
• The puncture hole has a length or width of on the tyre).
4 mm or more.
l Wipe tyre sealant off the paintwork immedi-
ately with a damp cloth.
l Immediately wash clothes contaminated
with tyre sealant.

Tyre repair kit*
6. Take the valve cap (C) off the tyre valve CAUTION the bottle, the seal will break, allowing
(D), then press the valve remover (E) the sealant to be used.
onto the valve as illustrated. Allow all of l If there is any air left in the tyre when you
remove the valve insert, the valve insert may
the air in the tyre to escape.
fly out and injure you. Make sure the tyre
contains no air before removing the valve in-
sert.
8. Shake the tyre sealant bottle well.
8
CAUTION
7. Remove the valve insert (F) by turning it l If you shake the bottle after screwing on the
hose, sealant may spray out of the hose.
anticlockwise using the valve remover
(E). Put the removed valve insert in a
clean place so it does not get dirty. 10. Press the hose onto the valve (D). Hold-
NOTE ing the sealant bottle upside-down,
squeeze it again and again to inject all of
l In cold conditions (when the ambient tem-
the sealant into the tyre.
perature is 0 °C or lower), thickening of the
tyre sealant can make the tyre sealant hard to
squeeze out of the bottle. Warm the bottle in-
side the vehicle.
9. Take the cap (G) off the tyre sealant bot-

tle (H). Do not remove the seal (I).
Screw the filler hose (J) onto the bottle
(H). As you screw the filler hose onto

Tyre repair kit*
12. After injecting the sealant, securely fit
the valve remover (E) into the end of the
filler hose (J) to prevent sealant from
leaking from the empty bottle.
NOTE NOTE
l When injecting the sealant, position the l When removing and screwing in the valve 8
valve away from the bottom, i.e., away from insert using the valve remover, turn the
the point where the tyre touches the ground. valve remover by hand. Using a tool to turn
If the valve is near the point where the tyre the valve remover could damage it.
touches the ground, the sealant may not go 13. Pull out the compressor hose (K) from
into the tyre easily. the side of the tyre compressor, and then
securely attach the hose to the tyre valve
11. After injecting the sealant, pull the hose (D).
off the valve, remove any residual seal-
ant from the valve, rim and/or tyre. Fit
the valve insert (F) into the valve (D),
and screw the valve insert securely into
place using the valve remover (E).

Tyre repair kit*
14. Place the compressor (L) with its air (Refer to “Tyre inflation pressures” on CAUTION
pressure gauge (M) on top. page 10-11.)
Pull out the compressor’s power cord l The compressor is not waterproof. If you use
it in rain, make sure water does not get on it.
(N), insert the plug on the cord into the
accessory socket (O), and then put the l Any sand or dust sucked into the compressor
could make the compressor break down. Do
operation mode in ACC. (Refer to “Ac- not place the compressor directly on any
cessory socket” on page 7-73.) sandy or dusty surface when using it.
Turn ON the compressor switch (P) and l Do not disassemble or modify the compres-
inflate the tyre to the specified pressure. sor. Also, do not subject the air pressure
gauge to shock. It could malfunction.
15. Check and adjust the tyre pressure with

reference to the air pressure gauge on the
8 compressor. If you overinflate the tyre,
release air by loosening the hose’s end
fitting.
If there is a gap between the tyre and
wheel because the tyre has moved in-
ward from the wheel rim, press the pe-
riphery of the tyre towards the wheel to
close the gap before running the com-
pressor. (With no gaps, the tyre pressure
will rise.)
CAUTION
CAUTION l Be careful not to get your fingers trapped be-
tween the tyre and wheel as the tyre inflates.
l The supplied compressor is designed only
l The surface of the compressor will get hot
for inflation of your vehicle tyres.
while the compressor is running. Do not
l The compressor is designed to run on a vehi-
keep the compressor running continuously
cle’s 12 V power supply. Do not connect it
for more than 10 minutes. After using the
to any other power source.
compressor, wait for the compressor to cool
before using it again.

Tyre repair kit*
CAUTION CAUTION
l If the compressor becomes sluggish or hot l If you sense any abnormality while driving,
while operating, it is overheating. Immedi- stop the vehicle and contact a MITSUBISHI
ately place the switch in the OFF position MOTORS Authorized Service Point or an-
and let the compressor cool down for at least other specialist. Otherwise the tyre pressure
30 minutes. may drop before the emergency repair pro-
cedure is completed, rendering the vehicle
unsafe.
NOTE
l If the tyre pressure does not rise to the speci- NOTE
fied level within 10 minutes, the tyre may be
so severely damaged that the tyre sealant l Driving faster than 80 km/h (50 mph) can
cannot be used to effect an emergency re- CAUTION make the vehicle vibrate.
pair. Please contact a MITSUBISHI
l Do not affix the sticker anywhere except the 8
specified position on the pad of the steering 19. After driving for 10 minutes or 5 km
other specialist in this event.
wheel. Affixing the sticker in an incorrect (3 miles), check the tyre pressure using
position could prevent the SRS airbag from
the air pressure gauge on the compres-
16. Turn OFF the compressor switch, then working normally.
sor. If the tyre pressure has apparently
pull the power cord plug out of the sock- not dropped, the emergency repair pro-
et. 18. When you have inflated the tyre to the cedure is complete. Continue the process
specified pressure, stow the compressor, from step 21.
NOTE bottle, and other items in the vehicle and If the tyre pressure is not sufficient, in-
promptly start driving the vehicle so that flate the tyre to the specified pressure
l Simply putting sealant and air into the tyre
the tyre sealant can spread evenly in the again and drive the vehicle carefully
using the tyre repair kit does not seal the
puncture hole. Air will leak through the tyre. Drive with great care. Do not ex- without exceeding a speed of 80 km/h
puncture hole until the emergency repair ceed a speed of 80 km/h (50 mph). Ob- (50 mph).
procedure is completed (through step 19 or serve local speed limits.
step 20 of these instructions).
17. Affix the speed restriction sticker (Q) to

the three-diamond mark on the steering
wheel.

How to change a tyre
CAUTION NOTE NOTE

l If the tyre pressure is lower than the mini- l In cold conditions (when the ambient tem- l Please give the empty sealant bottle to your
mum permitted pressure (1.3 bar {130 perature is 0 °C or lower), the time and driv- MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Serv-
kPa}), the tyre cannot successfully be re- ing distance necessary until completion of ice Point when you purchase new sealant or
paired with the tyre sealant. Do not drive the the repair can be longer than in warmer con- dispose of the sealant bottle according to na-
vehicle any further. Contact a MITSUBISHI ditions, meaning that the tyre pressure can tional regulations for the disposal of chemi-
MOTORS Authorized Service Point or an- drop below the specified level even when cal waste.
other specialist. you have inflated the tyre a second time and l A tyre in which puncture sealant has been
subsequently driven the vehicle. If this hap- used should ideally be replaced with a new
pens, inflate the tyre to the specified pres- one. If you wish to have such a tyre properly
20. After driving for 10 minutes or 5 km sure once more, drive for about 10 minutes repaired for reuse, please contact a
(3 miles), check the tyre pressure using or 5 km (3 miles), then check the tyre pres- MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Serv-
the air pressure gauge on the compres- sure again. If the tyre pressure has again ice Point or another specialist. Note that a
sor. If the tyre pressure has apparently dropped below the specified level, stop driv- proper repair is impossible following an
8 not dropped, the emergency repair pro- ing the vehicle and contact a MITSUBISHI emergency repair if the puncture hole cannot
cedure is complete. You must still not MOTORS Authorized Service Point or an- be located.
exceed a speed of 80 km/h (50 mph). other specialist. l The manufacturer is unable to guarantee that
all tyre punctures can be repaired with the
Observe local speed limits. tyre repair kit, in particular cuts or perfora-
21. Immediately drive with great care to a tions with a diameter of more than 4 mm or
NOTE Service Point and have tyre repair/
away from the tyre’s tread. The manufactur-
er is not liable for damage sustained through
l If the tyre pressure has dropped below the replacement performed. improper use of the tyre repair kit.
specified level when you check it at the end l The manufacturer is not liable for damage
of the repair procedure, do not drive the ve- sustained through re-use of any tyre in
hicle any further. Contact a MITSUBISHI CAUTION which tyre sealant has been used.
other specialist. l Be sure to check the tyre pressure for confir-
mation that the emergency repair procedure
is complete. How to change a tyre
Before changing a tyre, first stop your vehi-
cle in a safe, flat location.
1. Park the vehicle on level and stable
ground, free of loose pebbles, etc.
2. Set the parking brake firmly.

3. On vehicles with M/T, stop the engine WARNING CAUTION
and move the gearshift lever to the “R”
(Reverse) position. l Be sure to apply chocks or blocks to the l The pressure should be periodically checked
correct tyre when jacking up the vehicle. and maintained at the specified pressure
On vehicles with A/T or CVT, move the
If the vehicle moves while jacked up, the while the tyre is stowed.
selector lever to the “P” (PARK) posi- jack could slip out of position, leading to Driving with an insufficient tyre pressure
tion and stop the engine. an accident. can lead to an accident. If you have no
4. Turn on the hazard warning flashers and choice but to drive with an insufficient tyre
set up a warning triangle, flashing signal pressure, keep your speed down and inflate
lamp, etc., at an adequate distance from NOTE the tyre to the correct pressure as soon as
the vehicle, and have all your passengers possible. (Refer to “Tyre inflation pressures”
l The chocks shown in the illustration do not on page 10-11.)
leave the vehicle. come with your vehicle. It is recommended
5. To prevent the vehicle from rolling when that you keep one in the vehicle for use if
jacking up the vehicle, place chocks or needed. Temporary spare wheel*
blocks (A) at the tyre that is diagonally l If chocks are not available, use stones or any 8
opposite from the tyre (B) you are other objects that are large enough to hold CAUTION
the wheel in position.
changing. l The temporary spare wheel is for temporary
use only and should be removed as soon as
6. Get the jack bar and wheel nut wrench the original wheel can be repaired or re-
ready. placed.
Refer to “Tools and jack” on page 8-13. l The vehicle must not be driven at speeds in
excess of 80 km/h (50 mph) while using the
temporary spare wheel.
Spare wheel information* l The temporary spare wheel is not as good as
a standard wheel in controllability and sta-
The spare wheel is stored under the floor of
bility.
the luggage area. When the temporary spare wheel is used,
Check the air pressure of the spare tyre fre- avoid quick starts, sudden braking and sharp
quently and make sure it is ready for emer- steering.
gency use at any time. l The temporary spare wheel is specifically
designed for your vehicle and it should not
Maintaining the spare wheel at the highest be used on any other vehicle.
specified air pressure will ensure that it can
always be used under any conditions (city/
high-speed driving, varying load weight,
etc.).
CAUTION CAUTION
l When you purchase the temporary spare l Upon installation of the temporary spare
wheel, be sure to purchase the type designed wheel, the ground clearance is reduced as
specially for your vehicle from your the tyre is smaller in diameter than the stand-
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Serv- ard tyre.
ice Point. When passing over the projections on the
l Do not use snow traction device (tyre road, take care not to damage the vehicle’s
chains) with your temporary spare wheel. undercarriage.
Because of the smaller tyre size, a snow l Do not install more than one temporary
traction device (tyre chains) will not fit spare wheel at the same time.
properly. This could cause damage to the
wheel and result in loss of the snow traction
device (tyre chains). To remove the spare wheel CAUTION
If a front tyre becomes flat when using snow
8 traction device (tyre chains), first replace a
1. Open the tailgate and remove the tyre l Be careful as you loosen the tyre hanger in-
stallation bolt. If you loosen it too far, the
hanger installation bolt covers (A) with
rear wheel with the temporary spare wheel hook may come out and let the spare wheel
and then use the removed rear wheel to re- the jack bar.
fall.
place the flat front wheel so that you can
continue to use the snow traction device
(tyre chains). 3. Lift up the tyre hanger (B) at the section
indicated by the arrow in the diagram,
remove it from the hook (C), lower it,
and then take the tyre off the tyre hanger.
2. Loosen the tyre hanger installation bolt

by turning it anticlockwise with the
wheel nut wrench.

CAUTION Then loosen the wheel nuts a quarter WARNING

turn with the wheel nut wrench. Do not
l When removing the tyre hanger from the remove the wheel nuts yet. l Set the jack only at the positions shown
hook or hanging it back on the hook, hold here. If the jack is set at a wrong position,
the tyre hanger carefully so that it does not it could dent your vehicle or the jack
drop on your feet. might fall over and cause personal injury.
l Do not use the jack on a tilted or soft sur-
face.
NOTE Otherwise, the jack might slip and cause
personal injury. Always use the jack on a
l Put the spare wheel under the vehicle body
flat, hard surface. Before setting the jack,
near the jack. This makes it safer if the jack
make sure there are no sand or pebbles
slips out of position.
under the jack base.
3. Rotate the jack by hand until the flange 8

portion (B) fits in the groove (C) at the
2. Place the jack under one of the jacking top of the jack.
points (A) shown in the illustration. Use
the jacking point closest to the tyre you
wish to change.
To change a tyre
1. On vehicles with wheel covers, first re-
move the covers (refer to “Wheel cov-
ers” on page 8-27).
4. Insert the jack bar (D) into the wheel nut
wrench (E). Then put the end of the jack
bar into the shaft’s jack end, as shown in
the illustration.

Slowly rotate the wheel nut wrench until WARNING WARNING
the tyre is raised slightly off the ground
surface. l Do not turn the raised wheel. The tyres l Mount the spare wheel with the valve
still on the ground could turn and make stem (I) facing outboard. If you cannot see
your vehicle fall off the jack. the valve stem (I), you have installed the
wheel backwards.
Operating the vehicle with the spare
5. Remove the wheel nuts with the wheel wheel installed backwards can cause vehi-
nut wrench, then take the wheel off. cle damage and result in an accident.
CAUTION
l Handle the wheel carefully when changing
the tyre, to avoid scratching the wheel sur-
face.
8
6. Clean out any mud, etc. on the hub sur-
WARNING face (F), hub bolts (G) or in the installa-
tion holes (H) in the wheel, and then
l Stop jacking up the vehicle as soon as the
mount the spare tyre.
tyre is raised off the ground. It is danger-
ous to raise the vehicle any higher.
l Do not get under your vehicle while using 7. Turn the wheel nuts clockwise by hand
the jack. to initially tighten them.
l Do not bump the raised vehicle or leave it [Type 1: On vehicles with steel wheels]
sitting on the jack for a long time. Both
are very dangerous.
Temporarily tighten the wheel nuts by
hand until the tapered parts of the wheel
l Do not use a jack except the one that
came with your vehicle. nuts make light contact with the seats of
l The jack should not be used for any pur- the wheel holes and the wheel is not
pose other than to change a tyre. loose.
l No one should be in your vehicle when us- [Type 2: On vehicles with aluminium
ing the jack. wheels]
l Do not start or run the engine while your
Temporarily tighten the wheel nuts by
vehicle is on the jack.
hand until the flange parts of the wheel

nuts make light contact with the wheel CAUTION Tightening torque 88 to 108 N•m
and the wheel is not loose.
l Never apply oil to either the wheel bolts or
the nuts, or they will tighten too much.
Type 1
NOTE
l If all 4 aluminium wheels are changed to
Type 2 steel wheels. e. g. when fitting winter tyres,
use tapered nuts.
8. Lower the vehicle slowly by rotating the

wheel nut wrench anticlockwise until the
tyre touches the ground.
CAUTION 8
NOTE l Never use your foot or a pipe extension for
l Flange nuts can be temporarily used on the extra force in the wheel nut wrench. If you
steel spare wheel as shown in the illustra- do so, you will tighten the nut too much.
tion, but return to the original wheel and tyre
as soon as possible.
10. On vehicles with wheel covers, install
the covers (refer to “Wheel covers” on
page 8-27).
11. Lower and remove the jack, then store
the jack, flat tyre, and chocks. Have your
damaged tyre repaired as soon as possi-
ble.
9. Tighten the nuts in the order shown in
the illustration until each nut has been
tightened to the torque listed here.

12. Check your tyre inflation pressure at the CAUTION
next gasstation. The correct tyre pres-
sures are shown on the driver’s door la- l Do not mix one type of tyre with another or
use a different size from the one listed. This
bel. See the illustration.
would cause early wear and poor handling.
To store the spare wheel

1. Put the tyre on the centre of the tyre
hanger, with the wheel surface facing
upwards.
CAUTION
CAUTION
8 l Storing the tyre with the wheel surface fac-
l Do not attach the hook to any part of the tyre
hanger other than the correct position. Other-
ing down may damage the wheel or tyre wise the hook could damage the vehicle
hanger. If you find any damage on a spare body, or the tyre could fall while driving and
13. On vehicles with tyre pressure monitor- tyre, do not use the tyre and contact a cause an accident.
ing system (TPMS), after filling your MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Serv-
tyres to the correct pressure, reset the ice Point.
l The tyre hanger cannot be used for the punc- 3. Open the tailgate and tighten the tyre
tyre pressure monitoring system
tured tyre. If you carry the punctured tyre, hanger installation bolt securely by turn-
(TPMS). securely store the punctured tyre in the lug- ing it clockwise with the wheel nut
Refer to “Tyre pressure monitoring sys- gage room. wrench.
tem (TPMS): Reset of low tyre pressure
warning threshold” on page 6-119.
2. Lift up the tyre hanger (A) and hang it
on the hook (B).
CAUTION
l After changing the tyre and driving the vehi-
cle about 1,000 km (620 miles), retighten the
wheel nuts to make sure that they have not
come loose.
l If the steering wheel vibrates when driving
after changing the tyre, we recommend you
to have the tyres checked for balance.

CAUTION Wheel covers* To install

l After storing the spare wheel, check that the 1. Make sure the tabs (A) of the back of the
tyre hanger is securely locked in place. If the To remove wheel cover are not broken and correctly
tyre hanger is not securely locked in place, it fitted on the rings (B). If in doubt, do not
Wrap the tip of the jack bar with a cloth, in-
could come loose and fall while you are install the wheel cover and consult your
driving and cause an accident. sert it into the notch provided in the wheel
cover, and pry the cover away from the MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized
l When removing the tyre hanger from the
Service Point.
hook or hanging it back on the hook, hold wheel. Using the same procedure at the other
the tyre hanger carefully so that it does not wheel cover notches, work the wheel cover
drop on your feet. away from the wheel to remove it complete-
ly.
4. Install the tyre hanger installation bolt
cover.
8
To store the tools and jack
Reverse the removing procedure when stor-
ing the jack, jack bar and wheel nut wrench.
Refer to “Tools and jack” on page 8-13.
2. Align the air valve (C) of the tyre with

the notch (D) in the wheel cover.
CAUTION
l Removing the cover with your hands may
cause injury to the fingers.
NOTE
l The wheel cover is made of plastic. Pry it
loose carefully.

Towing
NOTE Towing The regulations concerning towing may dif-

fer from country to country. It is recommen-
l Full wheel covers have a symbol mark (E) ded that you obey the regulations of the area
provided on the reverse side to show the air
If your vehicle needs to be tow- where you are driving your vehicle.
valve location.
Before installing the wheel cover to the ed
wheel, make sure that the opening with the
symbol mark is correctly aligned with the air If towing is necessary, we recommend you to
valve.
have it done by your MITSUBISHI
MOTORS Authorized Service Point or a
3. Push the underside (F) of the wheel cov- commercial tow truck service. Do not tow 4WD vehicles, or 2WD vehicles
er into the wheel. with CVT, with this style.
4. Gently push both sides (G) of the wheel In the following cases, transport the vehicle
cover and hold them in place with both
8 knees.
using a tow truck.
l The engine runs but the vehicle does not Do not tow 4WD vehicles with this style.
5. Gently tap around the circumference of move or abnormal noise is produced.
the wheel cover at the top (H), then push l Inspection of the vehicle’s underside re-
the wheel cover into place. veals that oil or some other fluid is leak-
ing.
If a wheel gets stuck in a ditch, do not try to

tow the vehicle.
Please contact your MITSUBISHI MOTORS
Authorized Service Point or a commercial
tow truck service for assistance.
Only when you cannot receive a towing serv-

ice from a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Author-
ized Service Point or commercial tow truck
service, tow your vehicle carefully in accord-
ance with the instructions given in “Emergen-
cy towing” in this part.

Towing
Towing the vehicle by a tow CAUTION Turn the ignition switch to the “ACC” posi-
truck tion or put the operation mode in ACC and
l [For 2WD vehicles equipped with the Active secure the steering wheel in a straight-ahead
Stability Control (ASC)]
position with a rope or tiedown strap. Never
CAUTION If the vehicle is towed with the ignition
place the ignition switch in the “LOCK” po-
switch in the “ON” position or the operation
l This vehicle must not be towed by a tow mode in ON and only the front wheels or on- sition or put the operation mode in OFF when
truck using sling lift type equipment (Type ly the rear wheels raised off the ground towing.
A) as illustrated. Using a sling lift will dam- (Type B or C), the ASC may operate, result-
age the bumper and front end. ing in an accident. When towing the vehicle Towing with front wheels off the
l Do not tow 2WD vehicles with CVT with with the rear wheels raised, turn the ignition ground (Type C - 2WD vehicles
the driving wheels on the ground (Type B)
as illustrated.
switch to the “ACC” position or put the op- only)
eration mode in ACC. When towing the ve-
This could result in the driving system dam- hicle with the front wheels raised, keep the Release the parking brake.
age. ignition switch or the operation mode as fol- Place the gearshift lever in the “N” (Neutral)
l Do not tow 4WD vehicles with the front or lows. position (M/T) or the selector lever in the
8
rear wheels on the ground (Type B or Type [Except vehicles equipped with keyless op-
C) as illustrated. This could result in driving “N” (Neutral) position (CVT).
eration system]
system damage or the vehicle may jump at The ignition switch is in the “LOCK” or
the carriage. “ACC” position. Emergency towing
If you tow 4WD vehicles, use Type D or E [Vehicles equipped with keyless operation
equipment. system] If towing service is not available in an emer-
l On 2WD vehicles, if the transmission is mal- The operation mode is in OFF or ACC. gency, your vehicle may be temporarily tow-
functioning or damaged, transport the vehi- ed by a rope secured to the towing hook.
cle with the driving wheels on a carriage
(Type C, D or E) as illustrated. Towing with rear wheels off the If your vehicle is to be towed by another ve-
ground (Type B - 2WD vehicles hicle or if your vehicle tows another vehicle,
with M/T only) pay careful attention to the following points:
Place the gearshift lever in the “N” (Neutral) If your vehicle is to be towed by
position. another vehicle
1. The front towing hooks are located as
shown in illustration. Secure the tow
rope to the front towing hook.

Towing
On vehicles with M/T, turn the ignition CAUTION
switch to the “ACC” or “ON” position.
On vehicles with A/T or CVT, turn the l Do not leave the ignition switch in the
“LOCK” position or the operation mode in
ignition switch to the “ON” position.
OFF. The steering wheel will lock, causing
[For vehicles with the keyless operation loss of control.
system] l For vehicle equipped with the Adaptive
On vehicles with M/T, put the operation Cruise Control system (ACC) and Forward
mode in ACC or ON. Collision Mitigation system (FCM), stop
On vehicles with A/T or CVT, put the these systems to prevent an unexpected acci-
operation mode in ON. dent or unexpected operation during towing.
Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control System
(ACC)” on page 6-78 and “Forward Colli-
NOTE NOTE sion Mitigation System (FCM)” on page
6-89.
8 l Using any part other than the designated
towing hook could result in damage to vehi- l For vehicles equipped with the Auto Stop &
Go (AS&G) system, press the “Auto Stop &
cle body.
Go (AS&G) OFF” switch to deactivate the 3. Place the gearshift lever in the “Neutral”
l Using a wire rope or metal chain can result
Auto Stop & Go (AS&G) system before position (M/T), or the selector lever in
in damage to the vehicle body. It is best to
stopping the vehicle. the “N” (Neutral) position (A/T or
use a non-metallic rope. If you use a wire
Refer to “To deactivate” on page 6-30.
rope or metal chain, wrap it with cloth at any CVT).
point where it touches the vehicle body. 4. Turn on the hazard warning lamps if re-
l Use care that the tow rope is kept as hori-
WARNING quired by law. (Follow the local driving
zontal as possible. An angled tow rope can laws and regulations.)
damage the vehicle body. l When the engine is not running, the brake 5. During towing make sure that close con-
l Secure the tow rope to the same side towing booster and power steering system do not
hook, to keep the tow rope as straight as pos- operate. This means higher brake depres- tact is maintained between the drivers of
sible. sion force and higher steering effort are both vehicles, and that the vehicles trav-
required. Therefore, vehicle operation is el at low speed.
very difficult.
2. Keep the engine running.
If the engine is not running, perform the
following operation to unlock the steer-
ing wheel.
[Except vehicles equipped with keyless
operation system]

Operation under adverse driving conditions
WARNING If your vehicle tows another ve- NOTE

hicle
l Avoid sudden braking, acceleration and l Do not tow a vehicle heavier than your own
steering wheel movements; such driving Only use the rear towing hook as shown in vehicle.
operation could cause damage to the tow- the illustration.
ing hook or tow rope. Secure the tow rope to the rear towing hook.
People in the vicinity could be injured as a Otherwise, the instructions are the same as
result.
for “When being towed by another vehicle”.
l When going down a long slope, the brakes
may overheat, reducing effectiveness.
Have your vehicle transported by a tow
truck.
CAUTION 8
l The person in the vehicle being towed must
pay attention to the brake lamps of the tow- Operation under adverse
ing vehicle and make sure the rope never be-
comes slack. driving conditions
l When the vehicle equipped with A/T or
CVT is to be towed by another vehicle with
the all wheels on the ground, make sure that On a flooded road
the towing speed and distance given below NOTE
are never exceeded, causing damage to the
l Using any part other than the designated l Avoid flooded roads. Water could enter
transmission. towing hook could result in damage to vehi- the brake discs, resulting in temporarily
cle body. ineffective brakes. In such cases, lightly
Towing speed: 40 km/h (25 mph) depress the brake pedal to see if the
Towing distance: 40 km (25 miles)
brakes operate properly. If they do not,
For the towing speed and the towing dis- lightly depress the pedal several times
tance, follow the local driving laws and reg- while driving in order to dry the brake
ulations. pads.

Operation under adverse driving conditions
l When driving in rain or on a road with l Depressing the brake pedal during travel CAUTION
many puddles a layer of water may form on snowy or icy roads may cause tyre
between the tyres and the road surface. slippage and skidding. When traction be- l The impact on tyres and/or wheels when
driving on a bumpy or rutted road can dam-
This reduces a tyre’s frictional resistance tween the tyres and the road is reduced
age the tyre and/or wheel.
on the road, resulting in loss of steering the wheels may skid and the vehicle can-
stability and braking capability. not readily be brought to a stop by con-
ventional braking techniques. Braking This vehicle is intended for driving mainly
To cope with this, observe the following will differ, depending upon whether you on roads with firm surface.
items: have anti-lock brake system (ABS). As 4WD system (if available on your vehicle)
your vehicle is equipped with ABS, makes possible driving on roads without spe-
(a) Drive your vehicle at slow brake by pressing the brake pedal hard, cial coverage, on flat and firm surface.
speed. and keeping it pressed. Please, remember that off-road ability of your
(b) Do not drive on worn tyres. l Allow extra distance between your vehi- vehicle is limited. Your vehicle is not inten-
8 cle and the vehicle in front of you, and ded for driving in heavy offroad, overcoming
(c) Always maintain the specified the rugged terrain, deep ruts, etc.
avoid sudden braking.
tyre inflation pressures.
l Accumulation of ice on the braking sys-
tem can cause the wheels to lock. Pull Manufacturer of the vehicle is proceeding
On a snow-covered or frozen away from a standstill slowly after con- from the following assumption:
road firming safety around the vehicle. taking the decision to keep driving under
conditions mentioned above, driver takes all
l When driving on a snow-covered or fro- actions at own risk, aware of possible conse-
zen road, it is recommended that you use CAUTION quences.
snow tyres or snow traction device (tyre l Do not press the accelerator pedal rapidly. If
chains). the wheels break free of the ice, the vehicle
Refer to the “Snow tyres” and “Snow could suddenly start moving and possibly
traction device (tyre chains)” sections. cause an accident.
l Avoid high-speed operation, sudden ac-
celeration, abrupt brake application and On a bumpy or rutted road
sharp cornering.
Drive as slow as possible when driving on
bumpy or rutted roads.

Vehicle care
Vehicle care precautions......................................................................9-02

Cleaning the interior of your vehicle.................................................. 9-02
Cleaning the exterior of your vehicle..................................................9-03
OGFE20E1
Vehicle care precautions
Vehicle care precautions Cleaning the interior of your NOTE

In order to maintain the value of your vehi-
vehicle l Do not use cleaners, conditioners, and pro-
tectants containing silicons or wax.
cle, it is necessary to perform regular mainte- After cleaning the interior of your vehicle Such products, when applied to the instru-
nance using the proper procedures. with water, cleaner or similar, wipe and dry ment panels or other parts, may cause reflec-
Always maintain your vehicle in compliance tions on the windscreen and obscure vision.
in a shady, well-ventilated area. Also, if such products get on the switches of
with environmental pollution control regula-
the electrical accessories, it may lead to fail-
tions.
Carefully select the materials used for wash- NOTE ure of these accessories.
l Do not use synthetic fiber or dry cloth. They
ing, etc., to be sure that they do not contain l To clean the inside of the tailgate window, can cause discolouring or damage the sur-
corrosives. always use a soft cloth and wipe the window face.
If in doubt, we recommend you to consult a glass along the demister heater element so as l Do not place a deodorizer on the instrument
specialist for selection of these materials. not to cause damage. panel or near lamps and instruments. The in-
gredients for deodorizer can cause discolour-
ing or cracking.
9 CAUTION CAUTION
l Cleaning products can be dangerous. Always l Do not use organic substances (solvents,
Upholstery
follow the instructions of the cleaning prod- benzine, kerosene, alcohol, petrol, etc.) or
uct supplier. alkaline or acidic solutions. 1. To maintain the value of your new vehi-
l To avoid damage, never use the following to These chemicals can cause discolouring, cle, handle the upholstery carefully and
clean your vehicle: staining or cracking of the surface. keep the interior clean.
• Petrol If you use cleaners or polishing agents, make Use a vacuum cleaner and brush to clean
• Paint Thinner sure their ingredients do not include the sub-
stances mentioned above.
the seats. If stained, vinyl and synthetic
• Benzine leather should be cleaned with an appro-
• Kerosene priate cleaner. Cloth fabrics can be
• Turpentine Plastic, vinyl leather, fabric cleaned with either upholstery cleaner or
• Naphtha and flocked parts a mild soap and water solution.
• Lacquer Thinner 2. Clean the carpeting with a vacuum
• Carbon Tetrachloride 1. Lightly wipe these off with a soft cloth
soaked in a mild soap and water solu- cleaner and remove any stains with car-
• Nail Polish Remover pet cleaner. Oil and grease can be re-
• Acetone tion.
2. Dip cloth in fresh water and wring it out moved by lightly dabbing with a clean
well. Using this cloth, wipe off the deter- colourfast cloth and stain remover.
gent thoroughly.
9-02 Vehicle care OGFE20E1
Cleaning the exterior of your vehicle
Genuine leather* Cleaning the exterior of Use a mild car washing soap if necessary.
Rinse thoroughly and wipe dry with a soft
1. To clean, lightly wipe the leather with a your vehicle cloth. After washing the vehicle, carefully
soft cloth soaked in a mild soap and wa-
clean the joints and flanges of the doors, bon-
ter solution. If the following is left on your vehicle, it may net and other sections where dirt is likely to
2. Dip cloth in fresh water and wring it out cause corrosion, discolouration and stains, remain.
well. Using this cloth, wipe off the deter- wash the vehicle as soon as possible.
gent thoroughly. l Seawater, road deicing products.
3. Apply leather protecting agent to the l Soot and dust, iron powder from facto- CAUTION
genuine leather surface. ries, chemical substance (acids, alkalis, l When washing the under side of your vehi-
coal-tar, etc.). cle or wheel, be careful not to injure your
hands.
NOTE l Droppings from birds, carcasses of in-
sects, tree sap, etc. l As your vehicle has rain sensor, place the
l If genuine leather is wet with water or is wiper switch lever in the “OFF” position to
washed in water, wipe off water as quickly deactivate the rain sensor before washing the
as possible with a dry, soft cloth. If left Washing vehicle. Otherwise, the wipers will operate
damp, mildew may grow. in the presence of water spray on the wind- 9
Chemicals contained in the dirt and dust
l Organic solvents such as benzine, kerosene,
picked up from the road surface can damage
screen and may get damaged as a result.
alcohol and petrol, acid or alkaline solvents l Refrain from excessively using a car wash as
may discolour the genuine leather surface. the paint coat and body of your vehicle if left its brushes may scratch the paint surface,
Be sure to use neutral detergents. in prolonged contact. causing it to lose its gloss. Scratches will be
l Remove dirty patches or oil substances Frequent washing and waxing is the best way especially visible on darker coloured vehi-
quickly as they can stain genuine leather. to protect your vehicle from this damage. cles.
l The genuine leather surface may harden and This will also be effective in protecting it l Never spray or splash water on the electrical
shrink if it is exposed to direct sun for long components in the engine compartment. Do-
from environmental elements such as rain,
hours. When your vehicle is parked, place it ing so could have an adverse effect on the
in the shade as much as possible. snow, salt air, etc. engine startability.
l When the temperature of the vehicle interior Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. Exercise caution also when washing the un-
rises in summer, vinyl products left on the Park the vehicle in the shade and spray it derbody; be careful not to spray water into
genuine leather seat (if so equipped) may de- with water to remove dust. Next, using an the engine compartment.
teriorate and stick to the seat. ample amount of clean water and a car wash- l Some types of hot water washing equipment
ing brush or sponge, wash the vehicle from apply high pressure and heat to the vehicle.
top to bottom. They may cause heat distortion and damage
to the vehicle resin parts and may result in
flooding of the vehicle interior.
OGFE20E1 Vehicle care 9-03

CAUTION CAUTION Do not wax your vehicle in direct sunlight.

You should wax after the surfaces have
Therefore: • If your vehicle is equipped with the Ultra- cooled.
• Maintain a distance of approx. 70 cm or sonic misacceleration Mitigation System
For information on how to use wax refer to
more between the vehicle body and the (UMS), turn off the system.
washing nozzle. Refer to “FCM and UMS ON/OFF the instruction manual of the wax.
• When washing around the door glass, switch” on page 6-94.
hold the nozzle at a distance of more than CAUTION
70 cm and at right angles to the glass sur- During cold weather
face. l Waxes containing high abrasive compounds
l After washing the vehicle, drive the vehicle Salt and other chemicals spread on the roads should not be used.
slowly while lightly depressing the brake in some areas in winter can have a harmful l On vehicles with a sunroof, be careful when
pedal several times in order to dry out the waxing the area around the sunroof opening,
effect on the vehicle body. You should there-
brakes. not to put any wax on the weatherstrip
fore wash the vehicle as often as possible in (black rubber). If stained with wax, the
Leaving the brakes wet could result in re-
duced braking performance. Also, there is a accordance with our care-instructions. It is weatherstrip cannot maintain a weatherproof
possibility that they could freeze up or be- recommended to have a preservative applied seal with the sunroof.
9 come inoperative due to rust, rendering the and the underfloor protection checked before
vehicle unable to move. and after the cold weather season.
l When using an automatic car wash, pay at- After washing your vehicle, wipe off all wa-
Polishing
tention to the following items, referring to terdrops from the rubber parts around the The vehicle should only be polished if the
the operation manual or consulting a car paintwork has become stained or lost its lus-
doors to prevent the doors from freezing.
wash operator. If the following procedure is
tre. Do not polish parts with a mat coating
not followed, it could result in damage to
and the plastic bumpers. Doing so could
your vehicle. NOTE cause stains or damage the finish.
• The outside mirrors are retracted.
• The wiper arms are secured in place with l To prevent freezing of the weatherstripping
tape.
on the doors, bonnet, etc., they should be Cleaning plastic parts
treated with silicone spray.
• If your vehicle is equipped with roof rails Use a sponge or chamois leather.
or a roof spoiler, consult a car wash oper- If a car wax adheres on a grey or black rough
ator before using the car wash. Waxing surface of the bumper, moulding or lamps,
• As your vehicle has a rain sensor, place the surface becomes white. In such a case,
the wiper switch lever in the “OFF” posi- Waxing the vehicle will help prevent the ad-
tion to deactivate the rain sensor. herence of dust and road chemicals to the wipe it off using lukewarm water and soft
paintwork. Apply a wax solution after wash- cloth or chamois leather.
ing the vehicle, or at least once every three
months to assist displacing of water.
CAUTION CAUTION Wiper blades

l Do not use a scrubbing brush or other hard l Do not use a brush or other hard implement Use a soft cloth and glass cleaner to remove
tools as they may damage the plastic part on the wheels. grease, dead insects, etc., from the wiper
surface. Doing so could scratch the wheels. blades. Replace the wiper blades when they
l Do not bring the plastic parts into contact l Do not use any cleaner that contains an abra- no longer wipe properly. (Refer to page
with petrol, light oil, brake fluids, engine sive substance or is acidic or alkaline. Doing 10-15.)
oils, greases, paint thinners, and sulphuric so could cause the coating on the wheels to
acid (battery electrolyte) which may crack, peel or become discoloured or stained. Cleaning the sunroof*
stain or discolour the plastic parts. l Do not directly apply hot water using a
If they touch the plastic parts, wipe them off steam cleaner or by any other means. Use a soft cloth to clean the inner side of the
with soft cloth, chamois or the like and an l Contact with seawater and road deicer can sunroof. Hard deposits should be wiped away
aqueous solution of neutral detergent then cause corrosion. Rinse off such substances with a cloth dipped in warm, neutral deter-
immediately rinse the affected parts with as soon as possible. gent solution. Wipe away the solution with a
water. sponge dipped in fresh water.
Window glass
Chrome parts The window glass can normally be cleaned NOTE 9
In order to prevent spots and corrosion of using only a sponge and water. l The surface treatment on the inside of the
chrome parts, wash with water, dry thorough- Glass cleaner can be used to remove oil, glass may be removed if hard cloth or organ-
ly, and apply a special protective coating. grease, dead insects, etc. After washing the ic solvent (benzine, kerosene, thinner, etc.)
This should be done more frequently in win- glass, wipe dry with a clean, dry, soft cloth. is used.
ter. Never use a cloth that is used for cleaning a
Aluminium wheels*
painted surface to clean a window. Wax from Engine compartment
the painted surface could get on the glass and
1. Remove dirt using a sponge while sprin- Clean the engine compartment at the begin-
lower glass transparency and visibility.
kling water on the wheels. ning and end of winter. Pay particular atten-
2. Use neutral detergent on any dirt that tion to flanges, crevices and peripheral parts
cannot be removed easily with water.
NOTE where dust containing road chemicals and
Rinse off the neutral detergent after l To clean the inside of the rear window, al- other corrosive materials might collect.
washing the wheels. ways use a soft cloth and wipe the window If salt and other chemicals are used on the
3. Dry the wheels thoroughly using a cha- glass along the demister heater element so as roads in your area, clean the engine compart-
not to cause damage. ment at least every three months.
mois leather or a soft cloth.
OGFE20E1 Vehicle care 9-05

Never spray or splash water on the electrical
components in the engine compartment, as
this may cause damage.
Do not bring the nearby parts, the plastic
parts and so on into contact with sulphuric
acid (battery electrolyte) which may crack,
stain or discolour them.
If they are in contact, wipe off with soft
cloth, chamois or the like and an aqueous sol-
ution of neutral detergent then immediately
rinse the affected parts with plenty of water.

Maintenance
Service precautions........................................................................... 10-02

Catalytic converter*.......................................................................... 10-04
Bonnet............................................................................................... 10-04
Engine oil.......................................................................................... 10-05
Engine coolant...................................................................................10-06
Washer fluid...................................................................................... 10-08
Brake fluid/Clutch fluid*.................................................................. 10-08
Battery...............................................................................................10-09
Tyres.................................................................................................. 10-11
Wiper blade rubber replacement....................................................... 10-15
General maintenance.........................................................................10-17
Fusible links...................................................................................... 10-17
Fuses..................................................................................................10-18 10
Replacement of lamp bulbs...............................................................10-25
OGFE20E1
Service precautions
Service precautions A- Cooling fans WARNING

B- Caution label l Improper handling of components and
Adequate care of your vehicle at regular in- materials used in the vehicle can endanger
tervals serves to preserve the value and ap- your personal safety. We recommend you
pearance as long as possible. to consult a specialist for necessary infor-
Maintenance items as described in this own- WARNING mation.
er’s manual can be performed by the owner.
We recommend you to have the periodic in- l When checking or servicing the inside of
the engine compartment, make sure the Check items of engine compartment are loca-
spection and maintenance performed by a engine is switched off and has had a ted as shown in the figure below.
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service chance to cool down.
Point or another specialist. l If it is necessary to do work in the engine
In the event a malfunction or a problem is compartment with the engine running, be
discovered, we recommend you to have it especially careful that your clothing, hair,
checked and repaired. This section contains etc., does not become caught by the cool-
ing fans, drive belts, or other moving
information on inspection maintenance pro- parts.
cedures that you can do yourself. Follow the
l The cooling fans can turn on automatical-
10 instructions and cautions for each of the vari- ly even if the engine is not running. Turn
ous procedures. the ignition switch to the “LOCK” posi-
tion to be safe while you work in the en-
gine compartment.
l Do not smoke, cause sparks or allow open
flames around fuel or battery. The fumes
are flammable.
l Be extremely cautious when working
around the battery. It contains poisonous
and corrosive sulphuric acid.
l Do not get under your vehicle with just
the body jack supporting it. Always use
automotive jack stands.
10-02 Maintenance OGFE20E1

Service precautions
2000 models, 2400 models 2000 models

LHD RHD
3000 models
LHD
10
1. Engine oil level gauge 5. Engine coolant reservoir

2. Engine oil cap 6. Battery
3. Brake fluid reservoir/Clutch fluid reser-
voir*
4. Washer fluid reservoir
OGFE20E1 Maintenance 10-03
Catalytic converter*
Catalytic converter* Bonnet NOTE

l Only open the bonnet when the wipers are in
The exhaust gas scavenging devices used the original position. In any other position,
with the catalytic converter are extremely ef- To open the wipers could damage the paint or bonnet.
ficient for the reduction of noxious gases.
The catalytic converter is installed in the ex- 1. Pull the release lever towards you to un-
3. Support the bonnet by inserting the sup-
haust system. lock the bonnet.
port bar in its slot.
It is important to keep the engine properly
tuned to ensure proper catalyst operation and
prevent possible catalyst damage.
WARNING
l As with any vehicle, do not park or oper-
ate this vehicle in areas where combusti-
ble materials such as dry grass or leaves
can come in contact with a hot exhaust
10 since a fire could occur.
l Paint should not be applied to the catalyt-
ic converter.
2. Raise the bonnet while pressing the safe-
ty lock. CAUTION
NOTE l Note that the support bar may disengage the
bonnet if the open bonnet is lifted by a
l Use fuel of the type recommended in “Fuel
strong wind.
selection” on page 2-02.
l After inserting the support bar into the slot,
make sure the bar supports the bonnet se-
curely from falling down on to your head or
body.
To close
1. Unlatch the support bar and clip it in its
holder.

Engine oil
2. Slowly lower the bonnet to a position NOTE 2000 models, 2400 models
about 20 cm above the closed position,
then let it drop. l For vehicles equipped with the multi infor-
mation display - type 1, security alarm sys-
3. Make sure the bonnet is securely locked
tem or Auto Stop & Go (AS&G) system, if
by softly lifting the centre of the bonnet. you drive with the bonnet left open, the
warning display is displayed on the informa-
tion screen in the multi-information display.
3000 models
Engine oil
10
CAUTION
To check and refill engine oil
l Be careful that hands or fingers are not trap-
ped when closing the bonnet. A- Minimum level
l Before driving, make sure that the bonnet is B- Maximum level
securely locked. An incompletely locked
bonnet can suddenly open while driving. C- Oil replacement indication mark
This can be extremely dangerous.
NOTE
l If this does not close the bonnet, release it The engine oil used has a significant effect on
from a slightly higher position. the engine’s performance, service life and
l Do not press down firmly on the bonnet as startability. Be sure to use oil of the recom-
doing so could damage it.
mended quality and appropriate viscosity.

Engine coolant
All engines consume a certain amount of oil NOTE
during normal operation. Therefore, it is im-
portant to check the oil level at regular inter- • When the oil level is checked in step 6
above, check it on a low side of the dip-
vals or before starting a long trip.
stick because it is different in appearance
1. Park the vehicle on a horizontal surface. of oil level in the two sides of the dip-
2. Switch off the engine. stick.
3. Wait a few minutes. • The oil level should be within the range
4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it with a (A) to (B) on the dipstick.
clean cloth. l The engine oil will deteriorate rapidly if the
5. Reinsert the dipstick as far as it goes. vehicle is subjected to severe conditions, re-
quiring earlier oil replacement.
6. Remove the dipstick and read the oil lev-
Please refer to the maintenance schedule.
el, which should always be within the
l For handling of used engine oils, refer to
l Select engine oil of the proper SAE vis-
range indicated. page 2-05.
7. If the oil level is below the specified cosity number according to the atmos-
limit, remove the cap located on the cyl- pheric temperature.
inder head cover and add enough oil to
Recommended engine oil vis- l Use engine oil conforming to the follow-
cosity ing classification:
10 raise the level to within the specified
• API classification: “For service SM”
range. Do not overfill to avoid engine
damage. Be sure to use the specified en- NOTE or higher
gine oil and do not mix various types of • ILSAC certificated oil
l Use of additives is not recommended since
oil. they may reduce the effectiveness of addi- • ACEA classification:
8. After adding oil, close the cap securely. tives already included in the engine oil. It “For service A3/B3, A3/B4 or A5/B5”
9. Confirm the oil level by repeating step 4 may result in failure of the mechanical as-
sembly.
to 6.
l If those classifications are not available, Engine coolant
NOTE ized Service Point.
To check the coolant level
l For 3000 models, if it is difficult to verify
the oil level, wipe off the dipstick and rein-
sert it. Wait a moment and then recheck the
A transparent coolant reserve tank (A) is lo-
oil level by checking the upper surface of the cated in the engine compartment.
dipstick.
l Check or refill the oil according to the fol-
lowing manner.
Engine coolant
The coolant level in this tank should be kept If the level should drop below the “LOW” MITSUBISHI MOTORS GENUINE Coolant
between the “LOW” and “FULL” marks level on the reserve tank, open the lid and has excellent protection against corrosion and
when measured while the engine is cold. add coolant. rust formation of all metals including alumi-
Also, if the reserve tank is completely empty, nium and can avoid blockages in the radiator,
remove the radiator cap (B) and add coolant heater, cylinder head, engine block, etc.
until the level reaches the filler neck. Because of the necessity of this anti-corro-
sion agent, the coolant must not be replaced
WARNING with plain water even in summer. The re-
quired concentration of anti-freeze differs de-
l Do not open the radiator cap (B) while the pending on the expected ambient tempera-
engine is hot. The coolant system is under
ture.
pressure and any hot coolant escaping
could cause severe burns.
Above -35 °C: 50 % concentration of anti-
freeze
Anti-freeze Below -35 °C: 60 % concentration of anti-
FULL freeze
The engine coolant contains an ethylene gly-
col anti-corrosion agent. Some parts of the 10
engine are cast aluminium alloy, and periodic CAUTION
changing of the engine coolant is necessary
LOW l Do not use alcohol or methanol anti-freeze
to prevent corrosion of these parts. or any engine coolants mixed with alcohol
or methanol anti-freeze. The use of an im-
Use “MITSUBISHI MOTORS GENUINE proper anti-freeze can cause corrosion of the
*: Front of the vehicle SUPER LONG LIFE COOLANT PREMI- aluminium components.
UM” or equivalent*. l Do not use water to adjust the concentration
of coolant.
To add coolant
*: similar high quality ethylene glycol l Concentrations exceeding 60 % will result in
based non-silicate, nonamine, non-ni- a reduction of both the anti-freeze and cool-
The cooling system is a closed system and ing performance thus adversely affecting the
normally the loss of coolant should be very trate and non-borate coolant with long engine.
slight. A noticeable drop in the coolant level life hybrid organic acid technology
could indicate leakage. If this occurs, we rec-
ommend you to have the system checked as
soon as possible.

Washer fluid
CAUTION If the level is low, replenish the container To check the fluid level
with washer fluid.
l Do not top up with water only. The fluid level must be between the “MAX”
Water by itself reduces the rust-protective
and anti-freeze qualities of the coolant and
and “MIN” marks on the reservoir.
has a lower boiling point. It can also cause
damage to the cooling system if it should
freeze. Do not use tapwater, as it can cause
corrosion and rust formation.
EMPTY
FULL
During cold weather
If the temperatures in your area drop below
freezing, there is the danger that the coolant
in the engine or radiator could freeze and
cause severe damage to the engine and/or ra-
diator. Add a sufficient amount of anti-freeze
to the coolant to prevent it from freezing. NOTE
The fluid level is monitored by a float. When
10 The concentration should be checked before l The washer fluid container serves the wind- the fluid level falls below the “MIN” mark,
the start of cold weather and anti-freeze add- screen, rear window and headlamps (if so
equipped). the brake fluid warning lamp lights up.
ed to the system if necessary.
The fluid level falls slightly with wear of the
During cold weather brake pads, but this does not indicate any ab-
Washer fluid normality.
To ensure proper operation of the washers at
Open the washer fluid reservoir cap and The fluid in the master cylinder should be
low temperatures, use a fluid containing an
check the level of washer fluid with the dip- checked when doing other work under the
anti-freezing agent.
stick. bonnet. The brake system should also be
checked for leakage at the same time.
Brake fluid/Clutch fluid* If the fluid level falls markedly in a short
The brake fluid and the clutch fluid share the length of time, it indicates leaks from the
reservoir tank. brake system.
If this occurs, we recommend you to have the
vehicle checked.

Battery
Fluid type Battery The electrolyte level must be between the

specified limit on the outside of the battery.
Use brake fluid conforming to DOT3 or The condition of the battery is very important Replenish with distilled water as necessary.
DOT4 from a sealed container. The brake flu- for quick starting and to keep the vehicle’s The inside of the battery is divided into sev-
id is hygroscopic. Too much moisture in the electrical system working properly. Regular eral compartments; remove the cap from each
brake fluid will adversely affect the brake inspection and care are especially important compartment and fill to the upper mark. Do
system, reducing the performance. in cold weather. not top up beyond the upper mark because
spillage during driving could cause damage.
Check the electrolyte level at least once every
WARNING NOTE 4 weeks, depending on the operating condi-
l Take care in handling brake fluid as it is
l After replacing the battery, the electronic tions.
harmful to the eyes, may irritate your control system data for the automatic trans- If the battery is not used, it will discharge by
skin and will damage painted surfaces. mission, etc., will be erased. As a result, itself with time.
Wipe up any spills immediately. shift shocks may occur.
If brake fluid gets on your hands or in Check it once every 4 weeks and charge with
Shift shocks will become smoother after sev-
your eyes, flush immediately with clean low current as necessary.
eral changes in speed.
water. Follow up with a doctor as necessa-
ry. Removing and installing the air 10
Checking battery electrolyte duct (Except for 3000 models)
level
CAUTION To replenish with the distilled water, remove
l Use only the specified brake fluid. the air duct.
Do not mix or add different brands of brake
fluid to prevent chemical reaction.
Do not let any petroleum-based fluid touch, WARNING
mix with, or get into the brake fluid.
This will damage the seals.
l Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”
l Keep the reservoir tank cap closed to pre- OFF.
vent the brake fluid from deteriorating ex- Make sure that your clothes cannot be
cept maintenance. caught by the fan or drive belt. Personal
l Clean the filler cap before removing and injury could result.
close the cap securely after maintenance.

Battery
To remove During cold weather NOTE
1. Remove the clips (A), and then remove
The capacity of the battery is reduced at low
the air duct (B). Type A
temperatures. This is an inevitable result of
its chemical and physical properties. This is
why a very cold battery, particularly one that
is not fully charged, will only deliver a frac-
tion of the starter current which is normally
available.
We recommend you to have the battery
checked before the start of cold weather and,
if necessary, have it charged or replaced. Type B
This does not only ensure reliable starting,
but a battery which is kept fully charged also
has a longer life.
10 To install Disconnection and connection

1. Install the air duct (A), and then install
To disconnect the battery cable, stop the en-
the clips (B).
gine, first disconnect the negative (-) terminal
and then the positive (+) terminal. When con-
necting the battery, first connect the positive WARNING
(+) terminal and then the negative (-) termi-
l Keep sparks, cigarettes, and flames away
nal. from the battery because the battery
could explode.
NOTE
l Open the terminal cover (A) before discon-
necting or connecting the positive (+) termi-
nal of the battery.
l Loosen the nut (B), and then disconnect the
battery cable from the positive (+) terminal.

Tyres
WARNING CAUTION NOTE

l The battery electrolyte is extremely caus- l In order to prevent a short circuit, be sure to l When the vehicle is to be left unused for a
tic. Do not allow it to come in contact with disconnect the negative (-) terminal first. long period of time, remove the battery and
your eyes, skin, clothing, or the painted l Always wear protective eye goggles when store it in a place where the battery fluid will
surfaces of the vehicle. working near the battery. not freeze. The battery should be stored only
Spilt electrolyte should be flushed imme- l Do not bring the nearby parts, the plastic in a fully charged condition.
diately with ample amounts of water. parts and so on into contact with sulphuric
Irritation to eyes or skin from contact acid (battery electrolyte) which may crack,
with electrolyte requires immediate medi- stain or discolour them. Tyres
cal attention. If they are in contact, wipe off with soft
l Ventilate when charging or using the bat- cloth, chamois or the like and an aqueous
WARNING
tery in an enclosed space. solution of neutral detergent then immediate-
ly rinse the affected parts with plenty of wa- l Driving with tyres that are worn, dam-
ter. aged or improperly inflated can lead to a
CAUTION loss of control or blow out of the tyres
which can result in a collision with serious
l Keep it out of reach of children. NOTE or fatal injury.
l Never disconnect the battery when the igni-
tion switch is in the “ON” position. Doing so l Keep the terminals clean. After the battery is 10
could damage electric components. connected, apply terminal protection grease.
To clean the terminals, use lukewarm water.
l Never short-circuit the battery. This could
cause it to overheat and be damaged. l Check to see if the battery is securely instal-
led and cannot be moved during travel. Also
l If the battery is to be quick-charged, first
disconnect the battery cables. check each terminal for tightness.
Tyre inflation pressures

Item Tyre size Front Rear
Normal tyre 215/70R16 100H 2.4 bar (35 psi) [240 kPa], 2.6 bar (38 psi) [260 kPa]*
225/55R18 98H 2.4 bar (35 psi) [240 kPa], 2.6 bar (38 psi) [260 kPa]*
Temporary spare tyre T155/90D16 110M 4.2 bar (60 psi) [420 kPa]
*: Above 160 km/h (99 mph)

Tyres
Item Tyre size Front Rear

T155/80D17 100M 4.2 bar (60 psi) [420 kPa]
*: Above 160 km/h (99 mph)
Check the tyre inflation pressure of all the tyres while they are cold; if insufficient or excessive, adjust to the specified value.
After the tyre inflation pressure has been adjusted, check the tyres for damage and air leaks. Be sure to put caps on the valves.
Wheel condition Tread wear indicators will appear on the sur-

face of the tyre as the tyre wears, thereby in-
dicating that the tyre no longer meets the
NOTE minimum requirement for use. When these
l The tyres that can be installed on your vehi- wear indicators appear, the tyres must be re-
cle are shown on the driver’s door label. For placed with new ones.
details, contact a MITSUBISHI MOTORS On 4-wheel drive vehicles, when replacement
Authorized Service Point. of any of the tyres is necessary, replace all of
them.
10
CAUTION
1- Location of the tread wear indicator l Always use tyres of the same size, same
type, and same brand, and which have no
2- Tread wear indicator wear differences. Using tyres of different
size, type, brands or degree of wear, will in-
Check the tyres for cuts, cracks and other crease the differential oil temperature, result-
damage. Replace the tyres if there are deep ing in possible damage to the driving sys-
cuts or cracks. Also check each tyre for tem. Further, the drive train will be subjected
pieces of metal or pebbles. to excessive loading, possibly leading to oil
leakage, component seizure, or other serious
The use of worn tyres can be very dangerous faults.
because of the greater chance of skidding or
hydroplaning. The tread depth of the tyres
must exceed 1.6 mm in order for the tyres to
meet the minimum requirement for use.

Tyres
Replacing tyres and wheels NOTE When rotating tyres, check for uneven wear
and damage. Abnormal wear is usually
l On vehicles with the Electric parking brake, caused by incorrect tyre pressure, improper
CAUTION a steel wheel with diameter of 16 inches can-
wheel alignment, out of balance wheel, or se-
not be used on your vehicle because it inter-
vere braking. We recommend you to have it
l Avoid using different size tyres from the one feres with brake parts.
listed and the combined use of different Additionally, an aluminium wheel with di- checked to determine the cause of irregular
types of tyres, as this can affect driving safe- ameter of 16 inches may not be used on your tread wear.
ty. vehicle depending on its type, even if a
Refer to “Tyres and wheels” on page 11-11. MITSUBISHI MOTORS GENUINE wheel. Spare tyre used*
l Even if a wheel has the same rim size and Consult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Author-
offset as the specified type of wheel, its ized Service Point before using wheels that
shape may prevent it from being fitted cor- you have. Front
rectly. We recommend you to consult a spe-
cialist before using wheels that you have.
l If your vehicle is equipped with a tyre pres- Tyre rotation
sure monitoring system, only MITSUBISHI Tyre wear varies with vehicle conditions,
MOTORS GENUINE wheels should be Spare tyre not used
used. Use of another type of wheel risks air
road surface conditions and individual driv-
leaks and sensor damage, as it will not be er’s driving habits. To equalize the wear and 10
help extend tyre life, it is recommended to ro- Front
possible to install the tyre pressure sensor
properly. tate the tyres immediately after discovery of
Refer to “Tyre pressure monitoring system abnormal wear, or whenever the wear differ-
(TPMS)” on page 6-114. Tyres that have arrows showing rotation direction
ence between the front and rear tyres is rec-
ognizable.
Front
*: If the spare tyre wheel differs from the

standard tyre wheel, do not perform tyre
rotation using a spare wheel.

Tyres

l A temporary spare tyre can be fitted tempo- l Avoid the combined use of different types of l The laws and regulations concerning snow
rarily in place of a tyre that has been re- tyres. tyres (driving speed, required use, type, etc.)
moved during the tyre rotation. However, it Using different types of tyres can affect ve- vary. Find out and follow the laws and regu-
must not be included in the regular tyre rota- hicle performance and safety. lations in the area you intend to drive.
tion sequence. l If flange nuts are used on your vehicle,
l If the tyres have arrows (A) indicating the change to tapered nuts when steel wheels are
correct direction of rotation, swap the front Snow tyres used.
and rear tyres on the left-hand side of the ve- The use of snow tyres is recommended for
hicle and the front and rear tyres on the
driving on snow and ice. To preserve driving Snow traction device (Tyre
right-hand side of the vehicle separately.
stability, mount snow tyres of the same size
Keep each tyre on its original side of the ve-
and tread pattern on all 4 wheels.
chains)
hicle. When fitting the tyres, make sure the
arrows point in the direction in which the A snow tyre that is worn down more than If snow traction device (tyre chains) have to
wheels will turn when the vehicle moves for- 50% is no longer appropriate to use. be used, ensure that they are fitted only on
ward. Any tyre whose arrow points in the Snow tyres which do not meet specifications the drive wheels (front) in accordance with
wrong direction will not perform to its full must not be used. the manufacturer’s instructions.
potential.
10 On 4WD vehicles in which the driving power
is distributed preferentially to the front
CAUTION wheels, ensure that the snow traction device
Front l Observe permissible maximum speed for (tyre chains) are fitted on the front.
your snow tyres and the legal speed limit. Use only snow traction device (tyre chains)
l If your vehicle is equipped with a tyre pres- which are designed for use with the tyres
sure monitoring system, only MITSUBISHI
mounted on the vehicle: use of the incorrect
Motors genuine wheels should be used. Use
of another type of wheel risks air leaks and size or type of snow traction device (tyre
sensor damage, as it will not be possible to chains) could result in damage to the vehicle
install the tyre pressure sensor properly. Re- body.
fer to “Tyre pressure monitoring system Contact a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Author-
(TPMS)” on page 6-114. ized Service Point before putting on a snow
traction device (tyre chains). The max. snow
traction device (tyre chains) height is as fol-
lows.

Wiper blade rubber replacement
Max. snow CAUTION NOTE

traction de-
Tyre size Wheel size vice (tyre l When snow traction device (tyre chains) are l The laws and regulations concerning the use
installed, take care that they do not damage of snow traction device (tyre chains) vary.
chains) the disc wheel or body. Always follow local laws and regulations.
height [mm] l Do not install a snow traction device (tyre In most countries, it is prohibited by the law
chains) on an emergency wheel which is to use of snow traction device (tyre chains)
215/70R16 16 x 6 1/2 J
compact in size. If one of the front wheels on roads without snow.
100H 16 x 6 1/2 JJ has punctured, replace it with one of the rear
9 mm
225/55R18 wheels and install the temporary spare wheel
98H
18x7 J in that place before fitting a snow traction Wiper blade rubber
device (tyre chains).
When driving with a snow traction device l An aluminium wheel can be damaged by a replacement
(tyre chains) on the tyres, do not drive faster snow traction device (tyre chains) while
than 50 km/h (30 mph). When you reach driving. When fitting a snow traction device
roads that are not covered in snow, immedi- (tyre chains) on an aluminium wheel, take Windscreen wiper blades
care that any part of the snow traction device
ately remove the snow traction device (tyre (tyre chains) and fitting cannot be brought 1. Lift the wiper arm off the windscreen.
chains). into contact with the wheel. 2. Pull the wiper blade until its stopper (A)
l Remove the wheel covers before installing a disengages from the hook (B). Pull the
10
snow traction device (tyre chains), otherwise
CAUTION they may be damaged by the snow traction
wiper blade further to remove it.
l Choose a clear straight stretch of road where device (tyre chains). (See page 8-27.)
you can pull off and still be seen while you l When installing or removing a snow traction
are fitting the snow traction device (tyre device (tyre chains), take care that hands and
chains). other parts of your body and not injured by
l Do not fit snow traction device (tyre chains) the sharp edges of the vehicle body.
before you need them. This will wear out
your snow traction device (tyre chains) and
the road surface.
l After driving around 100-300 meters, stop
and retighten the snow traction device (tyre
chains).
l Drive carefully and do not exceed 50 km/h
(30 mph). Remember that preventing acci-
dents is not the purpose of snow traction de-
vice (tyre chains).

Wiper blade rubber replacement
NOTE NOTE
l Do not let the wiper arm drop onto the wind- l If a retainer is not supplied with the new
screen. This could damage the glass. wiper blade, use the retainer from the old
blade.
3. Attach the retainers (C) to a new wiper
blade. Refer to the illustration to ensure 5. Push the wiper blade until the hook (B)
that the retainers are correctly aligned as engages securely with the stopper (A).
you attach them.
NOTE
l Do not allow the wiper arm to fall onto the
window glass; it could damage the glass.
10
Rear window wiper blades

1. Lift the wiper arm off the window glass.
2. Pull the wiper blade downward to disen-
gage it from the stopper (A) at the end of
the wiper arm. Pull the wiper blade fur-
4. Insert the wiper blade into the arm, start- ther to remove it.
ing with the opposite end of the blade 3. Slide a new wiper blade through the
from the stopper. Make sure the hook hook (B) on the wiper arm.
(B) is fitted correctly in the grooves in
the blade.

General maintenance
4. Firmly insert the retainer (C) into the General maintenance Meter, gauge and indicator/
groove (D) in the wiper blade. warning lamps operation
Refer to the illustration to ensure that the
retainers are correctly aligned as you in- Fuel, engine coolant, oil and ex- Start the engine and check the operation of
sert them into the groove. all instruments, gauges and indication and
haust gas leakage
warning lamps.
Look under the body of your vehicle to check If there is anything wrong, we recommend
for fuel, engine coolant, oil and exhaust gas you to have your vehicle inspected.
leaks.
Hinges and latches lubrication
WARNING Check all latches and hinges, and, if necessa-
l If you see a suspicious fuel leak or if you ry, have them lubricated.
smell fuel, do not operate the vehicle and
call your MITSUBISHI MOTORS Au-
thorized Service Point for assistance.
Fusible links
Exterior and interior lamp op-

The fusible links will melt to prevent a fire if 10
a large current attempts to flow through cer-
eration tain electrical systems.
In case of a melted fusible link, we recom-
Operate the combination lamp switch to mend you to have your vehicle inspected.
check that all lamps are functioning properly. For the fusible links, please refer to “Passen-
NOTE If the lamps do not illuminate, the probable ger compartment fuse location table” on page
l If a retainer is not supplied with the new cause is a blown fuse or defective lamp bulb. 10-20 and “Engine compartment fuse loca-
wiper blade, use the retainer from the old Check the fuses first. If there is no blown
blade.
tion table” on page 10-22.
fuse, check the lamp bulbs.
For information regarding the inspection and
replacement of the fuses and the bulbs, refer
to “Fuses” on page 10-18 and “Replacement
of lamp bulbs” on page 10-25.
If the fuses and bulbs are all OK, we recom-
mend you to have your vehicle checked and
repaired.
Fuses
WARNING Pull the fuse lid to remove it.

Main fuse block
l Fusible links must not be replaced by any 1. Open the glove box.
other device. Failing to fit the correct fusi-
2. Uncouple the rod (A) on the right side of
ble link may result in fire in the vehicle,
property destruction and serious or fatal the glove box.
injuries at any time.
Fuses
Fuse block location

A- Main fuse block
To prevent damage to the electrical system B- Sub fuse block
due to short-circuiting or overloading, each
individual circuit is provided with a fuse. Passenger compartment (RHD
There are fuse blocks in the passenger com- vehicles)
10 partment and in the engine compartment. 3. While pressing the side of the glove box,
The fuse boxes in the passenger compartment
are located behind the glove box at the posi- unhook the left and right hooks (B) and
Passenger compartment (LHD tion shown in the illustration. lower the glove box.
vehicles)
The fuse blocks in the passenger compart-
ment are located behind the fuse lid in front
of the driver’s seat at the position shown in
the illustration.
A- Main fuse block

B- Sub fuse block

Fuses
4. Remove the glove box fastener (C), and When changing the fuse of the sub fuse Engine compartment
then remove the glove box. block, perform it with the hole of the bottom
In the engine compartment, the fuse blocks
cover.
are located as shown in the illustration. While
pressing the tab (D), pull up the cover.
Sub fuse block
10

Fuses
A- Main fuse block NOTE
B- Sub fuse block (Type 1)
C- Sub fuse block (Type 2) l Spare fuses are provided on the cover of
main fuse block in the engine compartment.
Fuse load capacity Always use a fuse of the same capacity for
replacement.
The fuse capacity and the names of electrical
systems protected by the fuses are indicated
on the inside of the fuse lid (LHD vehicles), Passenger compartment fuse lo-
the back side of the glove box (RHD vehi- cation table
cles) and inside of the fuse block cover (in-
side of the engine compartment).
Main fuse block
10 Sub fuse block

(LHD)
Sub fuse block

(RHD)

Fuses
Ca- Ca- Ca-

Sym- Electrical sys- Sym- Electrical sys- Sym- Electrical sys-
No. paci- No. paci- No. paci-
bol tem bol tem bol tem
ties ties ties
Electric window 4-wheel drive Cigarette lighter/
1 30 A*1 13 10 A
control system 23 Accessory sock- 15 A
et
Rear window Stop lamps
2 30 A*1 14 15 A
demister (Brake lamps) Charge 7.5 A
3 Heater 30 A 15 Instruments 10 A 24 Heated steering
15 A
Windscreen wip- wheel
16 SRS airbag 7.5 A
4 30 A
ers Power seat
17 Radio 15 A 25 30 A*1
(Driver seat)
5 Door locks 20 A
Control unit re- 26 Heated seat 30 A
18 7.5 A
6 Rear fog lamp 10 A*2 lay
Power seat
Interior lamps 27 30 A*1
7
Accessory sock-
et
15 A 19
(Room lamps)
15 A (Passenger seat) 10
*1:Fusible link
Rear window Reversing lamps
8 15 A 20 7.5 A *2:Even if your vehicle is equipped with the
wiper (Backup lamps)
rear fog lamp, the fuse of the rear fog lamp
9 Sunroof 20 A Heated door may not be installed on your vehicle.
21 7.5 A
mirror
10 Ignition switch 10 A l Some fuses may not be installed on your
Outside rear- vehicle, depending on the vehicle model
22 10 A
11 Option 10 A view mirrors or specifications.
Hazard warning
*1:Fusible link l The table above shows the main equip-
12 15 A *2: ment corresponding to each fuse.
flasher Even if your vehicle is equipped with the
*1: rear fog lamp, the fuse of the rear fog lamp
Fusible link
*2:
may not be installed on your vehicle.
Even if your vehicle is equipped with the
rear fog lamp, the fuse of the rear fog lamp
may not be installed on your vehicle.

Fuses
Engine compartment fuse loca- Sym-

Ca-
Sym-
Ca-
tion table No. Electrical system paci- No. Electrical system paci-
bol bol
ties ties
40 F2 Wiper de-icer 15 A
Main fuse block VLC
A*
F3 Electric parking brake 7.5 A
30
SBF2 Starter
A* Daytime running
F4 10 A
lamps
Air conditioning con- 30
SBF3
denser fan motor A* F5 Front fog lamps 15 A
40 F6 Air conditioner 10 A
SBF4 Radiator fan motor
A*
F7 Headlamp washer 20 A
40
SBF5 Anti-lock brake system
A* F8 Security horn 20 A
10 Behind of the fuse block cover
SBF6 Electric parking brake
50 F9 Horn 10 A
A*
F10 ETV 15 A
30
SBF7 Anti-lock brake system
A* F11 Alternator 7.5 A
BF1 Electric tailgate 30 A F12 Engine 7.5 A
BF2 Audio system amp 30 A ENG/POWER 20 A
F13
Ca- BF3 IOD IOD 30 A Fuel line heater 25 A
Sym-
No. Electrical system paci- BF4 Diesel 30 A
bol F14 Fuel pump 15 A
ties
Automatic transmis-
Air conditioning con- 30 F1 20 A F15 Ignition coil 10 A
SBF1 sion
denser fan motor A* *:
*: Fusible link Fusible link
*: Fusible link

Fuses
Ca- l Some fuses may not be installed on your l The table above shows the main equip-
Sym- vehicle, depending on the vehicle model ment corresponding to each fuse.
No. Electrical system paci-
bol or specifications.
ties
l The table above shows the main equip- Sub fuse block (Type 2)
F16 ENG/POWER 10 A ment corresponding to each fuse.
Headlamp high-beam
F17 10 A Sub fuse block (Type 1)
(left)
Headlamp high-beam
F18 10 A
(right)
Headlamp
F19 low beam LED 20 A
(left)
Headlamp
F20 low beam LED 20 A
(right)
Headlamp Ca- 10
Sym-
F21 low beam Halogen 10 A No. Electrical system paci-
bol
(left) ties
Ca- 50
Headlamp Sym-
No. Electrical system paci- SBF1 Heated windscreen
F22 low beam Halogen 10 A bol A*
ties
(right) 50
30 SBF2 Heated windscreen
F23 Battery current sensor 7.5 A SBF1 Electric parking brake A*
A*
*: Fusible link
#1 — Spare fuse 10 A 30
SBF2 Electric parking brake
#2 — Spare fuse 15 A A* l Some fuses may not be installed on your
*: vehicle, depending on the vehicle model
#3 — Spare fuse 20 A Fusible link
or specifications.
*: Fusible link l Some fuses may not be installed on your l The table above shows the main equip-
vehicle, depending on the vehicle model ment corresponding to each fuse.
or specifications.

Fuses
The fuse box does not contain spare 7.5 A, 2. Remove the fuse puller (A) from the in- NOTE
25 A or 30 A fuses. If one of these fuses side of the fuse block cover in the engine
burns out, substitute with the following fuse. compartment. l If any system does not function but the fuse
corresponding to that system is normal, there
7.5 A: 10 A spare fuse
may be a fault in the system elsewhere. We
25 A: 20 A spare fuse recommend you to have your vehicle
30 A: 30 A audio system amp fuse checked.
When using a substitute fuse, replace with a
fuse of the correct capacity as soon as possi-
4. Insert a new fuse of the same capacity
ble.
by using the fuse puller into the same
Identification of fuse place the fuse block.
Capacity Colour
7.5 A Brown
10 A Red 3. Referring to the fuse load capacity table,
15 A Blue check the fuse pertaining to the problem.
10
20 A Yellow
25 A Natural (White)
Green (fuse type) / Pink (fu-
30 A
sible link type)
40 A Green (fusible link type) CAUTION
50 A Red (fusible link type) l If the newly inserted fuse blows again after a
short time, we recommend you to have the
Fuse replacement electrical system checked to find the cause
and rectify it.
1. Before replacing a fuse, always turn off
the electrical circuit concerned and place l Never use a fuse with a larger capacity than
B- Fuse is OK specified or a substitute (such as a cable or
the ignition switch in the “LOCK” posi- foil). Doing so could cause the circuit wires
C- Blown fuse
tion or put the operation mode in OFF. to overheat and create a fire.

Replacement of lamp bulbs
Replacement of lamp bulbs CAUTION Bulb location and capacity

If the glass surface is dirty, it must be
Before replacing a bulb, ensure the lamp is cleaned with alcohol, paint thinner, etc., and
off. Do not touch the glass part of the new refit it after drying thoroughly.
CAUTION
bulb with your bare fingers; the skin oil left l When replacing a bulb, be sure to use a new
on the glass will evaporate when the bulb bulb of the same type, wattage and colour. If
gets hot and the vapour will condense on the you install a different bulb, the bulb could
malfunction or fail to come on and could
reflector and dim the surface. lead to a vehicle fire.
CAUTION
l Do not install commercially available LED-
type bulbs.
Commercially available LED-type bulbs
could adversely affect the operation of the
vehicle, such as by preventing the lamps and
other vehicle equipment from operating
properly.
NOTE 10
l Bulbs are extremely hot immediately after
being turned off. l If you are unsure of how to carry out the
When replacing a bulb, wait for it to cool work as required, we recommend you to
sufficiently before touching it. You could consult a specialist.
otherwise be burnt. l Be careful not to scratch the vehicle body
l Handle halogen lamp bulbs with care. The when removing a lamp or lens.
gas inside a halogen lamp bulbs is highly l When it rains or when the vehicle has been
pressurized, so dropping, knocking, or washed, the inside of the lens sometimes be-
scratching a halogen lamp bulb can cause it comes foggy. This is the same phenomenon
to shatter. as when window glass mists up on a humid
l Never hold the halogen lamp bulb with a day, and does not indicate a functional prob-
bare hand, dirty glove, etc. lem.
The oil from your hand could cause the bulb When the lamp is switched on, the heat will
to break the next time the headlamps are op- remove the fog. However, if water gathers
erated. inside the lamp, we recommend you to have
the lamp checked.

Outside 3- Headlamps, low beam NOTE

Halogen: 55 W (H7)
LED: − • Side turn-signal lamps (on outside rear-
Front view mirror)
4- Position lamps/
Daytime running lamps: −
5- Front fog lamps* Rear
Halogen: 19 W (H16)
LED: −
6- Side turn-signal lamps (on fender)*: 5 W
7- Side turn-signal lamps (on outside rear-
view mirror)*
Type A Codes in parentheses indicate bulb types.
NOTE
10 l It is not possible to repair or replace only the 1- High-mounted stop lamp: −
bulb for the side turn-signal lamp (on fend-
Type B
er). 2- Tail lamps: −
For repair and replacement, contact a 3- Rear fog lamp (LHD vehicles):
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Serv- 21 W (W21W)
ice Point. Reversing lamp (RHD vehicles):
l The following lamps use an LED instead of 16 W (W16W)
the bulb. 4- Licence plate lamps: 5 W (W5W)
If you need to repair or replace these lamps,
5- Rear fog lamp (RHD vehicles):
ized Service Point. 21 W (W21W)
Type A: Halogen headlamps type
• Headlamps, high-beam (LED type) Reversing lamp (LHD vehicles):
Type B: LED headlamps type
• Headlamps, low beam (LED type) 16 W (W16W)
1- Front turn-signal lamps: 21 W (PY21W)
• Position lamps 6- Rear turn-signal lamps:
2- Headlamps, high-beam
• Daytime running lamps 21 W (WY21W)
Halogen: 60 W (HB3)
• Front fog lamps (LED type) 7- Stop lamps: −
LED: −
Codes in parentheses indicate bulb types.

NOTE NOTE Left side
l The following lamps use an LED instead of l The following lamps use an LED instead of
the bulb. the bulb.
If you need to repair or replace these lamps, If you need to repair or replace these lamps,
contact a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Author- contact a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Author-
ized Service Point. ized Service Point.
• High-mounted stop lamp • Downlight
• Tail lamps • Front foot lamps
• Stop lamps • Floor console box lamp*
Inside Headlamps (low beam, halogen

bulb) Right side
1. When replacing the bulb, remove the
bolts (A) holding down the relay boxes
and move the relay boxes towards the
rear of the vehicle. (if so equipped) 10
1- Luggage room lamp: 8 W

2- Room lamp (rear): 8 W
3- Map & room lamps (front): 8 W *: Front of the vehicle
4- Downlight
5- Vanity mirror lamps: 2 W 2. Turn the cap (B) anticlockwise to re-
6- Glove box lamp: 1.4 W move it.

NOTE 2. Turn the cap (B) anticlockwise to re-

move it.
l When installing the bulb, align the tab (D)
with the notch (E) of the socket.
3. Turn the socket (C) anticlockwise to re-

move it, and then pull the bulb out of the Headlamps (high-beam, halo- *: Front of the vehicle
socket. gen bulb)
10 1. When replacing the bulb on the right 3. Turn the bulb (C) anticlockwise to re-
side of the vehicle, remove the clip (A) move it, and then while holding down
holding down the washer tank spout and the tab (D), pull out the bulb (E).
move the spout towards the rear of the
vehicle.
4. To install the bulb, perform the removal

steps in reverse.

4. To install the bulb, perform the removal Front fog lamps (Halogen bulb
steps in reverse. type)*
1. Insert a straight blade (or minus) screw-
Front turn-signal lamps driver with a cloth over its tip at the
1. Remove the 12 clips (A, B), and then re- points indicated by arrows and pry gen-
move the cover (C). tly to remove the cover (A).

10
steps in reverse.
2. Remove the 3 screws (B) and remove
the lamp unit.
2. Turn the socket (D) anticlockwise to re-

move it, then remove the bulb from the
socket by turning it anticlockwise while
pressing in.

NOTE 4. Turn the bulb (F) anticlockwise to re- Rear fog lamp (driver’s side)/
move it. Reversing lamp (Passenger’s
l When unfastening the screws of the fog
lamp, be careful not to mistakenly move the side)
beam position adjustment screw (C).
1. Insert a straight blade (or minus) screw-
driver with a cloth over its tip at the edge
of the lamp unit, and then push the lamp
unit upward to remove it.

3. While holding down the tab (D), pull out
steps in reverse.
10 the socket (E).

2. Turn the socket (A) anticlockwise to re- NOTE 3. Turn the socket anticlockwise and re-
move it, and then pull the bulb out of the move it, and then pull the bulb out of the
socket. l When installing the lamp unit, first insert the socket.
notch (B) into the hole on the body, and then
push on the lamp unit to fit it into place.
3. To install the bulb, perform the removal Rear combination lamps D- Rear turn-signal lamp
steps in reverse. 1. Open the tailgate. E- Tail lamp and stop lamp (LED)-cannot 10
2. Remove the screws (A), and then move be replaced
the lamp unit towards the rear of the ve-
hicle to unfix the notch (B) and pins (C)
of the lamp unit.
NOTE
l The tail lamp and stop lamp use an LED in-
stead of the bulb.
If you need to repair or replace these lamps,
ized Service Point.

steps in reverse.

NOTE 2. Insert a minus screwdriver with the end NOTE

covered with a cloth or other object to
l When installing the lamp unit, align the press the hook (B) aside and remove the l When installing the lamp unit, first insert the
notch (F) and pin (G) on the lamp unit with end of tab (C) and then align tab (D).
lens.
the clip (H) and hole (I) in the body.
Licence plate lamps 3. Remove the bulb from the socket.

10 1. Remove while pressing the lamp unit
(A) to the left side of the vehicle.

steps in reverse.

Specifications
Vehicle labeling.................................................................................11-02
Vehicle dimensions............................................................................11-04
Vehicle performance..........................................................................11-05
Vehicle weight...................................................................................11-05
Engine specifications........................................................................ 11-09
Electrical system............................................................................... 11-10
Tyres and wheels............................................................................... 11-11
CO2 Mass Emissions.........................................................................11-12
Capacity.............................................................................................11-14
11
OGFE20E1
Vehicle labeling
Vehicle labeling Vehicle information code label* 1- Model code

2- Engine model code,
The vehicle information code label is affixed Exterior code
Vehicle identification number as shown in the illustration. 3- Transmission model code
4- Chassis number
The vehicle identification number is stamped 5- Maximum gross vehicle weight
on the bulkhead as shown in the illustration. 6- Body colour code,
Interior code,
Option code
7- Gross combination weight
8- Maximum axle weight (Front)
9- Maximum axle weight (Rear)
Vehicle information code plate*

The vehicle information code plate is riveted
The label shows model code, engine model, as shown in the illustration.
transmission model and body colour code,
11 etc.
Please use this number when ordering re-
placement parts.
The plate shows model code, engine model,

transmission model and body colour code,
etc.
11-02 Specifications OGFE20E1

Vehicle labeling
Please use this number when ordering re- Vehicle identification number Engine model/number
placement parts. plate (RHD vehicles only)
The engine model and number are stamped
The vehicle identification number is stamped on the engine cylinder block as shown in the
on the plate riveted to the left front corner of illustration.
the instrument panel pad. It is visible from
outside of the vehicle through the wind- 2000 models,
screen. 2400 models
1- Model code
2- Engine model code
3- Transmission model code
4- Body colour code
5-
6-
Interior code
Option code
11
7- Exterior code 3000 models
OGFE20E1 Specifications 11-03

Vehicle dimensions
Vehicle dimensions
11 1 Front track 1,540 mm

2 Overall width 1,810 mm
3 Front overhang 990 mm
4 Wheel base 2,670 mm
5 Rear overhang 1,035 mm
6 Overall length 4,695 mm
Except for vehicles for Rus-
7 Ground clearance (unladen) sia, Kazakhstan, Belarus, Uk- 190 mm
raine and Moldova

Vehicle performance
Vehicles for Russia, Kazakh-

stan, Belarus, Ukraine and 215 mm
Moldova
8 Overall height (unladen) 1,710 mm
9 Rear track 1,540 mm
Body 5.76 m
Minimum turning radius
Wheel 5.3 m
Vehicle performance
M/T 190 km/h (118 mph)
2000 models 2WD 193 km/h ,192 km/h (120 mph)*
CVT
Maximum speed 4WD 188 km/h ,190 km/h (118 mph)*
2400 models 198 km/h (123 mph) 11
3000 models 205 km/h
*: 4J11 engine model
Vehicle weight
2000 models (M/T)
Seating capacity 5 persons
Kerb weight Without optional parts 1,410 kg
*: In case of trailer towing

Vehicle weight
With full optional parts 1,446 kg

Maximum gross vehicle weight 1,900 kg
Front 1,150 kg
Maximum axle weight
Rear 1,250 kg, 1,360 kg*
With brake 1,600 kg
Maximum towable weight
Without brake 740 kg
Maximum trailer-nose weight 80 kg
Maximum roof load 80 kg
NOTE
l Trailer specifications indicate the manufacturer’s recommendation.
11 2000 models (CVT)

Item 2WD 4WD
Seating capacity 5 persons 7 persons 5 persons 7 persons
Without
Kerb weight optional 1,445 kg 1,475 kg 1,510 kg 1,540 kg
parts
*1: Vehicles for Russia, Kazakhstan, Belarus, Ukraine and Moldova
*2: GF7WXTSXL6
*3: GF7WXTCXL6
*4: GF7WXTBXZL6
*5: In case of trailer towing

Vehicle weight
Item 2WD 4WD

With full
1,531 kg, 1,520 kg*1, 1,596 kg, 1,593 kg*1,
optional 1,561 kg, 1,511 kg*3 1,626 kg, 1,611 kg*1
parts 1,506 kg*2 1,546 kg*4
1,980 kg, 1,985 kg*1, 2,045 kg, 2,060 kg*1,

Maximum gross vehicle weight 2,160 kg, 2,100 kg*3 2,225 kg, 2,210 kg*1
1,960 kg*2 1,980 kg*4
Front 1,150 kg
Maximum axle weight
Rear 1,250 kg, 1,360 kg*5
With brake 1,600 kg
Maximum towable
weight Without
750 kg
brake
*2: GF7WXTSXL6
11
*3: GF7WXTCXL6
*4: GF7WXTBXZL6
*5: In case of trailer towing
NOTE

Vehicle weight
2400 models
Seating capacity 5 persons 7 persons
Without optional
1,525 kg 1,555 kg
parts
Kerb weight
With full optional
1,606 kg 1,630 kg
parts
Maximum axle Front 1,150 kg

weight Rear 1,250 kg, 1,360 kg*
Maximum towable With brake 1,600 kg
weight Without brake 750 kg
11 *: In case of trailer towing
NOTE
3000 models
Seating capacity 5 persons
Without optional parts 1,615 kg
Kerb weight
With full optional parts 1,637 kg

Engine specifications

Front 1,150 kg
Maximum axle weight
Rear 1,250 kg, 1,360 kg*
With brake 1,600 kg
Maximum towable weight
Without brake 750 kg
NOTE
11
Engine specifications
Item 2000 models
Engine model 4B11 4J11
No. of cylinders 4 in line 4 in line
Total displacement 1,998 cc 1,998 cc
Bore 86.0 mm 86.0 mm
Stroke 86.0 mm 86.0 mm
Camshaft Double overhead Single overhead
Mixture preparation Electronic injection Electronic injection

Electrical system
Item 2000 models

Maximum output (EEC net) 107 kW/6,000 rpm 110 kW/6,000 rpm
Maximum torque (EEC net) 196 Nm/4,200 rpm 195 Nm/4,100 to 4,200 rpm
Item 2400 models 3000 models

Engine model 4B12 6B31
No. of cylinders 4 in line 6-V (60°)
Total displacement 2,360 cc 2,998 cc
Bore 88.0 mm 87.6 mm
Stroke 97.0 mm 82.9 mm
Camshaft Double overhead Single overhead
Mixture preparation Electronic injection Electronic injection
Maximum output (EEC net) 123 kW/6,000 rpm 167 kW/6,250 rpm
Maximum torque (EEC net) 222 Nm/4,100 rpm 291 Nm/3,750 rpm
11
Electrical system
Item 2000 models 2400 models 3000 models
Voltage 12 V
Battery Type (JIS) 75D23L, Q-85*1 80D26L
Capacity (5HR) 52 Ah, 55 Ah*1 55 Ah
Alternator capacity 130 A 120 A
*1: Vehicles equipped with Auto Stop & Go (AS&G) system

Tyres and wheels
Item 2000 models 2400 models 3000 models

Spark plug type NGK DILKR6D11G, FR6FI*2 FR5FI DILKR7C11
*1: Vehicles equipped with Auto Stop & Go (AS&G) system
NOTE
l Vehicles equipped with the Auto Stop & Go (AS&G) system have a dedicated AS&G battery type.
The use of a different battery could cause the battery to run down quickly or the AS&G system not to operate normally.
Please contact a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point when replacing the battery.
Tyres and wheels

Tyre 215/70R16 100H 225/55R18 98H
Wheel
Size 16x6 1/2JJ, 16x6 1/2J 18x7J 11
Offset (Inset) 38 mm
NOTE
l The tyres that can be installed on your vehicle are shown on the driver’s door label, refer to “Tyre inflation pressures” on page 10-11. For details, contact
your MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point.

CO2 Mass Emissions
CO2 Mass Emissions

Vehicles for Russia, Kazakhstan and Belarus
Combined
Item
CO2 (g/km)
2WD 173
2000 models
4WD 179
2400 models 181
3000 models 209
Vehicles for Ukraine and Moldova
Combined
Item
CO2 (g/km)
11 2WD 175
2000 models
4WD 181
2400 models 188
Except for vehicles for Russia, Kazakhstan, Belarus, Ukraine and Moldova
Combined
Item
CO2 (g/km)
NEDC 169
5M/T GF7WXNSXL6
2000 models WLTC 173
CVT 2WD GF7WXTSXL6 NEDC 156

CO2 Mass Emissions
Combined
Item
CO2 (g/km)
GF7WXTCXL6 WLTC 174
GF7WXTHXL6 NEDC 162
GF7WXTXXL6 WLTC 184
NEDC 164
GF7WXTBXZL6
WLTC 182
GF7WXTHXZL6
4WD NEDC 169
GF7WXTHXZR6
GF7WXTXXZL6
WLTC 196
GF7WXTXXZR6
11

Capacity
Capacity
2000 models, 2400 models
LHD RHD
11 3000 models

Capacity
No. Item Quantity Lubricants

Oil pan 4.0 litres
2000 models Oil filter 0.3 litre
Oil cooler*1 0.1 litre
1 Engine oil Oil pan 4.3 litres Refer to page 10-05.
2400 models
Oil filter 0.3 litre
Oil pan 4.0 litres
3000 models
Oil filter 0.3 litre
Brake fluid Brake fluid DOT 3 or
2 As required
Clutch fluid DOT 4
3 Washer fluid 3.7 litres, 4.5 litres*2 —

2000 models MITSUBISHI
6.0 litres MOTORS GENUINE
2400 models
4 Engine coolant
[includes 0.65 litre in the re- SUPER LONG LIFE 11
serve tank] COOLANT PREMI-
3000 models 9.0 litres UM or equivalent
*3
MITSUBISHI
5 Automatic transmission fluid 8.2 litres MOTORS GENUINE
ATF-J3
*1: If so equipped
*3: Similar high quality ethylene glycol based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrate and non-borate coolant with long life hybrid organic acid
technology

Capacity

MITSUBISHI
CVT fluid 6.9 litres MOTORS GENUINE
CVTF-J4
*1: If so equipped
*3: Similar high quality ethylene glycol based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrate and non-borate coolant with long life hybrid organic acid
technology
CAUTION
l Use only the MITSUBISHI MOTORS GENUINE ATF-J3 (for the automatic transmission fluid) or MITSUBISHI MOTORS GENUINE CVTF-J4 (for the
CVT fluid). Use of a different fluid could damage the transmission.

MITSUBISHI
11 MOTORS GENUINE
NEW MULTI GEAR
OIL API GL-3 SAE
75W-80 or
6 Manual transmission oil 2.5 litres
MITSUBISHI
MOTORS GENUINE
NEW MULTI GEAR
OIL ECO API GL-4
SAE 75W-80
7 Transfer oil 0.47 litre MITSUBISHI
MOTORS GENUINE
8 Rear differential oil 0.4 litre Super Hypoid Gear Oil
API GL-5 SAE 80

Capacity

430 - 470 g*1, HFC-134a*1
9 Refrigerant (air conditioning)
530 - 570 g HFO-1234yf
11

OGFE20E1
Alphabetical index
CD player.......................................................... 7-13
4 B Central door locks............................................. 3-22
Charge warning lamp........................................ 5-55
4-wheel drive operation.....................................6-53 Battery............................................................. 10-09
Check engine warning lamp..............................5-54
Charge warning lamp.................................... 5-55
A Discharged battery (Emergency starting)......8-09 Child restraint....................................................4-27
Disposal information for used batteries........ 2-06
Accessory (Installation).....................................2-04 Specification................................................11-10 Caution for installing the child re-
Accessory socket............................................... 7-73 Blind Spot Warning (BSW).............................6-104 straint on vehicles with front pas-
Active stability control (ASC)...........................6-66 Bluetooth® 2.0 interface................................... 7-47 senger’s airbag.....................................4-18,4-27
Child-protection rear doors............................... 3-24
Adaptive Cruise Control System (ACC)...........6-78 Bonnet............................................................. 10-04
Cigarette lighter.................................................7-72
Air conditioner Bottle holders.................................................... 7-81
Cleaning
Automatic climate control air conditioner.... 7-05 Brake assist system............................................6-61
Important operation tips for the air Exterior of your vehicle................................ 9-03
Brake
conditioner................................................... 7-12 Interior of your vehicle................................. 9-02
Anti-lock brake............................................. 6-63 Clutch
Air purifier.........................................................7-13
Brake auto hold............................................. 6-57
Airbag................................................................4-27 Fluid.................................................. 10-08,11-14
Braking..........................................................6-56
Coat hook.......................................................... 7-83
Caution for installing the child re- Electric parking brake................................... 6-07
straint on vehicle with front pas- Fluid.................................................. 10-08,11-14 Combination headlamps and dipper switch...... 5-57
senger’s airbag.....................................4-18,4-27 Parking brake................................................ 6-05 Coolant (engine)....................................10-06,11-14
Anti-lock brake system (ABS).......................... 6-63 Bulb capacity ..................................................10-25 Cruise control.................................................... 6-68
Ashtray.............................................................. 7-71 Cup holder......................................................... 7-80
Assist grips........................................................ 7-83
Audio Bulb capacity.............................................. 10-29 D
CD player...................................................... 7-13
LW/MW/FM radio........................................ 7-13 C Daytime running lamps..................................... 5-60
Troubleshooting............................................ 7-45 Bulb capacity.............................................. 10-25
Capacity...........................................................11-14 Demister (rear window).................................... 5-74
Auto Stop & Go (AS&G) system......................6-26
Card holder........................................................7-78 Digital clock
Automatic high-beam system............................5-60
Cargo area cover................................................7-82 Time Setting.................................................. 7-43
Automatic transmission
Cargo loads......................................................6-140 Dimensions......................................................11-04
Fluid............................................................ 11-14
Selector lever operation................1-19,6-32,6-39 Catalytic converter.......................................... 10-04 Dipper (High/Low beam change)......................5-60
Selector lever position.......................... 6-34,6-42 Cautions on handling of 4-wheel Door ajar warning lamp.....................................5-56
Sport mode............................................6-35,6-43 drive vehicles................................................... 6-55 Doors
OGFE20E1 Alphabetical index 12- 1

Alphabetical index
Central door locks......................................... 3-22 Exterior and interior lamp operation............... 10-17
Child-protection............................................ 3-24 G
Dead Lock System........................................ 3-23 F
Lock and unlock............................................3-20 General maintenance....................................... 10-17
Driving, alcohol and drugs................................ 6-02 Fluid capacities and lubricants........................ 11-14 General vehicle data........................................ 11-04
Fluid Genuine parts.....................................................2-05
E Automatic transmission fluid...................... 11-14 Glove box.......................................................... 7-78
Economical driving........................................... 6-02 Brake fluid........................................ 10-08,11-14
Clutch fluid....................................... 10-08,11-14 Glove box lamp
Electric parking brake....................................... 6-07 CVT fluid.................................................... 11-14 Bulb capacity.............................................. 10-27
Electric power steering system (EPS)............... 6-65 Engine coolant.................................. 10-06,11-14
Electric tailgate..................................................3-26 Washer fluid...................................... 10-08,11-14 H
Forward Collision Mitigation System (FCM)...6-89
Electric window control.................................... 3-40
Front fog lamps Hazard warning flasher switch..........................5-67
Electrical system..............................................11-10
Bulb capacity.............................................. 10-25 Hazard warning indication lamps......................5-52
Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft Replacement................................................10-29 Head restraints...................................................4-06
starting system)................................................ 3-03 Switch........................................................... 5-68 Headlamp levelling switch................................ 5-64
Electronically controlled 4WD system..... 1-21,6-46 Front room lamp................................................7-75
Headlamp washer switch...................................5-73
Emergency starting............................................8-09 Bulb capacity.............................................. 10-27
Front seats......................................................... 4-03 Headlamps
Emergency stop signal system.......................... 6-62
Front turn-signal lamps Bulb capacity.............................................. 10-25
Engine specifications.......................................11-09
Headlamp flasher.......................................... 5-60
Engine switch.................................................... 6-16 Bulb capacity.............................................. 10-29 Replacement..................................... 10-27,10-28
Replacement................................................10-29 Switch........................................................... 5-57
Engine Frozen road warning..........................................5-22 Heated mirror.................................................... 6-14
Coolant..............................................10-06,11-14 Fuel
High coolant temperature warning lamp.......5-55 Heated seats.......................................................4-04
MIVEC................................................. 6-22,6-23 Filling the fuel tank....................................... 2-03 Heated windscreen switch.................................5-75
Number........................................................11-02 Fuel remaining display......................... 5-08,5-23
Fuel remaining warning display........... 5-08,5-23 High coolant temperature warning lamp...........5-55
Oil..................................................... 10-05,11-14
Oil and oil filter...........................................11-14 Fuel selection................................................ 2-02 High-mounted stop lamp.................................10-26
Overheating................................................... 8-11 Modification/alterations to the Hill start assist................................................... 6-60
Specifications.............................................. 11-09 electrical or fuel systems............................. 2-05
Tank capacity................................................ 2-03 Hinges and latches lubrication........................ 10-17
Used engine oils safety instructions
and disposal information............................. 2-05 Fuses................................................................10-18 Horn switch....................................................... 5-76
ERA-GLONASS............................................... 8-02 Fusible links.................................................... 10-17
Event Data Recording....................................... 2-06
12- 2 Alphabetical index OGFE20E1

Alphabetical index
LED headlamp warning lamp........................... 5-59
I Licence plate lamps O
Bulb capacity.............................................. 10-25
If the vehicle breaks down................................ 8-09 Oil
Replacement................................................10-32
Ignition switch...................................................6-15 Link System.......................................................7-47 Engine oil..........................................10-05,11-14
Indication and warning lamps...................5-28,5-51 Manual transmission oil.............................. 11-14
Locking and unlocking the doors and
Rear differential oil..................................... 11-14
Indication lamps................................................ 5-52 tailgate..................................................... 1-15,3-22
Transfer oil.................................................. 11-14
Information screen.............................................5-05 Lubricants........................................................11-14 Operation under adverse driving conditions..... 8-31
Inside rear-view mirror......................................6-11 Luggage floor box............................................. 7-79 Outside rear-view mirrors................................. 6-12
Inside tailgate release........................................ 3-32 Luggage hooks.................................................. 7-83 Overheating....................................................... 8-11
Inspection and maintenance following Luggage room lamp.......................................... 7-76
rough road operation........................................6-55 Bulb capacity.............................................. 10-27 P
Instruments........................................................ 5-02 LW/MW/FM radio............................................ 7-13
Parking sensors................................................6-125
Interior lamps.................................................... 7-75
M Parking.............................................................. 6-10
J Making a flat seat.............................................. 4-10
Electric parking brake................................... 6-07
Parking brake................................................ 6-05
Jack....................................................................8-13 Making a luggage area...................................... 4-08 Position lamps
Storage.......................................................... 8-13 Manual transmission......................................... 6-31 Bulb capacity.............................................. 10-25
Jump starting (Emergency starting).................. 8-09 Manual transmission oil.................................. 11-14 Precautions to observe when using
wipers and washers.......................................... 5-74
Map lamps......................................................... 7-76
K Bulb capacity.............................................. 10-27
Pregnant women restraint..................................4-17
Meter illumination control........................ 5-02,5-21 Puncture (Tyre changing).................................. 8-20
Keyless entry system.........................................3-04
Mirror Puncture
Keyless operation system.................................. 3-09
Inside rear-view mirror..................................6-11 Tyre repair kit................................................8-14
Keys...................................................................3-02
Outside rear-view mirror...............................6-12
MIVEC engine.......................................... 6-22,6-23 R
L
Modification/alterations to the electri- Rear combination lamps
Labeling...........................................................11-02 cal or fuel systems............................................2-05
Bulb capacity.............................................. 10-26
Lamp monitor buzzer........................................ 5-59 Multi Around Monitor.....................................6-132 Replacement................................................10-31
Lane Departure Warning (LDW).....................6-110 Multi information display......................... 5-03,5-19 Rear Cross Traffic Alert.................................. 6-108
Leakage (Fuel, engine coolant, oil Rear differential oil..........................................11-14
and exhaust gas).............................................10-17 Rear fog lamp

Alphabetical index
Bulb capacity.............................................. 10-25 Head restraints.............................................. 4-06 System check screen..........................................5-10
Replacement................................................10-25 Heated seats.................................................. 4-04
Switch........................................................... 5-69 Making a flat seat..........................................4-10 T
Rear room lamp.................................................7-75 Making a luggage area.................................. 4-08
Bulb capacity.............................................. 10-27 Second seats.................................................. 4-05 Tail lamps
Rear turn-signal lamps Third seats..................................................... 4-06
Bulb capacity.............................................. 10-25
Security alarm system....................................... 3-33
Replacement................................................10-31 Tailgate.............................................................. 3-25
Rear window demister switch........................... 5-74 Service precaution........................................... 10-02
Tank capacity.....................................................2-03
Rear-view camera............................................6-129 Side turn-signal lamps
Ticket holder......................................................7-71
Rear-view mirror Bulb capacity.............................................. 10-25
Time Setting...................................................... 7-43
Snow traction device (tyre chains).................. 10-14
Inside............................................................. 6-11 Tools.................................................................. 8-13
Outside.......................................................... 6-12 Snow tyres....................................................... 10-14
Storage.......................................................... 8-13
Replacement of lamp bulbs............................. 10-25 Spare wheel....................................................... 8-21
Towing...............................................................8-28
Reversing lamp Spark plug........................................................11-10
Trailer towing.................................................. 6-141
Bulb capacity.............................................. 10-25 Specifications.................................................. 11-02
Transfer oil...................................................... 11-14
Replacement................................................10-31 Speed Limit Display function..........................6-114
Reversing sensor system................................. 6-121 Transmission
Speed limiter..................................................... 6-72
Roof carrier precaution....................................6-140 Automatic transmission................1-19,6-32,6-39
Starting.............................................................. 6-21 Manual transmission..................................... 6-31
Room lamp........................................................ 7-75
Steering Turn-signal indication lamps.............................5-52
Running-in recommendations........................... 6-04
Steering wheel height adjustment................. 6-10 Turn/Lane-change signals................................. 5-67
Steering wheel lock.......................................6-19 Tyre pressure monitoring system (TPMS)...... 6-114
S Stop lamps
Tyre repair kit.................................................... 8-14
Safe driving techniques..................................... 6-03 Bulb capacity.............................................. 10-25
Tyres................................................................ 10-11
Storage spaces................................................... 7-77
Seat belt reminder..............................................4-13 How to change a tyre.................................... 8-20
Sun visors.......................................................... 7-71
Seat belts............................................................4-11 Inflation pressures....................................... 10-11
Sunglasses holder.............................................. 7-80 Rotation.......................................................10-13
Adjustable seat belt anchor........................... 4-14
Child restraint................................................4-18 Sunroof.............................................................. 3-42 Size (tyre and wheel)...................................11-11
Force limiter..................................................4-18 Snow traction device (tyre chains)..............10-14
Super-All Wheel Control (S-AWC).......... 1-21,6-49
Inspection...................................................... 4-27 Snow tyres...................................................10-14
Supplemental restraint system...........................4-27 Tread wear indicators..................................10-12
Pregnant women restraint............................. 4-17
Pretensioner...................................................4-17 Caution for installing the child re- Tyre repair kit................................................8-14
Seat straint on vehicles with front pas-
senger’s airbag.....................................4-18,4-27
Adjustment.................................................... 4-03 Servicing....................................................... 4-39
Front seats..................................................... 4-03
12- 4 Alphabetical index OGFE20E1

Alphabetical index
Waxing...............................................................9-04
U Weight..............................................................11-05
Wheel
Ultrasonic misacceleration Mitigation
System (UMS)................................................. 6-99 Covers........................................................... 8-27
Specification................................................11-11
USB input terminal............................................7-68
Wiper de-icer switch......................................... 5-74
How to connect a USB memory................... 7-69
Wiper
How to connect an iPod................................ 7-69
USB port (for charging).................................... 7-74 Rear window................................................. 5-73
Windscreen....................................................5-69
Used engine oils safety instructions
Wiper blades................................................10-15
and disposal information..................................2-05
V
Vanity mirror..................................................... 7-71
Vanity mirror lamp
Bulb capacity.............................................. 10-27
Vehicle care precautions....................................9-02
Vehicle dimensions..........................................11-04
Vehicle identification number......................... 11-02
Vehicle identification number plate.................11-02
Vehicle information code plate........................11-02
Vehicle labeling............................................... 11-02
Vehicle performance........................................11-05
Vehicle weight................................................. 11-05
Ventilators..........................................................7-02
W
Warning lamps...................................................5-53
Washer
Fluid.................................................. 10-08,11-14
Switch................................................... 5-69,5-73
Washing............................................................. 9-03

OGFE20E1
OGFE20E1 Declaration of Conformity 13- 1
13- 2 Declaration of Conformity OGFE20E1
The approval for Russia, Belarus and Kazachstan
OGFE20E1
Declaration of Conformity
13- 79
The approval for Serbia
Blind Spot Warning (BSW) and Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)
13- 84
Declaration of Conformity
OGFE20E1
OGFE20E1
OGFE20E1
OGFE20E1
OGFE20E1
OGFE20E1
OGFE20E1
OGFE20E1

20MY Outlander Petrol Owners Manual - OGFE20E1

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

20MY Outlander Petrol Owners Manual - OGFE20E1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

OGFE20E1

OUTLANDER - ENGLISH - OGFE20E1

19-000330_OGFE20E1_Outlander_OM-Cover_eng_2019_rug-26,9mm.indd All Pages 15/07/19 16:14

© 2019 Mitsubishi Motors Corporation

1 Instruments and controls

1-02 Overview/Quick guide OGFE20E1

OGFE20E1 Overview/Quick guide 1-03

1-04 Overview/Quick guide OGFE20E1

OGFE20E1 Overview/Quick guide 1-05

Parking brake lever type Electric parking brake type

1-06 Overview/Quick guide OGFE20E1

OGFE20E1 Overview/Quick guide 1-07

1-08 Overview/Quick guide OGFE20E1

OGFE20E1 Overview/Quick guide 1-09

1-10 Overview/Quick guide OGFE20E1

OGFE20E1 Overview/Quick guide 1-11

1-12 Overview/Quick guide OGFE20E1

OGFE20E1 Overview/Quick guide 1-13

1-14 Overview/Quick guide OGFE20E1

Quick guide Keyless operation key The operating range is approximately 70 cm

Keyless operation system*

OGFE20E1 Overview/Quick guide 1-15

1-16 Overview/Quick guide OGFE20E1

Refer “Steering wheel height and reach

Refer to “Turn-signal lever” on page

OGFE20E1 Overview/Quick guide 1-17

To adjust the mirror position

MIST- Misting function

1-18 Overview/Quick guide OGFE20E1

Refer “Filling the fuel tank” on page

OGFE20E1 Overview/Quick guide 1-19

“P” PARK Refer to “Automatic transmission IN-

“R” REVERSE Refer to “Automatic transmission IN- Type 2

“Ds” (DOWNSHIFT & SPORTY DRIV-

OGFE20E1 Overview/Quick guide 1-21

1 S-AWC drive Function S-AWC drive Function

Refer to “S-AWC (Super-All Wheel Con-

1-22 Overview/Quick guide OGFE20E1

Fuel selection...................................................................................... 2-02

Fuel selection NOTE Graphical expression for con-

2-02 General information OGFE20E1

Filling the fuel tank Fuel tank capacity

OGFE20E1 General information 2-03

2-04 General information OGFE20E1

OGFE20E1 General information 2-05

Protect the environment Event Data Recording NOTE

2-06 General information OGFE20E1

Keys 3- Keyless operation key (with electric tail- NOTE

3-02 Locking and unlocking OGFE20E1

OGFE20E1 Locking and unlocking 3-03

NOTE NOTE Keyless entry key

In cases like these, remove the object or

Keyless entry system

3-04 Locking and unlocking OGFE20E1

To lock NOTE NOTE

OGFE20E1 Locking and unlocking 3-05

3-06 Locking and unlocking OGFE20E1

Step iii: Step iii: WARNING

OGFE20E1 Locking and unlocking 3-07

CAUTION 2. Remove the screw (A) from the remote NOTE

6. Close the remote control switch case

[Keyless operation key]

Keyless operation system*